JP2022132477A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in player's desire to play a game.

SOLUTION: Ball entry means is provided which permits entry of a game ball when a privilege game is executed based on satisfaction of specific conditions, and a ball whose entry into the ball entry means is regulated by variation means is guided to the ball entry means during a next privilege game or thereafter by guiding means. In this case, at least one privilege game from among the next privilege game and thereafter may be set by setting means to be executed such that a ball can pass through a specific area. This provides an effect capable of suppressing a decrease in player's desire to play a game when a privilege game is won for a plurality of times.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a privilege game (for example, a small winning game) when a special symbol lottery result is a predetermined lottery result, and when a ball passes through a specific area during the privilege game, A gaming machine has been proposed in which a predetermined privilege (for example, winning game) is provided.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-301008

However, in the gaming machine described above, even if the bonus game is executed, the ball does not necessarily pass through the specific area. There is a possibility that the desire to play will decrease.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in a player's desire to play.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition, and A variable that can be changed to a ball entry means that allows a ball to enter when a privilege game is executed, an allowable position that allows a ball to enter the ball entry means, and a regulation position that regulates the ball entry. means, a specific area provided in the ball entry means, through which the ball can pass when a predetermined condition is established, and a privilege for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the ball passing through the specific area. and a granting means, wherein when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the ball whose entry into the ball entering means is restricted by the variable means positioned at the restriction position during the privilege game, At least one privilege game among the following privilege games is executed during the period when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a guiding means capable of guiding to the ball entering means during the following privilege games. and a setting means for setting such that

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the guiding means comprises a downflow passage through which the ball can flow down, and a downflow period extension means for extending the period in which the ball flows down the downflow passage. and

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the game machine comprises determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determining condition, and display means for displaying identification information based on the result of determination by the determining means. dynamic display means for statically displaying the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means after dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period; and dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period, wherein the specific condition is met when identification information based on a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The flowing period extending means makes the period during which the ball flows down the flowing path longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to at least one of the following privilege games. It is extended as follows.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the ball entry means includes a first opening into which a ball can enter and a and a second opening provided, wherein the guiding means directs a ball whose entry into the first opening is restricted by the variable means positioned at the restriction position to the second opening. It is an inducement.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the ball entry means is provided in the allowable position for allowing the ball to pass through the specific area or the ball to pass through the specific area. A second variable means that can be changed to a regulation position for regulation, and a second variable control means that changes the second variable means to the allowable position for a predetermined period after the privilege game is executed, The ball entering means has second guiding means for making it easier for a ball entered through the second opening to enter the specific area than a ball entered through the first opening, The guiding means is arranged so that the ball entering from the second opening passes through the specific area more than the passing period of the first passage, which is the passage until the ball entering from the first opening passes through the specific area. It is configured so that the passage period of the second passage, which is a passage until passing, is shortened.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the establishment of the specific condition, the variable means is varied to the allowable position, and the ball entry means is allowed to enter the ball. Become. A specific area is provided in the ball entering means, and a privilege is given by the privilege giving means when the ball passes through the specific area. A ball whose entry into the ball entry means is restricted by the variable means positioned at the regulation position during execution of the privilege game is guided to the ball entry means during the next and subsequent privilege games by the guide means. It is set by the setting means so that at least one privilege game among the next and subsequent privilege games is executed during the period when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, it becomes possible to execute the privilege game in which the ball can pass through the specific area, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. be.

According to the game machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 1, the period in which the ball flows down the downflow passage is extended by the downflow period extension means, so that the ball flows down the downflow passage. The ball can be made to flow down to a position where the ball can be entered by the ball entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably guide the player to the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. After the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means until the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means elapses, the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the display means. When identification information based on a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means, a specific condition is established, and the flow period extension means corresponds to at least one of the following bonus games. The period during which the ball flows down the downflow passage is extended so as to be longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably guide the player to the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball-entering means has a first opening into which a ball can enter and a second opening provided separately from the first opening. A ball that is restricted from entering the first opening is guided to the second opening.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably guide the player to the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the ball entry means is provided with a second variable means that can be changed to an allowable position that allows the ball to pass through the specific area or a restrictive position that restricts the ball from passing through the specific area. , the second variable control means makes it variable to the allowable position for a predetermined period after the privilege game is executed. In order to make it easier for the ball entering through the second opening to enter the specific area than the ball entering through the first opening by the second guide means, the ball entering through the first opening is placed in the specific area. The passage period of the second passage, which is the passage until the ball entered from the second opening passes through the specific area, is shorter than the passage period of the first passage, which is the passage until the ball passes through.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the bonus game is won a plurality of times.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is the front view which expanded the partial area|region of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the inside of the second variable winning device. It is a front view showing the inside of the first ball entering device. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM in a main controller, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first winning random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first jackpot type selection table, (c) is the first It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit classification selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table for big wins, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table for winning. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation|variation pattern selection table for small hits. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a jackpot scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a jackpot scenario a, and (c) is a jackpot scenario b is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning scenario a, and (c) is a small It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the winning scenario b. 2(a) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device, and FIG. 3(b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM within the audio ramp control device; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a game specification storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a V-gate scenario, and (c) is a precursor effect. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a selection table; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a continuous effect type selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a continuous effect variation pattern selection table, (c) It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous production|presentation variation pattern selection table (additional prize-winning). (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small winning middle effect pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an indication effect variation pattern selection table. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of executing a big winning game via a small winning game, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of executing a big winning game based on a lottery of special symbols. is a chart. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. It is the timing chart which showed about the flow of continuous production|presentation, and the operation control of various apparatuses. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third pattern display device. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third pattern display device. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. It is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous jackpot production and the operation control of various devices. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third pattern display device. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing variation execution determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a small winning start setting process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 starting winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 start winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the look-ahead process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is the flowchart which showed the door passage time process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the V passage time process performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing V gate drive control processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot ending control processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting ending control processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing V-gate command reception processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device; 10 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing the hit-related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot start production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the big-hit completion|finish effect|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting related processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit start production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing variation pattern selection processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the precursor variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio|voice ramp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous production|presentation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous production|presentation classification selection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 10 is a flowchart showing V passable variation determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a V-counter update process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. 4 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing jackpot opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing the final round command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot interval command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending-related command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) shows a small win opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flow chart. (a) is a flowchart showing small winning ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the door passing command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is. 4 is a flowchart showing V pass command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing SW-related command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the second embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the second embodiment It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small per type selection table in the second embodiment, (b) is the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table in the second embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a large winning variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a deviation variation pattern selection table according to the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern selection table for small hits in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning scenario table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the small winning scenario a in the second embodiment. It is a figure and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit scenario b in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the timing of the special symbol game and the operation of the V gate 650d when the normal variation pattern is selected in the second embodiment, and (b) is the second It is a timing chart schematically showing the timing of the special symbol game and the operation of the V gate 650d when the special variation pattern in the second embodiment is selected. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing counter subtraction processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the second embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit ending control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage time processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the third embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the third embodiment It is a diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the 1st winning random number table 3 in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small per type selection table in the third embodiment, (b) is the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table in the third embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modified example 1 of the third embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modified example 2 of the third embodiment. It is a front view showing typically the internal structure of the winning unit of the pachinko machine in the modification 2 of the third embodiment. (a) is a plan view schematically showing a winning unit with a second opening/closing member closed in Modification 2 of the third embodiment, and (b) is a modification of the third embodiment; 2 is a plan view schematically showing the winning unit in a state where the second opening/closing member is opened in FIG. 2. FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the relationship between the opening and closing drive of the third variable winning device and the ball flow in the modification 2 of the third embodiment.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 4 is a front view of the interior of the second variable prize winning device 650, FIG. 5 is a front view of the interior of the first ball entry device 64, and FIG. It is a diagram.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

The inner frame 12 is provided with a large number of nails and a winning opening 63, a first ball entrance device 64 having a first ball entrance 64a and a second ball entrance A64b (see FIG. 5), and a second ball entrance B640b. The game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having the second ball-entering device 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, etc. is detachably attached from the front side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. It's becoming

An upper tray 17 for storing balls is projected forward from the front frame 14 and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and award balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper tray 17. - 特許庁The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

The front frame 14 has a frame left button 22a provided on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1) and a frame right button 22b provided on the right side of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The left frame button 22a and the right frame button 22b (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22) are spaced apart (approximately 500 mm) to make it difficult to operate with one hand. , it is necessary to release the operating handle 51 and use both hands.

This frame button 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b), for example, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changes the effect contents of super reach. It is operated by the player when changing it. Further, although the details will be described later, an effect of simultaneously operating both frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a and frame right button 22b) is also executed.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are unified. One stage is provided. Then, variation effects and reach effects that are performed accompanying a ball entering a so-called starting winning hole (starting winning), such as a first ball hole 64a, a second ball hole A64b, and a second ball hole B640b, which will be described later. The various productions are designed to match the themes given to each stage. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during high-speed variation. Sky stage"→"Island stage"→"City stage"→... Immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the super ready-to-win effect mode during the normal ready-to-win when the normal ready-to-win effect is started and the normal ready-to-win is to be developed into the super ready-to-win. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is being displayed, the content of the effect at the time of super ready-to-win is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box" or a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. will be The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , rails 61 and 62, general winning opening 63, first ball-entering device 64 having first ball-entering opening 64a and second ball-entering opening A64b, second ball-entering apparatus 640 having second ball-entering opening B640b, first A variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). It is attached. A general winning port 63, a first ball-entering device 64 having a first ball-entering port 64a and a second ball-entering port A64b, a second ball-entering device 640 having a second ball-entering port B640b, a first variable winning device 65, a 2 The variable winning device 650 and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. Therefore, for example, by providing a movable accessory for decoration that moves according to the game on the rear surface side of the base plate 60, the movement of the movable accessory can be visually recognized by the player, so the range is limited. It is possible to three-dimensionally use the game area provided, and to provide the player with a variety of presentations.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area in front view (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball enters the second ball entrance (second ball entrance A 64b or When the ball enters the second ball entrance B640b), the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use the LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving mode or the normal mode by the lighting state, indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing by the lighting state, or display the stop symbols. The lighting state indicates whether it is a pattern corresponding to a big hit, a pattern corresponding to a small hit, or a missing pattern. In addition, the 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be notified with a small number of LEDs. is configured to

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance (the second ball entrance A64b or the second ball entrance B640b) is suspended up to four times each. However, the maximum hold count is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less (eg, 2) or 5 or more (eg, 8).

In this pachinko machine 10, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, a lottery for the first special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed, and the ball enters the second ball entrance A64b or the second When the ball enters the ball entrance B640b (hereinafter referred to as second ball entrances 64b and 640b), a lottery for the second special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed. Also, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) lottery is performed.

In the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol) for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, 640b, the special symbol is a jackpot or Whether or not a small win is won is determined, and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, the type of the big win is also determined.

When the result of judging whether or not the special symbol wins is a big win, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state (big win game). Here, when the jackpot game is executed, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed (after the opening period has passed), the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined period. It is opened (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won), and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). After the opening of the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is repeated a predetermined number of times, the jackpot game ends when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses (ending period elapses).

In addition, 15 balls are paid out to the player as prize balls by winning one ball in the first variable prize winning device. Also, a period (opening period) from when the jackpot game is executed until the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (opening period), or when the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). ) The period from the repetition to the end of the jackpot game (ending period), and the period during which the specific door 65f is closed between the opening operations of the specific door 65f that are repeatedly executed (interval period) are appropriately set. do it.

During the jackpot game, a large number of balls (approximately 100 (10 per round x 10 rounds)) enter the specific prize-winning port 65a of the first variable prize-winning device 65, so a larger number of prize balls (approximately 1000) (100 pieces x 10 shots)) are paid out.

As will be described later in detail, in the special symbol jackpot, one of two types of jackpots, "jackpot A" and "jackpot B", is determined (see FIG. 10(b)), and the number of times according to the jackpot type. Only the specific door 65f is opened. In addition, after the special game state ends, the time-saving game state is given to the player a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times).

Here, the time-saving gaming state (during time-saving) means that the probability of hitting the first symbol (special symbol) and the second symbol (normal symbol) is the same as the normal state, but the first symbol (special symbol) and the second symbol The variation time of the pattern (normal pattern) is shortened, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entry device 640, which is opened when the second pattern (normal pattern) wins, is extended. (For example, 1 second (2 times open for 0.5 seconds)). That is, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance B640b than in the normal game state.

Further, when it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit, the type of the small hit is also determined. That is, when the special symbol becomes a small win, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a specific game state (small win game), and the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined period (for example, (Until 1.5 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls have won).

As a result, the ball can enter the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650. Although the details will be described later, a V discharge channel 650e3 is provided inside the above-described second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 4), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the V discharge channel 650e3. When the switch 650e5 (see FIG. 4) is detected (hereinafter referred to as passing through a specific area), a jackpot game is awarded.

Although the details will be described later, when winning a small hit of a special symbol, one of three types of "small hit A", "small hit B", and "small hit C" is selected by referring to the first small hit type selection table 202c. is selected (see FIG. 11(a)). Then, a small winning game is executed based on the selected small winning type. In addition, for each small winning type, "big winning C" or "big winning D" is set as a large winning type that can be given as a result of a small winning game.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 wins a game (so-called type 1 game) aiming for a big win by lottery of special symbols, and wins a small win by lottery of special symbols, and the second variable winning device 650 by the small win game. It has a game property (so-called 1-type 2-type mixer) with a game (so-called 2-type game) aiming for a big hit by passing the winning ball to a specific area.

By having such game characteristics, the player can aim for a big win at a plurality of opportunities, so that it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the game.

On the other hand, in the lottery of normal symbols executed for the passage of the ball to the through gate (normal symbol starting port) 67, determination of whether the normal symbols are successful or not is performed. When the normal symbol (second symbol) is won, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry device 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second ball entrance B640b. The ball will be in a state where it is easy to enter. That is, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance B640b, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

Also, when the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device (not shown), and a predetermined time (eg, 1 second or 180 seconds) is reached. After a lapse of time, normal symbols indicating the lottery result are stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the second pattern display device is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B. be done.

As described above, the types of special symbol jackpots include "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" given by lottery of special symbols, and a detection switch (specific area) 650e5 provided in the V discharge channel 650e3. There are provided four types of "jackpot C" and "jackpot D" awarded by detecting a ball. As shown in FIG. 10(b), each jackpot type is set so that the operation content of the specific door (attacker) 65f in the jackpot game and the time-saving game state after the jackpot game end are different. Specifically, "jackpot A" is a jackpot (2R (round) jackpot) in which the specific door (attacker) 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened twice, and after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state (special A state in which the fluctuation time of the pattern and the normal pattern is shortened and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is lengthened) is set for a period until the special pattern fluctuates 8 times (the number of times of time reduction is 8 times). "Jack B" is a jackpot (5R (round) jackpot) in which the specific door (attacker) 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened five times, and after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state and special symbols are eight times. The period until it changes is set (8 times of time reduction). In addition, in any jackpot, the conditions for ending one round are set when 10 balls win in the first prize winning device 65 or when the opening time of the first prize winning device 65 elapses for 30 seconds. , the specific door 65f is closed to end one round when the conditions for ending one round are satisfied.

As described above, in the jackpot game according to the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the presence or absence of the time-saving game state after the jackpot game are changed according to the type of the jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot.

Also, depending on the type of jackpot, the period in which the "time-saving gaming state" is changed may be changed. The period may be set to the time-saving game state, and when the "jackpot B" is reached, the period from the end of the "jackpot B" until the special symbols fluctuate six times may be the time-saving game state.

Furthermore, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the period of the ``time-saving gaming state'' given after the jackpot ends may be changed. The period from the end of "A" until the special pattern fluctuates 3 times is set as a time-saving game state, and when "jackpot A" is won in the "time-saving game state", the special pattern fluctuates 8 times after the "jackpot A" ends. The period of may be the time saving game state. As a result, even if the same type of jackpot (for example, jackpot A) is won, a privilege (time saving game state) that is advantageous to the player according to the game state (normal game state or time saving game state) at the time of winning. can be made different.

As described above, various benefits can be provided to the player according to the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. In addition to the feeling of expectation for the event, it is possible to have the feeling of expectation for the content of the privilege to be given. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the jackpot game of the present embodiment, the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 continues to open during one round until the end condition of the round is satisfied. The specific door 65f may be configured to open and close multiple times. After opening for 1.5 seconds (first opening) and closing the specific door 65f once, it may be opened for 28.5 seconds (second opening).

To improve the amusement of a game by making it possible to open the game for a long period of time after making the player think that the player has won a jackpot with a special pattern but cannot secure the ball to be put out by such a constitution. can be done. In addition, for example, when the lottery of special symbols is not determined to be a big hit (when it is determined to be lost), the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened for a short period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds). is newly provided, as a result of the lottery with special symbols, at the timing when the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened for 1.5 seconds (first opening), the player can win the jackpot A or the small There is an effect that it is not possible to grasp whether or not the player has won a prize, and the player can enjoy the game by drawing attention to the subsequent operation of the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that even in the case of using a configuration in which the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened multiple times within one round, the condition for ending the round is that the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened within one round. For example, the timing when the total number of seconds in the open state within one round reaches 30 seconds, and the total number of game balls won during one round is 10 It is preferable to use the timing of the number of times as the end condition of the round. By configuring in this way, the round end conditions can be unified, so it is possible to share a part of the control processing during the big win. .

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, as a privilege after the jackpot game, it is configured to provide a time-saving gaming state according to the jackpot type, but as a privilege to be given after the jackpot game Even if another privilege is given Well, for example, a high probability state in which the special symbol jackpot probability or small hit probability is set higher than the normal game state may be given for a predetermined period. In this case, the predetermined period includes the period until the next big hit is won, the period until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (eg 10 times), and the transition to the normal game state with a predetermined probability (eg 1/5). The period from the time a lottery is held until winning the lottery, etc. can be considered. In addition, as other benefits, a privilege to increase the winning probability of normal symbols from the normal game state, and changing the opening pattern of each winning device executed in the big winning game and the small winning game to the opening pattern advantageous to the player. Benefits, etc. can be considered.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a small hit is set with a predetermined probability (397/399) as a special symbol lottery result (see FIG. 10(a)). As described above, there are three types of small hits: "small hit A", "small hit B", and "small hit C". A specific game state (small winning game) is executed based on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11( a ), “small win A” is a small win that opens the door (attacker) 650 f of the second variable prize winning device 650 once (1.5 seconds). It is a hit, and the detection switch 650e5 detects that the ball has passed through the V discharge flow path 650e3 during the small hit game (passes through the specific area), so that the big hit type (V passage A jackpot D is set as a jackpot at the time). "Small win B" is a small win in which the action of opening the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 is executed three times (0.1 seconds x 3 times), and the big win D when passing V is set. "Minor win C" is a small win in which the operation of opening the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 is executed three times (0.1 seconds x 3 times), and the big win C when passing V is set.

That is, the "small win A" opens the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 for a longer period of time than other small wins, so the second variable winning device 650 It becomes a small hit that the game ball easily enters the second specific winning hole 650a provided in the .

Now, with reference to FIG. 3, the configuration of the lower right area of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of the lower right region III of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, with the cover covering the front surface of the second variable winning device 650 removed. A cover body that covers the front surface of the second variable prize winning device 650 is made of a transparent member that allows the inside to be visually recognized.

It should be noted that, of the cover body, at least the part that covers the ball path in the second variable prize winning device 650 may be configured with a half mirror. With this configuration, when a decoration lamp (light emitting means) provided in the decoration portion 650g, which will be described later, emits light, the player can visually recognize the path of the ball inside the second variable prize winning device 650. When the lamp does not emit light (is extinguished), the ball path in the second variable winning device 650 can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize.

Therefore, for example, when the game state is a game state (small winning game state) in which the game ball is awarded to the second variable winning device 650, by lighting the decoration lamp provided in the decoration part 650g, the player can As a result, the player can easily notice that the game state is aimed at the second variable prize winning device 650, and the player can use the second variable prize winning device in a game state other than the non-playing state or the small winning game state. Since it is possible to make the ball path in 650 invisible (difficult), cheating (for example, a guide member that guides the ball that has won the second variable prize winning device 650 to the specific area V discharge flow path 650e3 By deforming the (V gate) 650d, the act of letting the game ball pass through the V discharge channel 650e3 and the act of grasping the operation timing of the guide member (V gate) 650d and the act of varying the special symbols at irregular timing. ) can be made difficult. The details of the internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 3, the description continues. The second specific prize winning port 650a of the second variable prize winning device 650 used in the pachinko machine 10 has a door 650f configured with a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board side, and a game ball can enter an open state and a ball entering state. variable to a difficult closed state. In the closed state, the opening of the second specific prize winning port 650a is completely covered with the door 650f, and the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the door 650f toward the lower left direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front.

In the open state, the door 650f is retracted toward the inside of the game board 13 to open the second specific prize winning opening 650a. In addition, on the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650, an inclined surface for rolling game balls toward the door 650f is formed on the upstream side of the door 650f (on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front).

Now, with reference to FIG. 3, the main flow of balls flowing down the right side area of the game board 13 will be described. A ball flowing down the right side area of the game board 13 passes through a passing path having a passage width corresponding to one game ball formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 2), reach the area. The ball that reaches the lower right area flows down toward the first variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, and if the first variable winning device 65 is closed, then the above-described second variable winning device It flows down to device 650 .

A ball that rolls on the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front of the game board flows down toward the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game. When the door 650f is closed, it rolls on the door 650f in the closed state, passes through the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67 that starts the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and flows down to the second ball entry device 640. do. Then, the ball that has reached the bottom of the game board 13 passes through the out port 71 and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

By constructing in this way, the small win game state, the time saving game state, and the big win game state, which are advantageous states for the player, are all executed in a game (right-handed game) aiming at the right side area of the game board 13. It is possible to reduce the control of notifying the player of the change in the game method (left-handed notification) accompanying the change of the game state, and reduce the trouble of the player operating the operation handle 51 in accordance with the change of the game state. You can play games easily.

Further, by providing the first variable winning device 65 on the most upstream side of the lower right area, it is possible to efficiently win a game ball hit to the right during a jackpot game. Furthermore, by providing the second ball entry device 640 downstream of the normal symbol start port 67, the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 enters the second ball entry port B640b of the second ball entry device 640. It is possible to make the ball to be shot, and the shot ball can be efficiently used in the game. In addition, by providing the second ball-entering device 640 on the re-downstream side of the lower right area, the first variable prize-winning device is capable of awarding a greater privilege to the player than entering the ball into the second ball-entering device 640. The driving of the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entering device 640 does not hinder the winning of the game ball to 65 or the second variable ball entering device 650, and the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable during the game. can do.

Next, the internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4(a) is a rear view showing the internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 arranged on the game board 13, showing an open state in which the door 650f is open to allow balls to enter. ing.

First, the outline of the configuration of the second variable winning device 650 will be described. The second variable winning device 650 is variably controlled to an open state in which the door 650f can win a prize when a small winning game is started.

Here, the small winning game will be explained. The small winning game is a game state that shifts after the fluctuation of the special symbol stops (the symbol is fixed) when the determination result of the special symbol is a determination result corresponding to the small winning, and a predetermined period (opening period). This is a game in which the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened after the lapse of time so that a ball can enter the second variable winning device 650.例文帳に追加Although the detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of types of small wins set (small win A to small win C), and a mode of opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 ( Open pattern) and the jackpot type that can be given after the small hit game is finished are set to be different.

Returning to FIG. 4, the description is continued. A winning ball in the second variable winning device 650 is configured to pass through either a V discharge channel 650e3 or a normal discharge channel 650e4, which will be described later, and discharged out of the gaming machine. Then, when the ball passes through the detection switch 650e5, which is a specific area in the V discharge channel 650e3, execution of the big winning game is started after the small winning game ends.

Therefore, when the small winning game is started, the player shoots a ball so as to aim at the second variable winning device 650, and the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 passes through the specific area (detection switch 650e5). It is possible to play the game while paying attention to the flow of the ball as if doing so, and there is an effect that the desire to play can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 4A, each configuration will be described. The second variable prize winning device 650 is provided with a second specific prize winning port 650a having a horizontally long and short shape in the approximately central portion of the upper surface thereof, and the second specific prize winning port 650a is in an open state in which a ball can (easily) win a prize. A door 650f is provided for changing between a closed state and a closed state in which the ball cannot (difficultly) win a prize.

The door 650f is composed of a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side, and in the open state of the second specific winning opening 650a shown in FIG. In the closed state of the second specific winning opening 650a, the second specific winning opening 650a, which has an opening width (50 mm) that allows multiple winnings at the same time, is completely covered. In addition, the door 650f is configured so that balls can roll in a line on the upper surface thereof in a state of protruding so as to completely cover the second specific winning opening 650a. In other words, a plurality of balls rolling on the door 650f can simultaneously enter the second variable prize winning device 650 at the timing when the second specific prize winning port 650a changes from the closed state to the open state.

The balls that have won the second variable prize winning device 650 are aligned in a line along an alignment path (not shown), and then pass through the passage detection switch 650a1 that detects the winning of the second variable prize winning device 650. Specifically, an alignment path whose flow direction is the width direction of the second specific prize winning port 650a (horizontal direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 4(a)) is arranged at a lower position for receiving the winning ball from the second specific prize winning port 650a. do. The alignment path has a passage width (approximately 15 mm) that allows one ball to pass through, and is configured to allow the ball to flow down in the lower right direction (lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 4(a)). ing.

With this configuration, when the second specific prize winning opening 650a is opened while a plurality of balls are rolling on the door 650f, the plurality of balls rolling on the door 650f are aligned. It will fall along the flow direction of the path, and it is possible to align the winning balls efficiently.

An intermediate partition member 650f3 is provided in the second variable winning device 650. A first passage 650e1 in which the ball flows down above the intermediate partition member 650f3 and a second passage in which the ball flows down below the intermediate partition member 650f3. A flow path 650e2 is formed. The first flow path 650e1 is a flow path that communicates with the normal discharge flow path 650e4, and the balls that flow down the first flow path 650e1 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e4, are collected in a collection port (not shown), and exit the gaming machine. and discharged. The normal discharge channel 650e4 is provided with a passage detection switch 650e6 for detecting balls that have flowed down the channel, and is configured to be able to calculate the number of balls that have flowed down the normal discharge channel 650e4.

On the other hand, the second flow path 650e2 is a flow path provided with a later-described stopper (ball stopper) 650c and a V gate 650d, and the ball can flow down either the normal discharge flow path 650e4 or the V discharge flow path 650e3. It is formed as a flow path. The V discharge channel 650e3 is provided with a passage detection switch 650e5 for detecting the ball that has flowed down the channel, and based on the detection of the ball by the passage detection switch 650e5, the big win game is started after the small win game ends. configured to run. The ball flowing down the V discharge channel 650e3 is collected by a collection port (not shown) and discharged out of the game machine.

Flow-down of the ball to the first flow path 650e1 or the second flow path 650e2 described above is switched by the flow path switching member 650b. The flow path switching member 650b is rotatably supported by a shaft support portion 650b1 provided at one end thereof, and is pushed downward by the dropped ball to rotate to the abutting position where it abuts against the restricting piece 650b2. is configured as When the flow path switching member 650b rotates to the contact position, the flow paths are switched such that the ball pushing down the flow path switching member 650b flows down to the second flow path 650e2.

Further, the flow path switching member 650b is provided with a plate spring (not shown) as a biasing member that biases the flow path switching member 650b in an upward direction at the shaft support portion 650b1, and moves from the initial position (Fig. 4(a) shown by solid lines).

Further, the flow path switching member 650b is configured so that the tip portion 650b3 thereof can be bent in one direction by the bending portion 650b4. Specifically, it is configured to be bendable about the lower surface side of the flow path switching member 650b, and the distal end portion 650b3 is configured to bend downward with respect to the flow path switching member 650b. As a result, when the flow path switching member 650b rotates (returns) from the contact position to the initial position, even if there is an obstacle in the range in which the distal end portion 650b3 rotates, the distal end portion 650e3 can be bent to return to the initial position. It is configured to be able to rotate (return) to.

Next, the stopper (ball stop member) 650c provided in the second flow path 650e2 will be described. A stopper (ball stopper member) 650c provided in the second flow path 650e2 is configured to be movable between a ball stopper position to stop the ball from flowing down and a release position to allow the ball to flow down. The control for moving the stopper (ball stop member) 650c will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 4.5 seconds) has passed, it is controlled to move to the release position.

When the stopper (ball stopper member) 650c described above is positioned at the ball stopper position, the ball is retained by the stopper (ball stopper member) 650c as shown in FIG. 4(a). The remaining ball abuts against the tip portion 650b3 of the flow path switching member 650b that has returned to the initial position, and the flow path switching member 650b is in a state of restricting rotation (downward rotation) to the contact position. . In this state, when the winning ball of the second variable winning device 650 passes through the passage detection switch 650a1 and falls onto the flow path switching member 650b, the ball flows down the above-described first flow path.

Note that when the flow path switching member 650b moves upward in a state in which the ball is retained by the stopper 650c, the tip portion 650b3 of the flow path switching member 650b3 buffers the retained ball. As described above, since the tip portion 650b3 of the flow path switching member 650b is configured to be bendable, it rotates (returns) to the initial position with the tip portion 650b3 bent downward.

Then, the flow path switching member 650b that has rotated (returned) to the initial position is pushed downward again by the subsequent winning ball, but the tip portion 650b3 comes into contact with the ball staying at the staying position. Therefore, the downward movement is restricted, and the distal end portion 650b3 that has been bent by the bending portion 650b4 returns to the normal state (the state indicated by the solid line in FIG. 4A).

Next, the V gate (induction member) 650d provided in the second variable winning device 650 will be described. This V gate 650d has two states (induction position) in which the ball can pass through the passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 in the V discharge flow path 650e3, and The passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 is configured to be alternately changed to a regulated state (regulated position) in which it is difficult to pass through, and while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, A certain action is performed repeatedly. The V gate 650d in the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an inclination so that the ball flows down to the lower left side (lower left side from the point of view of FIG. 4(a)) when attached to the game board 13. , to cover the rolling surface 650f1 on the downstream side of the stopper 650c. When the ball flows down when the V gate 650d is in the regulated state, the ball smoothly flows down to the second flow path 650e2, and when the ball flows down when the V gate 650d is in the guided state. Secondly, it is to surely guide the ball to the V discharge channel 650e3. A detailed description will be given later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4(b), the positional relationship of each component provided in the second variable winning device 650 will be described in detail. The upstream end side of the intermediate partitioning member 650f3 is provided at a position so as to communicate with the downstream end side of the flow path switching member 650b located at the initial position, and the downstream end side of the middle partitioning member 650f3 is provided so that the ball flowing down normally flows into the discharge flow path 650e4. It is provided to a position protruding leftward from the partition wall 650f2 provided for partitioning the V discharge channel 650e3 and the normal discharge channel 650e4 so as to flow down reliably.

Specifically, a gap (for example, , a gap less than half a sphere) is provided, and the upstream end of the intermediate partitioning member 650f3 has a predetermined step ( For example, a step less than half a sphere) is provided. As a result, when the subsequent ball that has won the second prize winning device 650 falls onto the flow path switching member 650b, even if the flow path switching member 650b moves slightly in the vertical direction, the ball can be smoothly transferred to the second flow path. This is to make it flow down into the water. By configuring in this way, even if there is a slight error in the attachment position of the stopper 650c or the flow path switching member 650b, it is possible to prevent the spherical flow from being affected. In addition, even if the installation state of the pachinko machine 10 has some error with respect to the horizontal, it is possible to prevent the flow of balls from being affected.

Next, the downstream configuration of the intermediate partitioning member 650f3 will be described. The downstream end of the intermediate partitioning member 650f3 is formed in a downwardly arcuate shape. (a2 in FIG. 4(b)) is less than one sphere. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the first flow path 650e1 from flowing down to the V discharge flow path 650e3.

It is desirable that the height position of the upper end of the partition wall 650f2 (a2 in FIG. 4(b)) and the height position of the downstream end of the intermediate partition member 650f3 (a4 in FIG. 4(b)) be half a sphere. It should be less than one piece. With this configuration, when the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 650e1 and the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 join, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 will be at a higher position. Therefore, it is possible to preferentially flow down the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2. Therefore, by colliding with the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 650e1, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 stays. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent a situation in which an unexpected game such as the flow of water is performed.

Next, a detailed configuration of V gate 650d will be described. The V gate 650d is constructed such that the height position (a1 in FIG. 4(b)) on one end side of the upper surface is higher than the height position (a2 in FIG. 4(b)) on the other end side where the partition wall 650f2 abuts. , and the other end side of the partition wall 650f2 are configured to be at substantially the same height position as the upper end portion of the partition wall 650f2. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to cause the ball rolling on the upper surface of the V gate 650d to smoothly flow down to the normal discharge flow path 650e4.

The upper surface of the V gate 650d may be inclined downward to the left, and the height of the other end may be higher than the upper end of the partition wall 650f2. Further, in this embodiment, the upper surface of the partition wall 650f2 is flat, but it may be inclined in the same direction as the upper surface of the V gate 650d. By forming in this way, it becomes possible to cause the ball to flow down to the normal discharge flow path 650e4 more smoothly. Furthermore, a gap may be provided between the V gate 650d and the partition wall 650f2 to the extent that the rolling of the ball is not hindered.

Next, the rolling surface 650f1 is formed in an arc shape toward the V discharge flow path 650e3, and the height position (a3 in FIG. 4B) on the upstream end side of the rolling surface 650f1 is the partition wall 650f2. is configured to be lower than With this configuration, when the V-gate 650d is in the guiding state (the V-discharge channel 650e3 is open), the ball flowing down jumps over the partition wall 650f2 and flows down the normal discharge channel 650e4. It is possible to prevent troubles that may occur.

In the present embodiment, the rolling surface 650f1 is formed in an arc shape. A slanted linear shape may be used.

Further, in this embodiment, the V gate 650d and the rolling surface 650f1 are configured to substantially abut, but a space may be provided between the V gate 650d and the rolling surface 650f1. By configuring in this way, the shape of the V gate 650d can be made simple, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b), the flow of winning balls in the second variable winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 4(a) is a rear view showing the internal configuration of the second variable prize winning device 650 arranged on the game board 13, showing an open state in which the door 650f is open to allow balls to enter. It is a diagram. FIG. 4(b) is a rear view showing the internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 arranged on the game board 13, and the door 650f is closed so that the ball cannot (difficultly) enter. FIG. 10 shows a closed state;

A small winning game is started, and a ball that has won the second variable prize winning device 650 first flows down an alignment path (not shown), and its passage is detected by the passage detection switch 650a1. After that, the first winning ball pushes down the channel switching member 650b, flows down to the second channel 650e2, and is retained by the stopper 650c positioned at the ball stop position (see FIG. 4A). When a predetermined time (4.5 seconds) has passed since the start of the small winning game, the stopper 650c is moved to the release position, and the ball retained by the stopper 650c flows down the second flow path 650e2 toward the V gate 650d. (see FIG. 4(b)). When the V gate 650d is in the guidance state, the ball flows down the V discharge passage 650e3. Run down 650e4.

Next, the flow of subsequent balls that have won the second variable prize winning device 650 will be described. As described above, when the subsequent ball flows down in the second variable winning device 650, the ball has already stayed at the staying position, and the flow path switching member 650b has moved (returned) to the initial position. is. In this state, the winning ball rolls on the channel switching member 650b and passes through the normal discharge channel 650e4 while flowing down the upper surface of the intermediate partitioning member 650f3 (see FIG. 4A).

Also, the ball that has won the second variable prize winning device 650 is detected by the passage detection switch 650a1, the ball that has flowed down the V discharge channel 650e3 is detected by the passage detection switch 650e5, and the ball that has flowed down the normal discharge area 650e4. is detected by the passage detection switch 650e6. In this way, the total number of winning balls (the total number of balls detected by the passage detection switch 650a1) and the total number of ejected balls (the total number of balls detected by the passage detection switches 650e5 and 650e6) can be detected. Since it is possible to monitor whether the winning ball is discharged within a predetermined time, for example, a clogged ball generated in the second variable winning device 650 or an intentional ball in the second variable winning device 650 It becomes possible to easily discover a fraudulent act that leaves

In addition, the following detection sensors may be provided in the second variable winning device 650 . For example, a switch capable of detecting that the flow path switching member 650b is positioned at the initial position or the contact position may be provided. By providing such a switch, it becomes possible to easily detect a failure of the flow path switching member 650b. Further, a switch capable of detecting that the flow path switching member 650b is continuously positioned at the contact position for a predetermined time may be provided. By providing such a switch, it becomes possible to easily grasp the state in which the flow path switching member 650b cannot be moved (returned) to the initial position for some reason.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as a result of the special symbol game, when the small winning game given when winning the small winning is started, the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. , the second specific winning opening 650a is opened. When a ball wins the second variable prize winning device 650 in the open state, one ball is retained by the stopper 650c as a ball that can pass over the V gate 650d. Subsequent balls that have won the second variable winning device 650 flow down the first flow path 650e1 and pass through the normal discharge path 650e4. After a predetermined period of time has passed, the door 650f is closed to close the second specific prize winning opening, so that the second variable prize winning device 650 no longer wins new prizes. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the stopper 650c moves to the release position, and the stagnant ball flows down toward the V gate 650d. When the ball reaches the V gate 650d, if the V gate 650d is in an induced state (open state), it passes through a passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 in the V discharge channel 650e3 and a jackpot is given. be done. On the other hand, if the V gate 650d is in the regulated state (closed state), it rolls on the V gate 650d, flows down the second flow path 650e2, and passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e4.

The ball that has flowed down the first flow path 650e1 and the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 join at the confluence position 650e7, but the sphere that flows down the second flow path 650e2 preferentially flows down the confluence position 650e7. is configured as Therefore, even if a plurality of balls win in the second variable prize winning device 650, all the balls can be processed smoothly.

The opening timing of the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650, the operation timing of the stopper 650c, and the operation timing of the V gate 650d will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the configuration of the first ball-entering device 64 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(a) and 5(b) are diagrams schematically showing the internal structure of the first ball-entering device 64. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through. It is configured so that it is difficult to visually recognize the inside.

At the top of the first ball entry device 64, a passage opening through which a game ball can enter is provided, and a transmissive ball entry sensor 64c is arranged to detect that a game ball has passed through the passage opening. It is A game ball that has passed through the passage port is alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entry port 64a and the second ball entry port A64b arranged therebelow.

The distribution member 900 receives the entering game ball in the accommodating portion 900a or 900c of the distribution member 900. - 特許庁When a game ball is received by the storage portion 900a, the distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise due to the weight of the game ball (see FIG. 5(a)), and the game ball is first entered. It is guided to the mouth 64a. Here, each of the distribution members 900 is configured to be rotatable about 30 degrees in the left-right direction, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the storage section 900a and the storage section 900c.

A magnet 900b of a sorting member 900 is arranged on the base body provided on the back side of the first ball-entering device 64, and a base-side magnet 901 is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage opening. The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the distribution member 900 side.

The magnet 900b is also made of a rod-shaped magnet similar to the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 so that the tip thereof faces the base-side magnet 901 side. At a position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the storage portion 900a and the storage portion 900c is directly above (on the center line of the interval where about one game ball can enter the passage port), the base side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at a position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward. It is maintained at a position rotated to either the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 is positioned on the center line of the passage opening (upper position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other. Then, either one of the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) for receiving the game ball entering the first ball-entering device 64.例文帳に追加Therefore, by receiving the entered game ball in either one of the accommodation part 900a and the accommodation part 900c, the game ball is appropriately distributed to either the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance A 64b. be able to.

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, for example, after the accommodation portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 15 degrees to the left, guiding the game ball to the first ball entrance 64a, It is possible to prevent the distribution member 900 from rotating to the right (accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after the game ball is guided to the first ball entrance 64a, the accommodation portion 900b faces upward, and the game ball that enters the first ball entry device 64 is received by the accommodation portion 900b. Then, the distribution member 900 rotates about 30 degrees to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the second ball inlet A64b. In this way, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide game balls entering the first ball entering device 64 to the first ball entering port 64a and the second ball entering port A64b. Therefore, the game balls can be equally distributed to the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance A64b to win a prize, and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as A first lottery game) and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as a second lottery game) caused by winning a prize to the second ball entrance A64b can be executed efficiently.

The second ball entrance B640b provided in the second ball entrance device 640 is a ball entrance where the lottery for the second special symbol is started when a game ball is entered in the same manner as the second ball entrance A64b. . The second ball entry device 640 has an electric accessory 640a which is variable means (see FIG. 2). is configured to be This electric accessory 640a is configured to be in an open state for a predetermined period when a winning game is given by a normal symbol lottery. In addition, the second special symbol has four reserved balls, including the second entrance A64b and the second entrance B640b.

In addition, only the game ball that has passed through the left side of the variable display unit 80 can enter the passage opening of the first ball entry device 64 (which is large enough for one game ball to pass through). The ball opening B640b is configured so that only game balls that have passed through the right side can enter.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) using this as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The center frame 86 is provided with decorative movable accessories 400, 500 and 600 which are movable in response to the variable display of the third pattern executed by the third pattern display device 81 and the effect display during the winning game. It is The decorative movable accessories 400, 500, and 600 can provide a lively performance to the player by moving or emitting light from the built-in LEDs.

In addition, each decorative movable accessory 400, 500, 600 is movable so as to cover the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third pattern display device 81, respectively.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later. columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described. The third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are composed of 10 types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main pattern is constructed by adding numbers from "0" to "9" on the handle.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 7) to be described later is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbols is a small hit, a variable display is performed such that a plurality of main symbols are stop-displayed in a specific combination (for example, "341" or the like).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, all numbers from "0" to "9" are used regardless of the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) to be given. may be aligned. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an effect (pseudo-interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed between rounds during the big win is executed in a predetermined period (special fluctuation period) after the end of the big win. there is In order to effectively carry out this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured so that it is difficult to predict the kind of big win based on the kind of the main symbol displayed when the big win occurs. In addition, when the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a small win, chance numbers composed of random numbers of "341" are displayed. In the present embodiment, the chance number is one type of "341", but the number is not limited to this, and other random numbers may be used.

The variable display of the special symbols indicating the lottery result of the lottery game of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not performed at the same time, but only one of them is performed. When reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively stored, the variation of the special symbols is set in the winning order. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special pattern reserved memory (maximum 4) and the second special pattern reserved memory (maximum 4) are configured to be changed in the order of reserved storage (winning order). However, other configurations may be used, for example, the second special symbol is set to be preferentially changed, and if the second special symbol has pending storage, the first special symbol pending storage status Regardless, the second special symbol may be preferentially changed. Also, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be simultaneously variably displayed.

In this embodiment, although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11(a) to (b), the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol (special figure 1). The rate at which the small hit A, which is the small hit type, is selected is set high. Here, since the first ball entrance device 64 alternately wins the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance A 64b, the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is alternately performed. is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the winning of prizes from being biased toward one of the winning holes, and to suppress the loss of the player from becoming excessive. It is configured so as to be able to suppress problems such as remarkably high resistance. In addition, it is possible to reduce the occurrence frequency of so-called over-winning, in which the number of reserved balls exceeds the upper limit due to winning in one winning opening, so that even if the ball enters the opening, Dissatisfaction of a player due to not winning a prize can be reduced, and the player stops shooting balls every time the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, and the turnover rate of the game deteriorates, preventing the increase in sales on the game parlor side. can be prevented.

Furthermore, by providing the time-saving game state, when a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is performed in order to enter the ball into the second ball entrance B640b, the second game that is advantageous to the player Since the game is shifted to a special symbol variation game mainly composed of special symbols (special symbol 2), the time-saving game state can be provided as a more advantageous game state for the player.

Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 26, the display screen (P) of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The other lower side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of held balls and the like.

Three symbol rows are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each symbol row, and each symbol row is cyclically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row and the right symbol row are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each symbol row. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as an active line, and the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line in the order of left symbol row→right symbol row→middle symbol row in each game. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the activated line, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning. Also, if a combination of small winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of "341" as the main symbol) is aligned on the activated line, a small winning moving image is displayed as a small winning.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a plurality of types of small wins (small wins A to small wins C). Among these types of small hits, there are small hits (for example, small hits A) and right hits that are advantageous to the player by executing a game (right-handed game) that aims at the right side area of the game board 13 during the small hit game. A small hit (for example, a small hit C) that does not give the player an advantage even if a beating game is executed is set. In the above-described small winning animation, a guide display that guides a game method that is advantageous to the player according to the small winning type (for example, a display that guides the right-handed game in the small winning animation corresponding to the small winning A) It is included.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 stores the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been performed among the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, 640b. This is the area to display. Specifically, in the small area Ds1, the reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbols are displayed in such a manner that the special symbols 1 and 2 can be identified.

In the small area Ds2, a changing design is displayed in the same manner as the reserved design corresponding to the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether the special symbol that is currently being variably displayed is the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 by looking at the symbol during variation. In addition, as a production that suggests the possibility that the special design corresponding to the reserved design is a big hit, even when adopting the production that changes the mode of the reserved design (so-called reservation notice production), the special design that is currently fluctuating It is possible to easily grasp the presence or absence of the suspension notice effect.

Therefore, it is possible to easily associate the suspension notice effect performed in advance with the variable display of the special symbols, and to provide a gaming machine in which the player is interested in the effect. In addition, as the above-mentioned pending notice effect, for example, the effect of changing the color of the pending pattern (white → blue → red), the effect of changing the background effect of the pending pattern (suggested by the size of the flame), and the pending pattern Any effect may be used as long as the effect allows the player to determine the possibility of a big win, such as an effect in which the characters appear on the screen.

In the small area Ds3, a game explanation (“explanation indicating pressing a button”) for the special symbol game in which variable display is being performed, and the content of notifying the current game state are displayed. In addition, the guide display of the game method during the small winning game displayed in the small winning moving image displayed in the main display area Dm can be displayed in any of the various display areas (Ds1 to Ds3) constituting the sub display area Ds. You may make it display. By doing so, a powerful effect display corresponding to the small winning game and a decorative display for congratulating the winning of the small winning game are executed in the main display area Dm, and in an area different from the main display area Dm. Since the guide display for guiding the game method can be executed in a certain sub-display area Ds, the guide display is intrusive and the effect display becomes difficult to see, or the decorative display is too conspicuous and the guide display is overlooked. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol reserved ball and the second special symbol reserved ball are configured to be identifiable. It may be a (difficult) mode in which it is not possible to distinguish from the held ball.

Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box may be damaged. Cover side and cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 7) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers such as the sound lamp controller 113 by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. It is transmitted in only one direction from the controller 110 to the sub-controllers. On the other hand, data can be transmitted and received bi-directionally to the payout control device 111 .

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, various switches including sensors (magnet sensors, radio wave sensors) for detecting balls and detecting illegal games. 208, a door solenoid 650f2 for opening and closing the door 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650, a ball stop solenoid 650c2 for driving the stopper 650c in the second variable prize winning device 650, and the second variable prize winning device 650 A V gate solenoid 650d2 for driving the V gate, a specific door solenoid 65f2 for opening and closing the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65, etc. Various solenoids 209 are connected. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to them through the port 205 .

Also, the input/output port 205 is connected to a later-described RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 , and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and RAM erasure signals output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253 . Various processes are executed based on the signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 48) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 continuously pays out prize balls one by one. More specifically, one prize ball is paid out each time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation). Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). In addition, every time a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is suspended for a predetermined period (1 second). Thus, for example, when a large amount of prize balls need to be paid out continuously, such as during a big win, the payout motor 216 continues to pay out prize balls without a break, and the heat generation of the payout motor 216 is suppressed. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from breaking down due to the melting of the resin portion or the elastic portion of the pachinko machine 10 due to the heat generated by the payout motor 216 . In addition, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable parts of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the lower tray unit 15 operation and the parts touched by the player such as the handle 51), causing injury such as burns to the player. It can be suppressed. It should be noted that the number of payouts until the payout motor 216 suspends the payout of prize balls and the pause period of payout are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. can. For example, the payout may be suspended every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 . Also, for example, the pause period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and produces a variation pattern ( It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b), and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage to be played or change the contents of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Since the details of the display control device 114 are known, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply circuit (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 48).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The main controller 110 executes major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, and display setting in the second symbol display device. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 8, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display on the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. A first hit type counter C2 used for , a stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the special symbol, and a small hit type counter C5 used to select the small hit type of the special symbol. , a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 50). Then, the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 as appropriate. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each area has a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, And each value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the pattern starting port (through gate) 67. - 特許庁

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 50).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, the special symbol 1 is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 64b, 640b. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 64b, 640b.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that will result in a loss, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is lost.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there is one random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, and the random number "0" is stored in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 10(a)). there is In this way, among the total number of random numbers of 400, since the total number of random number numbers that result in a big win is 1, the probability of a big win with a special symbol is "1/400".

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the value provided in the ROM 202 The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10(b)). As shown in FIG. 10(b), in the case of a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type when the random number is "0 to 49" in the first hit type counter C2 is "jackpot A". Become. Also, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B".

In addition, in this embodiment, as a kind of special symbol loss (other than the big win), a small win is provided in which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state. In the first winning random number counter C1, there are 398 random numbers that become a small winning special symbol. stored. Among the total number of random numbers of 400, the total number of small winning random numbers is 398, so the probability of winning a special symbol is "398/400".

In addition, the value of the small hit type counter C4 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 398, and the value of this small hit type counter C4 and the value provided in the ROM 202 The small hit type is determined based on the first small hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 10(c)). In addition, in this embodiment, the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 for the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 for the second special symbol (special figure 2) (see FIG. 10(c)). Then, depending on each table, the range of random numbers for which each small hit type is set is changed (see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)). This is because, as described above, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol (special symbol 1), so that the ratio of selecting the small win A is increased. be. In addition, the contents of the small winning game corresponding to each small winning type will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach out of front and back" (for example, range of 98 to 99) that stops at the same time, and "Reach other than front and rear out" (for example, range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops outside the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. , and "Completely out of range" (range of 0 to 89, for example), which does not generate reach, are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, the special symbol 1 reserved ball in the RAM 203 It is stored in the storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrances 64b and 640b.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, the table is divided into normal gaming state and time-saving gaming state, and the range of random numbers set for each stop type of failure is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state or in the time-saving game state.

For example, in the time-saving gaming state, a table for high probability with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. “Out” is more likely to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the case of a normal game, the random number range corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is set to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, 640b. A narrow low-probability table of 0 to 79 is selected, making it difficult to select "complete failure". In addition, in the normal game state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front and back" is widened from 80 to 97, and "Reach other than front and rear" is more likely to be selected. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long presentation time, so that it is possible to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrances 64b, 640b, and display the third symbol. It becomes easier for the device 81 to continuously perform the variable display. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "front-back reach" is set to 98-99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variable time refers to the time from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop display of the symbol and the determination of the symbol. For example, if the symbol is stopped for 0.5 seconds after the symbol variation is executed for 9.5 seconds and the symbol is fixed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.5 seconds + 0.5 seconds). It is written as Based on this variation time, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the voice ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 . The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 50), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern selection table 202e (FIG. 11(c), FIGS. , FIG. 13) are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9A).

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 398, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 398). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the normal symbol win is set by a normal symbol random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the normal symbol. If the winning random number value matches the winning random number set by the winning random number table, it is determined as a winning of the normal design.

There are 200 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "0 to 199". These random numbers are normally stored in a random number table per symbol. In this way, the total number of random numbers for the normal design is 399, and the total number of random numbers for winning the normal design is 200. Therefore, the probability of winning the normal design is approximately "1/2".

In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and normal symbol variable display is performed for 180 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 199", it is determined as winning, and after the variable display is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is illuminated and displayed. , the second ball entrance B640b is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the second ball entrance B640b is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. , the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving game state (during time-saving), the probability of winning the normal symbols is "1/2", which is the same as in the normal game state, but the normal symbols are variably displayed. time is set to 1 second. In addition, the opening pattern is set so that the second ball entrance B640b is opened "0.5 sec x 2 times" when the normal symbol wins. Thus, in the time-saving game state, it is configured so that the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entrance B640b than in the normal game state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 398), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 50).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 sets the special symbol lottery and variation pattern and the normal symbol lottery and variation pattern setting according to the value of the counter and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 can be executed.

In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 50) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 49) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 48) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11. FIG. FIG. 9(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 9( a ), the ROM 202 contains the first per random number table 202 a, the first big per type selection table 202 b, the first small per type selection table 202 c, the second per random number table 202 d, and the variation At least a pattern selection table 202e, a big win scenario table 202f and a small win scenario table 202g are provided.

As described above, the first winning random number table 202a is a table in which the values of random numbers that are special symbol jackpots are defined. When the random value defined in the first winning random number table 202a and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Incidentally, in the first winning random number table 202a, the value of the random number that becomes the small winning of the special symbol is also set. Details of the first hit random number table 202a will be described later with reference to FIG. 10(a).

The first jackpot type selection table 202b is a data table in which the determination value of the first jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. The detailed contents of the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described later with reference to FIG. 10(b).

The first small hit type selection table 202c is a data table in which the determination value of the small hit type counter C5 for determining the small hit type is set for each small hit type. This first small hit type selection table 202c is different data in the case of winning a small hit with the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the case of winning a small hit with the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured to determine the small hit type by referring to the table, and when the small hit is made with the special figure 1, the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 is used. The usage type selection table 202c2 is referred to (see FIG. 10(c)). In addition, the detailed content of the 1st small hit classification selection table 202c is later mentioned with reference to Fig.11 (a).

The second winning random number table 202d is a data table in which the winning judgment value of the normal symbol is stored. For example, the value of the second winning random number counter C3 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer ranges from 0 to 199. In the case of , it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design. It should be noted that, as described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol wins in the normal game state, after the variable display for a predetermined time (180 seconds) ends, the stop symbol is lit and displayed, and the second ball entrance B640b The electric accessory 640a associated with is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state (during time-saving), the value of the second winning random number counter C3, which is determined to be a hit of the normal design, does not change, but the variation time when it is determined to be a hit of the normal design is set to 1 second. , after the variable display is completed, the stop symbol is lit and displayed, and the electric accessary 640a associated with the second entrance B 640b is opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

In addition, the value of the second winning random number counter C3, which is determined to be a winning of normal symbols, may be changed between the normal game state and the time saving game state (during time saving).

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202e is a data table used for determining the display form of the fluctuation pattern, and the display form is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern selection table 202e, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11(c), the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a large winning variation pattern selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 12(a)) dedicated to the case where the winning determination result is a winning The determination result is out, and the deviation pattern selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 12 (b)) dedicated to the case of the normal game state, and the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 dedicated to the case where the success/failure determination result is a small hit (see FIG. 13).

The jackpot scenario table 202f is a data table used to determine the opening scenario for opening the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, and defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the types of jackpots won. It is Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the jackpot scenario table 202f includes a jackpot scenario a 202f1 (see FIG. 14(b)) dedicated to the case where the jackpot type is jackpot A, and the jackpot type is jackpot B. It consists of a case-only jackpot scenario b202f2 (see FIG. 14(c)) and a jackpot scenario c (not shown) dedicated when the jackpot type is jackpot C or D.

In this jackpot scenario, various events (scenario contents) are defined based on the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p (see FIG. 9(b)) that counts when the jackpot scenario is set. The opening/closing control of the specific door 65f is executed based on the content.

The small winning scenario table 202g is a data table used to determine the opening scenario for opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game, and is a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning small winning types. is stipulated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), the small hit scenario table 202g has a small hit scenario a202g1 (FIG. 15(d)) for exclusive use when the small hit type is the small hit A, and the small hit type is It is composed of a small winning scenario b202g2 (see FIG. 15(c)) dedicated to the case of small winning B or C.

In this small winning scenario, various events (scenario contents) are defined based on the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q (see FIG. 9(b)) which counts when the small winning scenario is set. , the opening/closing control of the door 650f is executed based on the content of the scenario, and the operation control of the stopper 650c provided in the second variable winning device 650 is executed. In addition, in the process of determining whether or not the passage of the ball into the second specific prize winning port 650a and the V discharge channel 650e3 is normal, the range in which the ball is allowed to pass is also based on the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q. stipulated.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 9(b). FIG. 9(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9B, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a time saving medium counter 203h, a counter buffer 203i, a fluctuation execution flag 203j, a fluctuation order storage area 203k, and a V flag 203m. , an open counter 203n, a closed counter 203o, a big win scenario counter 203p, a small win scenario counter 203q, a special figure 2B validity period flag 203r, a validity period measurement counter 203s, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first ball entrance 64a (first special symbol), and has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first big hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the first small hit type counter C5 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 and C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for the special symbol 1 is performed in the main controller 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 and C5 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and C5 that are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, a special symbol lottery or the like is determined.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning) and each value of each counter C1-C3 and C5 is acquired according to the starting winning, those values are included. A winning information command is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 from the winning information command and stores them as the winning information in the RAM 233. Store in the storage area 223a.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second special symbol (second entrance A64b, second entrance B640b). The only difference is that the first special symbol (first entrance 64a) is changed to the second special symbol (second entrance A64b, second entrance B640b). omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the holding area of 1 to a holding area with an area number smaller by 1. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (waiting number of times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added (see S704 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S207 in FIG. 35).

In the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the first special symbol (first entrance 64a) is the second special symbol (second entrance A 64b, second The only difference is that it is changed to the 2-ball entrance B640b), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times of holding variable display in special design 1 N1) or the value of special design 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times of variable display reserved in special design 2 N2) is reserved. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the number-of-balls command (see S208 and S211 in FIG. 35, S705 in FIG. 40, and S808 in FIG. 41). The reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. is.

The voice lamp control device 113 is controlled by the reserved ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of pending balls in the variable display that is held in the device 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the displayed variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device based on the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port 67 to a maximum of 4. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol starting port) 67 and the number of variable display reserved balls increases. 1 is added up to (see S1104 in FIG. 44). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1009 in FIG. 43).

When the ball passes through the through gate (ordinary design start opening) 67, if the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in the normal design) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1106 in FIG. 44). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S1103 in FIG. 44: No).

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving gaming state (time-saving), and if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving gaming state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with normal symbols (normal game state). The initial value of the counter 203h during time saving is set to zero, and in the main controller 110, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot ending (that is, the jackpot end timing). Specifically, 8 is set when the jackpot types are "jackpot A", "jackpot B" and "jackpot D", and 0 is set when the jackpot type is "jackpot C". After that, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect ends until the value of the time saving medium counter 203h becomes 0 (S222 in FIG. 35).

When the lottery for winning the normal pattern is performed, if the lottery result is a win, the value of the time saving counter 203h is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, 0 as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a. .5 sec x 2 opening patterns are set (S1017 in Fig. 43), and the variation time of normal symbols is set to 1 sec (S1018 in Fig. 43). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, the fluctuation time of the normal design is set to 180 seconds (S1017 in FIG. 43), similarly to the case where the lottery result of the normal design is other than winning.

The counter buffer 203i is a buffer area used for counting each counter value, as described above.

The variation execution flag 203j is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is varied or the second special symbol is varied. If the pending data stored in the first memory area of the variable order storage area 203k, which will be described later, is the pending data based on the first special design, the variation execution flag 203j is set to the first special symbol, the second If it is the reserved data based on the special design, the second special design is set as the special design for which the variable execution is performed. It should be noted that this flag is an area that is backed up even when power is cut off, and in the initial state where the RAM is cleared, etc., the first special symbol is preferentially set.

The variable order storage area 203k is an area for storing the winning order of each reserved data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Eight storage areas are set in the variable order storage area 203k, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in order of winning. In addition, the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

The V flag 203m is a flag for storing that the ball has passed through the passage detection switch 640e5, which is a specific area of the second variable prize winning device 650. When the small winning is completed, the value of the V flag 203m is changed. Based on this, a jackpot is awarded. This V flag 203m, in the V passing time process, the type of jackpot based on the type of small hit is set (S1306, S1309 in FIG. 46), referred to in the small hit ending control process (S2107 in FIG. 54), and then turned off (S2108 in FIG. 54).

The open counter 203n is a counter used for drive control of the V gate 650d, which is an induction member provided in the second variable prize winning device 650, and the V gate solenoid 650e2 turns on (moves the V gate 650d to the induction position). ), the count is started, and when the counter value of the open counter 203n exceeds a predetermined value, the V gate solenoid 650e2 is turned off (the V gate 650d is moved to the regulation position). The open counter 203n performs addition of the counter value (S1404 in FIG. 47), discrimination of the counter value (S1405 and S1406 in FIG. 47), and resetting of the counter (S1407 in FIG. 47) in the V gate drive control process. done.

The closed counter 203o is a counter used for driving control of the V gate 650d, which is an induction member provided in the second variable winning device 650, and turns off the V gate solenoid 650e2 based on the counter value of the above-described open counter 203n. By doing so, counting is started, and when the counter value of the closing counter 203o exceeds a predetermined value, the V gate solenoid 650e2 is turned on (the V gate 650e is moved to the guidance position). The closing counter 203o performs addition of the counter value (S1410 in FIG. 47), determination of the counter value (S1411 in FIG. 47), and resetting of the counter (S1407 in FIG. 47) in the V gate control process.

The above-described open counter 203n and closed counter 203o are configured to add 1 to their values during timer interrupt processing that is executed every 2 milliseconds. Therefore, if the opening time of the V gate is set to 1.5 seconds, it is determined whether the value of the open counter 203n exceeds 750. If the closing time of the V gate 650d is set to 3.5 seconds, It is sufficient to determine whether the value of the closing counter 203o exceeds 1750 or not.

In this embodiment, a configuration is shown in which various counter values are added by timer interrupt processing. It may be measured using a period of time. Further, in this embodiment, the open counter 203n and the closed counter 203o are configured separately, but a single counter may be configured to measure the open period and the closed period.

The jackpot scenario counter 203p is a counter for updating the jackpot scenario in which the opening/closing timing of the specific door 65f is defined. Opening control is executed. This jackpot scenario counter 203p is incremented by 1 when it is determined that a jackpot scenario is set in the jackpot control process (S1802 in FIG. 51), and in the jackpot ending control process, when control based on the jackpot scenario is completed, the jackpot scenario counter 203p is set. is cleared (S1905 in FIG. 52).

The small winning scenario counter 203q is a counter for updating the small winning scenario in which the operation timing of various devices (the ball stopper member 650c and the door 650f) is defined. Operation control of various devices is executed during the small winning based on the winning scenario. This small winning scenario counter 203q is incremented by 1 when it is determined that a small winning scenario is set in the small winning control process (S2002 in FIG. 53), and in the small winning ending control process, control based on the small winning scenario is completed, and the setting of the small winning scenario is cleared (S2111 in FIG. 54).

The special figure 2B valid period flag 203r is a flag for storing the period during which the winning to the second entrance B (special figure 2B) 640b is valid among the second special symbols (special figure 2), In addition to the period during which this special figure 2B valid period flag 203r is set to ON (the period during which winning to the second entrance B (special figure 2B) 640b is valid), the second entrance B (special figure 2B) It is used in the process of determining that the detection of winning in 640b is an error (S803 in FIG. 41).

This special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is set to ON during the period from when the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entering device 640 is started until the validity period measurement counter 203s described later measures a predetermined period. be. This special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is normally set to ON in the design variation process (S1025 in FIG. 43), and is normally set to OFF in the design variation process after the elapse of a predetermined period (S1004 in FIG. 43).

Validity period measurement counter 203s is for measuring the period during which the above-described special figure 2B valid period flag 203r is set to ON (the period during which winning to the second entrance B (special figure 2B) 640b is valid) It is a counter, while the value of this valid period measurement counter 203s is subtracted (after 1000 is set as the value of the counter, the value of the counter is subtracted until it becomes 0), the special figure 2B valid period flag 203r is set on.

This effective period measuring counter 203s is normally set to ON in the symbol variation process (S1026 in FIG. 43), and 1000 is set as the value of the counter. Then, 1 is subtracted (S1002 in FIG. 43) in normal symbol variation processing executed every 2 milliseconds as a timer interrupt processing, and this is repeated until the counter value becomes 0 (until 2 seconds elapse).

Next, details of various tables held in the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG.

First, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 10(a). FIG. 10(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 10(a), in the first winning random number table 202a, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0" as the determination value of the big win, and the value of the first random number counter C1 as the determination value of the small win. "1 to 398" is set, and the value "399" of the first winning random number counter C1 is set as a determination value other than a big hit and a small hit (loss).

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a special symbol lottery with a probability of "1/400" for a big win, a probability for "398/400" for a small win, and a probability for "1/400" for a loss. It is configured as follows, and the lottery result of the special pattern is almost a small hit.

Next, the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 10(b). FIG. 10(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 10(b), in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, the value "0 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 as the judgment value of the jackpot A is "50 to 99" as the judgment value of the jackpot B. ” is set. For the jackpot C and the jackpot D, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is not set. It is a jackpot type set by passing through the V discharge channel 650e3, which is a specific area in the second variable winning device 650. FIG.

Here, when a jackpot game is started in the pachinko machine 10, the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened, and a lot of prize balls are obtained by entering game balls into the specific prize winning opening 65a. A game is executed. In addition, a time-saving game state advantageous to the player is imparted after the end of the jackpot game according to the jackpot type.

Next, the contents of each jackpot type will be described. When the jackpot A is selected, a jackpot game is started in which the first variable winning device 65 opens two rounds (2R), and after the jackpot game ends, a time-saving game state (time-saving) is provided eight times. When the jackpot B is selected, a jackpot game is started in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 5 rounds (5R), and after the jackpot game ends, a time-saving game state (time-saving) is provided eight times.

When the jackpot C is selected, a jackpot game in which the first variable prize winning device 65 opens 10 rounds (10R) is started, but after the jackpot game ends, the time saving game state (time saving) is not provided. When the jackpot D is selected, a jackpot game is started in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 10 rounds (10R), and after the jackpot game ends, a time-saving game state (time-saving) is provided eight times.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, by winning a special symbol jackpot (jackpot A or jackpot B), the state is always shifted to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed. The number is set smaller than the jackpot C or jackpot D. This is because the big win (jackpot C or jackpot D) executed by adding a specific area to the game ball during the small win game can make the player think that he/she has won the big win by himself/herself. This is to make the privilege of C or the jackpot D more advantageous to the player.

FIG.10(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st small hit classification selection table 202c. As shown in FIG. 10(c), the first small per type selection table 202c is set with a special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 and a special figure 2 type selection table 202c2. The selection ratio of the small hit type is changed with the hit and the small hit by the special figure 2. Here, the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 will be described with reference to FIG. 11(a).

FIG. 11(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1. As shown in FIG. 11 (a), in the case of a small hit of the first special symbol (special figure 1), in the small hit type counter C5, the small hit when the random value is "0 to 34" The type is "small hit A". Further, when the random number is "35 to 40", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number is "41 to 398", the small hit type is "small hit C".

Here, the small hit type will be described with reference to FIG. 11(a). First, when the "small win A" is selected, the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is set to 1 during the small winning game as an opening pattern that makes it easy for the game ball to win the second variable winning device 650. An opening scenario of opening for 0.5 seconds is set, and "jackpot D" is set as the jackpot type given when passing through a specific area provided in the V discharge channel 650e3 (at the time of V passage). Further, when "small hit B" is selected, as an opening pattern in which it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable prize winning device 650, the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened at 0.00 during the small winning game. An opening scenario is set in which the action of opening for one second is performed three times, and "jackpot D" is given as a jackpot type when passing through a specific area provided in the V discharge channel 650e3 (at the time of V passage). is set. Also, when "small win C" is selected, the same opening scenario as "small win D" is set, and when passing through a specific area provided in the V discharge flow path 650e3 (when passing V ) is set to “jackpot C” as the jackpot type.

In this way, the opening pattern of the door (attacker) 650f during the small winning game and the big winning type given at the time of V passage are different depending on each small winning type, so that the second variable winning device 650 is opened. Advantageous small wins and disadvantageous small wins can be set for the player, and various game properties can be provided.

Next, the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 11(b). FIG. 11(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2. As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a small hit, the small hit when the random number is "0 to 85" in the small hit type counter C5 The type is "small hit A". Further, when the random number is "86 to 90", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number is "91 to 398", the small hit type is "small hit C".

In this embodiment, the winning ratio of each special symbol (first special symbol (special symbol 1) and second special symbol (special symbol 2)) is varied according to the game state (normal game state or time saving game state). is configured to Specifically, since the game aiming at the first ball entry device 64 is performed in the normal game state, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are alternately won, so the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are won. The ratio is 1:1, but in the time-saving game state, the game (right-handed game) aiming at the second ball-entering device 640 is performed, so there is no special figure 1 winning.

Therefore, as described above, by changing the selection ratio of the selected small hit type between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, it is possible to provide an advantageous game to the player according to the game state. In addition, although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to provide a state that is more advantageous to the player (easy to pass V) by continuing the "small hit A". In the normal game state in which , and special figure 2 win alternately, the expectation that ``small win A'' will be won continuously depending on whether the next winning prize after winning ``small win A'' is special figure 1 or special figure 2 Since the odds are changed, it is possible to provide the player with a new game feature of continuously winning the "minor win A", which is effective in improving the interest.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 11(c). FIG. 11(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e. This variation pattern selection table 202e includes, as shown in FIG. ) and a small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 (see FIG. 13) are set at least.

First, with reference to FIG. 12(a), the large winning variation pattern selection table 202e1 will be described. FIG. 12(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern selection table 202e1. The large winning variation pattern selection table 202e1 is a data table that defines the display mode (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a large winning. Variation patterns of various jackpots are selected based on the number of held balls, the presence or absence of the time-saving gaming state (time-saving), and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot indicates how many times the special pattern lottery for which the variation pattern is selected this time is the lottery after the end of the jackpot game. When selecting a variation pattern indicating a result, the number of variations after the big win "1" is referred to, otherwise the number of variations after the big win "2~" is selected. In this way, in the selection of the variation pattern of the special symbol, by setting a variation pattern that differs only in specific variation timing, it is possible to provide the player with a variation pattern that appears only at a specific variation timing, and the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the user becomes bored with the content of the program.

Here, although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute a special effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the case where the first spin after the end of the big win is "small win A". (See FIGS. 32-33). Therefore, the large winning variation pattern selection table 202e is defined so that a different variation pattern display mode from the other cases is selected only for the first rotation after the end of the big winning.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, when the number of held balls is a predetermined number or more (7 pieces) at the timing of selecting a variation pattern, V discharge in a small winning game when a predetermined condition is satisfied It is configured to provide a situation in which it is easy to pass through the specific area provided in the flow path 650e3. Therefore, the big hit variation pattern selection table 202e is set so that the display mode (variation time) of the variation pattern differs according to the number of held balls.

Returning to FIG. 12(a), the description is continued. In the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1, time-saving variation A to time-saving variation D are set as variation patterns to be selected in the time-saving gaming state (with time-saving), and jackpot variation A to C is set. First, the time-saving variation A to time-saving variation D selected in the time-saving gaming state will be described. Short-time fluctuation A is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, which is set when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 98" when the number of fluctuations after the jackpot is 1 and the number of held balls is 0 to 2. is. The time saving variation B is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 30 seconds when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "99 to 198" in the same state as the time saving variation A.

The time saving variation C and the time saving variation D are the time saving variation C (variation time 4 seconds), and in the case of "99 to 198", the time reduction variation D (variation time 6.5 seconds) is set respectively.

Next, the big hit fluctuations A to C selected in the normal game state will be explained. In the normal game state, the variation pattern is set only by the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the game state (the number of variations after the end of the jackpot and the number of held balls). The jackpot variation A is a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds set when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 98", and the jackpot variation B has a variation type counter CS1 value of "99 to 149 is a variation pattern with a variation time of 25 seconds, and the jackpot variation C is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds, which is set when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "150 to 198". be.

Next, the deviation variation pattern selection table 202e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(b). FIG. 12(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern selection table 202e2. As with the above-described jackpot variation pattern selection table, this deviation variation pattern selection table 202e2 also depends on the number of variations after the completion of the jackpot, the number of currently held balls, the presence or absence of the time-saving gaming state (time-saving), and the value of the variation type counter CS1. Variation patterns for various losses are selected based on the above, and the only difference is that the variation pattern (variation time) selected for the big hit variation pattern is different, so the description is omitted.

Next, the small winning variation pattern selection table 202e3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning variation pattern selection table 202e3. This small winning variation pattern selection table 202e3 is also similar to the selection of the large winning variation pattern described above. Variation patterns for various small hits are selected based on the value of .

The small winning variation pattern selection table 202e3 has a special variation A when the number of fluctuations after the big winning is 1 and the time saving game state (time saving), and the special symbol lottery result is a small winning A, In addition, special variations B to C are selected when the number of variations after the end of the jackpot is 2 or more and the number of reserved balls is 5 to 7.

Here, the special variation A will be explained. The special variation A is a special variation selected when executing a continuous jackpot effect (see FIGS. 31 to 34), which will be described later. For the special variation A, a specific variation time (30 seconds) is defined as a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation for the first rotation after the end of the big win, in order to execute a continuous big win effect.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIGS. The timing at which the door 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened in the winning A game and the timing at which the V gate 650d provided in the second variable prize winning device 650 is in the guided state are calculated in advance, and after the big win is completed. It is determined whether the timing at which the variation of the special symbols in the first rotation starts, that is, the timing at which the big winning game ends is the timing at which the small winning A game in the first rotation after the big winning ends can pass through the V discharge channel 650e3. Then, based on the determination result, the effect during the jackpot game (the effect during the final round and the ending period) is determined.

Next, the special variation B will be explained. The special variation B is a special variation that is selected when executing a small winning continuous effect (FIGS. 27 to 30), which will be described later. As a result of the special symbol lottery, when the small winning A is continuously executed, the special variation B is selected as each variation pattern when the small winning A is continuously executed. It is a variation pattern for making the timing of opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 in the small hit A game different from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d.

Here, the variation pattern (variation time) set when the special variation B is selected will be described. In this embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit A, and the special variation B is selected when the number of retained balls is 5 or 6 at the time of selecting the variation pattern. This special variation B is defined as a variation pattern with a variation time of 5.5 seconds. A detailed explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 27. When the small winning A is won continuously and the special variation B is selected, the execution timing of the continuous small winning A is determined by the V gate 650d. A small hit A is executed at a timing different from the execution cycle (in this embodiment, a timing different by 1.5 seconds).

In this way, in the next special symbol lottery after winning the small win A, when the predetermined condition (the number of balls held is 5 to 6) is satisfied, if the small win A is won (continuously winning the small win A winning), since the variation pattern (variation time) is defined so that the small winning A is executed at different timings with respect to the operating cycle of the V gate 650d, when winning the small winning A continuously, the induction It is possible to make it easier to execute the small winning A at the timing when the ball can be passed through the V gate 650d in the state (making it easier to execute the advantageous small winning game).

Next, the special variation C will be explained. The special variation C is a special variation selected when executing a small winning continuous effect (FIGS. 27 to 30) described later, and when the small winning A is continued, the first small winning game is executed. This is a variation pattern for making the timing of the change constant.

The small winning variation pattern selection table 202e3 is similar to the large winning variation pattern selection table described above, except that the above-described special variations A to C are provided. Variation patterns for various small hits are selected based on the presence or absence of the time-saving gaming state (time-saving) and the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected for the big hit variation pattern is different. Since they are only different, the description is omitted.

In addition, in the various variation pattern tables described above, various variation patterns (variation time) are selected according to the game state (the number of variations after the end of the jackpot, the number of retained balls, whether or not there is time saving) and the value of the variation type counter CS1. However, in the pachinko machine 10, it is better to accumulate a large number of reserved balls, to achieve a big win via a small winning game, that is, a specific area in the second variable winning device 650 (V discharge channel 650e3 Pass detection Since it is configured to be able to increase the degree of expectation of passing through the switch 650e5), it is configured to select a long variable time (for example, 60 seconds) as an opportunity to accumulate a plurality of the number of held balls.

Next, referring to FIG. 14, the jackpot scenario table 202f will be described. FIG. 14(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot scenario table 202f. This jackpot scenario table 202f is defined so that jackpot scenarios corresponding to the jackpot types selected by the first jackpot type selection table 202b can be selected, and a jackpot game is executed based on the selected jackpot scenario.

The jackpot scenario table 202f has, as jackpot scenarios to be selected, a jackpot scenario a 202f1 dedicated to jackpot A, a jackpot scenario b 202f2 dedicated to jackpot B, and a jackpot scenario c 202f3 dedicated to jackpot C or D.

Next, the jackpot scenario a202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 14(b). FIG. 14(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the jackpot scenario a202f1. When the jackpot scenario is set, the jackpot scenario counter 203p starts counting (S1802 in FIG. 51), and various controls set corresponding to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p are executed. Note that the counter value is incremented in the main processing of main controller 110 which is executed at a 4 millisecond cycle, and when the counter value is incremented by 1, 4 milliseconds have elapsed.

When the jackpot scenario a is set and the counter value reaches 1250 (5 seconds have elapsed), the jackpot opening period ends, and when the counter value is updated to 1251, the specific door 65f of the first variable ball entry device 65 is opened. To do so, the specific door solenoid 65a2 is turned on (1 round starts). After that, when the counter value reaches 8750 (35 seconds have passed), that is, when 30 seconds have passed since the specific door 65f was opened, the specific door solenoid 65a2 is turned off to close the specific door 65f (1 round ends). .

The closing condition (end condition) of the specific door 65f in one round of this pachinko machine is when 30 seconds have passed since the specific door 65f was opened and when 10 balls have won in the specific winning hole 65a. be. Details will be described later, but if 10 balls win in the specific winning opening 65a within 30 seconds after the specific door 65f opens, the value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is set to 8749 (1 at the end of one round). It is configured to execute the process of updating up to the previous).

With this configuration, the counter value is incremented by 1, and the counter value becomes 8750. Since the operation control for closing the specific door 65f is executed, the door closing control is executed for each of a plurality of round end conditions. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load, and it is possible to prevent the operation control of the specific door solenoid from malfunctioning when the respective round end conditions occur substantially at the same timing.

After that, until the counter value reaches 9250, that is, until 2 seconds have elapsed since the end of the first round, a state in which the specific door 65f is closed is maintained as the inter-round interval period, and the counter value reaches 9251. Then, operation control is executed to start the next round, and the specific door solenoid is turned on to open the specific door 65f (second round). When the counter value reaches 16750, the specific door solenoid is turned off as in the first round (end of the second round).

Since this jackpot scenario a202f1 is a jackpot scenario corresponding to jackpot A, which is a two-round jackpot, when the second round ends, until the counter value reaches 18000 (5 seconds after the end of the second round) jackpot ending period is executed. In this way, the jackpot A in which the jackpot scenario a is set is provided with a jackpot game that is executed until the counter value reaches 18000 (72 seconds) at the longest.

Next, the jackpot scenario b202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 14(c). FIG.14(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot scenario b202f2. This jackpot scenario b202f2 is a jackpot scenario in which the jackpot type is set to jackpot B (5-round jackpot), and the above-described jackpot scenario a202f1 differs only in the number of rounds to be executed, so the explanation is omitted. do.

In this embodiment, only the operation control of the specific door 65f is shown as the control executed based on the big win scenario, but other control may be executed based on the big win scenario. For example, a period obtained by adding a predetermined time to the period during which the specific door 65f is opened is set as the effective winning period for the first specific winning opening 65a, and it is determined whether or not the winning of the ball to the first specific winning opening 65a is normal. You may make it possible.

Next, referring to FIG. 15, the small winning scenario table 202g will be described. FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning scenario table 202g. The small winning scenario table 202g stores selectable small winning scenarios respectively corresponding to the small winning types selected by the first small winning type selection table 202c, and based on the selected small winning scenario. A game is executed.

The small winning scenario table 202g has a small winning scenario a202g1 dedicated to the small winning A and a small winning scenario b202g2 dedicated to the small winning B or C as selected small winning scenarios.

Next, the small winning scenario a202g1 will be described with reference to FIG. 15(b). FIG.15(b) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of small hit scenario a202g1. When the small winning scenario is set, the small winning scenario counter 203q starts counting (S2002 in FIG. 53), and various controls set corresponding to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q are executed. Note that the counter value is incremented in the main processing of main controller 110 which is executed at a 4 millisecond cycle, and when the counter value is incremented by 1, 4 milliseconds have elapsed.

When the small winning scenario a is set and the counter value becomes 1, the small winning opening period is started and the ball stopping solenoid 650c2 is set to ON to project the stopper 650c to the ball stopping position. Then, when the counter value reaches 625 (2.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win), the opening period for the small win ends, and when the counter value reaches 626, the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. Set door solenoid 650f2 on (start round). After that, when the counter value reaches 1000 (4 seconds have passed), that is, when 1.5 seconds have passed since the door 650f was opened, the door solenoid 650f2 is turned off to close the door 650f (end of the round).

Then, when the counter value reaches 1001, the ending period for the small win is started. During the ending period of this small hit, when the counter value reaches 1125, that is, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the door 650f was closed, the ball stopper solenoid is activated to retract the stopper 650c to the ball stopper release position. 650c2 is set off. This ejects the balls staying in the second variable winning device 650 with the door 650f closed (excluding the balls staying at the ball stop position) out of the second variable winning device 650. In order to provide a grace time (0.5 seconds) for this, the small hit scenario is configured to turn off the door solenoid 650f2 and then turn off the stopper ball stopping solenoid 650c2 after 0.5 seconds. It is.

With this configuration, when the stopper 650c is released, balls other than the balls retained at the ball stop position can be prevented from flowing down toward the V gate 650d, thereby preventing an unexpected game ( It is possible to prevent execution of a game in which a plurality of balls flow down toward the V gate in one small winning game.

Returning to FIG. 15(b), the description is continued. When the counter value reaches 1250, that is, 0.5 seconds after the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is turned off, the ball passes through the passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 in the V discharge passage 650e3 (V passage). A period (counter value 1250 to 1500) for validating the fact is set. The period from when the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is turned off until the V passage is enabled is from when the ball staying at the ball stop position is released from the stopper 650c to when it passes through the specific area. A minimum time (0.5 seconds) is set. Therefore, it is possible to effectively handle the passing of the ball retained by the stopper 650c through the specific area, and invalidate the ball passing through the specific area during a period other than the period during which the V passage is valid even during the small winning game. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent fraudulent games in which balls are intentionally retained in the second variable winning device 650 and passed through a specific area during a small winning game.

Then, when the counter value reaches 1500, the small winning ending period ends, the V passage effective period ends, and the small winning game ends. In addition, in the small winning scenario a202g1, the door passable period is set between the counter value 626 and 1125 as the period during which the winning of the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a is enabled. By setting the validity period in this way, it becomes possible to easily determine whether or not the winning or passing of the ball is normal.

Next, with reference to FIG.15(c), small hit scenario b202g2 is demonstrated. FIG.15(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of small hit scenario b202g2. The small winning scenario b202g2 is a small winning scenario corresponding to the small winning B or the small winning C, and it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 650 by opening and closing the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 at high speed. This is a scenario that provides a small winning game.

The opening period during the small winning game is different from the small winning scenario a202g1 in that it is set 1 second shorter, so the explanation thereof will be omitted. Also, the ending period during the small winning game is the same as the small winning scenario a202g1, so the explanation thereof is omitted. Hereinafter, the contents of the scenario during the round period during the small winning game will be described.

When the small winning game is started and the counter value reaches 376, the door solenoid 650f2 is turned on to open the door 650f, and when the counter value reaches 401 after that, the door solenoid 650f2 is turned off to close the door 650f. set. That is, in the small winning scenario 202g2, the opening time of the door 650f is set to 0.1 second. This opening operation is repeated three times, and when the counter value reaches 901, the round ends.

In this way, in the small hit scenario b, the opening time of the door 650f is set to 0.1 second, which is a difficult time for the ball to enter. Furthermore, the total opening time (0.3 seconds (0.1 seconds x 3 times)) in which the door 650f is opened in the small winning scenario b is the door 650f opening time (1.5 seconds) in the small winning scenario a. On the other hand, since the time is set to 1/5, a small winning game in which it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 650 is provided.

Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a game specification storage area 222b, a V gate scenario 222c, a precursor effect selection table 222d, a continuous effect type selection table 222e, and a continuous effect variation pattern selection. At least a table 222f, a continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional prize winning) 222g, a small hit middle effect pattern selection table 222h, and an indication effect variation pattern selection table 222i are stored. The variation pattern table 222a is already known and will be briefly described. More detailed fluctuation contents are determined from the type (reach, out, etc.). This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes.

The game specification storage area 222b is an area in which various specifications set by the main controller 110 are stored. Information of the scenario table 202f and the small winning scenario table 202g is stored.

The information stored in the game specification storage area 222b is referred to when acquiring the opening timing of the door based on the next or next change in the V passable change determination process (S3702, S3703 in FIG. 70), In the start process, it is referred to when acquiring the door opening timing in the small winning game of the first rotation after the end of the big winning game (S2804 in FIG. 61).

The V gate scenario 222c is a scenario in which the operation timing of the V gate 650d driven and controlled by the main controller 110, that is, the timing to set the V gate solenoid 650d to ON and the timing to set it OFF are set. , in the V gate command reception process, the V gate scenario 222c is set (S2506 in FIG. 58), and based on the counter value of the V counter 223t described later, the sound lamp controller 222 grasps the operation timing of the V gate 650d. used for It is also used when determining whether the V gate status command received from the main controller side 110 side matches the contents of the V gate scenario 222c corresponding to the counter value of the V counter 223t (S2504 in FIG. 58). .

The portent effect selection table 222d is a table that defines the effect contents of the portent effect to be executed based on the pending number and the value of the effect counter 223g when the portent effect counter 223p, which will be described later, is 3 or more. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 17(c). This portent effect selection table 222d is referred to when selecting a portent effect in the portent variation pattern selection process (S3403 in FIG. 67).

Here, the sign effect is a state in which the reserved memory of the special symbol lottery result of the special symbol lottery is continuously variable and displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "small winning A continuous executable state"). ), and notifies the player to set the reserved memory number of special symbols to a predetermined number or more (e.g., 8) when the variable display is performed. It is a production that performs

The continuous effect type selection table 222e is a table that defines the type of continuous effect that is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. A continuous effect type is selected based on the order of execution (this time, the next time, or the next time). This continuous effect type selection table 222e is referred to when selecting a continuous effect type in the continuous effect type selection process (S3606, S3607, S3610, S3612, S3613 in FIG. 69).

Here, the continuous performance means that when selecting the variation pattern corresponding to the first small win A in the state where the small win A can be continuously executed, the number of reserved and stored special symbols is a predetermined number or more (7 or more). This is an effect executed in the case where the variation display corresponding to the continuous small win A and the display during the small win game are associated with each other.

The continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f is a table that defines a variation pattern corresponding to each variation during continuous effect. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. This continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3505 in FIG. 68).

The continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g is a table defining a variation pattern corresponding to each variation when a new winning (additional winning) occurs during the continuous effect. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 18(c). This continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3504 in FIG. 68).

The small hit middle effect pattern selection table 222h is a table that defines the effect display contents to be executed during the small hit game. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. This small hit middle effect pattern selection table 222h is referred to when selecting a small hit effect pattern in the small hit start effect process (S3101 in FIG. 64).

The portent effect variation pattern selection table 222i is a table that defines whether or not to execute the SW effect as the portent effect when the conditions for executing the portent effect are satisfied. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. The portent effect variation pattern selection table 222i is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the portent variation pattern selection process (S3401 in FIG. 67).

Next, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 16(b). FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, and a fluctuation start flag 223e. , a stop type selection flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a round number accumulation counter 223h, a V gate initial flag 223i, a V gate state storage area 223j, an opening timing storage area 223k, and a V passable variation storage area 223m. , a specific small winning continuation counter 223n, a small winning consecutive number of times storage area 223o, an indication production counter 223p, a continuation flag 223q, an end information storage area 223r, a continuous big winning production flag 223s, a V counter 223t, and continuous At least an effecting flag 223u, a continuous effecting counter 223v, a continuous effect type selected flag 223w, an additional winning flag 223x, a SW valid time 1 counter 223y, and a SW valid time 2 counter 223α are provided.

The prize winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first area to eighth area). are stored respectively. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 starts winning, the first winning random number counter C1, the first big winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the small winning are obtained according to the starting winning. From each value of the type counter C5, various information obtained when the lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize (won or not, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, Various types of predicted information are notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by winning information commands.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 8th) among the 8 areas (1st to 4th areas) that are vacant. be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b counts the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by the ball entering first ball entrance 64a, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in special symbols. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (S2410 in FIG. 57). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several patterns are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that they are different, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, the reserved ball number corresponding to the normal symbol is stored based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 with respect to the above-described special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. Since the only difference is in , the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2402 in FIG. 57), and in the fluctuation display setting process, the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. is set to OFF (S3202 in FIG. 65). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 (S2302 in FIG. 56). It is transmitted towards device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2405 in FIG. 57), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S3208 in FIG. 65). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command is set. Also, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is performed so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. is controlled.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for notice effects and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S2312 in FIG. 56).

The round number accumulation counter 223h is a counter that counts the number of rounds during the jackpot game. Every time the round number command sent from the main controller 110 is received, 1 is added (S2704 in FIG. 60), and the value of the counter is reset to 0 in the jackpot ending effect process (S2906 in FIG. 62). In the sound lamp control device 113, a display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223h (S2708 in FIG. 60), and the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h indicates the final round of the jackpot game. When it reaches the value, the final round command for display is set (S2707 in FIG. 60), and the effect based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .

The V-gate initial flag 223i is a flag used by the sound lamp control device 113 to grasp the opening timing of the V-gate. , it is set to off after the V gate scenario 222c is set (S2507 in FIG. 58). This V gate initial flag 223i is for synchronizing the operation state of the V gate based on the V gate state command received from the main controller 110 with the scenario contents of the V gate scenario 222c by updating the counter value of the V counter 223t, which will be described later. It is set to ON only after the power is turned on.

With this configuration, among the V gate state commands transmitted from the main controller 110 every 4 milliseconds, the first V gate state command (S1403 in FIG. ) can be used as a reference to set the V gate scenario 222c. Further, by setting the V gate scenario 222c on the audio lamp control device 113 side, it becomes possible to predict the timing at which the V gate opens in the future.

The V gate state storage area 223j is an area for storing V gate state information (information indicating whether the V gate is open or closed) based on the V gate state command received from the main controller 110. FIG. This V gate state storage area 223j stores V gate state information in the V gate command reception process (S2501 in FIG. 58), and is referred to when determining whether it matches the contents of the V gate scenario 222c (FIG. 58 S2504).

The opening timing storage area 223k is an area for storing the V gate opening timing calculated based on the set V gate scenario 222c. The opening timing storage area 223k stores the V gate opening timing in the V gate command reception process (S2508 in FIG. 58), and is referred to in the V passable fluctuation determination process when determining the V passable fluctuation ( S3704 in FIG. 70).

The V passable variation storage area 223m is an area for storing the variation determined to be V passable in the V passable variation determination process. The V-passable variation storage area 223m stores whether the variation determined to be V-passable in the V-passable variation determination process is the current variation, the next variation, or the next variation (Fig. 70 S3706, S3708, S3709), the stored information is referenced in the continuous effect type selection process (S3605, S3609, S3611 in FIG. 69), and in the small hit start effect process, the value of the continuous effect counter 223v described later is 0 (S3109 in FIG. 64).

The specific small winning continuation counter 223n is a counter that counts the number of consecutive times that a winning command including winning information indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a small winning A is received from the main control device 110 . This specific small winning continuation counter 223n is incremented by 1 when it is determined that a winning command including winning information indicating that it is a small winning A is received in the winning command receiving process (S2610 in FIG. 59), and the winning command is received. In the process, it is referred to when it is determined that a winning command including winning information indicating other than the small hit A is received (S2605 in FIG. 59), and then reset to 0 (2608 in FIG. 59).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the value of the specific small win consecutive counter 223n becomes 2 or more, that is, when the winning command is received so that the small win A is continuously executed, the small win A can be continuously executed. state.

Small hit consecutive times storage area 223o, when it is determined in the winning command reception process that it has received a winning command including winning information indicating other than the small winning A, the value of the specific small winning consecutive counter 223n is set to a predetermined number ( In the present embodiment, it is an area for temporarily storing the value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n when it is 2) or more. The value temporarily stored in this small hit consecutive number storage area 223o is set to the counter 223v during continuous production in the continuous production type selection process (S3601 in FIG. 69), and then the stored value is cleared ( S3602 in FIG. 69).

This small winning continuation number storage area 223o stores the value of the specific small winning continuous counter 223n added based on the winning command received from the main control device 110 until the timing of selecting the variation pattern based on the winning command. is a storage area for

The portent effect counter 223p is a counter in which the current number of pending balls is set when the small hit A continuous executable state is reached. This portent effect counter 223p, when it is determined that the value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 2 in the winning command reception process, the current number of pending balls is set (S2612 in FIG. 59), and the portent variation pattern Subtraction is performed in the selection process (S3405 in FIG. 67).

Then, it is referred to in the variation pattern selection process (S3302 in FIG. 66), and is reset to 0 when the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is determined to be 0 in the small hit start effect process (S3108 in FIG. 64). . When the value of the portent effect counter 223p is larger than a predetermined value (2 in this embodiment), the portent effect can be executed.

The continuation flag 223q is a flag that is set to ON in order to execute a continuous jackpot effect that is executed during the jackpot game. This continuation flag 223q is set when the variation determined as the V passable variation in the V passable variation process is not the final variation in which the continuous effect is set, that is, as a result of the small winning game with the V passable variation, A jackpot game is executed, and when the variation of the first special symbol that is started after the jackpot game ends is the variation of winning the small win A, it is set to ON (S3608 in FIG. 69), and the jackpot start effect is set. In the process, after the consecutive big hit effect flag 223s is set to ON, it is set to OFF (S2811 in FIG. 61).

By setting this continuation flag 223q to ON, continuous jackpot effect is executed in the final round of the jackpot game.

The end information storage area 223r stores the opening timing of the door 650f in the small winning game and V stored in the V gate opening timing storage area 223k when the result of the variation in the first rotation after the end of the big winning is a small winning A. This is a storage area for storing the jackpot end timing (the end timing of the final round in the jackpot game) at which the small win game in the first rotation after the jackpot end becomes a small win game that can pass through V based on the gate opening timing.

This end information storage area 223r stores the jackpot end timing calculated when it is determined that the continuation flag 223q is set to ON in the jackpot start effect process (S2809 in FIG. 61), and the jackpot end effect process. (S2903 in FIG. 62) and then cleared (S2907 in FIG. 62).

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the end timing of the final round in the jackpot game matches the end timing stored in the end information storage area 223r. sets the display jackpot success ending command.

The continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is a flag that is set to ON in order to make the final round effect in the big win game a continuous jackpot effect. This continuous big win effect flag 223s is set to ON after the final round end timing is stored in the end information storage area 223r in the big win start effect process (S2810 in FIG. 61), and is referred to in the big win end effect process (see FIG. 62). S2901), and after the ending command for display based on the end timing of the final round is set, it is set to OFF (S2905 in FIG. 62).

The V counter 223t is a counter for updating the V gate scenario 222c. This V counter 223t is incremented by 1 (S3903 in FIG. , the value of the V counter 223t is set to 1 (S3904 in FIG. 72).

The V counter 223t is configured such that its value is set to 1 when the count is updated to 5000. FIG. This is because the control content based on the scenario defined in the V gate scenario 222c is to repeatedly execute control for 5 seconds, so the value of the V counter 223t is also 5 seconds (counter value 5000). After counting, it was configured to be set to 1 again. By configuring in this way, the area for storing the value of the V counter 223t can be reduced.

During continuous production flag 223u is a flag that is set to ON during continuous production. This continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON when the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is 2 and the number of pending balls is greater than 6 in the portent variation pattern selection process (S3408 in FIG. 67), and the small hit starts. It is referred to when selecting an effect pattern in the effect process (S3101 in FIG. 64), and is set to OFF when a continuous effect counter 223v, which will be described later, reaches 0 (S3106 in FIG. 64).

Here, the continuous effect means that the number of pending memories is greater than a predetermined number when selecting the variation pattern corresponding to the first pending memory among the pending memories in which the small hit A can be continuously executed (in this embodiment It is an effect that is executed in the case of more than 6), and is an effect that is continuously executed in association with a plurality of variable display effects and effects during the small winning game. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30. FIG.

The continuous effect counter 223v is a counter that counts the number of times (remaining times) of continuous effects. This continuous production counter 223v is set to the value stored in the small hit consecutive number storage area 223o in the continuous production type selection process (S3601 in FIG. 69), and 1 is subtracted in the small winning start production process (FIG. 64 S3104). Further, it is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3504, S3505 in FIG. 68). It should be noted that the subtraction in the small winning start effect process is executed until the counter value becomes zero.

Based on the value of the continuous production counter 223v, by identifying how many times of the continuous production the fluctuation to select the fluctuation pattern this time is, the continuous production fluctuation pattern selection table 222f and the continuous production fluctuation pattern selection table (additional winning) At 222g, an appropriate variation pattern is selected.

The continuous effect type selected flag 223w is a flag that is set to ON so as not to reset the continuous effect type. This continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON when the continuous effect type is selected in the continuous effect type selection process (S3614 in FIG. 69), and is referred to in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3501 in FIG. 68). , When the value of the counter 223v during continuous production is determined to be 0 in the small winning start production process, it is set to OFF (S3110 in FIG. 64).

The additional winning flag 223x is a flag that is set to ON when a new winning (additional winning) occurs while the continuous effect is being executed. This additional winning flag 223x is set to ON when the continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON in the winning command receiving process (S2603 in FIG. 59), and is referred to in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (FIG. 68 S3503). Then, when the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 0 in the small winning start effect process, it is set to OFF (3107 in FIG. 64).

This additional winning flag 223x is for the process of estimating the next variation or the variation pattern (variation time) of the next variation or the one after another variation that is executed when selecting the variation pattern that starts the continuous presentation by the additional winning during the execution of the continuous presentation. The number of held balls used is different from the number of held balls used when selecting the actually executed variation pattern (variation time), indicating that a variation pattern different from the previously assumed variation pattern is selected. It is.

Therefore, when additional winning occurs during execution of the continuous effect and the additional winning flag 223x is set to ON, the continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional Winning) 222g.

The SW valid time 1 counter 223y is a counter that counts the time for validating the operation of the frame button 22 (the left frame button 22a or the right frame button 22b) during the SW effect. This SW effective time 1 counter 223y counts the effective time of the SW effect (see FIGS. 28 and 29) executed during the continuous effect, and a predetermined time is set in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 29). 68-3506), it is subtracted in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3802 in FIG. 71), and the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the frame button 22 is operated (S3805 in FIG. 71).

The SW valid time 2 counter 223α is a counter that counts the time for validating the operation of the frame button 22 (the left frame button 22a or the right frame button 22b) during the SW effect. This SW effective time 2 counter 223α counts the effective time of the SW effect (see FIG. 26) executed in the portent effect, and when a variation pattern having the SW effect is selected in the portent variation pattern selection process. is set to a value of 5000 (equivalent to 5 seconds), and is subtracted in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3807 in FIG. 71). Then, when the frame button 22 is operated, the value of the counter is reset to 0 (S3810 in FIG. 71).

In this way, by setting the SW effective time in advance in each SW effect, for example, the frame button can be operated only while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a guide to operate the frame button 22 . Since the operation of 22 can be validated, the player unintentionally operates the frame button 22, and as a result, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 does not correspond to the operation of the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the situation of switching based on the game machine, and to improve the quality of the SW effect in the game machine.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19, various tables and the like held in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described. First, the game specification storage area 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 17(a). FIG. 17(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the game specification storage area 222b. Various game specifications (game information) set by the main controller 110 are stored in the game specification storage area 222b. is stored. The small winning scenario information stores the time of each small winning scenario, the opening timing and the opening period of the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 in the small winning A and the small winnings B to C as information, and variation pattern information. , each variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection table 202e and its variation time are stored as information. In addition, information based on selection conditions and jackpot scenarios when special fluctuations A to C are selected is also stored (not shown).

By storing the various game specifications stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 on the voice lamp controller 113 side in this way, based on the prize winning command and the pending ball number command received from the main controller 110, the voice Future game timing can be assumed on the lamp control device 113 side. For example, by the winning command receiving process, the winning command containing the winning information that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit is continuously received, and when the variation pattern based on the first winning information is selected, the number of reserved balls is 7. Then, as the variation pattern based on the first winning information, the variation pattern corresponding to the special variation C (variation time of 4 seconds) is selected by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 . Then, if a winning command based on a new winning (additional winning) does not come before the next variation starts, the next variation is that the lottery result is a small hit A and the number of balls held when the variation pattern is selected is Since there are six, it is possible to assume that main controller 110 will transmit a variation pattern corresponding to special variation B (variation time of 5.5 seconds).

In addition, since the game specification storage area 222b also stores information indicating the opening timing and opening period of the door 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 during the small winning game, the variation this time is the special variation B (variation Time 4 seconds) after the small winning game A is executed, it is possible to grasp that the door 650f is opened for 2.5 to 4 seconds after the small winning game is started.

Furthermore, since it is assumed that the next fluctuation is the special fluctuation B, if the big hit game is not executed by the small hit A game due to this fluctuation, after the end of the small hit game this time, special as the next fluctuation Variation B (fluctuation time of 5.5 seconds) is executed, then a small winning game of A is executed, and the door 650f is opened for 2.5 to 4 seconds after the small winning game is started. can be grasped.

That is, at the stage of selecting the current variation pattern, the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened 6.5 to 8 seconds and 16 to 18.5 seconds after the current variation starts. can be assumed.

Also, by comparing with the opening timing information of the V gate stored in the opening timing storage area 223k described above, the opening timing of the door 650f based on the current fluctuation and the opening timing of the door 650f based on the next fluctuation are It is also possible to determine whether or not it is time to open the V-passage, and it is also possible to display a preliminary effect based on the determination result on the third symbol display device. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of pre-effects than the pre-notification based only on winning commands, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The game specification storage area 222b of this embodiment stores only the game specifications referred to in the control of the sound lamp control device 113, thereby reducing the storage capacity. All the information stored may be stored in the game specification storage area 222b. By doing so, the work of creating separate data for the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Next, the V gate scenario 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 17(b). FIG. 17(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V gate scenario 222c. In this V gate scenario 222c, the V counter 223t is incremented by 1 each time the V counter update process (see FIG. 53) executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 is updated every millisecond. , and scenarios corresponding to the count values 1 to 5000 of the V counter 223t are set.

The scenario content of the V gate scenario 222c represents a state in which the V gate 650d is open until the counter value of the V counter 223t reaches 1 to 1500 (1.5 seconds), and the counter value reaches 1501 to 5000. The V-gate 650d is closed for 3.5 seconds.

Then, when the counter value reaches 5000, the process of setting the counter value to 1 again and updating the counter value is performed (S3904 in FIG. 72). By having this V gate scenario 222c in the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 side can grasp the state of the V gate 650d (whether it is open or closed), and also assume the future opening timing. becomes possible.

In addition, since it is possible to compare the V-gate state command received from the main controller 110 and the update status of the V-gate scenario 222c, it is possible to quickly discover that a malfunction has occurred in the operation control of the V-gate 650d. becomes possible. It should be noted that the actual operation status of the V gate 650d may be detected using a sensor or the like, and the actual operation status may be compared with the update status of the V gate scenario 222c. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that a fraudulent act such as outputting a fraudulent signal to the V-opening solenoid 650d2 to fraudulently operate the V-gate 650d can be detected early.

Next, the precursor effect selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 17(c). FIG. 17(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the portent effect selection table 222d. This portent selection table 222d is a table that prescribes the effect contents of the portent effect to be executed based on the number of reserved balls (retained number) and the value of the effect counter 223g when the portent effect counter 223p is 3 or more, and is a table that defines the effect contents of the portent effect. In the pattern selection process, it is referred to when selecting the portent effect (S3403 in FIG. 67).

Specifically, when the value of the portent effect counter 223p is 3 to 4, that is, when the order of execution of the change based on the reserved memory to be the target of the continuous effect is close, and when the value of the portent effect counter 223p is 5 to 5 In the case of 8, that is, when the order in which the change based on the reserved memory to be the target of the continuous effect is executed is far, the content selected in the portent effect changes. For example, when the value of the omen effect counter 223p is 3 to 4 and the number of reservations is 7, the number of reservations of special symbols is equal to or greater than a predetermined number at the timing when variation based on the reservation memory that is the target of continuous effects is executed. Therefore, an effect (for example, a big chance!) that gives the player expectations is selected.

On the other hand, when the value of the omen effect counter 223p is 5 to 8 and the number of pending balls is 0 to 3, there is time before the variation based on the pending memory that is the target of the continuous effect is executed. A presentation is selected that suggests increasing the number (eg, full force fire!).

In this embodiment, it is set as a condition for executing a continuous effect that the number of reservations is a predetermined number or more (7 or more) when the small win A is successively won and the variation is executed. In the above-mentioned sign effect, in a situation where the holding memory that won the small win A is continuously stored, the number of holdings is set to a predetermined number or more (7 It is a production that makes suggestions to make more than one).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prompt the player to store the reserved number up to a predetermined number or more, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the indication effect is changed based on the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p and the number of reservations. The display mode of the precursor effect may be changed. For example, when the variable time is long, it is a chance to acquire a plurality of reserved memories, so it is preferable to display the content to that effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player stops launching the game ball while a variation with a long variation time is being executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the indication effect can be executed only in a state in which the holding memory of winning the small win A is continuously stored, but the holding memory of winning the small win A is not continuously stored. Even in such a case, the precursor effect may be configured to be executable. By constructing in this way, even when the holding memory of winning the small win A is not continuously stored, the player who sees the performance display by the premonition performance tries to store the number of holdings up to the upper limit. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the continuous effect type selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 18(a). FIG. 18(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect type selection table 222e. This continuous effect type selection table 222e includes the value of the continuous effect counter 223v (2 or 3 in this embodiment) and the order of variation determined to be V passable in the V passable determination process (in this embodiment, this time , the next time, or the next time).

Specifically, when the value of the counter 223v during continuous production is 2, a continuous production type in which two continuous productions (continuous productions executed over two fluctuations) are executed is selected, and the value of the counter 223v during continuous production is selected. is 3, a continuous performance type in which 3 continuous performances (continuous performances executed over 3 fluctuations) are executed is selected.

Furthermore, if the order of variation that can pass V is this time, the type of 2 consecutive effects A or 3 consecutive effects A will be the type, and if the next time, the type of 2 consecutive effects B or 3 consecutive effects B will be the next time. The type of 3 consecutive effects C is selected. In addition, when the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2, the target of the continuous effect is two changes, so the third change (next time) is not selected.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is set to 3, but this is not the only option. It may be set within a range up to the upper limit (8 in this embodiment). By doing so, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the continuous effect is executed, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 18(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f. This continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f is referred to in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3505 in FIG. 68). The selected continuous effect type (S3606, S3607, S3610, S3612 in FIG. 69) and the value set to the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous effect in the continuous effect type selection process (S3601 in FIG. 69) Variation pattern based on is selected.

As an effect display mode of the variation pattern selected here, a chance effect is an effect indicating that a small win that can pass through V will be executed in the next and subsequent variations (see (b) and (c) of FIG. 28). , super chance production (see (a) and (b) in FIG. 29), which is a production showing that the small win that can pass through V is executed, and after the small win that can pass through V is executed There are three types of pounding effects (see (c) in FIG. 29), which are effects that are executed by variation.

Also, based on the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production, a variation pattern is selected in which a different variation time corresponding to each chance production is set. Specifically, when the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2 in a state where the 2-continuous effect A is selected as the continuous effect type, the super chance effect A with the change time of 4 seconds is selected as the variation pattern. be.

This is the case where the 2-continuous effect A is selected as the continuous effect type and the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win A, and the number of reserved balls is 7. This is because the variation pattern corresponding to the special variation C (variation time 4 seconds) is set because the variation pattern is set in the state of .

It should be noted that the above-mentioned thrilling effect means that when the big winning game is not executed after the end of the small winning game that can pass the V, that is, the second variable winning device 650 wins the ball in the small winning game that can pass the V. is not possible and the ball does not pass through the specific area during the small winning game, the performance corresponding to the variation of the special pattern is executed after the small winning game that allows the V to pass is finished. This heart-pounding effect is executed without suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether or not the small winning game based on the variation of the corresponding special symbols can pass the V.例文帳に追加

If a new winning (additional winning) occurs during the continuous effect, the variation pattern (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command actually received from the main controller 110 and the V passable variation determination process are assumed. The variation pattern (variation time) is different from the calculated variation pattern (variation time), and there is a possibility that the determination result as to whether or not it is possible to pass through the V is not a correct determination result. Therefore, when additional winning occurs, a variation pattern is selected using a dedicated variation pattern selection table (continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g).

Next, with reference to FIG. 18(c), variation pattern selection when additional winning occurs will be described. FIG. 18(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g. The continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g is a table that is referred to when an additional winning occurs, and a heart-pounding effect is executed based on the variation pattern (variation time) received from the main controller 110. is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, even if an additional winning occurs and the variation pattern selected by the main controller 110 and the variation pattern assumed by the sound lamp control device 113 are different, the main controller 110 The third symbol display device 81 can execute an effect corresponding to the content of the received variation pattern command.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of continuous effects is changed at the time when additional winning occurs. A process of correcting the effect content of the continuous effect may be performed based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, when the big winning game can be executed via the small winning game, it becomes easy to execute the continuous performance, and there is an effect that the performance expected by the player can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit A, and the variation pattern (special variation B) selected when the number of retained balls is 5 to 6, and the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit. The variation pattern (special variation C) selected when A and the number of pending balls is 7 is different, but the same variation pattern is selected, even if an additional winning occurs. The determination result of the V passable variation determination process may not be affected. For example, even when the number of held balls is 7, the special variation B may be selected.

By configuring in this way, even if additional winning occurs during the continuous effect, the determination result of the V passable variation determination process calculated in advance and the result of the actually performed game will not differ. There is an effect that an appropriate performance can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19(a), the effect pattern selection table 222h during the small winning will be described. FIG. 19(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning middle effect pattern selection table 222h. Here, the small winning middle production pattern selection table 222h is a table for selecting the content of the production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small winning game, and additional winning in the small winning game by the small winning A. A performance pattern (small winning performance pattern) during the small winning game is selected according to the presence or absence of the flag 223x or the flag 223u during continuous performance and whether or not the small winning game of this time is a small winning that can pass V (V possible). is stipulated as

Next, referring to FIG. 19(b), the precursor effect variation pattern selection table 222i will be described. FIG. 19(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the portent effect variation pattern selection table 222i. The portent effect variation pattern selection table 222i is a table referred to when it is determined that the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is greater than 2, and is a variation pattern command and effect counter received from the main controller 110. Based on the value of 223g, a variation pattern in which the SW effect (forecast effect) is performed or a variation pattern in which the SW effect is not performed is selected.

If the variation pattern type received from the main controller 110 is less than the predetermined time (5000 milliseconds), it is impossible (difficult) to execute the SW effect during the variation. The variation patterns for which the presence or absence of the SW effect is selected are defined in advance only for variation patterns whose variation time is longer than a predetermined time (5000 milliseconds).

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 24. FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND-type flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed. This may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the second predetermined address is the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (S4001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Set the start address of the corresponding program.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 24) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 75(b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the power is turned on.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 73).

The power-on fluctuation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 (display of "o" and "x" on the third pattern display device 81).

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, an image is displayed for a fixed period after stopping the variation performance in the case of ``a special pattern jackpot'', and an image is displayed for a fixed period after the suspension of the variation performance in the case of ``out of the special pattern''.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts a game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball entry into the first ball entrance 64a is detected, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the power-on varying image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image resident in the area 235b, and the images are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. directed against. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64a is detected while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 21, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 21A and 21B are explanatory diagrams for explaining two types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 21(b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "town stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage".

As shown in FIG. 21, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "town stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 shifts the corresponding rear image from position a to position a' to the initial position of the display area. , and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . As time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 21(a), the rear face A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear face A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the town stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage, as shown in FIG. back image area 235c.

Here, the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at arbitrary timing based on the player's will. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed within the range from position a to position a', and from position a including the initial position to position a Since the image data corresponding to the image during b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the player can press the frame button. When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 22, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial position of the back B is immediately displayed in the third pattern. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing color tone over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the back surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 20). As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b' and positions b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the variable performance is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. , the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

A player can easily recognize the time period of normal symbols by informing the time period of normal symbols in the ending performance. The longer the time period of this normal pattern, the more chances the ball will pass through the second ball entrance B640b. Become. Therefore, there are more chances that the electric accessory will be released as a jackpot of the normal symbol, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance B640b, and the lottery of the special symbol can be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first ball entrance 64a is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a jackpot of normal symbols, and the ball wins the second prize. If it becomes easier to enter the opening 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that any one of the pending special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can receive special symbols in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that a big win will occur, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will surely win a big win. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information change over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or to display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (FIG. 24), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer 233d is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The created configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (FIG. 24) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. do.

For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third pattern display device 81 . This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (S4005 in FIG. 73). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the transfer setting processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, It is set to OFF (S6405 in FIG. 88(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (S4301 in FIG. 75(b)). When the display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination processing (see S4308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting processing (FIG. 75) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (b) S4309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (FIGS. 76 to 85) and display setting processing (FIG. 86) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (S6301 in FIG. 88A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on Since there is resident object image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (FIG. 88(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, When the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (FIG. 89) is executed to transfer the image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (FIG. 24) is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 draws an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (FIG. 24) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. do.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 executes display setting processing for V interrupt processing (S4303 in FIG. 86) based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed. ), pointer update processing (S6005 in FIG. 86) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 24), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing of one frame image are completed, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 is performed. Each time it is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (S6007 in FIG. 86). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (S1902 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 231. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S6513 in FIG. 89). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (S6514 in FIG. 89), The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (S6602 in FIG. 90).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (FIG. 75(b)) is executed (S6603 in FIG. 90).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

Next, referring to FIG. 25, the time from when the ball passes through the ball entrance (first ball entrance 64a, second ball entrance A64b, or second ball entrance B640b) to execution of the jackpot game is I will explain the flow of the game. FIG. 25(a) is a timing chart showing a flow in which a big winning game is executed via a small winning game. FIG. 25(a) shows a pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the small winning type A, and the big winning game is executed after the small winning game ends.

First, the main controller 110 changes the special symbol (especially Figure variation) is executed, and a special figure variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 (for example, variation time 10 seconds).

In addition, a V gate solenoid (V opening solenoid) 650d2 for opening or closing the V gate 650d provided in the second variable winning device 650 is repeatedly turned on and off at a constant timing after the power is turned on. It is controlled by the main controller 110 so that Here, the V gate solenoid (V opening solenoid) 650d2 is set to ON to move the V gate to the guidance position (the position where the V gate 650d is opened so that the ball can pass through the V discharge passage 650e3). It is configured to position the V gate at the regulated position (the position where the V gate 650d is closed so as to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3) by setting it to OFF.

This V-gate solenoid (V-opening solenoid) 650d2 positions the V-gate 650d at the guidance position for a period of time t5 (1.5 seconds) after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and then during a period of time t6 (3.5 seconds). ), i.e., the period from when the V-gate 650d is positioned to either the guidance position or the regulation position to when it is positioned to either of them is one operation cycle. , and is controlled so that its operation cycle is repeatedly executed.

As a result of the above-described special figure fluctuation, when the pattern (identification information) indicating the small hit A stops, the small hit A game is executed after that, and the effect of the small hit A is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114. be done. The control contents of various devices executed during the small winning game are determined based on the small winning scenario selected by referring to the small winning scenario table 202g stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, In the small winning scenario a corresponding to the small winning A, when the small winning game is executed, the ball stopping solenoid 650c2 is set to ON during the period t4 (4.5 seconds). Then, when the period t1 (2.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the small winning game, the door solenoid (opening solenoid) 650f2 for opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is turned on during the period t2 (1.5 seconds). set.

At this timing, the second variable winning device 650 is in a state where the ball can win, and the first winning ball pushes down the flow path switching member 650b and stays by the stopper 650c. Then, the subsequent winning ball rolls on the upper surface of the flow path switching member 650b that has returned to the initial position, flows down the first flow path 650e1, and passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e4 (see FIG. 4).

After the period t2 (the period during which the door solenoid (opening solenoid) 650f2 is set to ON) has elapsed, the door solenoid (opening solenoid) 650f2 is set to OFF for a period t3 (2 seconds), and the second variable winning device 650 to make it impossible (difficult) to win the ball. At the timing when the period t4 has passed, that is, at the timing when 0.5 seconds have passed since the period t2 ended, the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is turned off, and the stopper 650c moves from the ball stop position to the ball stop release position (release position). position).

It should be noted that the time (0.5 seconds) provided from when the door solenoid 650f2 is set to OFF to when the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF is the ball staying in the second variable winning device 650. 2 It is set as a grace period for discharging to the outside of the variable winning device 650 .

By moving the stopper 650c to the release position, the ball staying at the ball stop position (the ball that entered first) flows down toward the V gate 650d, and the timing of this flow changes when the V gate 650d is in the guidance state. At the timing of (guidance position), the ball passes through a passage detection switch (specified area) 650e5 (described as V detection SW in FIG. 25) provided in the V discharge passage 650e3, while the V gate 650d is regulated. At the timing of the state (restricted position), it rolls on the upper surface of the V gate 650d, flows down the second flow path, and passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e4 (see FIG. 4).

Then, when the passing detection switch (specific area) 650e5 in the V discharge flow path 650e3 detects the ball (by passing the ball through the specific area), the main controller 110 starts the big winning game after the small winning game ends. After a predetermined period of time from the start of the jackpot game, the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and the display control device 114 displays the jackpot effect on the third symbol display device 81. .

As described above, by operating various devices (the door 650f and the stopper 650c) at a predetermined timing during the small winning game, it is possible to cause only one ball to flow down toward the V gate at a predetermined timing. , a proper game can be surely executed. In addition, since operation control of various devices is executed based on one small winning scenario, there is less risk of error occurring in operation control timing between devices than when operation control is performed independently for each device. , a proper game can be executed more reliably.

In addition, by using the above-described configuration, the timing at which the ball flows down on the V gate 650d after the small winning game is started is fixed (in this embodiment, about 5 seconds after the small winning game starts). However, since the V gate 650d is always controlled in a constant cycle regardless of the game state, it is determined at random whether or not the ball won by the second variable winning device 650 in the small winning game passes through the specific area. be able to.

Further, by configuring the operation timing of the V gate 650d to be comprehensible by the voice ramp control device 113, it is possible to determine whether the small winning game of this time is a small winning game that can pass V.

FIG. 25(b) is a timing chart showing a flow in which a big winning game is executed based on a special symbol lottery. First, the main controller 110 changes the special symbol (especially While the figure fluctuation) is executed, the display control device 114 through the sound lamp control device 113 executes a special figure fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 .

Then, when the special symbol variation ends and the special symbols indicating the big win are stopped and displayed, the big win game is executed by the main control device 110, and the first variable winning device 65 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the big win game is started. When the specific door 65f is opened, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a big win effect.

It should be noted that the time from the start of the special figure fluctuation shown in FIG. 25 (a) until the jackpot game is executed, and the time from the start of the special figure fluctuation shown in FIG. It is good to set the variation time of each special figure variation or the game time of the small hit game so that it is the same. By constructing in this way, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the player has won a big win in the special symbol lottery or whether the big win has been granted as a result of the small winning game, and the third symbol display device 81. There is an effect that it is possible to entertain the performance displayed on the screen until the end.

Also, when adopting the configuration described above, the second variable prize winning device 650 is preferably arranged in the lower center of the game board 13 . By doing so, there is no need to notify the third symbol display device 81 of the position where the game ball is to be shot (so-called right-handed display) during the small winning game, and the special symbols can be presented to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether a big win has been won in a lottery or a big win has been granted as a result of a small winning game.

Furthermore, the time from the start of the special figure fluctuation shown in FIG. 25(a) to the execution of the jackpot game and the time from the start of the special figure fluctuation shown in FIG. 25(b) to the execution of the jackpot game The third symbol display device 81 may be made the same and the same effect display may be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp whether the big win has been won in the lottery of the special symbols or the big win has been granted as a result of the small winning game.

Also, even if the V passable small win is executed, if the second variable winning device 650 cannot win the ball, the big win is not given. Among the effect displays to be displayed, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed until the V passage time processing for determining whether or not the ball has passed through a specific area in the V discharge channel 650e3 during the small winning game is executed. The effect display to be executed is the same, and when it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area in the V discharge flow path 650e3 as a result of the determination of the V passage time processing, the same effect display is continuously executed and the V Only when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the specific area in the discharge channel 650e3, it is preferable to execute the process of switching the content of the effect display displayed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the determination result.

By configuring in this way, in the normal game flow in which the ball is passed through the specific area during execution of the V-passable small win and the big win is executed after the small win game is completed, the third symbol display device Since there is no need to switch the contents of the effect display displayed at 81, there is an effect that the processing load of the effect display can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, an indication effect among the display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the prognostic effect. The premonition performance is a performance executed when a reserved ball with a special symbol lottery result of a small win A is continuously stored among the stored reserved balls, and the special symbol is a special symbol. This is an effect for urging the player to accumulate reserved symbols up to the upper limit before the variation based on the reserved ball whose lottery result is a small hit A is executed.

Here, the display screen (P) of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. The display screen (P) of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, the upper part being the main display area Dm for displaying the third symbol variably, and the other lower part being the secondary display area for displaying the number of pending balls. area Ds.

Three symbol rows are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is divided into three display areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is a held ball that has not been changed among the balls that have entered each ball entrance (first ball entrance 64a, second ball entrance A64b, or second ball entrance B640b). Reserved symbols indicating the number of are displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the reserved design of the special figure 1 and the reserved design of the special figure 2 are displayed in an unidentifiable (difficult) manner, but the reserved design of the special figure 1 and the reserved design of the special figure 2 The display mode of the reserved symbols may be changed so that the player can identify the . Further, another display body (mark) capable of distinguishing the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be displayed in the vicinity of the reserved design without changing the display mode of the reserved design. By doing so, the player can easily grasp whether the next variation is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2.

In the small area Ds2, a changing design is displayed in the same manner as the reserved design corresponding to the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. By configuring in this way, as a production that suggests the possibility that the special design corresponding to the reserved design is a big hit, even if the production that changes the mode of the reserved design (so-called reservation notice production) is adopted. It is possible to easily grasp the presence/absence of the suspension notice effect for the special pattern during fluctuation.

Therefore, it is possible to easily associate the suspension notice effect performed in advance with the variable display of the special symbols, and to provide a gaming machine in which the player is interested in the effect. In addition, as the above-mentioned pending notice effect, for example, the effect of changing the color of the pending pattern (white → blue → red), the effect of changing the background effect of the pending pattern (suggested by the size of the flame), and the pending pattern Any effect may be used as long as the effect allows the player to determine the possibility of a big win, such as an effect in which the characters appear on the screen.

In the small area Ds3, a game explanation (“explanation indicating pressing a button”) for the special symbol game in which variable display is being performed, and the content of notifying the current game state are displayed.

Returning to FIG. 26(a), the description is continued. In FIG. 26(a), six reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1, and among the reserved symbols, the result of the special symbol lottery is a small winning A reserved design (in FIG. 26(a) (shown as a star pattern) are continuously stored.

In this state, that is, in a state in which reserved balls with a special pattern lottery result of a small win A are continuously stored among the reserved balls, the indication effect can be executed, and the game is played in the small area Ds3. The content prompting the user to operate the frame button 22 is displayed.

Here, when the player operates the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 26(b), the characters "Just a little more!!" are displayed in the small area Ds3. This character is selected by referring to the portent effect selection table 222d in the portent variation pattern selection process (S3403 in FIG. 67).

In the example shown in FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), for ease of explanation, the reserved symbols corresponding to the reserved ball whose special symbol lottery result is a small hit A are indicated by asterisks. In fact, it is displayed as a reserved design in a display mode indistinguishable (difficult) from other reserved designs. By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp in advance which sign performance is being executed for which reserved symbol, and when the sign performance is executed, the number of reserved balls should always be accumulated to the upper limit. The game can be played enthusiastically, and the operation of the game machine can be increased.

Further, the form of the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 may be changed to a display form suggesting that the reserved balls winning the small hit A are continuously stored. In this case, the display mode of the two consecutive reserved patterns may be changed to suggest the possibility that the reserved pattern whose display mode has been changed has won the small win A, or one of the reserved patterns may be reserved. The display form of the pattern is changed, and in addition to the reserved pattern whose display form is changed, either the reserved pattern that fluctuates before the reserved pattern or the reserved pattern that fluctuates after the reserved pattern wins the small win A. It may be configured to suggest that it is a reserved symbol corresponding to a sphere.

By constructing in this way, before the player starts the variation based on the specific reserved pattern (the reserved pattern whose display mode is changed), the game is motivated to accumulate the reserved balls to the upper limit. In addition, if you succeed in accumulating the reserved balls to the upper limit at the timing when the fluctuation based on the specific reserved pattern starts, you can see the fluctuation production based on the reserved pattern with a sense of superiority. effective.

It should be noted that this sign effect is configured to be executable until the fluctuations before the fluctuations based on the held balls whose lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit A are started.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30, the continuous effect among the display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous effects and operation control of various devices.

Here, the continuous effect will be explained. The continuous effect is when the lottery results of the special symbols are consecutive small hits A, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the first small hit A is selected from the consecutive small hits A, the ball is held. is stored in a predetermined number (seven in this embodiment), and in the continuous small hit A game, the V discharge channel 650e3 provided in the second variable winning device 650 It is an effect for highlighting a small hit A game (hereinafter referred to as V passable small hit) that the ball can pass through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5).

This continuous effect includes at least the special symbol variation display corresponding to the first small win A among the consecutive small wins A (hereinafter referred to as the first special figure variation display) and the first special figure variation display. As a result, a small winning A game (hereinafter referred to as the first small winning A game) and a special symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the second small winning A among the consecutive small winnings A (hereinafter referred to as the second (referred to as a special figure fluctuation display) and a small hit A game (hereinafter referred to as a second small hit A game) executed as a result of the second special figure fluctuation display. .

As shown in FIG. 27, in the case where the conditions for executing the continuous effect are satisfied, the main controller 110 selects the special variation C (variation time 4 seconds) as the first special variation, and the special variation After the fluctuation of C stops, the first small winning A game is executed (6 seconds). Then, as the second special figure variation, the special variation B (variation time 5.5 seconds) is executed, and after the variation of the special variation B stops, the second small hit A game is executed.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, based on various commands set by the main control device 110, the special figure variation display 1 corresponding to the first special figure variation and the first small hit A game are displayed. A small winning middle display 1, a special figure variation display 2 corresponding to the second special figure variation, and a small winning middle display 2 corresponding to the second small winning A game are displayed.

On the other hand, the V gate 650d changes its operation to the guidance state (the state in which the ball can pass through the V discharge passage 650e3) for 1.5 seconds, and then to the regulation state (the V discharge flow path 650e3) for 3.5 seconds. One cycle (five seconds) is set to the state in which the ball cannot pass through the flow path 650e3 (difficult state), and the cycle is repeated.

Here, in the state where the continuous effect is executed, the winning ball V gate arrival timing (see FIG. 27) is the timing at which the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 in the first small winning A game reaches the V gate 650d. ) and the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the second small hit A game is 11.5 seconds.

This is the time (1 second) from the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate to the end of the small hit A game in the first small hit A game, and the second special figure fluctuation fluctuation time (5.5 seconds) , and the time (5 seconds) from when the small winning game is executed in the second small winning A game to when the winning ball reaches the V gate.

In this way, by setting the interval of the winning ball reaching the V gate, it is possible to cause the ball to flow down at different timings to the V gate 650d whose operation is controlled in a 5-second cycle.

To explain in detail, since one period of V gate 650d is set to 5 seconds, the operating state is the same as that of V gate 650d corresponding to the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the first small hit A game. 5 seconds and 10 seconds after the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the first small hit A game, and at intervals of 5 seconds. In this embodiment, since the interval between the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the first small winning A game and the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the second small winning A game is 11.5 seconds, the second small winning ball The winning ball arrival timing at the V gate in the winning A game is 1.5 seconds behind (different from) the winning ball arrival timing at the V gate in the first small winning A game.

Here, the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate that can provide the player with a more advantageous game state when the small hits A are won in succession will be described. In this embodiment, the period during which the V gate 650d is in the induction state is set to 1.5 seconds. That is, if the timing of the first and second winning balls reaching the V gate differs from the operating cycle of the V gate 650d by less than 1.5 seconds (for example, 0.5 seconds), the first and second winning balls The probability that the V gate 650d is in the restricted state (3.5 seconds) for both the sphere V gate arrival timings increases.

Conversely, if the winning ball reaches the V gate for the first time and the second time differs from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d by more than 1.5 seconds (for example, 2 seconds), the V gate 650d enters the induction state. There is a possibility that the period will be crossed.

Therefore, by setting the timings of the winning balls to reach the V gate for the first time and the second time to be different from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d by the period (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the V gate 650d is in the regulated state at both the first and second winning ball arrival timings to the V gate without straddling the period in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the V gate 650d is changed to the guidance state (the state in which the ball can pass through the V discharge passage 650e3) for 1.5 seconds, and then for 3.5 seconds. One cycle (five seconds) is set to the control state (a state in which the ball cannot (is difficult) pass through the V discharge passage 650e3), and the cycle is repeatedly executed. That is, V-gate 650d is configured to be in the induction state for 1.5 seconds with an interval of 3.5 seconds. In other words, V-gate 650d is configured to be in the regulated state for 3.5 seconds with an interval of 1.5 seconds.

In addition, in the small hit A game, the playing time of the small hit game is set to 6 seconds, and the ball enters the V gate 650d at the timing when about 5.5 seconds have passed since the small hit game was started. designed to reach

Therefore, when the reserved memory of the special symbol lottery result of the small win A is stored in the state of continuously fluctuating display (small win A continuous executable state) in the reserved memory of the special symbols, From the timing when the winning ball during the first small hit game of the consecutive small hits A reaches the V gate 650d (timing 5.5 seconds after the start of the small hit game), the second special After the figure fluctuation display, if the time until the winning ball reaches the V gate 650d during the second small win game is an integer multiple of the operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d, then the continuous small win A Any small winning game based on will cause the ball to reach the V gate 650d at the timing when the V gate 650d is performing the same operation.

That is, if the total time of the game time of the small hit A game and the variation time of the special symbol is an integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, the V gate 650d operating in a predetermined operation cycle The ball will flow down at the same timing. In such a configuration, even if the player wins small wins A consecutively, there is no merit for the player, and the player's willingness to play is lowered.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game time (6 seconds) of the small hit game (small hit A game), and the variation time of the second special figure fluctuation display (special fluctuation B : 5.5 seconds) is configured so that the total time (11.5 seconds) does not become an integral multiple of the operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d.

As a result, when small winning games occur continuously, the continuous small winning games do not cause the ball to flow down at the same timing to the V gate 650d operating in a predetermined operation cycle. That is, it is possible to cause the balls to flow down at different timings to the V-gate 650d which is operating in a predetermined operation cycle by continuously generating small winning games. Therefore, when the player wins the small winning game continuously, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state than when the player wins the small winning game alone, and wins the small winning continuously. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to the fact that the game is played.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game time of the small hit A game (6 seconds), and the variation time of the second special figure fluctuation display (special fluctuation C: 5.5 seconds) among the consecutive small hits A The total time (11.5 seconds) is different from the time corresponding to the integral multiple of the operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d by the period (1.5 seconds) during which the V gate 650d is in the induction state. The fluctuation time of the special pattern is set.

This is set in order to increase the probability of causing the ball to flow down to the V gate at the timing when the V gate 650d is in the induced state in any of the small winning games in the consecutive small winning games. That is, the time to be in the induced state in the operation cycle of the V gate 650d is 1.5 seconds, and the time to be in the regulated state is 3.5 seconds, so the game time of the small hit A game and the continuous small If the total time between the winning A and the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the latter is less than 1.5 seconds from the time corresponding to the integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, the former (first ) and the latter (second) small winning game may be V-passable small winning games. In this way, the fact that the small winning game that can pass V in the continuous small winning game overlaps means that the former (first) small winning game and the latter (second) small winning game cannot pass V (difficult ), the possibility of becoming a small winning game increases accordingly.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game time of the small hit A game (6 seconds), and the variation time of the second special figure fluctuation display (special fluctuation B: 5.5 seconds) of the continuous small hit A Set the fluctuation time of the special pattern so that the total time (11.5 seconds) is different from the time corresponding to the integral multiple of the operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d by 1.5 seconds, and continuous small wins When the V gate 650d is in a regulated state at the timing of causing the ball to flow down to the V gate 650d in the first small winning game among the games, the ball is caused to flow down to the V gate 650d in the second small winning game. Timing can increase the probability that the V gate 650d is in the induced state, and the game is more advantageous to the player when winning the small winning game continuously than when winning the small winning game alone. It is possible to provide the state, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation to play due to the successive winning of small winnings.

It is desirable that the difference is 1.5 seconds or longer with respect to the integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, but it may be less than that. For example, with respect to the operating cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d, if the time (for example, 1 second) is shorter than the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state, the number of consecutive small hits It is preferable to make the number of times more than two (for example, five times) and to make the difference by one operation cycle (five seconds) of the V gate 650d.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the small winning game continues five times, among the small winning games that are continuously executed, at least one small winning game that can pass V is executed, so the game It is possible to provide a player with a more advantageous game state than in the case of winning the small winning game singly when winning the small winning game continuously.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation cycle is set to a period that is not an integral multiple of the period (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state. By doing so, for example, when the number of consecutive small wins is made more than 2 times (for example, 5 times), and the total is different by one cycle or more (7.5 seconds) of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. In the first period and the second period, the timing of causing the ball to flow down to the V gate 650d in the small winning game can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that a more advantageous game state can be provided to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the interval between the winning balls reaching the V gate in consecutive small winning A games is set to a specific interval by setting the variation time of the special symbols to a specific variation time. In addition, for example, the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the first small winning A game and the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the second small winning A game may be different. Furthermore, the operating period of the V gate 650d may be changed based on the continuation of the small winning A game. Even if it is configured in this way, it is possible to set the interval of the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the continuous small winning A game to a specific interval as in the present embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, the continuous effect display displayed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 28(a) is an example showing the first half of the special symbol variation display 1 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the first special symbol variation in which continuous production is executed, and FIG. 28(b) is a special symbol variation. It is an example showing the second half of display 1 (see FIG. 27), and FIG. 28(c) is the first half of small hit middle display 1 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the first small hit A game in which continuous production is executed. is an example showing

FIG. 29(a) is an example showing the first half of the special figure variation display 2 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the second special symbol variation in which continuous production is executed, and FIG. 29(b) is a special figure variation. It is an example showing the latter half of the display 2 (see FIG. 27), and FIG. 29(c) is another example showing the latter half of the special figure fluctuation display 2 (see FIG. 27).

FIG. 30(a) is an example showing the first half of the small winning middle display 2 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the second small winning A game in which continuous production is executed, and FIG. 30(b) shows a small winning. This is an example showing the second half of middle display 2 (see FIG. 27).

First, (a) of FIG. 28 shows the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the continuous effect is executed. When the continuous effect is started, the variable display of the third pattern is executed in the variable display area Dm1 provided on the upper left side of the main display area Dm, and the empty area of the main display area Dm (out of the main display area Dm) is displayed. A mode (corresponding to the chance presentation in FIG. 18B) indicating that the continuous presentation has started is displayed in an area other than the variable display area Dm1.

In the small area Ds1, seven reserved symbols are displayed, and the leftmost reserved pattern (reserved pattern corresponding to the next fluctuation) is the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved ball whose lottery result is a small hit A (second time Reserved design corresponding to special figure fluctuation) is displayed (star design), and in the small area Ds2, the design during fluctuation is displayed (star design). For convenience of explanation, the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved ball whose lottery result is a small hit A is displayed as a star pattern. is displayed.

After that, in the latter half of the special figure variation effect corresponding to the first special figure variation, a display indicating that both the frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b are pressed is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the frame left button is displayed. A guide display indicating the locations of 22a and the frame right button 22b is displayed in the guide display area Dm2 on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. In addition, a mode (corresponding to the chance presentation in FIG. 18(b)) indicating that continuous presentation is being performed is displayed in the small area Ds3 (see FIG. 28(b)).

The frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b provided in the pachinko machine 10 are arranged at an interval (500 mm) that makes it difficult to operate with one hand. You need to let go of 51. This is when a new winning prize (additional winning prize) occurs during continuous production, the second fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special figure fluctuation received from the main controller 110 is V passage of the voice ramp control device 113 Since it differs from the variation time of the second special figure variation referred to in the possible variation determination process, it is an effect for preventing the occurrence of additional winnings.

After the left and right frame buttons 22 (the left frame button 22a and the right frame button 22b) are operated at the same time, when the first small win A game is started, the continuous effect continues in the main display area Dm in the small win middle effect. (corresponding to the chance presentation in FIG. 19(a)) is displayed as a continuous display indicating that the game will be played (FIG. 28(c)). In this state, the symbol "757" indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win is stopped and displayed in the variable display area Dm1. Also, in the small area Ds3, "Right shot" is displayed to indicate that the game state is aimed at the second variable winning device 650. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 28(c), during the continuous performance, for the small hits that are not determined to be passable through the V, the performance for informing the player that the continuous performance will continue is emphasized and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that a small winning game has occurred.

In addition, by notifying the player that the continuous effect will continue, even if the current small winning game is a small winning game that cannot pass V (difficult), the player can participate in the small winning game after the next time. Since it will attract attention, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce dissatisfaction due to the occurrence of a small winning game in which V passage is impossible (difficult).

And, the second special figure variation is started. First, the case where the second special figure variation is a special figure variation that is determined as a V passable variation in the V passable variation determination process will be described. When the second special-figure variation is started, as shown in FIG. (corresponding to a chance effect) is performed, and a guidance display for guiding the position of the frame button is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2. In this state, in the variable display area Dm1, the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is varied, and six reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1. Then, in the small area Ds2, a pattern during variation indicating the second special figure variation is displayed, and in the small area Ds3, "Continuous presentation" indicating that the continuous presentation is being performed is displayed.

The display indicating that the continuous effect is being performed, which is displayed in the small area Ds3, is configured so that the display mode changes so as to suggest that the current variation is a V-passable variation. By changing the color of the comment, the color of the background on which the comment is displayed, etc., it is possible to suggest to the player that the current variation is a V-passable variation. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while predicting when the variation corresponding to the V passable variation will come, and suppresses the situation of getting tired of the performance of the pachinko machine 10 early. It has the effect of being able to

Also, after the variable display determined as the V passable variation starts (after the variation pattern (variation time) of the variable display corresponding to the V passable variation is determined), a new winning (additional winning) occurs. However, since the variation pattern is not changed, a normal mode other than the operation effect of the frame button 22 using both hands is executed.

After the player operates one of the frame buttons 22, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a "super-chance presentation" suggesting that the small win to be provided this time in the main display area Dm is a small win that can be passed through V. Rush" (corresponding to super-chance effect in FIG. 18(b)) is displayed (FIG. 29(b)). In this state, the symbol "757" indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win is stopped and displayed in the variable display area Dm1.

In addition, the display screen displayed in FIG. 29(c) is a display screen when the second special figure variation is stopped and displayed when additional winning occurs during the first special figure variation. When the variation pattern (variation time) that is assumed in advance and the variation pattern (variation time) that is actually received from the main controller 110 are different due to the occurrence of the additional winning in this way, the current variation passes V. This display (corresponding to the heart-pounding effect in FIG. 18(b)) is used in which the degree of expectation indicating whether or not it is a possible change is unknown. It should be noted that this display screen is displayed even when an additional winning occurs, for example, when the player does not operate the frame button 22, or when the variation other than the final variation of the continuous effect is the V passable variation, and the V It is configured to be displayed even when the remaining variation is started without giving the big win in the small winning game won by the passable variation.

By using such a display screen, it is possible to execute a series of effects in which a plurality of variations are associated with each other even when additional winnings occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect display that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, after the screen of FIG. 29(b) is displayed, when the V passable small win is executed, as shown in FIG. 30(a), the main display area Dm emphasizes that V can pass. (corresponding to the super-chance effect in FIG. 19(a)), which is a V-pass highlighting display, is displayed, and the position of the second variable winning device 650 is guided in the guide display area Dm2. A guidance display is displayed.

In addition, in the small area Ds3, "super chance" is displayed to indicate that the continuous effect is being performed, and "right hitting" is displayed to indicate that the game is aimed at the second variable winning device 650. - 特許庁In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display indicating that the continuous performance is being performed is "continuous performance" (Fig. 28(b)), "chance in progress" (Fig. 29(a)), "super chance in progress" (Fig. 30(a)), which is executed after whether or not the current special symbol variation is a V-passable variation, or after the special symbol variation has stopped. It is set to indicate the degree of expectation indicating whether or not the small winning A game is a V passable small winning. Therefore, if the first special figure variation during continuous production is V passable variation, it may be displayed as "super chance" suddenly.

Finally, during the small winning game, the ball passes through the V discharge channel 650e3, which is a specific area in the second variable winning device 650, and when the big winning is awarded, the main display area is displayed as shown in FIG. 30(b). A display indicating that a big win has occurred is displayed in Dm, and a guide display for guiding the position of the first variable winning device 65 to be opened during the big win game is displayed in the guide display area Dm2.

As described above, in the continuous performance in the pachinko machine 10, from the start of the first special figure fluctuation (special figure fluctuation display 1 (see FIG. 27 (a))) to the small winning game corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation ( Since it is executed as a series of effects that are associated with the execution of the small win game based on the small win middle display 2 (see FIG. 28 (a))), the first small win and the second small win are the same production The display is not executed, but continuous highlighting is executed for the first small win to emphasize that the continuous performance continues, and the second small win emphasizes that it is a small win that can be passed through V. Since the highlighted display is executed, the player can recognize two continuous small winning games as one continuous game, and a small winning game that is impossible (difficult) to pass through V is executed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.

In addition, after the first special figure fluctuation is started, if additional winning occurs between the start of the second special figure fluctuation, the second special figure fluctuation fluctuation pattern (variation time) However, since it differs from the previously assumed fluctuation pattern (variation time), the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the small hit game corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation assumed in advance, and the actual second time There is a problem that the arrival timing of the prize ball V gate in the small winning game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation is different, and a satisfactory continuous performance cannot be executed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined period (period from the start of the first special figure fluctuation to the start of the second special figure fluctuation), it is difficult to generate additional winning of the ball. As an additional winning prevention effect, an operation effect (see FIG. 29(b)) of the frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a and frame right button 22b) using both hands is executed. By executing such an effect, the player releases the operation handle 51, so the number of balls shot during that period can be reduced, and as a result, the occurrence of additional winnings during the predetermined period is suppressed. It becomes possible to

In this embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of the above-described additional winning, an effect using the frame button 22 is executed to cause the player to suspend the game. If it is an effect, other effects may be used, or a display to the effect that the shooting of the ball should be stopped may be made on the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display content of the continuous effect is different when additional winning occurs. The winning ball V gate arrival timing is calculated again, and based on the calculation result, the effect display corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation (special figure fluctuation display 2 (see FIG. 27)) and based on the second special figure fluctuation You may reset the content of the production|presentation display (display 2 (refer FIG. 27) in a small hit) corresponding to a small hit game. By doing so, even when an additional prize is generated, a continuous effect can be executed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol used during continuous production, special variation B to special variation C are defined for each number of retained balls (see FIG. 13), but the retained ball Even if the numbers are different, it may be defined that the same variation pattern is selected. By configuring in this way, for example, the variation pattern selected when the number of retained balls is 7 and the variation pattern selected when the number of retained balls is 6 are the same variation pattern (for example, special variation B) By doing so, even if an additional prize is generated during the continuous performance and the second special figure variation is executed with the reservation 7, the variation pattern will not be different. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of preset continuous effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether the special figure variation (small hit game) during continuous production is executing a chance production (production that suggests that the possibility of becoming a big hit is low based on the variation), super chance It is configured to be able to inform the player whether the effect (the effect that suggests that the probability of winning a big win is high based on the change) is being executed. is being executed, and it is difficult to grasp whether this special figure variation (small winning game) is executing a chance production or a super chance production. Display modes may be used. By doing so, the player can have expectations for a plurality of special figure fluctuations that are executed until the continuous performance is finished, so that the situation of getting bored with the game early is suppressed. It has the effect of being able to

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the V passable variation is determined in the V passable variation determination process, the continuous effect is executed. Alternatively, the continuous effect may be executed on the condition that the small win A continues. Also, when the small win A and another small win (small win B or small win C) are consecutive, a continuous effect may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the continuous effect, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the above-described continuous effect is executed when the winning information of the special symbol is reserved and stored so that the small hit A is continuously executed. In some cases, a continuous effect may be executed. For example, even if a plurality of small wins A are stored in the pending and stored prize winning information (up to 8 pieces) in an order in which they are not continuously executed, continuous performance may be executed. . In the case of configuring in this way, if the result of the special design success/failure determination is not a small hit A (if the success/failure determination result is off or a small hit other than the small hit A), the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the winning game The time (small win game time) can be calculated in advance, and continuous performance can be executed when the reserved and stored small win A is determined to be a V passable small win.

Furthermore, as described above, in the case of executing continuous production including the case where the success/failure determination result of the special symbol is not a small hit A, the fluctuation time defined when the success/failure determination result of the special symbol is a small hit A The time obtained by summing the playing time of the small hit A is set so as to be the same as the variation time prescribed when the result of right/wrong judgment of the special pattern is wrong, and furthermore, the result of right/wrong judgment of the special pattern is the small hit A.例文帳に追加The total time of the fluctuation time and the playing time of the small hit A specified in the case of It is preferable to set so that the time obtained by adding up the game time is the same.

By doing so, regardless of the validity determination result of the special design, the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special design to the start of the fluctuation of the next special design, that is, the judgment result of the special design is off. In the case of , the period from the start of the special symbol variation to the stop display of the symbol indicating that the special symbol discrimination result is out, In the case of winning, the period from the start of the variation of the special symbols to the end of the small winning game which is executed after the symbol indicating that the discrimination result of the special symbols is a small winning other than the small winning A is stopped and displayed. Since the period can be unified, it is possible to reduce the determination processing of whether or not the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied.

In addition, in the first embodiment, there is one small win type (small win A) that is determined as a V-passable small win, but a plurality of types of small wins that are determined as V-passable small wins are provided. In some cases, the continuous effect described above may be executed. For example, a small hit A1 (as a big hit set when passing V, no 8R time saving) and a small hit A2 (as a big hit set when passing V, 10R time saving) 8 times).

Then, a small win A1 that can be passed through V is stored as the winning prize information to be executed first in the reserved and stored winning prize information, and a small winning game corresponding to the small winning A1 is stored in the winning prize information to be executed later. If a small win A2 to be executed at a timing when V can be passed if V is not passed is stored, an effect is provided to notify the player not to let the ball pass V during the small win game corresponding to the small win A1. Run.

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of types of small wins with different benefits (big win types) granted by passing the ball through the V during the small win game, the small wins that are more advantageous to the player are provided. It is possible to guide the ball to pass through the V at the hit. In the above-described example, an example is shown in which a guidance effect is displayed that allows V to be passed by a small win that is advantageous to the player among a plurality of small win types. The information may be configured to notify only that there are a plurality of small wins that can be passed through V. As a result, since the player decides by himself which small winning game the ball should pass through the V by himself, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, of the display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous jackpot effect will be described. FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous jackpot effects and operational control of various devices.

Here, the continuous jackpot effect will be described. The continuous jackpot performance is the timing at which the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened in the jackpot A game when the jackpot A is won in the first rotation of the special symbol variation after the jackpot ends. and the timing at which the V gate 650d provided in the second variable prize winning device 650 is in the induced state is calculated in advance, and the timing at which the special symbol changes for the first rotation after the end of the big win, that is, the big win game is started. It is determined whether or not the end timing is the timing at which the small win A game in the first rotation after the end of the big win can pass through the passage detection switch 650e5 in the V discharge flow path 650e3 which is the specific area, and the performance is produced based on the determination result. is determined.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the condition for executing the continuous jackpot effect is satisfied, the main controller 110 executes the special fluctuation A as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation for the first rotation after the jackpot is finished (FIG. 13 See), then a small winning A game is executed.

In addition, when the condition for executing the continuous jackpot production is satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 displays the passage detection switch in the V discharge flow path 650e3 where the small hit A game in the first rotation after the jackpot ends is the specific area. A performance display (final round performance display) based on the timing at which the ball can pass through 650e5 is executed in the final round of the jackpot game. Then, the ending effect display of the jackpot game is executed based on the game result of the final round. Then, based on various commands set by the main control device 110, the special figure variation display and the effect display during the small hit are executed.

On the other hand, the V gate 650d is changed to the guidance state (the state in which the ball can pass through the V discharge passage 650e3) for 1.5 seconds as its operation during the jackpot game, and then for 3.5 seconds. One cycle (five seconds) is defined as the operation of changing the state (the state in which the ball cannot (is difficult) pass through the V discharge channel 650e3), and the cycle is repeatedly executed.

Here, the jackpot end timing for making the small hit game based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the jackpot end a small hit that can pass through V will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, when the condition for executing the continuous jackpot production is established, after the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the jackpot is completed, the small hit based on the special figure fluctuation is performed. The time until the winning ball reaches the V gate, which is the timing at which the ball that has won the second variable prize winning device 650 in the game reaches the V gate 650d, is set to 35 seconds (special variation A: 30 seconds + small winning game 5 seconds from the time the winning ball reaches the V gate).

Also, the ending period of the jackpot game is fixed to 5 seconds (see FIG. 14). That is, 40 seconds after the end of the final round of the jackpot game, the prize ball reaches the V gate timing. Therefore, if the operation status of the V gate 650d at the timing when the final round of the jackpot game ends is the timing when the V gate 650d is in the induction state after 40 seconds, the small hit based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the jackpot ends A game can be made into a small prize that can be passed through V.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the V gate 650d repeatedly executes constant operation control at a cycle of 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. , the small winning game based on the special figure variation of the first rotation after the end of the big winning can be a small winning game that can pass V.

The end timing of the final round of this jackpot game is when the time runs out (30 seconds have elapsed) in the final round, or when a predetermined number of balls (10 in this embodiment) have won in the first variable winning device 65 in the final round. It's a matter of timing. Specifically, if the game is played normally, it is designed so that a predetermined number of balls (10 in this embodiment) wins the first variable winning device 65 before the time runs out. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the tenth prize is won in the final round of the jackpot game is the end timing of the final round of the jackpot game.

In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. A selection object (for example, an omikuji) is displayed, a selection part (for example, a cursor) for switching the selection object at a predetermined interval (for example, 1.5 second interval) is displayed, and the end timing of the final round of the jackpot game is the jackpot If it is the timing at which the small winning game based on the special figure variation in the first rotation after the end can be made a small winning that can pass through V, it is configured to display that effect using the ending time of the big winning game. .

In this embodiment, the operation period of the V gate 650d is 5 seconds, and the final round of the jackpot game is set to 30 seconds at the longest. It is possible to set a plurality of timings when a small hit based on the special figure fluctuation of the next 1st rotation becomes a small hit that can pass V. Therefore, even if the ratio of the balls shot during the jackpot game to win the first variable prize winning device 65 is different (whether the ball easily enters the first variable prize winning device 65 or not), continuous jackpot performance is provided. There is an effect that you can enjoy

Furthermore, since the end timing of the final round is determined when a predetermined number of balls shot by the player win the first variable prize winning device 65, for example, during the ending period of the big win game as a continuous big win effect, after the big win When there is a display showing that the small win game based on the special figure variation of the first rotation is a small win that can pass V, a game state that is advantageous to the player by itself (a small win that can pass V). It is possible to grasp that the has been acquired. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to change the outcome of the game on his or her own.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 displays the result of the continuous jackpot effect. may be configured to notify the player by changing . By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform an effect that the player notices but the surrounding people do not notice.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the V gate 650d is always driven after turning on the pachinko machine 10, in the final round period of the jackpot game, a small hit game based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the jackpot Since it is possible to make uncertain when the timing of making a small win that can pass through V comes, it is possible to prevent the player from being attacked, and to provide the player with fair playability. It has the effect of being able to

It should be noted that during the jackpot game state in which the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened, the internal structure of the second variable prize winning device 650 should be made invisible (difficult) to the player. By constructing in this way, during the jackpot game in which the above-described continuous jackpot effect is executed, the player can perform the jackpot game while grasping the operation status of the V gate 650d in the second variable prize winning device 650. can be prevented, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a fair game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, the continuous jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Fig. 32(a) shows the display screen of the last round (9 rounds) before the final round (10 rounds) in the jackpot game, or the effect before the final round (see Fig. 31) executed in the subsequent interval period. FIG. 32(b) is an example showing a display screen in the first half of the final round effect (see FIG. 31) executed during the final round of the jackpot game.

FIG. 33(a) is an example showing a display screen in the second half of the final round effect (see FIG. 31) executed during the final round of the jackpot game, and FIGS. It is an example showing the display screen of the ending effect display (see FIG. 31) executed during the ending period of the game.

First, in FIG. 32(a), in the final round (10th round), an advance notification display is displayed in the main display area Dm to notify that the Omikuji game, which is a continuous jackpot effect, will start. In addition, in the secondary display area Ds, a comment explaining the contents of the omikuji game, which is a continuous jackpot effect, is displayed in the small area Ds2. In the small area Ds3, "Right-handed" is displayed to indicate that the game is aimed at the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. This display is displayed from the middle of the 9th round and the interval period between the 9th round and the 10th round (final round).

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(b), in the final round (10th round), three oracles Dm4 are displayed in the main display area, and the selection cursor Dm3 pointing to each of the oracles in turn is moved at predetermined intervals (1. 5 seconds), a movement display that moves to the right is performed. In the small area Ds1, the winning number (10) and the winning ball number (7), which are the conditions for closing the attacker (specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65), are displayed. An explanation that the attacker is closed when the number of balls reaches 10, that is, the omikuji is determined, and a comment explaining that the winning balls are counted and displayed in the small area Ds1 are displayed.

The plurality of omikuji Dm4 displayed in the main display area Dm have different display modes, and are configured so that comments with different contents are displayed depending on the selected omikuji. Then, the selection cursor is displayed at the timing when the closing condition of closing the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 (when the number of winning balls exceeds 10, or when a predetermined time (30 seconds) is reached) is satisfied. Dm3 stops, and the omikuji indicated by the stopped selection cursor Dm3 is enlarged and displayed (FIG. 33(a)). In this state, the number of winning balls is displayed as 10 in the small area Ds1, and an explanatory comment indicating that the omikuji Dm4 has been determined is displayed in the small area Ds2.

Then, during the ending period of the jackpot game, the contents of the selected omikuji Dm4 are displayed as shown in FIG. The results of past omikuji games are displayed. FIG. 33(b) displays "super good luck" as the result of the omikuji game, and FIG. 33(c) displays "great good luck" as the result of the omikuji game.

The results of the omikuji game include ``super good luck'', ``great good luck'', ``middle good luck'' and ``small good luck''. It is selected when the jackpot game is finished at the timing and there is a jackpot with a special pattern in the subsequent reserved balls, and ``great good luck'' means that the first variation of the jackpot game after the jackpot ends can pass through V. Selected when the jackpot game ends at the timing, and "middle good luck" and "small good luck" are selected when the jackpot game ends at the timing when the small hit game of the first variation after the jackpot ends is impossible (difficult) to pass V. When it is selected and "Nakayoshi" is selected, a privilege (gift of music or image) that does not directly affect the game is given.

In this way, by displaying the past history, even if no consecutive big wins were provided as a result of the current consecutive jackpot production, if the past history includes "super good luck" or "great good luck", the next consecutive big win production can be performed. In addition, even if there is no "super good luck" or "great good luck" in the past history, if the end timing of the jackpot game is intentionally shifted slightly, it may become "super good luck" or "good luck". Since the game is played while performing such analysis, there is an effect that the player can actively play the game.

In the case of executing such a continuous jackpot effect, the inside of the second variable prize winning device 650 is visually recognized by the player during the jackpot, that is, during the game in which the ball is awarded to the first variable prize winning device 65. It is better not to do so. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to be attacked by completing the final round while grasping the opening/closing status of the gate and gradually adjusting the timing. In such a case, the cover member of the second variable winning device 650 is formed of a half mirror, and the lamp provided in the second variable winning device 650 is provided only when a game aiming at the second variable winning device 650 is performed. It is preferable to employ a configuration in which the (light-emitting means) emits light so that the inside can be visually recognized.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 34 to 54. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Processing and main processing will be described.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (398 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4 and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum When the values (399, 99, 99, 398 and 398 respectively in this embodiment) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 (counter buffer 203i).

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern (variation time) of the third symbol to be variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81, etc., along with the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37. (S104), and thereafter, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64a, second ball entrance A 64b, or second ball entrance B 640b is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the starting winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35-38 and 39-42.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 7), is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 A thru-gate passing process is executed as the ball passes (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and furthermore, the door passage processing (S109), the V passage processing (S110) and the V gate drive control processing (S111) are executed. Details of the door passing process (S109), the V passing process (S110) and the V gate drive control process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After completing the process of S111, other processes to be periodically executed are then executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the fluctuation display in the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of fluctuation display in the special symbol) The number of times of suspension N2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S203 is 0 and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0.

In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: Yes ) Since there is no held ball to start the variable display, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that either the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204: No), then, Variation execution determination processing is executed to determine which special symbol to start variation based on (S205). By executing the variation execution determination process (S205), a variation execution flag 203j indicating a special symbol to start variation is set. The details of this variation execution determination process (S205) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S205 is finished, it is then determined whether or not to execute variation in special figure 1 (S206). In the process of S206, it is determined whether or not the variable execution flag 203j set by the variable execution determination process (S205) indicates the variable execution in special figure 1 (S206). In the process of S206, if it is determined that the variation execution flag 203j indicates the variation execution in the special figure 1 (S206: Yes), the process proceeds to S207 in order to perform the variation in the special figure 1 .

In the process of S207, 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S207), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set. (S208). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S208, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S209). In the process of S209, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S213). In this embodiment, the same special symbol variation start processing is executed for the variation of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the variation of the special symbol based on the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S206, if it is determined that the variation execution flag 203j is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (S206: No), the variation execution flag 203j is the variation execution in the special figure 2, so In order to execute the variation in FIG. 2, the process proceeds to S210. In the processing of S210-S212, the same processing as the above-described processing of the reserved ball of special symbol 1 (processing of S207-S209) is performed for the reserved ball of special symbol 2.

Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set. (S211). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S212), and the special symbol for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37. A fluctuation start process is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (not shown), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbols are set in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the variation execution determination process (Fig. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area by S205 of 36), the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol is set. More specifically, when the special symbol 1 is a big win, it is determined whether the big win is a big win A or a big win B according to the value of the first winning type counter C2. Similarly, in the case of the special symbol 2 jackpot, it is determined whether the jackpot A or B will be the jackpot according to the value of the first win type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37) (this lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S216). Then, if the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set using the jackpot scenario table 202f (see FIG. 14(a)) (S217).

Specifically, if the lottery result of this time is a jackpot A, a jackpot scenario a202f1 (see FIG. 14(b)) is set, and if it is a jackpot B, a jackpot scenario b202f2 (see FIG. 14(c)) is set. ) is set.

After finishing the process of S217, the counter 203h is set to 0 (initialization) during a time saving (S218), and it transfers to the process of S223.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is the loss of the special symbol (S216: No), then it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery this time is a small hit of the special symbol (S219). In the process of S219, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is the small winning of the special symbol, the small winning start setting process is executed to start the small winning (S220), and the process proceeds to the process of S221. . Details of the small winning start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S219, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit of the special symbol (S219: No), the lottery result of this time is a loss of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S221.

In the process of S221, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S221). The value of the counter 203h during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 1 or more (it is 0) (S220: No), the process of S222 is skipped and the process proceeds to S223.

In the process of S223 executed after the process of S218, S221 or S222, the lighting of the LED and the third symbol display device 81 which are the display modes of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S215 A stop command is set (S223) to synchronize the fluctuation stop.

Next, the variation execution determination process (S205) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the variation execution determination process (S205). This variation execution determination process (S205) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display The effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether or not to execute based on the variation order stored in the variation order storage area 203k.

In the variation execution determination process, first, the variation execution flag 203j is initialized by setting 0 (S301), and then the data in the variation order storage area 203k is obtained (S302). Then, the data in the change order storage area 203k is shifted (S303). In the process of S303, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the variation order storage area 203k are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area, 5th area→4th area, 6th area→3rd area. 5 area, 7th area→6th area, 8th area→7th area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area of the variation order storage area 203k is special figure 1 (1) (S304).

In the process of S304, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (1) (S304: Yes), the variation execution flag 203j is set to variation execution (1) with special figure 1 (S305 ), end this process, and return to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the special figure 1 (1) (S304: No), the data in the execution area is the special figure 2 (2), so the variable execution flag 203j is set to the special figure 2 (S306), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area. Based on the values of various counters, it is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 .

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired and stored in the execution area in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (S401). Next, the data stored in the execution area in the special symbol holding storage area storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the process of S401 is acquired (S402). Specifically, each value of the first hit random number counter C1 of the special symbol, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter C5 is acquired.

After finishing the process of S402, the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202a corresponding to the type of special symbol acquired in the process of S402 (S403). More specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S402 is compared with the big winning determination value stored in the first winning random number table 202a to acquire the lottery result. As described above, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0", the lottery result is a big win, and when the value is "1 to 398", a small win is selected as a lottery result other than the big win (loss). In the case of "399", the lottery result is a lost lottery result (see FIG. 10(a)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in the process of S403 is a big win (S404). In the process of S404, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big win (S404: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the big win type is set (S405).

More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S402 is referred to, compared with the random number specified in the first big winning type selection table 202b, and four types of special symbol jackpots It is determined what the jackpot type is among the types (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", set the jackpot A (2R time saving jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot B (5R time saving and big hit) is set (see FIG. 10(b)). Of the four types of jackpot types, the jackpot C and jackpot D are set when the game ball passes through a specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) provided in the second variable winning device 650 in the small hit game. Any jackpot type is given to each small hit type described later (see FIG. 11(a)).

In the processing of S405, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the set jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

After the process of S405 is completed, based on the current gaming state (whether there is time saving), the number of held balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401, the variation pattern selection table 202e1 for big hits (Fig. 12 ( a) Refer to) to determine the jackpot variation pattern (S406) and proceed to the process of S412.

When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S406, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the big winning symbol. A pattern variation time is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S404, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big win (S404: No), it is then determined whether the lottery result is a small win (S407). In the processing of S407, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S407: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the small hit type is set (S408), and the current game state is held. A small hit variation pattern is determined based on the number of balls and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 (S409), and the process proceeds to S412.

In the process of S407, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small win (S407: No), the lottery result is a loss, so the display mode of loss corresponding to the special symbol is set (S410).

In the process of S410, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area, the A stop type to be displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81 is determined.

When the process of S410 is finished, the outlier variation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state, the number of held balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained in the process of S401 (S411), and the process proceeds to S412.

In the process of S411, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the missing symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S406, the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained in the processing of S401 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The relationship between each lottery result, the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1, and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 12(a) to 12(b) and FIG. 13).

After completing the processing of S406, S409 or S411, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S406, S409 or S411 is set (S412). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S405, S408 or S410 is set (S413). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 50). be. When the processing of S413 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the small winning start setting process (S220) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the small winning start setting process (S220). This small winning start setting process (S220) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35), and is a process for setting the start of the small winning game.

Here, when a small winning game is started, the pachinko machine 10 changes the second variable winning device 650 to an open state in which the ball can win (easy), and the winning ball of the second variable winning device 650 By passing through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5), a big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends.

That is, the game state in which the small winning game is executed is an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the second variable winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big winning game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state that increases the possibility of being

Returning to FIG. 38, the description continues. In the small winning start setting process (S220), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small winning A (S501). In the process of S501, if it is determined to be a small hit A (S501: Yes), using the small hit scenario table 202g, set a small hit scenario a corresponding to the small hit type (small hit A) ( S502).

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that it is not a small hit A (S501: No), a small hit scenario b corresponding to the small hit type (small hit B, C) using the small hit scenario table 202g Set (S503).

After completing the process of S502 or S503, it is then determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win C (S504). In the process of S504, when it is determined that it is a small win C (S504: Yes), the big win C is set as the big win type when passing V (S505), and this process ends.

on the other hand. In the process of S504, when it is determined that the small winning is not C (S504: No), the big winning D is set as the big winning type at the time of V passing (S506), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 39, the starting winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A 64b, or the second ball entrance B 640b (starting Winning) is determined, and if there is a start winning, the holding processing of the values indicated by various random number counters and the prefetching of the lottery results of each special pattern are executed from the values indicated by the reserved various random number counters. This process is for

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A 64b, or the second ball entrance B 640b (start winning) (S601). . Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A 64b, or the second ball entrance B 640b is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A 64b, or the second ball entrance B 640b (S601: No), a process relating to start winning is executed. Since it is not necessary, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, if it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A64b, or the second ball entrance B640b (S601: Yes), the process relating to the start winning , the process proceeds to S602.

In the process of S602, the special figure 1 starting winning process is executed in order to perform the process based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a (S602). The details of this special figure 1 starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S602 is finished, the special figure 2 starting winning process is executed in order to perform processing based on the ball entering the second ball entrance A64b or the second ball entrance B640b (S603). The details of this special figure 2 starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S603 is finished, the prefetching process is executed to execute the prefetching of the lottery result of each special symbol (S604), and this process is finished. Details of the prefetch processing (S604) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the special figure 1 starting winning process (S602) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 start winning process (S602). This special figure 1 start winning process (S602) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), determines whether or not there is a ball entering the first ball opening 64a (start winning), and starts winning This is a process for holding the values indicated by various random number counters when there is.

In the special figure 1 start winning process (S602), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (S701). In the process of S701, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64a (S701: No), there is no need to execute the process related to the start winning of the first special symbol. This process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (S701: Yes), then the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (variation display in special symbol (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

In the processing of S703, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit value (S703: No), the ball entered the first ball entrance 64a, This is the case where the number of held balls is the upper limit. In this case, the process ends as it is without executing the process related to the start winning of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is a ball entering the first ball entrance 64a (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), special symbol 1 1 is added to the value (N1) of the reserved ball number counter 203d (S704). Then, a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S705).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number of the RAM 223. It is stored in the counter 223b.

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S705, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the small hit updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above The value of the type counter C5 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S706), the special figure 1 is set to the first area of the variation order storage area 203k (S707), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S707, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the 2nd area, if the value is 3, the 3rd area, if the value is 4, the 4th area, and if the value is 5, the 5th area. , if the value is 6, the 6th area is set as the first area, and if the value is 7, the 7th area is set as the first area. By determining the value set in the variation order storage area 203k in the above-described variation execution determination process (S205), the entrance (starting entrance) changes the special symbol 1 as in this embodiment. , Even if there are two kinds of variations, ie, one that varies the special symbol 2, the variation can be started in the order of winning at the entrance (starting opening).

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the special figure 2 starting winning process (S603) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 start winning process (S603). This special figure 2 start winning process (S603) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and whether or not there is a ball entering the second ball entrance A64b or the second ball entrance B640b (start winning) is determined, and when there is a starting prize, the value indicated by the various random number counters is held.

In the special figure 2 start winning process (S603), first, it is determined whether or not the ball entered the second ball entrance A64b (start winning) (S801). When it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance A64b (S801: Yes), the process proceeds to S805 in order to perform the same processing as the first special symbol on the second special symbol.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S801 that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance A64b (S801: No), then the ball enters the second ball entrance B640b (start winning). It is determined whether or not (S802). When it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entrance B640b (S802: Yes), the process proceeds to S803 in order to determine whether the ball entered the second ball entrance B640b normally. do.

In the processing of S803, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is ON (S803). If it is determined that the special figure 2B valid period flag 203r is ON (S803: Yes), the ball is entered within the period set as valid (normal) to enter the second entrance B640b. Therefore, for the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S805 in order to perform the same process as for the first special symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of S803, if it is determined that the special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is off (S803: No), the entry to the second entrance B640b is set as invalid (abnormal). Since it is within the period, after setting the error command (S804), the process proceeds to S805.

The error command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output by the voice command during the external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the lamp control device 113 and an external output terminal board (not shown). When receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the content of the error from the error command, and notifies the third pattern display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 based on the extracted content. and

In the processing of S805, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of suspension of variable display in special symbols) is acquired (S805). Next, if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S806: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S807), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball is added. Set the special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the number counter 203e (S808). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter C5, and the winning hole type are stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (S809), and fluctuates. The special figure 2 is stored (set) in the first area of the order storage area 203k (S810), and this process is terminated. Note that the determination of the first area in S810 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S707.

Whether there is no entry into the second entrance A64b and the second entrance B640b (S802: No), or even if there is an entry into the second entrance A64b or the second entrance B640b If the value (N2) of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S806: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 42, the prefetching process (S604) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S604). This look-ahead process (S604) is executed in the starting winning process (see FIG. 39), determines the lottery result of each special symbol in advance, and is a process for setting a winning information command based on the result of the prior determination. .

In the look-ahead process (S604), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (start winning) (S901). In the process of S901, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (start winning) (S901: Yes), the first winning random number table 202a, the first jackpot type selection table 202b, the special figure Based on the type selection table 202c1 for 1, the pre-determination result (hit determination result, big hit type, small hit type) is acquired (S902).

On the other hand, in the processing of S901, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64a (the ball has entered the second ball entrance A 64b or the second ball entrance B 640b (start winning)) (S901: No), based on the first hit random number table 202a, the first jackpot type selection table 202b, and special figure 2 type selection table 202c2, acquire the preliminary determination result (hit determination result, jackpot type, small hit type) (S903).

After completing the processing of S902 or S903, based on the preliminary determination result (hit determination result, big hit type, small hit type) acquired in the processing of S902 or S903, the winning information command is set (S904). The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during an external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50), which will be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts the preliminary determination result (win determination result, big winning type, small winning type) from the winning information command, and stores the extracted value in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Store. As a result, the audio ramp control device 113 can execute an effect based on the result of the prior determination.

Next, referring to FIG. 43, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 7) and the second entering ball. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance B640b of the device 640, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the effective period measuring counter 203s is 1 or more (S1001). In the process of S1001, if it is determined that the value of the effective period measuring counter 203s is 1 or more, the value of the effective period measuring counter 203s is increased to measure the period during which the ball can enter the second ball entrance B640b. 1 is subtracted (S1002), and the process proceeds to S1003.

In the processing of S1003, it is determined whether or not the value of the effective period measuring counter 203s is 0 (S1003). In the process of S1003, if it is determined that the value of the effective period measuring counter 203s is 0 (S1003: Yes), the period for determining that the ball enters the second ball entrance B640b normally has passed. Therefore, the special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is set to OFF (S1004), and the process proceeds to S1005.

In the processing of S1001, when it is determined that the value of the effective period measuring counter 203s is 0 (S1001: No), the processing of S1002 to S1004 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1005. Also, if it is determined in the process of S1003 that the value of the effective period measuring counter 203s is greater than 0 (S1003: No), the process of S1004 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1005.

In the process of S1005, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S1005). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance B640b is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S1005: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal pattern (second pattern) is not hit (S1005: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 is fluctuating (S1006). If the display mode is not fluctuating (S1006: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S1007). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S1008), and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 0 (not 0). (S1008: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S1008: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S1009).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1010). In the process of S1010, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S1011).

When the process of S1011 is completed, based on the second winning random number table 202d, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S1012). Specifically, the obtained value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202d. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 199", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design, and if it is in the range of "200 to 398", the normal design is out. It is determined that

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S1012 is the normal symbol hit (S1013), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S1013: Yes), the winning The hour display mode is set (S1014). In the process of S1014, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether it is during time saving (whether the value of the counter 203h during time saving is greater than 0) (S1015), and when it is determined that it is not during time saving (the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 0) (S1015: No), since the gaming state is not the time saving mode, the opening time of the electric accessary 640a is set to 0.2 seconds and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1016), and the variation time of normal symbols is set to 180 seconds. (S1017), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1015, if it is determined that the time is being shortened (the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0) (S1015: Yes), the game state is the time being shortened, so the opening time of the electric accessary 640a is set to 0.5 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1018), the variation time of normal symbols is set to 1 second (S1019), and this process is terminated.

In this way, when the game state of the normal design is the time saving game state (during time saving), the game state of the normal design is compared with the normal game state (during non time saving), the time of fluctuation display is "180 seconds → 1 second", and furthermore, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance B 640b becomes very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 0.5 seconds x 2 times". Therefore, the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance B640b.

In the process of S1013, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S1013: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S1020). In the process of S1020, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of loss is completed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 180 seconds (S1017), and this processing is terminated.

In the processing of S1006, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1006: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S1021). Incidentally, the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S1017 or the process of S1019 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the processing of S1021, if the variation time has not elapsed (S1021: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1021, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S1021: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1022). In the processing of S1022, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the processing of S1014, the “○” symbol as the second symbol is displayed stopped (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S1020, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S1022, when the second symbol display update process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 50) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S1014 or the process of S1020.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S1023). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S1023: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance B640b is set (S1024). When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S1024, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 50) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1016 or S1018 are completed.

When the processing of S1024 is finished, in order to measure the open period of the electric accessory 640a set in the processing of S1024, the special figure 2B effective period flag 203r is set to ON (S1025), and the effective period measurement counter 203s is set to 1000. (2 seconds) is set (S1026), and the process ends. By the processing of S1025 and S1026, it is possible to determine whether the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entrance B640b is the opening period of the electric accessory 640a. In other words, it is possible to detect that a game ball has entered the second ball entrance B640b due to a fraudulent act or the like, even though it is not the opening period of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 650a is executed twice for 0.5 seconds in the time-saving game state. After adding the allowable time until the ball passes through the second entrance B640a, the effective period of the special figure 2B is set to 2 seconds, and the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 executed at a 2 millisecond cycle Although 1000 is set in the effective period measuring counter 203s to be subtracted by the operation, for example, the effective period may be set for each opening operation of the electric accessory 650a.

On the other hand, in the process of S1023, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S1023: No), it is not necessary to control the opening of the electric accessary 640a, so the processes of S1024 to S1026 are skipped. End the process.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through-gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through-gate) 67 (S1101). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (S1102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1103).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S1103: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S1104). Then, based on the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f added in the process of S1104, the normal pattern reserved ball number command is set (S1105).

Normal figure reservation ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and external output processing (S1701) of main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. Inside, it is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal pattern reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f from the normal pattern reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the normal pattern reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223d.

When the processing of S1105 is finished, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) is stored in the free reservation area (reservation first area to the fourth reserved area) (S1106). In the process of S1106, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the value of the second per random number counter C4 stored in the process of S1106 and the second per random number table 202d are obtained based on the general pattern pre-determination result (S1107), and the general pattern is obtained based on the general pattern pre-determination result. A winning information command is set (S1108), and this processing ends.

General figure winning prize information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and external output processing (S1701) of main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later , and is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 . The sound lamp control device 113, when receiving the general pattern winning information command, extracts the general pattern pre-determination result from the general pattern winning information command, and stores the extracted value in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform an effect based on the general pattern preliminary determination result.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol, and the more the number of reserved balls, the more the game It is designed to benefit people. Therefore, the state in which the ball can be entered into the second ball entrance B640b provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state.

By indicating the timing at which such a game state is provided based on the pre-determined result of the normal game, the player can play the game without missing a game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. It should be noted that when the performance is performed using the preliminary determination result of such a general pattern, not only the production based on the result of the determination of the success or failure of the general pattern, but also the electric accessory 640a is opened when the general pattern is determined to be winning. It is good to perform a production that suggests the timing of By doing so, in a normal game state, a game is played aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the second ball-entering device 640 (a device accompanied by the electric accessory 640a) moves to the right side of the game board 13. Even if it is arranged, it is possible to switch to a game (so-called right-handed hitting) aiming at the right side of the game board 13 before the electric accessory 640a performs the opening operation, and even in the normal game state There is an effect that the possibility of a ball entering the second ball hole B640b can be increased.

Next, referring to FIG. 45, the door passing process (S109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the door passing process (S109). This door passage time process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and is a process for determining whether or not the winning of the ball to the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is normal.

In this door passage time process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 provided in the second variable winning device 650 has detected a ball (S1201). In the process of S1201, if it is determined that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 has not detected a ball, that is, if it is determined that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 is not set to ON ( S1201: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 has detected a ball, that is, if it is determined that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 is set to ON (S1201 : Yes), it is determined by referring to the small winning scenario being executed whether the ball can pass through the second variable prize winning device 650 (within the passable period) (S1202).

In addition, in each small winning scenario, in addition to the operation control scenario executed during the small winning game, a ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 (door 650f) is provided in order to determine an abnormality during the small winning game. A period for valid (normal) handling and a period for valid (normal) handling of balls that have passed through a specific area in the second variable winning device 650 are set (see FIG. 15).

In the processing of S1202, if it is determined that the passage is within the passable period (S1202: Yes), the door passage command is set (S1203), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if it is determined that it is not within the passable period (S1202: No), an error command is set (S1204), and this process ends.

The error command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output by the voice command during the external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the lamp control device 113 and an external output terminal board (not shown). When receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the content of the error from the error command, and notifies the third pattern display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 based on the extracted content. and

In this way, with respect to the winning to the second variable winning device 650, even during the small winning game, by providing a period during which the winning is valid (normal) and a period when it is not valid (abnormal), It is possible to prevent an act of illegally winning a ball to the second variable winning device 650 during a small winning game.

In addition, since the period during which passage of the door 650f is valid (passable period) is set in the small winning scenario, the opening pattern of the door 650f whose operation is controlled during the small winning game is changed according to the type of the small winning. In the case (when a different small winning scenario is selected), the opening pattern of the door 650f and the passable period can be set in association with each other, and the passable period suitable for the opening pattern of the door 650f can be easily set. It has the effect of being able to

In this embodiment, when the passage of the sphere is outside the passable period (S1202: No), only the error command is set without setting the door passage command. An error command may be set above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the V passing time process (S110) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this V-passing process (S110). This V passage time processing (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34), and it is checked whether the passage of the ball to the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) in the second variable prize winning device 650 is normal. This is the process of determining.

In this V passage time process (S110), first, it is determined whether or not the passage detection switch 650e5 provided in the V discharge channel 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 has detected a ball (S1301). In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the passage detection switch 650e5 has not detected a ball, that is, if it is determined that the passage detection switch 650e5 is not set to ON (S1301: No), this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that the passage detection switch 650e5 has detected a ball (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether the current V passable period is set for the small hit scenario. It is determined (S1302).

In the process of S1302, if it is determined that it is not within the V passable period set in the small winning scenario (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1303), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1302, if it is determined that it is within the V passable period set in the small winning scenario (S1302: Yes), then it is set to the small winning type of the small winning game being executed. The jackpot type value is read (S1304). That is, when the small winning game under execution is the small winning C, the big winning C is read as the big winning type value, and when the small winning game being executed is other than the small winning C, the big winning D is read as the big winning type value (Fig. 11 (a) )reference).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type value read in S1304 is jackpot C (S1305), and if it is determined to be jackpot C in the processing of S1305 (S1305: Yes), jackpot C is indicated. The V flag 203m is set to ON (for example, the V flag 203m is set to "1") (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307. On the other hand, in the process of S1305, if it is determined that it is other than the jackpot C (jackpot D) (S1305: No), the V flag 203m indicating the jackpot D is turned on (for example, the V flag 203m is set to "2") (S1309), and proceeds to S1307.

And after the process of S1306 or S1309 is performed, a V passage command is set (S1307), and after that, the counter 203h is reset to 0 during time saving (S1308).

In this way, even during a small winning game with respect to the winning to the second variable winning device 650, by providing a period during which the winning is valid (normal) and a period during which the winning is not valid (abnormal), It is possible to prevent the act of illegally passing the ball to the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) during the hitting game.

Further, in this embodiment, when the ball is detected by the passage detection switch 650e5 outside the passable period, an error command is set without turning on the V flag 203m, and this process is terminated. Since the V flag 203m is not set to ON even if the ball passes through the specific area outside the passable period, even if the ball is illegally passed through the specific area during the small winning game, the big win is achieved after the small winning game is finished. No games are played. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent games.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area is normal, and the presence or absence of an abnormality (error) is determined. configuration may be used.

For example, when the passage detection switch 650e5 detects two or more balls in one small game, it may be determined to be abnormal. This is because in this embodiment, by controlling the operation of each component of the second variable winning device 650, the number of balls that can pass through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) during one small winning game is set to one. We are hiring. Therefore, when the passage detection switch 650e5 detects two or more balls in one small winning game, it may be determined as abnormal.

In addition, in this embodiment, after it is determined that the ball is detected by the passage detection switch 650e5, it is determined whether the detection of the ball (passing through the specific area) is within the passable period. Detection of an outside ball (passing through a specific area) can be processed as an abnormality. may be configured to determine whether has detected a sphere.

Furthermore, based on the detection results of the passage detection switch 650a1 for detecting the winning of the door 650f and the passage detection switch 650e5, which is a specific area, the passage detection switch 650a1 detects the ball during one small winning game. It may be determined as an abnormality when the passage detection switch 650e5 detects a ball even though the ball is not detected.

By doing so, for example, it becomes possible to monitor fraudulent games such as causing a ball to stay in the V discharge channel 650e3 and allowing the ball to pass through a specific area within the passable period.

In addition, means for determining whether or not the current small winning game is a small winning that can pass through V is provided, and using the determination result, it is possible to pass even if the small winning is impossible (difficult) to pass through V. An abnormality may be determined when the detection switch 650e5 detects a ball.

It should be noted that the plurality of abnormality monitoring processes described above are configured such that the ball that first wins in the second variable prize winning device 650 after the small winning game is executed can win a prize in the V discharge flow path 650e3 as in the present embodiment. By using it, it becomes possible to monitor fraudulent games more reliably.

In other words, when trying to illegally pass a ball through the passage detection switch 650e5, which is a specific area, the passage detection switch 650e5 is detected even though the second variable prize winning device 650 has not won even one ball during the small winning game. When a ball is detected, it can be determined as an abnormality, and furthermore, if even one ball is won by the second variable winning device 650 during a small winning game, the passage detection switch 650e5 detects two balls, and it is determined to be abnormal. It is possible to discriminate.

Also, if the small winning game this time is a small winning game that cannot pass V, the ball won by the second variable winning device 650 does not pass the passage detection switch 650e5, so it passes the passage detection switch 650e5. Although the number of balls to be played is one, it can be determined as abnormal because the passage detection switch 650e5 detects the ball during a small winning game that cannot pass V.

It should be noted that an error command may be set and output externally if the determination result of each abnormality determination process described above is determined to be abnormal. In this case, the error command may include identification information that can identify the cause of the abnormality and priority information that indicates the priority of the abnormality that has occurred.

Here, the priority information is information for easily determining whether or not the abnormality that has occurred is caused by an illegal game. If it is determined that the number of balls passing through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) is larger than the number of balls detected by the passage detection switch 650a1, there is a high possibility of fraudulent play, so priority information with a high priority. is set, and the abnormality that it is determined that the ball passed through the specific area outside the passable period during the small winning game may be caused by ball play, so priority information with low priority is set. .

In this way, none of the abnormalities can occur in a proper game. can be preferentially notified, and there is an effect that the processing after the occurrence of the abnormality can be performed smoothly.

It should be noted that each abnormality determination process for the ball passing through the specific region may be combined in its entirety, or may be appropriately combined in part.

Here, as a result of each abnormality determination process described above, an error command that is set when an abnormality is determined is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. 50) is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the sound lamp control device 113 and an external output terminal board (not shown) in the external output processing (S1701). When receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the content of the error from the error command, and notifies the third pattern display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 based on the extracted content. and

Next, the V gate drive control process (S111) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this V gate drive control process (S111). This V gate drive control process (S111) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34) and is a process for controlling the drive of V gate 650d controlled by main controller 110. FIG. Both the open counter 203n and the closed counter 203o used in the V gate drive control process are incremented by timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds. Then, 2 milliseconds have elapsed.

In the V gate drive control process (S111), first, it is determined whether it is the first interrupt process after power-on (S1401). In the processing of S1401, if it is determined that it is the first interrupt processing after power-on (S1401: Yes), the V gate solenoid 650d2 is turned on (S1402), and the V gate 650d is set to the induction state (open).

Then, a V gate state command indicating that the state of the V gate 650d is in the inductive state (open) is set (S1403), the value of the open counter 203n is incremented by 1 (S1404), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that it is not the first interrupt process after power-on (S1401: No), it is determined whether the value of the open counter 203n is 0 (S1405). In the processing of S1405, if it is determined that the value of the open counter 203n is not 0 (S1405: No), then it is determined whether the value of the open counter 203n is greater than 750 (whether 1.5 seconds have elapsed). (S1406).

In the process of S1406, if it is determined that the value of the open counter 203n is not greater than 750 (750 or less) (S1406: No), 1 is added to the open counter 203n in S1404, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1406, if it is determined that the value of the open counter 203n is greater than 750 (S1406: Yes), the value of the open counter 203n is reset to 0 (S1407), and the V gate solenoid 650d2 is turned off. (S1408), the V-gate 650d is brought into a regulated state (closed).

Then, a V gate state command indicating that the state of the V gate 650d is in the regulated state (closed) is set (S1409), the value of the closed counter 203o is incremented by 1 (S1410), and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S1405 that the value of the open counter 203n is 0 (S1405: Yes), that is, once the value of the open counter 203n becomes greater than 750, the value of the open counter 203n becomes higher than 750 in S1407. is reset to 0, next it is determined whether the value of the closing counter 203o is greater than 1750 (whether 3.5 seconds have elapsed) (S1411).

In the process of S1411, if the value of the closing counter 203o is not greater than 1750 (1750 or less) (S1411: No), 1 is added to the value of the closing counter 203o (S1410), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1411 that the value of the closing counter 203o is greater than 1750 (S1411: Yes), the value of the closing counter 203o is reset to 0 (S1412), and the V gate solenoid 650d2 is set to ON. (S1413), sets a V gate state command indicating opening (S1414), adds 1 to the value of the open counter 203n (S1415), and terminates this process.

The V gate state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during an external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . Upon receiving the V gate state command, the audio lamp control device 113 can extract the state of the V gate 650d from the V gate state command and grasp the operating state of the V gate 650d. In particular, the Vgate state command set in S1403 is used when the audio lamp controller 113 sets the Vgate scenario 222c (see FIG. 58).

As described above, the V gate 650d in this embodiment is controlled so that it always performs a constant operation (repeatedly opening for 1.5 seconds and closing for 3.5 seconds) after the power is turned on. ing.

In this embodiment, as a control in which a constant operation is always performed, values counted by counters (open counter 203n and closed counter 203o) are set in advance for the induced (open) state and the regulated (closed) state. Although control is performed to switch the operating state of the V gate 650d when it reaches the set counter value, other configurations may be used.

For example, an operation scenario (character product operation scenario) is provided that defines the operation contents of the V gate 650d, and counts each time a timer interrupt that is periodically executed (2 millisecond cycle) by the main controller 110 is executed. The operation scenario defining the operation content of the V gate 650d is updated using the value of the counter (accessory action counter), and the V gate 650d is operated based on the updated action scenario content. good too. In this case, Vgate 650d may be configured to loop through one operating scenario, since it only performs certain operations repeatedly.

Further, as described above, when using a counter (role product action counter) for updating the action scenario (role product action scenario) of the V gate 650d, the value of the role product action counter is used as the value of the variation type counter CS1. may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to select a variation type associated with the operation of the V gate 650d (character object). Also, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of control processes executed by main controller 110 based on a common counter value.

For example, the value of the counter indicating that the V gate 650d is open and the value of the counter indicating that the V gate 650d is in the closed state, so that the variation type (variation time) of the selected special symbol is different. It is preferable to configure a special symbol variation pattern selection table. Specifically, the counters referred to in each variation pattern selection table 202e1 to 202e3 (see FIGS. 12 and 13) set in the variation pattern selection table 202 (see FIG. 11) are changed from the variation type counter CS1 to the accessory Change to the value of the operation counter. Then, in the process of acquiring the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37) (S401 in FIG. 37), the value of the accessory action counter is acquired instead of the variation type counter CS1. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the value of the accessory action counter.

As the variation pattern to be selected with reference to the accessory action counter, for example, the small winning variation pattern selection table 202e3 (see FIG. 13) referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small winning. The variation pattern set corresponding to A is the value of the role product action counter indicating that the V gate 650d is open and the value of the role product action counter indicating that the V gate 650d is closed. , and the variation pattern (variation time) set corresponding to the value of the role product action counter indicating that the V gate 650d is in the open state is the variation pattern It is preferable to set the small win for which is executed to be a V passable small win.

That is, the period (fluctuation time) until the lottery result of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a small hit A, and the period from the start of the small hit A game until the ball can pass through the specific area 650e5 A variation pattern (variation time). Specifically, a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds is set. Thereby, when the variation of the special symbol winning the small win A starts at the timing when the V gate 650d is open, the V passable small win can be provided.

In this way, when the operation status of the accessory (V gate 650d) and the winning game (small winning A game) based on the lottery result of the special symbol are executed at a specific timing (while the V gate 650d is open, winning Used to control the operation of a role (V gate 650d) in a gaming machine in which a privilege (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is awarded when a small win A is executed so that the timing of reaching the ball V gate arrives. By configuring the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be selectable using the value of the counter (accessory operation counter), execution is performed when the accessory is in a predetermined operation mode (V gate 650d is open) It is possible to make the variation of the special symbols to be the variation of the special symbols advantageous to the player.

As a result, it becomes possible to execute the control in which the conventionally independent control of the control of the action of the role and the lottery of the special symbol are associated, and the player can control the operation state of the role and the timing of execution of the variation of the special symbol. The game will be played while being conscious of. Therefore, for example, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbol will affect the result of the next and subsequent special symbol variations. That is, conventionally, even if the player does not show interest in the special symbol variation (the special symbol variation that is out of the game, or the special symbol variation in which an effect with a low possibility of becoming a big hit is executed), the player is not interested in the special symbol. Since the timing at which the special symbol variation stops rather than the result of the variation lottery is watched, it is possible to make the player interested in the special symbol variation and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. It has the effect of being able to

Furthermore, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern for each game state (normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is provided, and variation pattern selection corresponding to a game state (time-saving game state) advantageous to the player is provided. In the table, it is preferable to select the variation pattern (variation time) by referring to the value of the counter (accessory action counter) for controlling the action of the security article described above. With this configuration, for example, even if the value of the role product action counter is a value indicating that the role product (V gate 650d) is open, the role product (V gate 650d) is closed. Even if it is a value indicating a state of In an advantageous game state, it is possible to ensure that the small winning A game becomes a V passable small winning. As a result, it is possible to provide a game state that is more advantageous to the player in a state that satisfies a predetermined condition (time-saving game state) as a game state that is more advantageous to the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of

In addition, in the first embodiment, the counter (variation type counter CS1 ), but other configurations may be used. For example, the timing at which the start winning process (see FIG. 39) is executed, that is, the start winning opening (first ball entrance 64a, first The value of the counter (variation type counter CS1) referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in the process executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance A64b, the second ball entrance B640b) is may be configured to obtain

In addition, as a technique of using the value of the counter (accessory action counter) used to control the operation of the V gate 650d in other control, the counter referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol (this embodiment Although an example in which it is used in place of the variation type counter CS1) is shown above, it may also be used in place of the first hit random number counter C1. In this case, the value of the counter (accessory action counter) for updating the action scenario of the accessory (V gate 650d) may be used as it is, or a random number is generated using the success of the accessory action counter, The random number may be used instead of the first winning random number counter C1.

Specifically, the value of the role product operation counter (for example, 0 to 2500) added by the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 executed every 2 milliseconds, and the main processing of the main controller 110 A value obtained by combining an initial value random number counter value (for example, 0 to 2500) updated using the remaining time may be used instead of the first hit random number counter C1. As a result, it is possible to set the value of the counter used for judging the hit of the special symbol in a complicated manner, so that it is difficult to be fraudulent. Also, by using the value of one counter (accessory action counter) for a plurality of controls, the number of counters mounted on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the operation of the V gate 650d is always controlled to be constant. Operation control may be added to ensure execution when a predetermined condition is met, such as extending the period of the induced (open) state for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) after the end of the jackpot game. .

By doing so, it is possible to substantially change the probability of executing a big winning game via a small winning game based on the presence or absence of establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game that surprises the player. There is an effect that it becomes possible to provide

Also, for example, on the condition that the occurrence of the big winning game via the small winning game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the V gate 650d switches the timing to be in the induction (open) state, or the induction (open) You may shorten the period which becomes a state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further complicate the timing at which the specific area in the small winning game can be passed, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game.

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S1612.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1715 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1612). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1613, S1614).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S1613, S1614) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1608). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S1610, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1611), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1708 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1711 and S1712 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S1701). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34). Send a prize ball command to In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) and the start winning process (see FIG. 39), and the winning information command set in the look-ahead process (see FIG. 42). Send to Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, it transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 the small winning opening command set in the small winning control processing (see FIG. 53) such as the opening command set in the big winning control processing (see FIG. 51). Furthermore, the error command set in the door passage processing (see FIG. 45) or the V passage processing (see FIG. 46), the V gate state command set in the V gate drive control processing (see FIG. 47), etc. Send to the audio ramp controller 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

In addition, the external output processing in the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that various commands can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by means of an external terminal board (not shown). there is

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and reset to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production, 1 A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704). Details of the jackpot control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

After completing the processing of S1704, small winning control processing is executed (S1705). Details of the small winning control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, although the small hit control process (S1705) is performed in the main process, it may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second ball entrance B640b of the second ball entry device 640 is executed (S1706). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of S1024 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 43), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1016 or S1018 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1707). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37), the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation display according to the variation pattern. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37) ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is finished, and the stop pattern (first pattern) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the first pattern display device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device (not shown) is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1017 or the process of S1019 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 43), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1022 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 43), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device The display is ended, and the stop design (second design) is stopped (lighted up) on the second design display device in the display mode set by the processing of S1014 or the processing of S1020 of the normal design variation processing (see FIG. 43). do.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1709). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1710). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1710: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described processes after S1701 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1710: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1711, S1712).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1711). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 398 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1712).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the processing of S1709, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1709: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 48 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1713 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1713), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1714). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1715), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1716), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1709 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1708, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1711 and S1712 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization process (S1601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S1701. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1704). This jackpot control processing (S1704) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 50). This is processing for opening or closing the port 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S1801). Specifically, the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 35) or the processing of S2107 of the small winning ending control processing (see FIG. 54) described later is executed to determine whether the big winning scenario is set. do. That is, the result of the lottery of the special symbols is a big win, and the big win scenario is set based on the lottery result, or the big win scenario is set based on passing through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) during the small win game. Determine if it is set. In the process of S1801, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1801: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1801, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1801: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p (S1802), and the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p increases. It is determined whether it is time to start opening the jackpot scenario (S1803). For example, when the jackpot scenario a is set (see FIG. 14), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is 1. determine whether

In the process of S1803, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the start of the opening (if the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S1803: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S1804), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the start of the opening (S1803: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the start of the round (in the jackpot scenario a If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 1251 (S1805).

In the processing of S1805, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the start of the round (S1805: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened in the processing of S1806. (Set the specific door solenoid 65f2 to ON so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning port 65a is in an open state), then set the round number command indicating the number of rounds to newly start ( S1807), the process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the start of the round (S1805: No), then the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed. It is determined whether the condition is established (S1808). Here, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a in the present embodiment, when 30 seconds have elapsed since the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a was opened, or When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls win after the winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the processing of S1808, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is established (S1808: Yes), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is changed to the current round. is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the counter value corresponding to the end of the round (S1809), and this processing ends. In addition, when it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied in the processing of S1808, the closing condition is cleared, and it is configured not to determine that the closing condition is satisfied again in the jackpot control processing after the next time. .

Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls have won in the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a and the closing condition is satisfied, that is, a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) When closing the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is updated to the value one before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed. (It is configured so that the operation control is executed in the next jackpot control process).

By doing so, the operation control (for example, the operation control to close a specific winning hole when a predetermined number of balls have won) that is executed due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) can be turned into a jackpot scenario. can be executed based on Therefore, as a closing condition of the specific winning port (first specific winning port) 65a, the operation is controlled based on the jackpot scenario when a predetermined time has passed, and the jackpot scenario is not based when a predetermined number of prizes have been won. This eliminates the need to perform complicated control such as execution of motion control, thereby facilitating design and preventing a situation in which both types of motion control are mixed.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description continues. In the processing of S1808, if it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65 is not met (S1808: Yes), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the end of the round. (S1810).

In the processing of S1810, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the end of the round (S1810: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed in the processing of S1811. (the specific door solenoid 65f2 is turned off so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning port 65a is closed), and the process ends. Incidentally, the determination process from S1805 to S1810 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the big win set in the big win scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S1810, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the end of the round (S1810: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the start of the interval. If it is the value jackpot scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1812). In the process of S1812, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the start of the interval (S1812: Yes), the interval command is set (S1813), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1812, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is not the value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1812: No), next, jackpot ending control processing (S1814) is executed. This jackpot ending control process is a process executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the final round of the jackpot game to the start of the variation of the special symbols. .

Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1814) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending control process (S1814). This jackpot ending control process (S1814) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 51).

In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (if the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 40751) (S1901). In the processing of S1901, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S1901: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S1902), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the start of the ending (S1901: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the end of the ending (in the jackpot scenario a If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 42000 (S1903). In the process of S1903, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1903: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1903, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1903: Yes), next, the setting of the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1904), and the jackpot The scenario counter 203p is reset to 0 (S1905). In other words, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is ended.

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot executed this time is jackpot C (S1906). In the processing of S1906, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not jackpot C (jackpots A, B, and D) (S1906: No), the counter value of the counter 203h during time saving is set to 8 (S1907), End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot C (S1906: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

That is, if the jackpot type is other than jackpot C (jackets A, B, D), by setting the counter value of the time saving counter 203h to 8, from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol is changed 8 times ( A game state is set to be a time-saving game state (time-saving state) until the lottery of special symbols is executed eight times and the result of the eighth lottery is stopped and displayed.

Next, the small hit control process (S1705) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process (S1705). This small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 50), setting a command for executing various effects according to the small hit by the sound lamp control device 113, and setting the second specific This is a process for controlling the operation of a door solenoid 650f2 for opening and closing the prize winning opening 650a and a stopper solenoid 650c2 for varying the position of a stopper (ball stop member) 650c.

In the small winning control process, first, it is determined whether or not a small winning scenario is set (S2001). Specifically, the processes of S502 and S503 of the small winning start setting process (see FIG. 38) are executed, and it is determined whether the small winning scenario is set. In the process of S2001, if the small winning scenario is not set (S2001: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, if a small winning scenario is set (S2001: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q (S2002), and the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is a small winning It is determined whether it is time to start the opening of the scenario (S2003). For example, when the small winning scenario a is set (see FIG. 15(b)), the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so the small winning scenario counter 203q Determine if the value is 1.

In the process of S2003, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q corresponds to the opening start (if the small hit scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S2003: Yes), the process of S2004 causes the stopper (Ball stop member) 650c is set to the ball stop position (the stopper solenoid 650c2 is turned on so that the stopper 650c can be changed to the ball stop position). Then, an opening command for a small hit is set (S2005), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is a value that does not correspond to the opening start (S2003: No), then the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q corresponds to the start of the round (in the small winning scenario a If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 626 (S2006).

In the processing of S2006, when the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the start of the round (S2006: Yes), the second specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed based on the small winning scenario in the processing of S2007. (The door solenoid 650f2 is set to ON or OFF so that the door 650f of the second specific winning port 650a is in the open state or the closed state), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the operation control executed based on the small winning scenario, the operation may be controlled such that the second specific winning opening 650a opens and closes multiple times during one round of the small winning game. For example, when the small winning scenario is the small winning scenario b, the opening and closing operation of the second specific winning opening 650a is repeated for 0.1 seconds and for 0.9 seconds during one round. is set to Such operation control is executed in the process of S2007.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description is continued. In the processing of S2006, if the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to the start of the round (S2006: No), then it is determined whether or not the round end condition is established (S2008). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) win in total while the second specific winning port 650a is open, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

In the process of S2008, when it is determined that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is satisfied (S2008: Yes), the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is increased by 1 from the counter value corresponding to the end of the round. The value is updated to the subtracted value (S2009), and the process ends. If it is determined in the process of S2008 that the round end condition is satisfied, the round end condition is cleared, and it is configured not to determine that the round end condition is satisfied again in the control after the next time. there is

Here, the small winning scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the small winning counter 203q and to execute the operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value in the same manner as the big winning scenario described above. there is Therefore, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls enter the second specific prize winning port 650a and the round end condition is satisfied, that is, the round ends due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value). In the case of (closing the second specific winning opening 650a), the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is configured to be updated to the value one before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed ( It is configured so that the operation control is executed in the next small hit control process).

By doing so, operation control (for example, operation control for ending the round when a predetermined number of balls have won) that is not associated with the passage of time (update of the counter value) is performed based on the small winning scenario. It is possible to execute Therefore, as a round end condition of the second specific winning port 650a, when a predetermined time has elapsed, operation control is performed based on the small winning scenario, and when there is a predetermined number of winnings, operation control is not based on the small winning scenario. This eliminates the need to perform complicated control such as executing , thereby facilitating design and preventing a situation in which both operation controls are mixed.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description is continued. In the process of S2008, if it is determined that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is not satisfied (S2008: Yes), then the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is set to the value corresponding to the end of the round (small If it is the winning scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 1000 (S2010).

In the processing of S2010, when it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S2010: Yes), the processing of S2011 sets the second specific winning opening 650a to be closed. (the door solenoid 650f2 is turned off so that the door 650f of the second specific winning port 650a is closed), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2010, when it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to the end of the round (S2010: No), next, a small winning ending control process (S2013) is executed. . This small winning ending control process is the ending period in the small winning game, that is, the process executed during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the round of the small winning game to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. is.

Next, the small hit ending control process (S2012) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this small winning ending control process (S2012). This small winning ending control process (S2012) is a process executed in the small winning control process (see FIG. 53).

In the small winning ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (if the small winning scenario a, the counter value is 1001) (S2101). In the processing of S2101, when it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the start of ending (S2101: Yes), a small winning ending command is set (S2102), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S2101: No), then the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is the stopper (ball stop member) 650c. It is determined whether the value (counter value is 1125 in the case of a small winning scenario a) corresponding to the release of the ball stopping to be varied to the release position (S2103). In the process of S2103, if it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to ball stop release (S2103: Yes), the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is set to the release position (the stopper 650c is The stopper solenoid 650c2 is turned off (S2104) so as to change from the ball stop position to the release position, and this process is finished.

In this embodiment, there is an interval of 0.5 seconds after the second specific prize winning opening 650a is closed until the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is changed to the release position. This is the time provided for ejecting out of the second variable winning device 650 the balls other than the balls retained by the stopper (ball stopper) 650c among the balls that have won the second specific winning opening 650a. . Therefore, at the timing when the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is changed to the release position, only one ball (the ball retained by the ball stop member 650c) exists in the second variable winning device 650, and that ball It is possible to prevent other balls from obstructing the flow of the ball, and to provide a proper game.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description is continued. In the process of S2103, if it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to ball stop release (S2103: No), then the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is V passage determination It is determined whether the value corresponding to (S2105).

Here, the V passage determination indicates the timing of determining the result of the V passage processing (see FIG. 46) executed in the timer interrupt processing of main controller 110 . In this V passage time processing, the ball is in a specific area (the V discharge of the second variable winning device 650 When the passage detection switch 650e5 provided in the flow path 650e3 is passed, the V flag 203m is set to ON. That is, it is provided to determine whether or not the V flag 203m has been set to ON by the processing at the time of V passage at the timing when the V passage valid period has passed.

By doing so, it is possible to reliably perform processing based on the fact that the sphere has passed through the specific area within the V passage valid period. Note that other configurations may be used, for example, when the V flag 203m is set to ON, the next process may be performed immediately.

In the process of S2105, when it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to V passage determination (S2105: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2105, if it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to V passage determination (S2105: Yes), then determine whether the V flag 203m is set to ON (S2106).

In the processing of S2106, if it is determined that the V flag 203m is not set to ON (S2106: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203m is set to ON (S2106: Yes), then the jackpot type given to the small hit being executed (if the small hit is A, the jackpot type D (See FIG. 11(a))) to set a jackpot scenario (S2107). Then, the V flag 203m is set to OFF (S2108), the V passing time jackpot type value is cleared (S2109), and the present process is terminated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since all small winning games are set as one round games, unlike the big winning scenario that executes the operation control of the big winning game, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds, and the interval period (round However, if a small winning game having multiple rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big winning scenario used in the above-described big winning game may be set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small winning scenario is set for the period during which the small winning game is executed. You may set a small hit scenario for between. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to set the V passage valid period until one second has elapsed after the end of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period that is set across different game states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the volume of control processing can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 72. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 55, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the power-off processing of the main processing (Fig. 56 (see S2318 of )) is determined (S2202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 56, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S2315 in FIG. 56), it executes power-off processing in S2318. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2318 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2202: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2318. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2203).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2203: Yes), it will transfer to S2204 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2203: No), the process proceeds to S2208.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2204. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2318 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2203: No), and the process proceeds to S2208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2202: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S2318, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process moves to S2204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2204, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2318 is executed (see S2317 in FIG. 56). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2318 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2209), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2210), an interrupt Permission is set (S2211), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2208 is reached while the power-off flag is turned off is that the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2208: No), S2209, which is the work area clearing process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2210, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2210), interrupt permission is set. (S2211). Then, the V gate initial flag 223i is set to ON (S2212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S2209 is skipped is that when the process of S2208 is reached from S2204 via the process of S2206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2204, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the previous processing of S2301 was executed (S2301). If the time has not elapsed (S2301: No), the process proceeds to S2312 without performing the processes of S2302 to S2311. In the process of S2301, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed because S2302 to S2311 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2313 and the variable display setting process of S2314 in a short period. By executing the process of S2313 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2314 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2301 (S2301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2303 to S2314 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S2302). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2308 described later (S2303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2305 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending ball number display update process is executed (S2306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen. The settings are sent as commands to the display controller 114 . In the pending ball number display update process, the process of lighting the pending lamp (Ds1) according to the values of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223c is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2307). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing, it is monitored whether or not the frame button 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect. 22 is confirmed, the corresponding effect is set. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. A detailed description of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing will be given later with reference to FIG.

Further, for example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command is set for the display control device 114. You may By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win performance, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S2307 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2308), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2310), and the process proceeds to S2311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2308 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After completing the processing of S2310, the V counter update processing for updating the value of the V counter 223t is executed (S2311). The details of this V counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the process of S2311, the effect counter 223g is updated (S2312), and the process proceeds to S2313.

In the process of S2313, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S2313). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S2314). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S2314 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2315). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2315 (S2315: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2317), and the power-off processing is executed (S2318). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off (S2319), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2315 (S2315: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2316), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2316: No), the process returns to S2301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2316: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2313) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2313). This command determination process (S2313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S2313), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern from the main controller 110 is read. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S2401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S2401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on (S2402), the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2403), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 65) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

If no variation pattern command has been received (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S2404). When the stop type command is received (S2404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2405), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2406), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 65) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if no stop type command has been received (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received from main controller 110 (S2407). Then, when the stop command is received (S2407: Yes), the display stop command is set based on the received stop command (S2408). On the other hand, if the stop command has not been received (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S2409).

In the process of S2409, when the pending ball number command is received (S2409: Yes), the pending ball number counter of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) corresponding to the received pending ball number command is Stores the value contained in the received pending ball number command (S2410). Specifically, if the reserved ball number command received this time is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1), from the received reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 of the main controller 110 The value of the reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Thereafter, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set (S2411).

Here, the pending ball number command is when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A 64b, or the second ball entrance B 640b (start winning), or when a lottery for a special pattern is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the start winning prize is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number of the sound lamp control device 113 is processed in S2410. The value of the counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, for example, due to the influence of noise or the like, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, the start winning The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 at the time of detection or the lottery of special symbols. Further, for example, when the process of S2411 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the display control device 114, based on the order in which the received number-of-holding-balls commands for display are received, as shown in FIG. Several symbols are displayed side by side in the small area Ds1. Display of the reserved number of symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number command and the change order command received from the main control device 110 by the voice lamp control device 113. Information corresponding to the order may be included in the command for the number of reserved balls for display and transmitted to the display control device 114 . By doing so, the display control device 114 only needs to display the reserved ball number pattern based on the display reserved ball number command received from the audio lamp control device 113, so the processing load of the display control device 114 is reduced. It is possible to Also, even when the order of variation of the special symbols is not the order of starting winning, it is possible to display the number of reserved balls pattern of the first special pattern and the number of reserved balls pattern of the second special pattern side by side.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description is continued. In the processing of S2409, if the pending ball count command has not been received (S2409: No), then it is determined whether or not the V gate state command has been received from main controller 110 (S2412). Then, when the V gate state command is received (S2412: Yes), V gate command reception processing is executed (2413), and this processing ends.

Here, the V gate command reception processing (S2413) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this V gate command reception process (S2413). This V gate command reception process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. It is a process executed based on the V gate state command received from the controller 110 . By executing the V gate command reception process, it becomes possible for the sound lamp control device 113 side to grasp the operation of the V gate 650d. Also, it becomes possible to determine whether the V gate 650d is operating normally.

In the V gate command reception process, first, V gate state information based on the V gate state command received from main controller 110 is stored in V gate state storage area 223j (S2501). Here, the V gate state command received from main controller 110 is set when the state of V gate 650d is changed by V gate drive control processing (see FIG. 47) executed by main controller 110. The V gate 650d is in an open state (a guided state in which the ball can flow down the V discharge channel 650e3) or a closed state (a controlled state in which the ball cannot (difficultly) flow down the V discharge channel 650e3). A command is set to indicate which state the state is.

Next, it is determined whether the V gate initial flag 223i is set to ON (S2502). This V-gate first-time flag 223i is a flag that is set to ON in the start-up process (see FIG. 55) of the audio ramp control device 113 described above. In the processing of S2502, if it is determined that the V gate initial flag 223i is set to ON (S2502: Yes), the V gate state information stored this time indicates that the V gate 650d is in the open (induced) state. (S2503).

In the processing of S2503, if it is determined that the information (V gate state information) stored this time is information indicating that the V gate 650d is in the open (induction) state (S2503: Yes), the V gate scenario 222c is set (S2506), and the V gate first time flag 223i is set to OFF (S2507). Next, based on the set V gate scenario 222c, the V gate opening timing is stored in the opening timing storage area 223k (S2508).

That is, the series of processing from S2502 to S2508 is executed only when the V gate first time flag 223i is set to ON, that is, when the power of the audio lamp controller 113 is turned on. When the power supply of the control device 113 is turned on, sound lamp control is performed based on the V gate state command received from the main control device 110 (V gate state command set in S1403 of the V gate drive control process (see FIG. 47)). A V gate scenario 222c provided in the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the device 113 is set. The V gate scenario 222c defines an operation scenario corresponding to the V gate drive control process of the main controller 110. By setting the V gate scenario 222c, the V counter update process (see FIG. 72) described later is performed. updates the V counter 223t.

Among the operation scenarios defined in the V gate scenario 222c, the content corresponding to the value of the V counter 223t is the current operation status of the V gate 650d. Thus, by providing the V gate scenario 222c in the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to easily grasp the operation status of the V gate 650d. Further, by referring to the V gate scenario 222c, it is possible to assume the future operation status of the V gate 650d (for example, it is assumed that the V gate 650d will be in the induction state after 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds). can be done), and it is possible to execute an effect based on the assumed information. Therefore, it is possible to assume a futuristic operating situation of the movable object (V gate 650d) that affects the outcome of the game, and use the assumed information to execute a game situation (a game state that is advantageous to the player in the future). Since it is possible to execute an effect (assumed game situation effect) for notifying whether or not the game is played, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 58, the description is continued. In the processing of S2502, if the V gate first time flag 223i is not set to ON (S2502: No), or in the processing of S2503, the information stored this time (V gate state information) indicates that the V gate 650d is open. (S2503: No), it is determined whether the information stored this time matches the contents of the V-gate scenario 222c (S2504).

If it is determined in the process of S2504 that the information stored this time matches the contents of the V-gate scenario 222c (S2504: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information stored this time does not match the contents of the V gate scenario 222c (S2504: No), an error command is set (S2505), and this processing ends.

In the process of S2504, by comparing the updated contents of the V-gate scenario 222c set in S2506 and the operation status of the V-gate 650d indicated by the V-gate status command received from the main controller 110, the V-gate is normally activated. 650d is configured to be able to determine whether it is controlling the operation. By doing so, it is possible to properly determine that the V gate 650d is not under normal operation control.

In the processing of S2504, it is determined whether or not the update contents of the V gate scenario 222c set in S2506 match the operation status of the V gate 650d indicated by the V gate status command received from the main controller 110. However, for example, it may be configured to allow an error within a predetermined range.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation control contents of the main controller 110 and the V scenario update status of the sound lamp display device 113 are compared to grasp the operation status of the V gate 650d. A sensor for detecting the operation of the gate 650d may be provided, and operation information of the V gate 650d detected by the sensor may be added to grasp the operation status of the V gate 650d. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not normal operation control is being performed, and furthermore, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation control content is actually being operated. 650d is not operating normally.

In this embodiment, the V gate 650d is configured to be controlled in a constant operation at all times. When configured to change, for example, when the number of jackpots per day exceeds 10 times, or when 10 hours have passed since the pachinko machine 10 was turned on, one operation cycle of the V gate 650d (for example, 1 second in the induction state, 4 seconds in the regulation state) so that the ratio of the induction state (the state in which the V gate 650d is opened) in the control can be switched. is stored, and the V gate scenario 222c and the V counter 223t are reset at the timing when the control content is switched. With this configuration, even if the operation control contents of the V gate 650d are switched during the game, it is possible to immediately grasp the operation status of the V gate.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description is continued. In the processing of S2412, if the V gate command has not been received (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from main controller 110 (S2414). Then, when the winning information command is received (S2414: Yes), the winning command receiving process is executed (S2415), and then the process ends.

Here, the winning command reception process (S2415) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the winning command reception process (S2415). This winning command reception process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed when a winning command is received from the main controller 110. It is a process that

In the present embodiment, when the winning information based on the winning command received from the main controller 110 is the winning information indicating the small win A continuously, the omen effect, the continuous effect, and the continuous jackpot effect are configured to be executable. ing. In the winning command reception process, the setting of various flags and the setting of various counters referred to for executing the various effects described above are performed.

In the winning command reception process, first, the winning information based on the winning command received from the main controller 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2601). The winning information includes information based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and C5.

Next, it is determined whether the flag 223u during continuous production is currently set to ON (S2602), and if it is determined that the flag 223u during continuous production is set to ON (S2602: Yes), additional winning The flag 223x is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2604. On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223u is not set to ON (S2602: No), the process of S2603 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2604.

After shifting to the process of S2604, it is determined whether or not the prize information stored this time is the prize information indicating the small hit A (S2604). Here, as shown in FIG. 11(a) or FIG. 15(a), the small win A is a small win scenario a in which the second variable winning device 650 is likely to win a ball during the small win game. It is a hit type, and is a small hit type for which the above-described continuous production is performed.

In the process of S2604, if it is determined that the information indicating the small winning A is included in the stored winning information (S2604: Yes), then it is determined whether the value is already stored in the small winning consecutive number storage area 223o. It is determined (S2608). If it is determined that the value is stored in the small hit consecutive number of times storage area 223o (S2608: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not stored in the small hit consecutive number storage area 223o (S2608: No), then it is determined whether the counter value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is 3 (S2609). In the process of S2609, when it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is 3 (S2609: Yes), this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, when winning information containing information indicating a small win A is continuously received (when a small win A is won continuously), the number of consecutive times is 2 or 3. The contents of the continuous production are different in the case of the times. The specific small hit continuation counter 223n is a counter that counts the number of continuations.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the upper limit of the continuous effect is set to 3 times, the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 3, and the winning command including the information indicating the new small hit A is received. Even if the process of adding the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is not performed (S2609), for example, when setting the upper limit of the continuous effect more than 3 times, the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is further added, and a continuous effect corresponding to the counter value is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2609, the counter value of the specific small per consecutive counter 223n is not 3, that is, if it is determined that the counter value of the specific small per consecutive counter 223n is 0 to 2 (S2609: No), 1 is added to the counter value of the specific small hit continuation counter 223n (S2610), and then it is determined whether the counter value of the specific small hit continuation counter 223n is 2 (S2611).

In the process of S2611, when it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 2 (S2611: Yes), the current number of pending balls is set to the indication effect counter 223p (S2612), and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S2611, the counter value of the specific small per consecutive counter 223n is not 2, that is, if it is determined that the counter value of the specific small per consecutive counter 223n is 1 or 3 (S2611: No), This process is terminated as it is.

The process of S2611 is a process for determining that the winning information containing the information indicating the small hit A is continuously received (continuously winning the small hit A), and the specific small hit continuous counter When the counter value of 223n becomes 2, it is determined that the small win A is won continuously. In addition, the indication effect counter 223p set in S2612 is a winning command determined to have won the small win A continuously (including information indicating the second small win A among the consecutive small wins A). Command) is a counter that counts the order in which the held ball changes. The portent effect is executed until the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p reaches a predetermined value (2 in this embodiment).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2604, the winning information stored this time is not the winning information containing the information indicating the small win A (the information indicating the small win corresponding to the small win type other than the big win, the loss, or the small win A is included) (S2604: No), then it is determined whether the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 2 or more (S2605).

In the process of S2605, if it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is 2 or more (S2605: Yes), then the counter value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is stored in the small hit consecutive number of times storage area 223o (S2606), resets the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n to 0 (S2607), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2605, if it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is not 2 or more (S2605: No), the process of S2606 is skipped, and the process of S2607 described above is executed. .

In this embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of reserved balls to be stored is set to 8, there is a possibility that a plurality of reserved balls continuously winning small hits A may exist independently. Therefore, by executing the process of S2608, the variation based on the winning command that was successively won in the first small hit A is executed, and until the value of the small hit consecutive number storage area 223o is reset to 0, it Even if the winning information including the information indicating the small win A is received after that, the winning information is not reflected in the presentation. By doing so, for example, when the premonitory effect is executed based on the winning command of winning the small win A continuously at the beginning, the winning command of winning the small win A continuously next is generated. Even if it does, there is an effect that it is possible to eliminate confusion for the player without changing the content of the presentation.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, until the variation based on the winning command that wins the small win A continuously is executed, the value when the small win A wins next is produced. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, after executing a variation based on the winning command that successively wins the small win A, the next small win A plurality of counter values of the specific small winning continuation counter 223n may be configured to be able to store so that an effect based on the winning command that is successively won in A is executed. By doing so, the number of opportunities to execute the continuous performance increases, and it is possible to provide the player with many appropriate performances corresponding to the game results, thereby improving the interest in the game. There is

Returning to FIG. 57, the description is continued. In the process of S2414, if no winning command has been received (S2414: No), then it is determined whether or not a win-related command has been received from main controller 110 (S2416). Then, when the hit-related command is received (S2416: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S2417), and then the process ends.

Here, the hit-related processing (S2417) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this win-related processing (S2417). This hit-related process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113, and is executed when a hit-related command is received from main controller 110. It is a process that

When the winning-related processing is executed, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot opening command has been received (S2701). When it is determined that a jackpot opening command has been received (S2701: Yes), then a jackpot start effect process is executed (S2702), and this process ends. In the jackpot start effect processing, a process of setting a jackpot opening command for display and extracting information referred to when setting various ending commands for display used as the effect display of the final round according to the game state is executed. be.

Here, with reference to FIG. 61, the jackpot start effect processing (S2702) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this jackpot start effect processing (S2702). This jackpot start effect process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed when a jackpot opening command is received from the main controller 110. It is a process that

When the jackpot start effect process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag 223q is set to ON (S2801). This continuation flag 223q is set to ON when the lottery result of the special symbol in the first variation after the end of the big win is a small win A, and based on the fact that this continuation flag 223q is set to ON. , the above-described jackpot continuous effect is executed.

In the processing of S2801, if it is determined that the continuation flag 223q is set to ON (S2801: Yes), the V gate opening timing stored in the V gate state storage area 223j is acquired (S2807), and , From the game specification storage area 222b, the door opening timing in the small winning game of the first rotation (first variation) after the end of the big winning is acquired (S2808). Then, the end of the final round of the big win is used as the timing for making the variation of the first rotation (first variation) after the end of the big win the V passable variation (fluctuation of the special symbol in which the small winning game that can pass the V is executed). The timing is stored in the end information storage area 223r (S2809).

After that, the consecutive big hit effect flag 223s is set to ON (S2810), the continuation flag 223q is set to OFF (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2802. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the continuation flag 223q is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S2801: No), the processes of S2807 to S2811 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2802. Transition.

In S2802, a jackpot opening command for display is set based on the jackpot opening command received from the main control device 110 (S2802), then the continuous effect flag 223u is set to OFF (S2803), and the additional winning flag 223x is turned OFF. (S2804), and after resetting the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p, the information stored in the V passable variation storage area 223m is cleared (S2806). Then, this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description is continued. In the processing of S2701, if it is determined that the jackpot opening command has not been received (S2701: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2703). In the processing of S2703, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2703: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending command has been received (S2709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2703 that the round number command has been received (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h (S2704), and the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is is a value corresponding to the final round (10 for jackpot C) (S2705).

In the process of S2705, when it is determined that the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is the value corresponding to the final round (S2705: Yes), next, it is determined whether the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON. It is determined (S2706). When it is determined that the consecutive big win effect flag 223s is set to ON, the final round effect command for display is set based on the game timing information. By transmitting this final round effect command for display to the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 displays the omikuji effect shown in FIGS.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2705, if the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is not a value corresponding to the final round, or in the processing of S2706, if it is determined that the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is not set to ON. (S2706: No), the display round number command is set based on the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h (S2708), and this process ends. Although omitted in FIG. 60, even when it is determined that the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is one before the final round (9 for the jackpot C), the continuous jackpot flag effect flag 223s is set. It is determined whether it is set to ON, and if the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON, the third effect (see FIG. 32(a)) indicating that the Omikuji effect will be executed in the final round. A dedicated display round number command is set so as to be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

As described above, the various display round number commands set here are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the commands of the main processing (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 are stored. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the output process (S2302). When the display control device 114 receives various display round number commands, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Thus, in this embodiment, the current round number is determined by the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol device 81 is changed depending on whether or not the consecutive big win effect flag 223s is set. However, other configurations may be used. For example, by including information indicating the current round number in the round number command, the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h may be eliminated. .

Returning to FIG. 60, the description continues. In the processing of S2709, when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has been received (S2709: Yes), then the jackpot end effect processing is executed (S2710). The jackpot end effect processing is a process for setting the display contents to be displayed during the jackpot ending period. is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 62, the jackpot end effect processing (S2710) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this jackpot end effect processing (S2710). This jackpot ending effect process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed when a jackpot ending command is received from the main controller 110. This is the process to be performed.

When the jackpot end effect process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON (S2901). No), the jackpot normal ending command for display is set (S2902), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2901, if it is determined that the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the end timing of the final round is stored in the end information storage area 223r (jackpot It is determined whether the first rotation (first variation) after the end is the timing at which the V-passable variation occurs (S2903). The end timing of the final round is the timing at which the jackpot ending command is received. That is, it is determined whether the timing at which the process of S2903 is executed matches the timing stored in the end information storage area 223r.

In the process of S2903, if it is determined that it does not match the timing stored in the end information storage area 223r (S2903: No), set the display jackpot failure ending command, and proceed to S2905, while the end information is stored When it is determined that it matches the timing stored in the area 223r (S2903: Yes), a display jackpot success ending command is set, and the process proceeds to S2905.

When the display jackpot failure ending command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 displays small good luck or medium good luck as a result of the Omikuji effect. On the other hand, when the display jackpot success ending command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 displays Super Good Luck or Great Good Luck as a result of the Omikuji effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the end timing of the final round in the jackpot, in which the result can be arbitrarily changed (easily) by the player's game operation, is set under a predetermined condition (stored in the end information storage area 223r). The result of the continuous jackpot effect can be determined depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player can actively participate in the game by performing game operations such as intentionally shifting the end timing of the final round, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Although omitted in FIG. 62, the display content displayed during the jackpot ending period as a result of the jackpot continuous effect is the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball in addition to the determination result of the end timing of the final round described above. is also determined based on For example, when the timing at which the processing of S2903 is executed matches the timing stored in the end information storage area 223r, and when the reserved ball includes a special symbol jackpot, a super luck is selected. It is configured.

By constructing in this way, the end timing (first condition) of the final round in the jackpot can be arbitrarily changed (easily) by the player's game operation, and the player's game operation can be arbitrarily changed. It is possible to determine the result of the continuous jackpot performance depending on whether or not the lottery result (second condition) of the special symbols in the reserved ball, which is impossible (difficult), is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game, and to display a wide variety of results as the result of the continuous jackpot effect, thereby preventing the player from getting bored with the game. It has the effect of being able to

Returning to FIG. 60, the description continues. In the process of S2709, when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2709: No), then the small hit related process is executed (S2711). This small winning related process is executed when a small winning is won as a result of a special symbol lottery and the small winning game is executed.

Here, with reference to Drawing 63, small hit related processing (S2711) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing this small hit related process (S2711). This small winning related process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113, and a command related to small winning from main controller 110 (small winning It is a process that is executed when an opening command, a small winning ending command, a door passing command, a V passing command) is received.

When the small hit related process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit opening command is received (S3001). Here, when it is determined that the small winning opening command is received (S3001: Yes), small winning start effect processing is executed (S3002), and then this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the small hit start effect processing (S3002) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing small winning start effect processing (S3002). This small winning start production process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small winning. Along with setting a small winning opening command for display corresponding to the production display to be, the processing of setting and updating various flags or various counters referred to when executing continuous production is executed.

When the small winning start effect processing is executed, first, a small winning effect pattern is selected from the small winning effect pattern selection table based on the received small winning opening command (S3101). Specifically, based on the received small winning opening command, the small winning type to be executed this time is determined, and a small winning performance pattern is selected from the small winning performance pattern selection table 222h. In the small hit effect pattern selection table 222h, as shown in FIG. 19(a), in addition to the small win type, the additional winning flag 223x, the continuous effect flag 223u, and the small win of this time are the small wins that can pass V. A small winning effect pattern is selected based on the determination result.

Next, a display small winning opening command corresponding to the selected effect pattern is set (S3102), and then it is determined whether the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 1 or more (S3103). Here, when it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is smaller than 1 (S3103: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production is 1 or more (S3103: Yes), the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production is subtracted by 1 (S3104), and then the counter 223v during continuous production is 0 (S3105). Here, when it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is not 0 (S3105: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3105, if it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 0 (S3105: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the continuous effect ends with the small hit of this time, the continuous effect is being performed. The flag 223u is set to OFF (S3106), the additional prize winning flag 223x is set to OFF (S3107), the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is reset to 0 (S3108), and stored in the V passable variation storage area 223m. The stored value is cleared (S3109), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description is continued. In the process of S3001, when it is determined that the small winning opening command has not been received (S3001: No), it is then determined whether the small winning ending command has been received (S3003). Here, when it is determined that the small hitting ending command is received (S3003: Yes), based on the received small hitting ending command, the small hitting ending command for display is set (S3004), and this processing is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the small winning ending command is not received (S3003: No), it is then determined whether the door passing command is received (S3005). Here, if it is determined that a door passage command has been received (S3005: Yes), a display door passage command is set based on the received door passage command (S3006), and this processing ends.

Here, when the display door passing command is set and transmitted to the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of winning prizes during the small hit, and the voice output device 226 moves the ball to the third position. 2. A notification sound is output to notify that the variable winning device 650 has won. It should be noted that, based on the determination result that the current small win is a V-passable small win, the manner of display by the third symbol display device 81 or notification by the voice output device 226 may be changed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect (display, notification) during the small win, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3005 that the door passage command has not been received (S3005: No), then it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received (S3007). Here, if it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S3007: Yes), the V passing command for display is set based on the received V passing command (S3008), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (S3007: No), this processing ends.

Here, when the V passing command for display is set and transmitted to the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect display indicating that the big win is executed after the end of the small win, The audio output device 226 outputs a sound congratulating the player. Even if the V passing command for display is set, it may be configured such that the big win is suddenly executed after the small win is finished without intentionally executing the effect indicating the fact to the player. . By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2314) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2314). This variable display setting process (S2314) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process (S2314), first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3201). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S3201: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S3207. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S3201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned off (S3202). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3203).

Then, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3204). In the process of S3204, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, variation pattern selection processing is executed (S3205). The details of this variation pattern selection process (S3205) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. FIG.

After the processing of S3205 is completed, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S3206). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f provided in the RAM 233 is set to ON (S3207). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not ON (that is, is OFF) (S3207: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S3207: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S3208). The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3209).

Next, based on the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110, the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set (S3210), and the process proceeds to S3211.

In the processing of S3210, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S3211). , the process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, the variation pattern selection process (S3205) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing this variation pattern selection process (S3205). This fluctuation pattern selection process (S3205) is a process executed in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

When the variation pattern selection process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON (S3301). Here, if it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON (S3301: Yes), then continuous effect variation pattern selection processing is executed (S3305), and then this processing is terminated. The continuous effect variation pattern selection process will be detailed later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223u is not set to ON (S3301: No), then it is determined whether the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is greater than 2 ( S3302).

In the processing of S3302, if it is determined that the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is not greater than 2 (2 or less) (S3302: No), the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type obtained in the processing of S3203. A variation pattern is selected from the selection table 222a (S3303). In addition, the processing of S3303 is performed when the continuous effect flag 223u is not set to ON and the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is 2 or less, that is, the small hit A is included in the stored winning information. This process is executed when there is no winning information that has been won consecutively.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3302, when it is determined that the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is greater than 2 (S3302: Yes), portent variation pattern selection processing is executed (S3304), and then this processing is terminated. .

Here, the counter value of the omen effect counter 223p is set to the number of pending balls at that point in time when the winning command including the information corresponding to the small win A is received twice consecutively (Fig. 59, S2612). Therefore, when it is determined that the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is 2 at the timing when the variation pattern selection process is executed, the first (first) small winning A among the consecutive small winnings A Timing to select a variation pattern based on, that is, timing at which continuous production can be executed.

Further, if the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is greater than 2, the state before the variation corresponding to the continuous small wins A is executed, that is, the stored winning information contains the continuous small wins. It shows a state in which winning information that a win A is won is included, and an indication variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern capable of executing an indication effect as a variation pattern is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p contains the information corresponding to the small hit A, when the winning command is received twice in succession, the number of pending balls at that time is set. However, other configurations may be used. For example, based on the number of held balls at the time when the conditions for setting the counter value of the omen effect counter 223p are satisfied, until the continuous effect can be executed (variation corresponding to the first small win A among the consecutive small wins A (until the process of selecting a pattern is executed) is set to the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p, and the portent effect can be executed until the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p becomes 0. .

Next, referring to FIG. 67, the precursor variation pattern selection process (S3304) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing this precursor variation pattern selection process (S3304). This portent variation pattern selection process (S3304) is a process executed in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is in a state where the portent effect can be executed ( In a state where the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is greater than 2), a process for setting the portent effect to be executed is executed.

When the portent variation pattern selection process is executed, first, a variation pattern is selected from the portent effect variation pattern selection table 222i based on the variation pattern type obtained by the processing of S3203 of FIG. 65 (S3401). Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern selected in the process of S3401 is SW effect (S3402).

Here, when it is determined that the selected variation pattern has a SW effect (S3402: Yes), the portent effect is selected based on the portent effect selection table 222d (S3403), and the SW effective time 2 is set (S3404). , S3405. Various display modes to be displayed in the small area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 are defined in the portent effect selection table 222d. The display mode is appropriately set based on the counter value (see FIG. 17(c)).

On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if it is determined that the selected variation pattern does not have SW effect (S3402: No), the process of S3403 to S3404 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3405, the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is subtracted by 1 (S3405).

Next, it is determined whether the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is 2 (S3406), and if it is determined that the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is 2 (S3406: Yes), then the current number of pending balls is greater than 6 (S3407). In the process of S3407, when it is determined that the number of currently held balls is greater than 6 (S3407: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON (S3408), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that the counter value of the omen effect counter 223p is not 2 (S3406: No), or in the process of S3407, the current number of pending balls is not greater than 6 (6 or less) If so (S3407: No), this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the current variation pattern is selected, the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is subtracted (S3405), and when the subtracted counter value becomes 2 (S3406: Yes), that is, when the next fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first small hit A among the continuous small hits A, whether or not to turn on the continuous effect flag 223u based on the current number of pending balls have decided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, continuous effect variation pattern selection processing (S3305) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3305). This continuous production variation pattern selection process (S3305) is a process executed in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is in a state where continuous production can be executed. This is a process for setting a continuous effect to be executed (in a state where the continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON).

Here, the outline of the processing related to the continuous effect performed in this embodiment will be described. First, based on the winning command received from the main control device 110, the target range of continuous production (variation number of special symbols and the number of small winning games) and the target period (variation time of special symbols and small winning game time ) are calculated (assumed) in advance. Next, a small winning game in which V passage is possible and its variation are determined (V passage possible variation determination) within a range to be continuously produced.

Then, the variation pattern type (variation time of the special symbol) included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the range to be subjected to continuous performance, and the continuous performance based on the determination result of the V passable variation determination Select the production content (variation pattern) of, furthermore, based on the small winning opening command received from the main control device 110, the range to be subjected to continuous production, and the determination result of V passable fluctuation determination, continuous production The contents of the production during the small win game in the middle are selected.

By doing so, it is possible to execute a series of performances that are associated with the special symbol variations and the small winning game a plurality of times.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is configured to differ according to the number of pending balls, if the number of pending balls changes during continuous production execution (additional winning occurs ), there is a possibility that the main controller 110 will transmit a variation pattern command indicating a content different from the previously calculated (assumed) content (the variation time of the special symbol).

Therefore, if the previously calculated (assumed) contents (variation time of the special symbol) and the variation pattern type (variation time of the special symbol) included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 are different, continuous Since there is a possibility that the performance content of the performance and the actual game content (V passable fluctuation determination) are different, processing for replacing the content of the continuous performance is executed.

By doing so, the content (variation time of the special symbol) that was calculated (assumed) in advance and the information included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 (variation time of the special symbol) were different. However, by replacing the contents of the continuous presentation, there is an effect that a comfortable continuous presentation can be provided.

In addition, by using a configuration in which the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol does not change according to the number of pending balls, the previously calculated (assumed) contents (variation time of the special symbol) and the main controller 110 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation different from the variation pattern type (variation time of special symbol) included in the variation pattern command received from.

Returning to FIG. 68, the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3305) will be described. When the continuous effect variation pattern selection process is executed, first, it is determined whether the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON (S3501). It is a flag that is set to ON when the continuous performance type to be referred to is selected, and is for preventing the continuous performance type from being reselected during one continuous performance.

In the processing of S3501, if it is determined that the continuous effect type selection completion flag 223w is not set to ON (S3501: No), that is, if the continuous effect type referred to in the current continuous effect is not selected, Continuous effect type selection processing is executed (S3502), and then the process proceeds to S3503. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON (S3501: Yes), the process of S3502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3503.

Here, the continuous effect type selection process (S3502) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the continuous effect type selection process (S3502). This continuous effect type selection process (S3502) is a process executed in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and each variation during the continuous effect This is a process for setting the continuous effect type referred to when selecting the variation pattern corresponding to .

When the continuous performance type selection process is executed, first, the value stored in the small winning continuous number storage area 223o is set to the continuous performance counter 223v (S3601), and the value of the small winning continuous number storage area 223o is cleared. (S3602). After that, V passable variation determination processing is executed (S3603), and the process proceeds to S3604. The V passable variation determination process is a process for determining a variation in which a small hit that allows a V pass is performed in each variation in which a continuous effect is performed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the V passable variation determination process (S3603) executed by MPU 221 in sound ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the V passable variation determination process (S3603). This V passable variation determination process (S3603) is a process executed in the continuous effect type selection process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113. FIG.

When the V passable variation determination process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2 (S3701). Here, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production is 2 (S3701: Yes), based on the information stored in the game specification storage area 222b, the fluctuation of this time and the next time (two fluctuations) (S3702), and then proceeds to S3704.

Here, a detailed description will be given of the processing executed in S3702. When the continuous production flag 223u is set to ON in S3408 of FIG. 67, continuous production variation pattern selection processing is executed (S3301 of FIG. 66: Yes). Then, a continuous effect type selection process is executed in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3502 in FIG. 68), and a V passable change determination process is executed in the process (S3603 in FIG. 69). This V passing variable variation determination process is a process that is executed only when the continuous effect variation pattern selection process is first executed (the continuous effect type that is skipped when the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON). This is a process executed in the selection process).

Therefore, in the processing of S3701, the determined counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is the value set in S3601 of FIG. Become. That is, in the process of S3701, when it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2, the current continuous effect is an effect that is executed over two fluctuations. When it is determined that the counter value of the middle counter 223v is not 2 (is 3), the current continuous effect is performed over 3 variations.

Therefore, in the process of S3702, which is executed when it is determined that the value of the counter 223v during continuous production is 2 in the process of S3701, the V passable variation is determined for the variation of two variations (this time, next time). to get the information to Here, in the process of S3702, the opening timing of the door 650f in the small win A and the next variation pattern (variation time) are acquired from the game specification storage area 222b. The current variation pattern (variation time) is extracted from the variation pattern type obtained in S3203 of FIG.

Also, in the present embodiment, as the next variation pattern (variation time), it is assumed that a new winning command is not received (there is no addition of the number of pending balls) until the next variation pattern is selected. Although it is configured to acquire a variation pattern, other configurations may be employed. For example, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is also possible to acquire a variation pattern that is assumed even when the number of held balls is added.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description continues. In the process of S3701, when it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is not 2 (is 3) (S3701: No), based on the information stored in the game specification storage area 222b, this time and The opening timing of the door 650f is acquired based on the fluctuations of the next time and the next time (three fluctuations) (S3703), and then the process proceeds to S3704. That is, in addition to the processing of S3702 described above, the variation pattern (variation time) of the next time (the third variation) is acquired from the game specification storage area 222b.

Next, in S3704, the V gate opening timing stored in the opening timing storage area 223k is acquired (S3704), and it is determined whether the V passable fluctuation is the current fluctuation (S3705). Here, a detailed description will be given of the processing executed in S3705.

In the process of S3705, based on the information acquired in S3702 or S3703 and the information acquired in S3704, it is determined whether the V passable variation is the current variation. Specifically, from this variation pattern (for example, special variation C: variation time 4 seconds) and the door 650f opening timing of small hit A (2.5 seconds to 4 seconds from the start of small hit A) (Fig. 17 ( See a)), in this variation, it is calculated that the door 650f is opened 6.5 to 8 seconds after the start of the variation. Then, from the next fluctuation pattern (for example, special fluctuation B: fluctuation time 5.5 seconds) and the opening timing of the door 650f of the small hit A (2.5 seconds to 4 seconds from the start of the small hit A) (Fig. 17 (a )), in the next fluctuation, it is calculated that the door 650f will be opened 18 to 19.5 seconds after the start of the current fluctuation.

Then, the period during which the door 650f is opened due to the current fluctuation and the next fluctuation described above is compared with the period during which the V gate 650d is opened stored in the opening timing storage area 223k, and each period satisfies the predetermined conditions. If the condition is satisfied, it is determined that the variation can pass through V. The predetermined condition is a condition that the door 650f is opened at a timing when the V-gate 650d can be passed, taking into account the time required for the ball that has won the door 650f to pass through the V-gate 650d. Specifically, the ball that has won the door 650f is retained by a stopper (ball stopping member) 650c, and the motion control of the stopper (ball stopping member) 650c opens the V gate one second after the door 650f is closed. It is configured to reach 650d. Specifically, 0.5 seconds after the door 650f is closed, the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is changed to the release position, and the ball that has been retained by the stopper (ball stop member) 650c starts flowing down. and then reaches the V gate 650d 0.5 seconds later.

Therefore, when the V gate 650d is in the open state (induction state) after one second from the end of the period in which the door 650f is opened, the fluctuation is determined as the V passable fluctuation. In this embodiment, the ball won by the door 650f due to the small win A is retained by the stopper (ball stop member) 650c, so the small win A starts regardless of when the door 650f wins. It is possible to reach the V gate 650d after a certain period of time has elapsed (5 seconds after the start of the small win), and it is possible to improve the determination accuracy of the V passable fluctuation. Therefore, by making the content of the continuous effect suitable for the actual game result, it is possible to prevent the effect that gives the player a sense of distrust.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the stopper 650c is provided, but the stopper 650c may be omitted. When adopting such a configuration, when determining the V passable fluctuation, the open period of the door 650f and the open period of the V gate 650d (the period in which the induction state is established) are compared, and the open period of the door 650f is compared. It is preferable to execute an effect suggesting the ratio of the period during which the ball can pass through the V gate 650d (the ratio of the period during which the ball winning during the period when the door 650f is open can pass through the V gate 650d). . By doing so, the player can grasp the possibility (expectation) of passing through the V gate 650d from the content of the presentation, and can be happy and sad about the result of the game. There is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect for performing

In addition, by using such a configuration, the timing of reaching the V gate 650d becomes random due to ball play of the ball that has won the door 650f. There is an effect that it is possible to make things difficult and to provide fair games to the players.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description continues. In the process of S3705, if it is determined that the V passable change is the current change (S3705: Yes), "this time" is set in the V passable change storage area 223m (S3706), and this process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3705 that the V passable variation is not the current variation (S3705: No), then it is determined whether the V passable variation is the next variation (S3707).

In the processing of S3707, if it is determined that the V passable variation is the next variation (S3707: Yes), "next time" is set in the V passable variation storage area 223m (S3708), and this processing ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3707 that the V passable variation is not the next variation (S3707: No), the V passable variation storage area 223m is set to "next time", and this processing ends ( S3709). In addition, in the processing of S3701, if it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2, in the processing of S3707, if it is determined that the V passable variation is not the next variation, the processing of S3709 is performed. This processing ends without execution.

Although not shown in the figure, if there is no variation determined as a V passable variation in the variations for which the continuous effect is executed, this process is terminated without setting the V passable variation storage area 223m.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the V passable variation determination process executed in the special symbol variation pattern selection process uses a configuration that determines the special symbol variation that is a small hit that can be passed through V. there is That is, the V passable variation determination process described in the present embodiment includes the function of determining whether the small hit corresponding to the special figure variation to be executed this time is V passable, and the stored winning information A function to determine whether there is a small hit that can pass V in (entrance information), and if there is a small hit that can pass V, when (after how many rotations) will the special pattern variation corresponding to that small hit It has a function to determine whether it will be executed.

It is not necessary for one process to have all of the functions described above, and separate processes may have each function.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description continues. After the V passable variation determination process is executed in S3603, next, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2 (whether the current continuous effect is a continuous effect straddling 2 fluctuations) ( S3604). Here, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous effect is 2 (S3604: Yes), based on the contents stored in the V passable variation storage area 223m by the V passable variation determination process described above, to determine whether the V-passable variation is "this time" (S3605).

In the process of S3605, when it is determined that the V passable variation is not "this time" (S3605: No), as the continuous effect type, the 2 continuous effect B is selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e (S3606), Next, the process proceeds to S3614. On the other hand, in the process of S3605, if it is determined that the V passable variation is "this time" (S3605: Yes), as the continuous effect type, select 2 continuous effect A from the continuous effect type selection table 222e (S3607 ), and the continuation flag 223q is set to ON (S3608). Then, the process proceeds to S3614.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3604, if it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is not 2 (is 3) (S3604: No), then it is determined whether the V passable variation is "this time". It is determined (S3609). Here, when it is determined that the V passable variation is "this time" in the process of S3609 (S3609: Yes), as the continuous effect type, the 3 continuous effect A is selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e (S3610 ), the continuation flag 223q is set to ON (S3608), and the process proceeds to S3614.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3609 that the V passable variation is not "this time" (S3609: No), then it is determined whether the V passable variation is "next time" (S3611). Here, when it is determined that the V passable variation is "next time" (S3611: Yes), as the continuous effect type, the 3 continuous effect B is selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e (S3612), and the continuation flag is selected. 223q is turned on (S3608), and the process proceeds to S3614. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V passable variation is not "next time" (S3611: No), as the continuous effect type, the 3 continuous effect C is selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e (S3612), and the process proceeds to S3614. do. Next, after executing the processing of S3606 or S3608, the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON, and this processing ends.

Although not shown in the figure, if there is no variation determined to be V-passable in the variation for which the continuous effect is executed, since nothing is stored in the V-passable variation storage area 223m, the continuous effect type is selected. This process ends without

Returning to FIG. 68, the description continues. In the process of S3503, it is determined whether or not the additional winning flag 223x is set to ON (S3503). Here, if it is determined that the additional winning flag 223x is set to ON (S3503: Yes), based on the variation pattern acquired in S3203, the continuous production variation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g, variation A pattern is selected (S3504), the SW effective time 1 is set (S3506), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3503, if it is determined that the additional winning flag 223x is not set to ON (S3503: No), based on the variation pattern acquired in S3203, from the continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f, A variation pattern is selected (S3505), SW effective time 1 is set (S3506), and this process is terminated.

Although not shown, if the continuous effect type is not selected, that is, if there is no change that is determined to be V-passable in the variation for which the continuous effect is executed, the same processing as S3303 in FIG. 66 is performed. executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (small hit) in succession, it is possible (easy) to pass the ball through the specific area. is determined, and based on the determination result, a series of effects (continuous) can be executed using a continuous small winning period and a variable display period of special symbols corresponding to the small winning. By configuring in this way, for example, the first small win is a small win in which it is impossible (difficult) to pass the ball through the specific area, and the second small win is a small win that allows the ball to pass through the specific area. In the case of a possible (easy) small win, as a production corresponding to the first small win, it is based on the fact that the current small win is an impossible (difficult) small win to pass the ball through a specific area. It is possible to execute an effect (for example, chance continuation effect) based on the fact that the next small win is a small win in which the ball can (easily) pass through a specific area instead of the effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the frequency of executing the performance based on the small win that cannot provide the player with an advantageous game state (it is difficult), it is possible to suppress the performance that the player feels dissatisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player gets bored with the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2307) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2307). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2307) is processing executed in the main processing (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Alternatively, it is a process of managing the time for validating the operation of the frame right button 22b) and setting a display command when the frame button 22 is operated within the valid time.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the switch valid time 1 is greater than 0 (S3801). Here, if it is determined in the process of S3801 that the SW valid time 1 is not longer than 0 (it is 0) (S3801: No), then it is checked whether the SW valid time 2 is longer than 0. It discriminates (S3806).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3801 that the SW effective time 1 is greater than 0 (S3801: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the SW effective time 1 (S3802), and both SW (frame left button 22a and frame right button 22b) is pressed (S3803). Here, if it is determined that both SW are pressed (S3803: Yes), a display switching advance notice SW pressing command is set (S3804), the SW effective time 1 is reset to 0 (S3805), and this processing is performed. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3803 that both SW are not pressed (S3803: No), this process ends.

Next, in the process of S3806, if it is determined that the SW effective time 2 is greater than 0 (S3806: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the SW effective time 2 (S3807), and either SW (frame left button 22a or It is determined whether any of the frame right buttons 22b) is pressed (S3808). Here, if it is determined that one of the SW is pressed (S3808: Yes), a display addition notice SW pressing command is set (S3809), the SW valid time 2 is reset to 0 (S3810), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3808 that neither SW has been pressed (S3808: No), this process ends. Also, in the processing of S3806, if it is determined that the SW valid time is not longer than 0 (it is 0) (S3806: No), this processing ends.

In this embodiment, the SW valid time 1 is set while the continuous effect is being executed, while the SW valid time 2 is set while the precursor effect is being executed. It is configured as follows. Therefore, since the effective time of both switches does not overlap, when the effective time of one switch is set, the processing related to the effective time of the other is skipped. If there is a possibility that each SW valid time is set, the processing of each SW valid time should be executed.

Next, the V counter update process (S2311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this V counter update process (S2311). This V counter update process (S2311) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and refers to the V gate scenario 222c. This is the process of updating the V counter 223t used to grasp the operation status of the .

When the V counter 223t is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the V gate scenario 222c is set (S3901). Here, if it is determined that the V-gate scenario 222c is not set (S3901: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V gate scenario 222c is set (S3901: Yes), then it is determined whether the counter value of the V counter 223t is 5000 (S3902).

In the processing of S3902, if it is determined that the counter value of the V counter 223t is 5000 (S3902: Yes), the counter value of the V counter 223t is set to 1 (S3904), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3902 that the counter value of the V counter 223t is not 5000 (S3902: No), the counter value of the V counter 223 is incremented by 1 (S3903), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the V-counter updating process in this embodiment, the V-gate scenario 222c defined for the V-gate 650d that repeats a fixed operation at five-second intervals is referred to. 650d, when the counter value of the V counter 223t reaches 5000 (5 seconds), the counter value is incremented from 1 again. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of information defined in the V gate scenario 222c.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 90. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 is operated so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S4001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S4001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S4102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S4103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S4104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S4002 in FIG. 73) (S4105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S4001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. A high processing performance can be maintained, and a diversified or complicated production can be easily executed using the auxiliary production unit.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 includes all the remaining boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S4101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S4101. and the processing of S4102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S4103 to S4105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S4103 to S4105 without performing the processes of S4101 and S4102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4003, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S4005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 88A), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S6302 in FIG. 88A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)) performs the simple command determination processing (see FIG. 75(b) S4308) and simple display setting processing (see S4309 in FIG. 75(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A 64b, or the second ball entrance B 640b (start winning), When an instruction to start a variable performance is received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when a variable pattern command for display is received, the variable image is immediately displayed during the period of the variable performance when the power is turned on. It can be displayed and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S4005, interrupt permission is set (S4006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S4006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301). If it is off (S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S4302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S4302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85. FIG.

In the display setting process (S4303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S4304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S4303) or the simple display setting processing (S4309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S4306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S4304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S4305), 24, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing object buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S4307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the third symbol display device A stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S4308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S4309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S4304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85, details of the command determination process (S4302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S4402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S4403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S4404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S4405) and returns to the processing of S4401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S4405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). FIG. 77(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S4501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S4501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4504), both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S4505)), and this processing ends.

By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77(a)), in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S4504, the display data table buffer 233d is set by the process of S4501. The drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the displayed variable display data table, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specified. Transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process, and image data of sprites required in the set variable display data table are stored in advance. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S4503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S4404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S4406), If there is a display variation type command (S4406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4407), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the stop type command process (S4407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop class command processing, first, the stop class table corresponding to the stop class information (shown by the stop class command for display) is determined (S4601), and the stop class table and the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b) ) is executed, and the value of the stop symbol counter updated each time is executed to finally set the stop symbol after the variable effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S4602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to OFF (S4603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S4602. In the above-described task processing (S4304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S4602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S4603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S4601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S4602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S4406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an advance notice effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4408), If there is a hit-related command (S4408: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S4409), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the win-related command process (S4409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing. This win-related command processing includes the win-related commands (jackpot opening command for display, number of rounds for display command, final round command for display, jackpot interval command for display, jackpot ending command for display, display Small winning opening command for display, small winning ending command for display, door passing command for display, V passing command for display) is a process for executing processing corresponding to.

In the hit-related command process (S4409), first, in the unprocessed new command, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot opening command for display (S4701), and if there is a jackpot opening command for display (S4701: Yes) , the jackpot opening command process is executed (S4702), and the process proceeds to S4703.

Here, the details of the jackpot opening command process (S4702) will be described with reference to FIG. 79(a). FIG. 79(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot opening command process (S4702). This jackpot opening command process (S4702) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the jackpot opening command process, first, the jackpot opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). After that, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set jackpot opening display data table (S3003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3005), the big hit opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S4701 that there is no jackpot opening command for display among the unprocessed new commands (S4701: No), the process of S4702 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4703. In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S4703), and if there is a display round number command (S4703: Yes), the round number command process is executed. (S4704), and the process proceeds to S4705.

Details of the round number command process (S4704) will now be described with reference to FIG. 79(b). FIG. 79(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing (S4704). This round number command process (S4704) is for executing the process corresponding to the round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the round number command process, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4901). After that, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S4902). Then, based on the set number of rounds display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S4903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S4905), the round number command processing is terminated, and the win-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S4703 that there is no display round number command among the unprocessed new commands (S4703: No), the process of S4704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4705. In the processing of S4705, it is determined whether or not there is a final round command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4705), and if there is a final round command for display (S4705: Yes), final round command processing is executed. (S4706), and the process proceeds to S4707.

Details of the final round command processing (S4706) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80(a) is a flow chart showing the final round command processing (S4706). This final round command processing (S4706) is for executing processing corresponding to the final round command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the final round command process, first, the final round display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). After that, the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5002). Then, based on the set final round display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5005), the final round command processing is terminated, and the win-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S4705 that there is no final round command for display among the unprocessed new commands (S4705: No), the process of S4706 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4707. In the processing of S4707, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot interval command for display in the unprocessed commands (S4707), and if there is a jackpot interval command for display (S4707: Yes), the jackpot interval command processing is executed. (S4708), and the process proceeds to S4709.

Here, with reference to FIG.80(b), the detail of big-hit interval command processing (S4708) is demonstrated. FIG. 80(b) is a flow chart showing the jackpot interval command process (S4708). This jackpot interval command process (S4708) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot interval command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the jackpot interval command process, first, the jackpot interval display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot interval display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5102), and based on the jackpot interval display data table thus set, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5105), the big hit interval command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. In the processing of S4707, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot interval command among the unprocessed new commands (S4707: No), the processing of S4708 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4709. In the process of S4709, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot ending command for display in the unprocessed commands (S4709), and if there is a jackpot ending command for display (S4709: Yes), the jackpot ending command process is executed. Then (S4710), the process proceeds to S4711.

Here, the details of the jackpot ending command process (S4710) will be described with reference to FIG. 81(a). FIG. 81(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending command process (S4710). This jackpot ending command process (S4710) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the jackpot ending command process, first, a jackpot ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). After that, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S5202). Then, based on the set jackpot ending display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5205), the big hit ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S4709 that there is no display jackpot ending command among the unprocessed new commands (S4709: No), the process of S4710 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4711. In the processing of S4711, in the unprocessed commands, it is determined whether or not there is a small per opening command for display (S4711), and if there is a small per opening command for display (S4711: Yes), a small per opening command The process is executed (S4712), and the process proceeds to S4713.

Here, with reference to Drawing 81 (b), the details of small hit opening command processing (S4712) are explained. FIG.81(b) is a flowchart which shows a small hit opening command process (S4712). This small winning opening command processing (S4712) is for executing the processing corresponding to the small winning opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

In the small winning opening command process, first, the small winning opening display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the small winning opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302), and based on the set small winning opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5303). ). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5305), the small winning opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning related command process.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S4711 that there is no display small winning opening command among the unprocessed new commands (S4711: No), the process of S4712 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4713. In the processing of S4713, in the unprocessed commands, it is determined whether or not there is a small hitting ending command for display (S4713), and if there is a small hitting ending command for display (S4713: Yes), a small hitting ending command The process is executed (S4714), and the process proceeds to S4715.

Here, with reference to FIG. 82(a), the details of the small winning ending command process (S4714) will be described. FIG. 82(a) is a flow chart showing the small winning ending command process (S4714). This small hitting ending command processing (S4714) is for executing the processing corresponding to the small hitting ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

In the small winning ending command process, first, the small winning ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). After that, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S5402). Then, based on the set small winning ending display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5405), the small hit ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. In the processing of S4713, when it is determined that there is no small winning ending command for display among the unprocessed new commands (S4713: No), the processing of S4714 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4715. In the processing of S4715, it is determined whether or not there is a display door passage command among the unprocessed commands (S4715), and if there is a display door passage command (S4715: Yes), door passage command processing is executed. Then (S4716), the process proceeds to S4717.

Details of the door passage command process (S4716) will now be described with reference to FIG. 82(b). FIG. 82(b) is a flow chart showing the door passing command process (S4716). This door passage command processing (S4716) is for executing processing corresponding to the door passage command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the door passing command process, first, the door passing display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). After that, the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5502). Then, based on the set door passage display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5505), the door passage command processing is terminated, and the win-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S4715 that there is no display door passing command among the unprocessed new commands (S4715: No), the process of S4716 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4717. In the processing of S4717, it is determined whether or not there is a display V passage command among the unprocessed commands (S4717), and if there is a display V passage command (S4717: Yes), V passage command processing is executed. (S4718), and the process ends.

Details of the V passage command processing (S4718) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing V pass command processing (S4718). This V passing command processing (S4718) is for executing processing corresponding to the V passing command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the V passing command processing, first, the V passing display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). After that, the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5602). Then, based on the set V passage display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5605), the V passage command processing is terminated, and the win-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S4717 that there is no display V passing command among the unprocessed new commands (S4717: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S4408, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S4408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a SW-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4410), and if the SW-related command is If there is (S4410: Yes), SW-related command processing is executed (S4411), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the SW-related command processing (S4411) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing SW-related command processing. This SW-related command process is a process for executing a process corresponding to the SW-related commands (both SW pressing command for switching display, advance notice SW pressing command for additional display) received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the SW-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a switching display both SW pressing command among unprocessed commands (S5701). In order to execute (display) the both SW pressing display effects, the process proceeds to S5702.

In the process of S5702, the both SW pressing display data table corresponding to the switching display both SW pressing command is determined, and switching is set in the display data table buffer 233d from the pointer value of the switching timing (S5702). Then, the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S5703), and the process proceeds to S5704.

By the processing of S5702, the both SW pressing display data table corresponding to the switching display both SW pressing command is synthesized with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, thereby easily setting the advance notice effect. be able to. It should be noted that, when synthesizing, the display contents specified in the both SW pressing display data table are added to each address after the address corresponding to the switching timing (the value of the pointer 233f). . That is, the display contents after the switching timing are specified for each elapsed time in the both SW pressing display data tables. By configuring in this manner, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently than in the case where addresses for all the fluctuation times are prepared in both SW depression display data tables.

In the process of S5701, if it is determined that there is no switching display dose SW pressing command among unprocessed commands (S5701: No), the process proceeds to S5704.

In the process of S5704, it is determined whether or not there is an additional display announcement SW pressing command among unprocessed commands (S5704). In the process of S5704, if there is an additional display advance notice SW press command (S5704: Yes), the process proceeds to S5705 in order to execute (display) the notice SW push effect.

In the process of S5705, the advance notice SW depression display data table corresponding to the additional display advance notice SW depression command is determined, and additionally set in the display data table buffer 233d from the current pointer value (S5705). Then, the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S5706), and this processing ends.

By the processing of S5705, the advance notice SW push-down display data table corresponding to the advance notice SW push-down command for additional display is synthesized with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, so that the advance notice SW push-down effect can be easily produced. can be set. When synthesizing, the display content defined in the advance notice SW pressing display data table is added to each address after the address (value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the effect currently being executed (displayed). is configured as That is, the display contents are defined for each elapsed time in the advance notice SW pressing display data table. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily add and display the advance notice SW depression effect from the time when the notice SW depression command for the additional infant is notified.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S4410, if it is determined that there is no SW-related command (S4410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4412), and the back image change command is determined. If there is a command (S4412: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S4413), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the back image change command process (S4413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6303) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S5801). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back face A, back face B), the back face image discrimination flag corresponding to the back face image type indicated by the back face image change command is turned on, and the other back faces are turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the image type is set to off (S5802), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S5801 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S5802. . Then, if the specified back image type is back B, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Then, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image of a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in task processing (S4304), if it is specified to display either back face A or back face B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image discrimination set in S5802 is performed. From the flag, the type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the lapse of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S4412, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S4412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4414). Otherwise (S4414: Yes), the error command process is executed (S4415), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the error command processing (S4415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). FIG. 85(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S5901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S5902). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S5901, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S5902, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process of S5902 sets on error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4414 that there is no error command (S4414: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4416), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

In the process of S4401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes ), and the processing of S4402 to S4416 is executed again. Then, the processing of S4401 to S4416 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. ), the command determination process is terminated.

The simple command determination process (S4308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) executed in this case, the display data table corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4501. In addition, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image required in this case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, details of the display setting process (S4303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 86, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6001). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S6002 to S6004 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S6005. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S6001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S6002), S6003-S6004 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S6003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S6004).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87(a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S6101).

In the task processing (S4304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S6101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S6004), or if it is determined in the process of S6003 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S6003: No), then the process proceeds to S6005.

In S6005, pointer update processing is executed (S6005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 87(b). FIG. 87(b) is a flow chart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6201). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S6201, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S6202). As a result, if it is End information (S6202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6203). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S6204), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S6205), and this processing is terminated. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S6203, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S6203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S6206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S6202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 86, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6006). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S6006 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S6008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S6008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S6009).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S6009: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S6010), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6011). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON in the ON state (S6014), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6015), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S4304), from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, from the last stop design determination flag set by S6015, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6009, if the fixed display flag is ON (S6009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S6016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6016: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S6017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6018). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6021), the process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is completed, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the third pattern display device 81 automatically displays the demonstration effect. You can set the drawing contents so that is displayed.

In the process of S6016, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S6016: No), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the simple display setting process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, the image of the power-on fluctuation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on fluctuation image has ended. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the details of the transfer setting process (S4305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 88(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S6302), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S6301, that is, if it is turned off (S6301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S6302), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 88(b). FIG. 88B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S6401). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6402). In the process of S6402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S6402 that the transfer process has not ended (S6402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6402: Yes), the process proceeds to S6403. Also, as a result of the process of S6401, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6401: No), the process proceeds to S6403.

In the processing of S6403, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S6403). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S6403, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S6403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6405), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S4308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 76 to 85) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 86 and 87) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent image data transfer from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 89) (see S6301: No in FIG. 88(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S6303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6005) of the previously executed display setting process (S4303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S6501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S6502). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6503), furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state is set to ON (S6504), and the process proceeds to S6505.

Also, in the processing of S6502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S6502: No), the processing of S6503 and S6504 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S6505. In the process of S6505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6506).

In the process of S6506, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S6506 that the transfer process has not ended (S6506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6506: Yes), the process proceeds to S6507. Also, as a result of the process of S6505, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S6505: No), the process proceeds to S6507.

In the process of S6507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6507). is turned off (S6508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S6513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S6507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6509).

If the back image change flag is on (S6509: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6511). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S6512), and the process proceeds to S6513.

In the process of S6509, if the back image change flag is not ON but OFF (S6509: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S6509, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

In the process of S6513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513). The determination in the process of S6513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the processing in S6513, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: No), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S6513 (S6513: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S6514). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S6514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6515), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, details of the drawing process (S4306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S4304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated (S6601). That is, in the process of S6601, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in task processing (S4304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S6602, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S6603). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 75(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small hit), the variable ball entry means (second variable winning device 650) that allows the ball to win a prize ), in which a specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) that gives a privilege to the player when the ball passes through the variable ball entry means, a guidance state in which the ball can pass through the specific area, and a difficult passage state. A guide means (V-gate 650d) is provided which can be varied at predetermined intervals to and from the regulated state. Then, when a specific lottery result is won consecutively, at least one of the consecutively won specific lottery results has a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area. there is

As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state than when the player wins the specific lottery result by himself when the player wins the specific lottery result in succession. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play due to winning the lottery result.

In the above-described embodiment, when a specific lottery result (small hit A) is won continuously, that is, when a specific lottery result is consecutively won, the ball moves through the specific area. Although the configuration in which the small winning game (advantageous privilege game) that is easy to pass is easily executed is shown, if it is a configuration in which the advantageous privilege game is easily executed by winning a specific lottery result multiple times, in this embodiment Configurations other than the configuration used may be used.

For example, when a specific lottery result is won a plurality of times in a predetermined order, an advantageous privilege game may be easily executed. In addition, as a predetermined order, a predetermined order such as a case where a specific lottery result used in the present embodiment is consecutively won multiple times, or a case where a specific lottery result and a loss are alternately repeated. includes winning multiple times in a particular lottery result. In particular, by presetting the order including the case where the lottery result of the special pattern is lost as a predetermined order, even if the lottery result of the special pattern is lost, an advantageous privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Since there is a possibility that it will become easier, there is an effect that the player can always have expectations.

Furthermore, in the case where small wins are won continuously, the total time of the playing time of the small win game and the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the second small win among the consecutive small wins is the V gate 650d. It is configured so that it does not become an integral multiple of the operating cycle.

As a result, when small wins occur successively, the successive small wins do not cause the ball to flow down at the same timing to the V gate 650d operating at a predetermined operating cycle. That is, it is possible to cause the balls to flow down at different timings to the V-gate 650d which is operating in a predetermined operation cycle by continuously generating small winning games. Therefore, when the player wins the small winning game continuously, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state than when the player wins the small winning game alone, and wins the small winning continuously. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to the fact that the game is played.

In addition, in this embodiment, the total time of the game time of the small winning game and the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation display among the continuous small winnings is the time corresponding to the integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d In contrast, the V gate 650d is configured to differ by at least the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the inductive state.

As a result, when the V gate 650d is in the regulated state, the V gate 650d in the second small winning game is V The timing of causing the ball to flow down to the gate 650d can increase the probability that the V gate 650d will be in the induced state, and when the player wins the small winning game continuously, the player wins the small winning game alone. It is possible to provide a more advantageous game state than in the case where the game is played, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play the game due to consecutive small winnings.

As for the time to be different, it is desirable to make the difference longer than the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state with respect to the integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, but it may be less than that. . As such a configuration, for example, when the operating period (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d is set to be shorter than the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state (for example, 1 second), By winning a small prize consecutively for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), it is preferable to make a difference of one operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the small winning game continues five times, among the small winning games that are continuously executed, at least one small winning game that can pass V is executed, so the game It is possible to provide a player with a more advantageous game state than the case of winning a single small win when the small win is won in succession.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the V gate 650d is not in an integral multiple of the period (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state is set as the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. By doing so, for example, in a continuous small winning game, the time (1.5 seconds minute) When the different small winning game continues a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) (when the total difference is more than one cycle of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d), even for different operation cycles of the V gate 650d It is possible to vary the timing of causing the ball to flow down to the V gate 650d in the small winning game. Therefore, there is an effect that a more advantageous game state can be provided to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition (7 reserved balls) is satisfied at the timing when the variation of the special symbols corresponding to the successively won small wins is executed, the successively won small wins are awarded to the player. It is configured to provide an advantageous game state for As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to always satisfy the predetermined condition, and to improve the operation of the game.

In this embodiment, it is shown that the number of reserved balls is seven as the predetermined condition, but other conditions may be set, and the number of reserved balls that satisfy the predetermined condition may be changed. In addition, requirements other than the number of held balls may be set as the predetermined condition. For example, it may be set as the predetermined condition that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the predetermined lottery result and the game state is different from the normal game state. Alternatively, it may be determined as a predetermined condition that it is within a predetermined period of time (for example, a period of time until the special symbols are changed 50 times) after a specific game state such as a jackpot game ends.

Even with such a configuration, the player will be motivated to play the game so as to satisfy the predetermined conditions, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won continuously, a small hit that can (easily) pass through a specific area is determined, and based on the determination result, a continuous small hit period And a series of effects (continuous) can be executed using the variable display period of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit. By configuring in this way, for example, the first small win is a small win in which it is impossible (difficult) to pass the ball through the specific area, and the second small win is a small win that allows the ball to pass through the specific area. In the case of a possible (easy) small win, as a production corresponding to the first small win, it is based on the fact that the current small win is an impossible (difficult) small win to pass the ball through a specific area. It is possible to execute an effect (for example, chance continuation effect) based on the fact that the next small win is a small win in which the ball can (easily) pass through a specific area instead of the effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the frequency of executing the performance based on the small win that cannot provide the player with an advantageous game state (it is difficult), it is possible to suppress the performance that the player feels dissatisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player gets bored with the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case where the small winnings executed when a specific lottery result is obtained are consecutive, a game state more advantageous than the case where the small winnings are executed alone is configured to be able to be provided. , based on the fact that the small win is executed a plurality of times, it may be configured so as to be able to provide a more advantageous game state than when the small win is executed independently.

For example, based on the fact that a small win is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (for example, 8 times, which is the upper limit number to be held and stored), a game state that is more advantageous than the case where a small win is executed alone is established. It may be configured so that it can be provided. By doing so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to frequent winning of small winnings.

In addition, based on the fact that small wins are executed a plurality of times along a predetermined order (for example, small wins and losses are executed alternately), it is more advantageous than the case where small wins are executed independently. game state can be provided. By doing so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to frequent winning of small winnings. Furthermore, by defining a predetermined order by combining small hits and losses, it is possible to provide a game state advantageous to the player even when the result is a loss as a result of lottery of special symbols a plurality of times. It has the effect of being able to

In addition, based on the fact that small hits are executed multiple times along a predetermined order (for example, small hits and losses are alternately executed), it is more advantageous than the case where small hits are executed alone game state can be provided, similar to the special variation time (special variation B to C) of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit described in this embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the loss A special fluctuation time may be set to , and the timing at which a plurality of small wins are executed and the opening timing of the guidance means may be made different. As a result, even if the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a loss, there remains a possibility that the player will be provided with an advantageous game state. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that an advantageous game state will be provided, aside from the result of the lottery of the special symbols. effective.

In this case, it is preferable to unify (at least partially unify) the special variation time of the special symbols corresponding to the small win and the special variation of the special symbols corresponding to the loss. As a result, when the small hits are consecutive and when the small hits are executed multiple times along a predetermined order (for example, when the small hits are alternately executed), special special effects during the continuous production It is possible to execute the same effect as the symbol variation effect, and there is an effect that the capacity of the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

Specifically, in the variation pattern selection table 202c for loss referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the variation time is 5.5 seconds when the number of entering balls retained and stored is 5 to 6. A special fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation pattern for outliers) is defined. By configuring in this way, for example, while the number of entered balls that are retained and stored decreases from 7 to 6 to 5, special wins are made in the order of small win A (first time) → miss → small win A (second time). When the symbol lottery is executed, after the first small hit A is completed, the fluctuation display of the loss (5.5 seconds) is executed, and then the fluctuation display of the small win A (5.5 seconds) ) After that, a small hit A is executed. Therefore, the interval between the arrival timing of the winning ball V gate of the first small winning A and the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the second small winning A is 17 seconds. Since the operation cycle of the V gate 650d is 5 seconds, the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the second small winning A is different from the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the first small winning A of the V gate 650d. The timing is different by 2 seconds (delayed by 2 seconds) from the operating cycle.

In the above-described example, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is shown to be unified between the case of the lottery result of the special symbol and the case of the small hit, but the variation pattern of the special symbol in the case of the loss (Variation time) may be a variation pattern having a variation time that is the sum of the special variation B (5.5 seconds) and the game time of the small hit A (6 seconds). By doing so, even if the deviation variation is executed during the small hit as in the above example, the time required for the deviation variation to change the deviation (variation time of special symbols and small winning game time ) can be unified with Therefore, the same continuous performance time can be secured in the case where the lottery results of the special symbols are in the order of small win A→loss→small win A and the case where the small win A is won three times in succession. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of display data displayed by the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced by standardizing the continuous effects.

In addition, by making it difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol during the continuous performance is a small win or a loss, the player can have expectations until the end of the continuous performance. There is

As mentioned above, the illustrated configuration shows a case where the lottery result of the special symbol other than the small hit is out, but it is not limited to it. It may be a small hit (small hit B to C) where B is not set. In this case, it is preferable to unify the small winning game times of the small winnings B to C with the small winning A to achieve commonality of the continuous effect.

Further, in this embodiment, by setting the special variation time as the variation time of the special symbol, when the small hit is executed continuously (when the small hit is executed a plurality of times), the small hit is made independently. Although it is configured to be able to provide a more advantageous gaming state than when it is executed, other configurations may be used. It is also possible to change the opening period and the opening timing, change the operation cycle of the V gate 650d (induction means), and change the operation timing of the stopper 650c.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set in advance so that one of the small wins is a small win that can pass V when the small win is executed a plurality of times. However, as another configuration, the operation pattern of the V gate 650d may be set so that one of the small wins can pass through the V when the small win is executed a plurality of times. . Even if such a configuration is used, it is possible to obtain the same effects as in the first embodiment.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 101. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, by providing special fluctuations B to C as fluctuation patterns when the result of the special symbol lottery is the small hit A, when the small hit A is successively won, the small hit The opening timing of the door 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 is determined by the state of the V gate 650d provided in the second variable prize winning device 650. It has a configuration in which the timing of the induced state is shifted so that when the small winning A is won continuously, the big winning via the small winning game is easily granted.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, as a result of the lottery of special symbols, as a small winning type selected when a small winning is obtained, a special variation pattern of special symbols is changed only 8 times after the small winning game is finished. and a small winning E which enables the selection of a special variation pattern only three times from the variation pattern of normal symbols after the completion of the small winning, and selection is made by winning the small winning D. As a possible special variation pattern, a variation pattern with a short variation time (1 second) is selected. Also, the operation period of the V gate 650d is changed from 5 seconds to 10 seconds.

By using such a configuration, the operation of opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 by the small winning game can be executed multiple times within the operation cycle (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d. Therefore, the door 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 can be intentionally opened at different timings with respect to the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, and when small wins occur frequently, a big win is given via a small win game. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the contents of various tables stored in the ROM of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are partially changed. The difference from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that a new counter is added to the R 34th AM of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 . Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), the ROM202 of the second embodiment has the contents of the first small per type selection table 202c and the variation pattern selection table 202e changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM202 in the first embodiment. ing. Also, the numerical values set in the big winning scenario table 2202f and the small winning scenario table 2202g are changed.

FIG. 91(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 91(b), the RAM 203 of the second embodiment has a special figure special fluctuation counter 203t and a normal figure special fluctuation counter 203u added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. .

Next, with reference to Drawing 92 (a), the 1st small hit classification selection table 202c in a 2nd embodiment is explained. FIG. 92(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small winning type selection table 202c in the second embodiment. The 1st small hit type selection table 202c has a special figure 1 type selection table 2202c1 and a special figure 2 type selection table 2202c2 in which a small hit type different from the above-described first embodiment is defined. .

FIG. 92(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table 2202c1 of the second embodiment. The special figure 1 type selection table 2202c1 is different from the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 of the first embodiment described above, with the point that the small hit D and the small hit E are added as the small hit type, and various small hit types The difference is that the value of the small hit type counter value set is changed, and other configurations are the same as the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 of the first embodiment described above, and the detailed description is omitted. .

As shown in FIG. 92(a), when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a small hit, the small hit when the random number is "0 to 34" in the small hit type counter C5 The type is "small hit A". Further, when the random number is "35 to 40", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number is "41 to 390", the small hit type is "small hit C". Further, when the random number is "391 to 395", the small hit type is "small hit D". Further, when the random number is "396 to 398", the small hit type is "small hit E".

Here, among the small winning types, the "small winning D" and "small winning E" added in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92(b). First, when "small hit D" is selected, as an opening pattern in which it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable prize winning device, the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened at 0.1 during the small winning game. An opening scenario is set in which the second opening operation is performed twice, and "jackpot D" is set as the jackpot type given when passing through the V discharge channel 650e3, which is a specific area (when passing V). . Further, a game state in which a special variation pattern, which will be described later, is set as a variation pattern of the special symbols, is provided until the variation display of the special symbols is executed eight times after the small winning game of the small winning D is finished.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96, but when a special variation pattern is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. , it is possible to execute the variable display of the special symbols a plurality of times in a short time. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the small winning game multiple times within the operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d operates, and the timing of opening the door 650 of the second variable winning device 650 by the small winning game is determined. It can be made different with respect to the operation period in which the V gate 650d operates. In other words, it means that the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened at the same timing (for example, the timing at which the V gate 650d is in the regulated state) with respect to the operation period of the V gate 650d for the small winning games that have occurred a plurality of times. can be prevented.

By configuring in this way, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the frequent occurrence of small winning games at the timing when V passage is impossible (difficult).

Further, when the "small win E" is selected, the "jackpot D" is set as the opening pattern similar to the above-described "small win D" and the big win type given when the V is passed. Furthermore, after the small winning game E is completed, a game state in which a special variation pattern, which will be described later, is set as a variation pattern of the normal symbols, is provided until the variation display of the normal symbols is performed three times.

The normal symbol variation pattern (variation time) is set to 180 seconds in the normal game state (S1017 in FIG. 99), but is set to 0.5 seconds when the special variation pattern is set. As a result, the normal symbols are easily hit in the normal game state, so that the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entry device 640 is easily opened, and the game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance B640b. becomes.

As a result, normally, the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance B640b in the normal game state in which the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are alternately held and stored by the first ball entering device 64. Thus, it is possible to continuously hold and store the special symbols 2. - 特許庁Special symbol 2 is set to have a high ratio of selecting small win A, which is a small win that makes it easy to enter the ball into the second variable winning device, relative to special symbol 1 (Fig. 92 (b), ( c)), it is possible to provide a state in which it is easy for a player to receive a big win via a small win.

In addition, in the present second embodiment, the contents of the operation scenarios (small winning scenarios) of small winning A to small winning C are different from those of the above-described first embodiment. A detailed description of the operation scenario will be given later with reference to FIG. 93, but the small winning scenario a2 corresponding to the small winning A requires a smaller winning game than the small winning scenario a used in the above-described first embodiment. The time is defined to be short, and the small winning scenario b2 corresponding to the small winning B or the small winning C is so that the time required for the small winning game is shorter than the small winning scenario b used in the above-described first embodiment. stipulated.

FIG. 92(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table 2202c2 of the second embodiment. The special figure 2 type selection table 2202c2 is, with respect to the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 of the first embodiment described above, the point that the small hit D and the small hit E are added as the small hit type, and various small hit types The difference is that the value of the small hit type counter value set is changed, and the other configuration is the same as the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 of the first embodiment described above, and the detailed description is omitted. .

As shown in FIG. 92 (c), when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a small hit, the small hit when the random number is "0 to 85" in the small hit type counter C5 The type is "small hit A". Further, when the random number is "86 to 90", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number is "91 to 390", the small hit type is "small hit C". Further, when the random number is "391 to 395", the small hit type is "small hit D". Further, when the random number is "396 to 398", the small hit type is "small hit E".

As described above, also in the second embodiment, the ratio of selecting the small hit A, which is a small hit that the ball is likely to win in the second variable winning device 650, is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. is set.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202e in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93(a). FIG. 93(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e in the second embodiment. The variation pattern selection table 202e includes a large winning variation pattern selection table 2202e1 that defines variation patterns different from those of the first embodiment, a loss variation pattern selection table 2202e2, and a small winning variation pattern selection table 2202e3. have.

Although detailed description of each variation pattern table will be described later, the variation pattern table used in the second embodiment is the variation pattern table used in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a special variation D is added to be selected in , and that special variations A to D cannot be selected.

FIG. 93(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern selection table 2202e1. Various jackpot variation patterns are selected from the jackpot variation pattern selection table 2202e1 based on whether a special variation pattern is set and the value of the variation type counter CS1. The special variation pattern setting is provided after the completion of the small winning D when the small winning D is selected as a result of the lottery of the special symbols, and when the special variation pattern is set, the value of the variation type counter CS1. Regardless, the special variation D (1 second) is selected.

FIG. 93(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation variation pattern selection table 2202e2. Like the above-described jackpot variation pattern selection table 2202e1, the winning variation pattern selection table 2202e2 is configured so that various jackpot variation patterns are selected based on whether or not a special variation pattern is set and the value of the variation type counter CS1. ing. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning variation pattern selection table 2202e3. The small winning variation pattern selection table 2202e3, like the large winning variation pattern selection table 2202e1 described above, is configured so that various large winning variation patterns are selected based on the presence or absence of special variation pattern settings and the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the small hit D is won, a predetermined period after the end of the small hit game (in the second embodiment, until the special symbol fluctuates 8 times) Special fluctuation A pattern is set, and it is configured so that the variation of the special symbol can be executed a plurality of times in a short period (a period of one operation cycle of the V gate).

Therefore, the small winning game can be executed a plurality of times within a short period of time, and the ball can flow down to the specific area in the small winning game at different timings with respect to the operation cycle of the V gate.

Next, the small winning scenario table 2202g in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95(a). FIG. 95(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning scenario table 2202g in the second embodiment. In the small winning scenario table 2202g, the small winning scenario a202g1 is changed to the small winning scenario a2202g1, and the small winning scenario b202g2 is changed to the small winning scenario b2202g2 with respect to the small winning scenario table 202g of the first embodiment described above. , and a small winning scenario b2202g2 is defined as a selection scenario corresponding to the small winning D and the small winning E, and the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The small winning scenario a2202g1 differs from the small winning scenario a202g1 of the first embodiment in that the interval between each scenario is shortened, and the contents of each scenario are the same. The interval of each scenario will be described with reference to FIG. 95(b).

FIG. 95(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning scenario a2202g1. In the small winning scenario a2202g1, the opening period is shortened to 0.1 seconds with respect to the small winning scenario a202g1, and in the ending period, the period from the execution of the V passage determination to the end of the ending is 0.1 seconds. , and the duration of the entire scenario is specified to be 2.7 seconds. In addition, since the period during which the door solenoid 650f2 is set to ON is the same as the small winning scenario a202g1 of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

By defining in this way, in the small winning game in which the small winning scenario a2202g1 is selected, the small winning game is executed for 2.7 seconds.

FIG.95(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of small hit scenario b2202g2. In the small winning scenario b2202g2, the number of times the door opens and closes is reduced by 1 to 2, the opening period is shortened to 0.1 seconds, and out of the ending period, The period from the execution of the V passage determination to the end of the ending is shortened to 0.1 seconds. Since other configurations are the same as those of the small winning scenario b202g2 of the first embodiment described above, description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the game time during the small winning game is 2.7 seconds for the small winning A, and 2.5 seconds for the small winning B to E. Execute the game. By configuring in this way, it is configured so as to be able to execute more special symbol variations in a short period of time.

In addition, in the second embodiment, although the small winning game time is set in advance, the game time of the small winning game may be changed according to the game state. For example, the length of the opening period or the ending period during the small winning game may be changed depending on whether the game state is the normal game state or the time saving game state.

Next, the operation cycle of the V gate 650d and the timing of the special symbol game executed by the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the timing of the special symbol game and the operation of the V gate 650d when the normal variation pattern is selected in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96(a), in the second embodiment, the V gate 650d is variably controlled so that one operation cycle is 10 seconds. On the other hand, as a result of the lottery for the special symbols, the shortest variation pattern selected when the small hit A is won is 10 seconds (see FIG. 94). Then, when the small win A is won, a small win scenario a2 is set in which the game time is defined to be 2.7 seconds (see FIG. 95(b)).

In the second embodiment configured in this manner, a plurality of small winning A games are not executed within one operating cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled in the normal gaming state, that is, It is configured so that the ball does not reach the V gate 650d multiple times within one operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled.

Figure 96 (b), when the special variation pattern in the second embodiment is selected, that is, as a result of the special symbol lottery, winning the small hit D, the special symbol in the case of executing the special symbol special variation 6 is a timing chart schematically showing the timing of a game and the operation of V gate 650d.

As shown in FIG. 96(b), as a result of the special symbol (special figure) lottery by the main controller 110, when the small winning D is won, after the small winning D game is executed for 2.5 seconds, the special figure A special variation is performed. As for this special symbol special variation, the special variation D with variation time of 1 second is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 93(a) to (b) and FIG. 94). Therefore, the V gate 650d is made possible to perform a plurality of special figure fluctuations within one operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when a small hit A is won, a small win scenario a2 in which the game time is defined to be 2.7 seconds is set (see FIG. 95(b)), so V Within one operating cycle (10 seconds) in which the gate 650d is variably controlled, a plurality of small winning A games are configured to be executable.

As a result, the small hit A game is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (in this embodiment, the period in which the special figure fluctuates 8 times) during which the special figure special variation is performed, so that the operation cycle of the V gate 650d On the other hand, it is possible to execute a small winning game at different timings. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit A game will pass through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5).

In addition, in the second embodiment, by enabling execution of a plurality of small winning games within the operating cycle (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d, the V gate 650d is variably controlled in one operating cycle (10 Seconds), the ball reaches the V gate 650d at a plurality of timings. In addition, it is only necessary to provide multiple timings for the ball to reach the V gate 650d. For example, in the case where there are a plurality of small wins with different timings for the balls to reach the V gate 650d, even if the small wins are not executed a plurality of times within the operating cycle (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d, The small win may be set so that the ball reaches the V gate 650d multiple times within the operation period (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d.

As described above, in the second embodiment, a period during which a plurality of small hits are advantageously executed (a period during which a special figure special variation is executed) is provided based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, when the player wins the small winning game a plurality of times, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state than when the player wins the small winning game alone, and wins the small winnings continuously. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to this.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result (small hit D), a specific game state (special figure special fluctuation) is set. , When other specific conditions are satisfied, it may be configured to set the specific game state. For example, the specific game state may be set on the condition that the number of memory reservations of special symbols reaches the upper limit. Also, the specific game state may be set on the condition that the ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the special figure special fluctuation is configured to be set for a predetermined period (8 times), but instead of setting the predetermined period by the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, It may be configured so that the special figure special variation is set until it is executed. As a result, by executing the special figure special variation, it is possible to easily provide the player with a jackpot game.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. First, timer interrupt processing 2 executed by MPU 201 in main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process 2 in the second embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, like the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 34). It is a periodic process that is executed every

In timer interrupt processing 2 of the second embodiment, S101, S106, S108, and S109 each correspond to steps S101, S104, S106, and S108 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. , and S109 are executed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, based on the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol has become a specific lottery result (small hit D), the variation of the special symbol selected in the normal game state A transition to a specific game state in which a variation pattern (variation time) different from the pattern (variation time) is selected. ), the variation pattern of the special symbols is set so that the lottery of the special symbols with which the lottery result is a small win is executed a plurality of times.

As a result, a plurality of small winning games can be executed in one operation cycle of the V gate 650d, so that when a plurality of small winnings are won within a predetermined period (operation cycle of the V gate 650d). Furthermore, the opening timing of the door 650f in the small winning game can be varied with respect to the operating cycle of the V gate 650d. Therefore, there is an effect that a game state (privilege) that is advantageous to the player can be easily awarded by frequent occurrence of small wins within a predetermined period.

In addition, in the second embodiment, based on the lottery result of the special symbol, a configuration is used in which the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected special symbol is changed. Other configurations may be used. For example, when the special symbol lottery result is a predetermined lottery result, the operation period of the V gate 650d may be set to be longer than the normal operation period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a small winning game a plurality of times within a predetermined period (operation cycle of the V gate 650d) without using a configuration for changing the variation pattern of the selected special symbol. be able to.

Furthermore, when lengthening the operation period of the V gate 650d, it is preferable to extend the period in which the V gate 650d is in the inductive state (open state). As a result, the ratio of the induction state (open state) in one operation cycle of the V gate 650d can be increased, and when a small winning game is executed a plurality of times within one operation cycle, V There is an effect that the possibility of becoming a passable small win can be increased.

Also, by similarly shortening the playing time of the small winning game, within a predetermined period (the operation cycle of the V gate 650d), it may be configured so that the small winning game can be executed a plurality of times. In this case, it is preferable to set the small winning game so that the period during which the specific door 650f is closed, that is, the small winning opening period and the small winning ending period are shortened in the small winning game. By doing so, the time of the entire small winning game is shortened, but the time of the period during which the specific door 650f is opened (the period during which the ball can win in the second specific winning opening 650a) is not changed. That is, it is possible to increase the ratio of the time during which the ball can win in the second specific winning opening 650a in the entire time of the small winning game, and the small winning game is executed a plurality of times within one operation cycle. In this case, there is an effect that the possibility of executing a small winning game that can pass V can be increased.

Furthermore, the second embodiment has two game states (normal game state and time-saving game state) in which the ratio of the special symbol lottery result to a specific lottery result (small hit D) is different, and the normal game When the lottery result of the special pattern satisfies a predetermined condition in the state (by executing the time-saving jackpot), the state is shifted to the time-saving game state in which the probability of obtaining the specific lottery result is higher than that of the normal game state. It is

By constructing in this way, the player can play the game with two types of game characteristics, that is, the game in which the special pattern is drawn and the game in which the ball passes through the specific area. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation of getting tired.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, in the normal gaming state, two entrances (first entrance 64a and second entrance 64a) with different ratios of special symbol lottery results to specific lottery results (small hit D) Since it has a configuration (first ball entry device 64) that alternately enters balls into the ball opening A 64b), in the normal game state, whether the next prize won after winning the "small win A" is a special figure 1 Since the degree of expectation that "small win A" will be won continuously changes depending on whether it is special figure 2, it is possible to provide a new game property of making "small win A" win continuously for the player. It becomes possible, and there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

Also in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the sound lamp control device 114 performs the same control as in the above-described first embodiment, but the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (small winning D ), and while the special variation pattern is being executed as the special symbol variation pattern, the special variation D (variation time: 1 second) is set as the special variation pattern regardless of the special symbol lottery result. Therefore, in the above-described first embodiment, it was configured to execute continuous production when the small hits continued, but in the second embodiment, the continuous production is always performed during the period in which the special variation pattern is set. can be configured to run.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 108. FIG. In the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, the winning information (ball winning information) based on the ball entering the first special symbol and the winning information (ball winning information) based on the ball entering the second special symbol are stored. , is changed in the order in which the ball was entered (in the order in which it was retained and stored) (so-called entry order digestion). On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the winning information (ball winning information) based on the winning ball to the second special symbol is given priority over the winning information (ball winning information) based on the ball winning to the first special symbol. It is different in that it uses a configuration that dynamically changes (so-called special figure 2 priority digestion).

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is changed, and the ROM of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores and the contents of the RAM of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 102, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 102 is a front view of the game board 13 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 102, the game board 13 of the third embodiment is different in that the first ball entrance 1064 is replaced with the first ball entrance device 64 . Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The first ball entrance 1064 is a ball entrance for obtaining first special symbol entrance information when a ball enters.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
First, ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 103(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As for ROM202 of this 3rd execution form, with respect to the constitution of ROM202 in 1st execution form, the value of 1st per random number table 202a and 1st small per classification selection table 202c is changed.

FIG. 103(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 103(b), the RAM 203 of the third embodiment has a variation execution flag 203j, a variation order storage area 203k, and a special figure 2B validity period flag 203r in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. , and the effective period measuring counter 203s are deleted.

Next, the first winning random number table 3202a in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 3202a. The first per random number table 3202a is different from the first per random number table 202a of the first embodiment described above in the value of the small hit determination value. Although the same small hit determination value is defined in FIG. 2, each has a different determination value in the first hit random number table 3202a.

First, the small hit determination value for special figure 1 is "1". Therefore, as a result of the special symbol lottery based on the special figure 1, the probability of a small hit is set to be "1/400". Next, the small hit determination value for special figure 2 is "1 to 398". Therefore, as a result of the special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2, the probability of becoming a small hit is set to be "398/400".

By configuring in this way, it is difficult to win a small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1, and it is possible to make it easier to win a small win in the lottery of the special figure 2, and the game state in which the special figure 2 is changed is changed to the special figure. It is possible to create a game state more advantageous to the player than the game state in which 1 is varied.

Next, with reference to Drawing 105, the 1st small hit classification selection table 202c in a 3rd embodiment is explained. Figure 105 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small per type selection table 202c in the third embodiment, Figure 105 (b) shows the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table 3202c1 It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, FIG. 105 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table 3202c2.

As shown in FIGS. 105(a) and 105(b), in the third embodiment, the rate at which the small win A that gives the player an advantage is selected is It is lowered in the special figure 1 type selection table 3202c1.

As described above, in the third embodiment, in the lottery based on the variation of the special figure 1, both the probability of becoming a small hit and the selection ratio of the small hit A when winning the small hit are Since it is lower than the lottery based on the variation of 2, the game state in which the special figure 2 is varied is configured to be a game state more advantageous to the player than the game state in which the special figure 1 is varied.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, control processing of the main controller in the third embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. In the third embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) is changed to the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 106), and the starting winning process ( 39) is changed to the starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 107). Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. In the special symbol variation process 3 in the third embodiment, processes from S271 to S274 are added to the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment. As for other processing, the same processing as in the first control example is executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S202, when it is determined that the present is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is obtained (S271). Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S272).

In the process of S272, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S272: Yes), the process proceeds to S211. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not greater than 0 (S272: No), then the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed. Acquire (S273).

Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S274). Here, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S274: Yes), the process proceeds to S207. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not greater than 0 (S274: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the special symbol variation processing 3 explained above, when the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S272: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1 ) Regardless, the variation based on the special symbol 2 is executed (so-called special symbol 2 priority).

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the starting winning process 2 will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the details of the starting winning process 2 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The starting winning process 2 in the third embodiment is different from the starting winning process in the first embodiment in the process related to the variation order storage area 203k and the starting winning process related to the second special symbol. As for other processing, the same processing as in the first control example is executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the start winning process is executed, first, the processes of S651 to S657 are executed. These processes are the same processes as S601 of the starting winning process (see FIG. 39) and S701 to S706 of the special figure 1 starting winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above, so the detailed description omitted.

Next, it is determined whether the ball has entered the second ball entrance (S658). In the third embodiment, there is one ball entrance (second ball entrance) that acquires the winning information (ball entrance information) of the second special symbol by entering the ball. Different from the embodiment. In the processing of S658, if it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entrance (start winning) (S658: Yes), then the processing of S659 to S663 is executed. In addition, the processing of S659 to S663 executed in the third embodiment is the same processing as the processing of S805 to S809 of the special figure 2 start winning process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment described above , the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, after executing the process of S663, the same prefetching process (S604) as the prefetching process (S604) executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment described above is executed (S664), and this process is executed. finish.

As described above, in the third embodiment, since the configuration is used to preferentially vary the winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the variation based on the winning information of the special figure 2 is continuously can be executed by In the lottery based on the special figure 2, the ratio of winning the small hit A is set higher than the lottery based on the special figure 1, so the game state (normal game state) in which it is difficult to enter the second special symbol. It is possible to set a game state (so-called time-saving game state) in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to set a game state in which it is difficult to win the small win A and a game state in which it is easy to win the small win A.

It should be noted that, as in the third embodiment, in the case of using a configuration in which the second special symbol is preferentially changed, in order to execute the continuous effect of the first embodiment described above, the ball holding the second special symbol It is sufficient to configure so as to execute the processing related to the continuous effect only for the target. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed in the order in which the ball is entered (so-called winning order digestion), and the winning received from the main controller 110 Since the special symbols are changed in the order of command processing, in the winning command reception process, all winning commands (winning command based on special symbol 1 or winning command based on special symbol 2) was running (see FIG. 59).

However, in the third embodiment, since the second special symbol is preferentially varied, the special symbols are varied in an order different from the processing order of the winning command received from the main controller 110. may be Therefore, when adopting a configuration that preferentially executes a variation based on one special design among a plurality of special designs as in the third embodiment, it corresponds to the special design on the side that is preferentially executed. It is only necessary to execute the processing related to the continuous effect only for the winning commands to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a continuous effect similar to that of the above-described first embodiment.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the normal game state (see FIG. 104) in which it is difficult to win a small hit in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly executed, and the second special symbol (special figure 2 ) in which the lottery is mainly executed and it is easy to win a small win (see FIG. 104). A pass detection switch 650e5) provided in the device 650 is configured to be able to provide a small hit game in which the ball easily passes.

As a result, in the normal game state, the frequent execution of the small winning game is suppressed, and in the time saving game state in which the small winning game is frequently executed, the small winning game is executed a plurality of times, It is possible to provide a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the player wins the small win game a plurality of times, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state than when the player wins the small win game alone, and the player wins the small wins continuously. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to this. In addition, the configuration of the special figure special variation used in the above-described second embodiment may be used in the third embodiment.

<Modification 1 in the third embodiment>
Next, Modification 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In Modification 1, the board configuration of the game board 13 is changed from that of the above-described third embodiment. In this modification 1, the second ball entry device 1640 is arranged below the first ball entry port 1064, and the second variable winning device 650 is arranged below the second ball entry device 640. It differs from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the third embodiment in that through gates 67 are arranged on the left and right sides of the board 13, respectively. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The second ball-entering device 1640 used in Modification 1 is provided with a second ball-entering port 1640b (not shown) accompanied by an electric accessory 1640a (not shown). The electric accessory 1640a differs from the electric accessory 640a described above in that it has two movable pieces (a right movable piece and a left movable piece) that are driven when the opening operation is executed. , is the same as the second ball-entering device 640 used in the above-described first embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

According to the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of Modification 1, even when a game (ordinary game) aimed at the left side area of the game board 13 is being performed, it is possible to pass the ball through the through gate 67, and It is configured such that a ball can be entered into the second ball entering device 640 even when a normal game is being played.

By configuring in this way, for example, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the normal game state, and the normal symbol lottery is executed. Then, when a win is won in the normal pattern lottery, the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entry device 640 is released, and the ball is entered into the second ball entry port 1640b of the second ball entry device 1640 (start winning ).

And, in the present modification 1, as in the above-described third embodiment, the second special symbol is preferentially varied, so the game state in which the variation of the second special symbol is continuously executed in the normal game state can be provided. Furthermore, since the lottery of the second special symbol has a higher probability of winning the small hit A than the lottery of the first special symbol, if the variation of the second special symbol is continuously executed, the small It is possible to increase the possibility of winning the winning A continuously.

As a result, even if the game state is the state of the normal game, the player is provided with a game that increases the possibility of continuously winning the small win A by winning the win in the lottery of the normal symbols. There is an effect that it becomes possible to play the game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the board surface configuration of the game board 13 used in the present modification 1, the second variable prize winning device 650, which is in an open state in which the ball can win a prize when a small win is won, is arranged at the lower center of the game board 13. By playing a game (ordinary game) aiming at the left area of the game board 13, the ball can reach the second variable winning device 650. FIG.

This eliminates the need for the player to play the right-handed game even if he or she wins a small win. In addition, when a small winning game is executed, it is not necessary to notify the player of prompting the right-handed game by the third symbol display device 81 or the like. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that he or she has won a small prize, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to winning a plurality of small prizes.

It should be noted that the board configuration of the game board 13 used in Modification 1 may be applied to the above-described first embodiment or second embodiment, or instead of various controls executed in the third embodiment, Various controls executed in the above-described first embodiment or second embodiment may be applied.

<Regarding modification 2 in the third embodiment>
Next, modification 2 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a front view showing the game board 13 in Modification 2. As shown in FIG. In Modification 2, the board configuration of the game board 13 is changed from that of the above-described third embodiment. In Modification 2, a winning unit 710 (see FIG. 110) having a third variable winning device 700 is arranged in the right area of the game board 13, and a first variable winning device 65 is arranged below the winning unit 710. However, it differs from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the third embodiment in that a second ball-entering device 640 is arranged on the downstream side thereof. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals will be given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Next, an overview of the winning unit 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 110. FIG. FIG. 110 is a front view schematically showing the internal structure of the winning unit 710. FIG. In order to explain the internal structure of the winning unit 710, FIG. 110 schematically shows only the main structure with the cover member removed.

First, as shown in FIG. 109, most of the game balls that have entered the right area of the game board 13 pass through the opening 710a of the winning unit 710. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 110, the prize winning unit 710 includes a first flow-down path 711a having a first discharge port 711 for discharging the balls that have passed through the opening 710a onto the game board 13, and the balls that have passed through the opening 710a. It has a second flow path 712a having a second discharge port 712 that is discharged onto the board 13, and a third variable winning device 700 that is configured so that the ball flowing down the second flow path 712a can win a prize, Based on the operation of the opening/closing member 700b (see FIG. 110) of the third variable winning device 700, the balls passing through the opening 710a are configured to flow down their respective paths.

The third variable prize winning device 700 is configured to allow a ball to enter when the special symbol lottery result is a small win, and when a small win game is executed, the opening/closing member 700b is operated. The first opening 700a1 and the second opening 700a2 of the 3-variable winning device 700 are respectively changed to a state in which the ball can win. A winning ball in the third variable winning device 700 is configured to pass through a specific area (passage detection switch 700 c 2 ) provided in the third variable winning device 700 or the normal ejection path 703 .

In addition, in this modification 2, it is different from the above-described third embodiment in that the variation time of 1 second is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (not shown). figure).

Next, the winning unit 710 will be described with reference to FIG. The opening 710a of the prize winning unit 710 is an opening having an opening width of one ball, and is formed at a position through which most of the balls shot to the right side area of the game board 13 pass. A second opening/closing member 700b3 is provided at a position below the opening 710a (the position reached by the ball passing through the opening 710a). The second opening/closing member 700b3 switches between a state (open state) in which a ball can pass through the first flow path 711a or a state (closed state) in which it is difficult for a ball to pass through, and a state of the first flow path 711a. is configured to be variable.

The second opening/closing member 700b3 is configured to follow the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 700b, which will be described later. 700b3 is configured to be movable back and forth. The second opening/closing member 700b3 is composed of a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board side, and in the closed state, the first flow path 711a is completely covered by the second opening/closing member 700b3. The upper surface of the second opening/closing member 700b3 has an inclined surface on which the ball flows down toward the second flow path 712a (left side in front view in FIG. 110) in the closed state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 111, a mechanism for opening and closing the second opening/closing member 700b3 will be described. FIG. 111(a) is a plan view schematically showing the winning unit 710 in a state where the second opening/closing member 700b3 is closed (state when the small winning game is not executed), and FIG. It is a plan view schematically showing the winning unit 710 in a state in which the second opening and closing member 700b3 is open (state during execution of a small winning game).

As shown in FIG. 111(a), the opening/closing member 700b of the third variable winning device 700 is configured to be movable in the forward and backward direction of the game board 13 by means of an opening/closing member solenoid 700g. In this state, the opening/closing member 700b projects forward from the game board 13 (the state shown in FIG. 111(a)), and when the opening/closing member driving solenoid 700g is set to ON, the opening/closing member 700b moves toward the game board. 13 is retracted rearward (the state shown in FIG. 111(b)).

Among the opening/closing members 700b, a plurality of protrusions are provided on one end side (the side facing the second opening/closing member) of the first opening/closing member 700b2. A transmission member 700b4 having an engaging portion with which the plurality of projections can be engaged is provided. The transmission member 700b4 is rotatably pivoted with respect to the winning unit 710. As shown in FIG. In addition, the second opening/closing member 700b3 is provided with a plurality of protrusions on one end side (the side facing the opening/closing member), and is provided at a position where the protrusions and the transmission member 700b4 described above are engaged.

Here, the operation of changing the second opening/closing member 700b3 with the operation of the opening/closing member 700b will be described with reference to FIG. For example, when the opening/closing member 700b is changed from the protruded state (the state shown in FIG. 111(a)) to the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 111(b)), the transmission Member 700b4 rotates (rotates to the right as viewed from the viewpoint of FIG. 111). As the transmission member 700b4 rotates, the second opening/closing member 700b3 engaged with the transmission member 700b4 moves in the direction of projecting to the front side of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. In other words, the opening/closing member 700b and the second opening/closing member 700b3 are driven by the opening/closing member driving solenoid 700g, which is a single driving source, to opposite positions, that is, when the opening/closing member 700b protrudes, the second opening/closing member 700b3 retracts. However, when the opening/closing member 700b is retracted, it is mechanically configured by the transmission member 700b4 so that the second opening/closing member 700b3 protrudes.

Returning to FIG. 110, the description continues. The second flow-down path 712a, in which the ball that has flowed down the upper surface of the second opening/closing member 700b3 is guided, has an inlet portion and an outlet portion formed by the upper surface of the opening/closing member 700b. It is configured.

This detour 710b is a passage provided for extending the flow time of the ball flowing down the second flow path 712a (reducing the flow speed), and the time for the ball to pass through the second flow path 712a is 2. It is designed to be seconds. During this time, when the small wins are won consecutively, the ball that passed through the second flow path 712a during the previously executed small win enters the second opening 700a2 during the later executed small win. It is the time when the ball becomes possible.

That is, in the present modification 2, since the variation time of the special symbol in which the lottery result is a small hit is 1 second, when the consecutive small wins are won, the second flow path during the previously executed small win The ball that passed through 712a (entered the second flow path 712a during the ending period of the small hit (see FIG. 15 (b))) has a special symbol fluctuation time (1 second) corresponding to the small hit and during the small hit After an opening period (0.1 seconds), the ball can be entered into the second opening 700a2.

In addition, the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit and the ball passage time of the second flow path 712a are not limited to the time set in this modification, and when the small hit is won continuously , The ball that entered the second flow-down path 712a during the previous small win (the ball that reached the third variable winning device 700 at the timing when the opening and closing member 700b closed during the small win (during the small win ending)) It suffices if the time for winning the third variable prize winning device 700 in the later small prize is set. For example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is set to 4 seconds and the opening period during the small hit is set to 1 second, the ball passing time of the second flow path 712a is 5.5 Seconds (4 seconds of fluctuation time, 1 second of opening period, and part of the ending time (0.5 seconds) during the previous small win) may be set.

Here, the second flow-down path 712a will be described with reference to FIG. 111(a). As described above, the inlet and outlet of the second flow-down path 712a are formed by the opening/closing member 700b, and as shown in FIG. It is configured as a flowable route. In this state, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the first opening/closing portion 700b1 of the opening/closing member 700b flows down to the detour 710b.

The detour 710b is formed by the first side wall 710b1, the second side wall 710b2, the third side wall 710b3, and the bottom member as a path along which the sphere flows down in a meandering manner. A specific configuration of the detour 710b will be described below. It should be noted that, in principle, words indicating directions used in the concrete description indicate directions when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front. The ball that has entered the second flow-down path 712a first collides with the right side surface of the first side wall 710b1 (the right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 111). The bottom portion where the right side of the first side wall 710b1 is arranged is inclined in the depth direction of the game board 13 (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 111), and the ball that collides with the right side of the first side wall 710b1 It flows down in the depth direction of the game board 13 and collides with the right end side of the second side wall 710b2. The bottom portion where the right end side of the second side wall 710b2 is arranged is inclined to the left of the game board 13 (leftward from the viewpoint of FIG. 111), and the ball that collides with the right end side of the second side wall 710b2 It flows down toward the left side of the game board 13 through the back channel. As described above, the detour 710b used in the present embodiment is configured such that the downward direction of the ball is changed to a substantially right angle due to the inclination of the bottom surface and the side walls, so that the downward flow (rolling) of the ball is prevented. A longer distance can be set.

Note that the detour 710b may be configured using a configuration other than the configuration of the detour 710b described above. It may be composed of one member, and each side wall may be configured to form an obtuse angle with respect to the flowing direction of the sphere. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the detour 710b can be simplified, although the downflow (rolling distance) of the ball cannot be set as long as the configuration of the detour 710b used in the present embodiment. It becomes possible.

The configuration of the detour 710b described above may be appropriately selected according to the space for disposing the detour 710b and the required falling (rolling) distance of the ball.

The ball that has flowed down the detour 710b flows down the upper surface of the second opening/closing member 700b3 of the opening/closing member 700b that constitutes the outlet of the second flow-down path 712a, passes through the second outlet 712 (see FIG. 110), and is played. It is discharged to the board 13.

Returning to FIG. 110, the description continues. The first opening/closing portion 700b1 forming the inlet portion of the second flow path 712a is designed to have a shorter opening width (the distance the ball flows down) than the second opening/closing portion 700b2 forming the outlet portion. The first opening/closing part 700b1 is designed to have an opening width of 15 mm, and the second opening/closing part 700b2 is designed to have an opening width of 45 mm.

With this configuration, the number of balls rolling on the top surface of the second opening/closing portion 700b2 of the opening/closing member 700b is greater than the number of balls rolling on the top surface of the first opening/closing portion 700b1 of the opening/closing member 700b. be able to. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 700b is opened at a high speed (for example, 0.2 seconds), the second opening 700a2 covered by the second opening/closing portion 700b2 is larger than the first opening 700a1 covered by the first opening/closing portion 700b1. It is an opening that makes it easier for the ball to win.

Next, referring to FIG. 110, the structure of the third variable winning device 700 provided in the winning unit 710 will be described. The third variable prize winning device 700 has two openings (the first opening 700a1 and the second opening 700a2) as described above. An opening/closing member 700b that is variable in the front-rear direction is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can pass through its two openings and a closed state in which a ball cannot (difficultly) pass through.

The first opening 700a1 and the second opening 700a2 are configured to be changed between the open state and the closed state by one opening/closing member 700b, and the two openings can be changed between the open state and the closed state at the same timing. be done. It should be noted that portions of the opening/closing member 700b that cover the respective openings (the first opening/closing portion 700b1 and the second opening/closing portion 700b2) are configured to have different lengths in the front-rear direction of the game board 13. The timing at which each opening changes between the open state and the closed state may be varied depending on the operation.

For example, the first opening/closing portion 700b1 of the opening/closing member 700b covering the first opening 700a1 is longer than the second opening/closing portion 700b2 of the opening/closing member 700b covering the second opening 700a2. 2) is designed to delay the timing at which the first opening 700a1 changes from the closed state to the open state (the state in which the opening is not covered by the opening/closing member) relative to the second opening 700a2, and to delay the timing from the open state to the closed state. You may make it advance the timing which changes to a state.

By configuring in this way, the period in which the first opening 700a1 is open relative to the second opening 700a2 is shortened, so that the ease of winning of each opening can be made more different. There is

Returning to FIG. 110, the description continues. A ball winning from the first opening 700a1 of the third variable winning device 700 is detected by the detection switch 700f1, flows down the first winning path 700d1, and reaches the V gate 700c1. The first winning path 700d1 is constructed so that the ball passes through for about 1 second.

Next, a ball that has won a prize from the second opening 700a2 of the third variable prize winning device 700 is detected by the detection switch 700f2, flows down the second prize winning path 700d2, and then reaches the V gate 700c1. . Further, in order to reliably detect the winning ball from the second opening 700a2 by the detection switch 700f2, the width of the ball passage of the ball from the second opening 700a2 toward the detection switch 700f2 is narrowed. The opening width (approximately 45 mm) of the second opening 700a2 is configured to be the sphere passage width (13 mm) of the detection switch 700f2. In addition, the second winning path 700d2 is configured so that the ball travels for about 0.3 seconds.

Also, the above-described first winning path 700d1 and second winning path 700d2 are configured to merge on the V-gate 700c1 in the third variable winning device 700. FIG.

As with the V gate 650d of the first embodiment described above, the V gate 700c1 is configured to be variable between the induced state and the restricted state at regular intervals after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Since the detailed configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

If the V-gate 700c1 is in the guidance state (a state in which the V-gate 700c1 can pass through the specific area of the V-ejection path), the ball that reaches the V-gate 700c1 passes through the specific area (the detection switch 700c2) in the V-ejection path 704, Collected in the collection port. When the V-gate 700c1 is in a regulated state (impossible (difficult) to pass through the specific area of the V-discharge route), it rolls on the V-gate 700c1, passes through the normal discharge route 703, and is collected in the collection port. .

In the third variable prize winning device 700 configured in this way, when small wins are won in succession, the small wins executed later among the consecutive small wins have the first opening portion 700a1 and the second opening portion. A ball can be entered from both 700a2. Furthermore, since the ball entering from the first opening 700a1 and the ball entering from the second opening 700a2 have different times to reach the V gate 700c1, the ball entering from either opening It is possible to increase the probability that the sphere will pass through the V gate 700c1. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state when the small wins are won successively than when the small wins are won singly. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to consecutive small winnings.

The configuration of the winning unit 710 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. Next, the flow of balls in the winning unit 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112. FIG. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining ball flow according to the operating state (closed state or open state) of the opening/closing member (door) 700b of the third variable winning device 700 of the winning unit 710. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 112, when the opening/closing member (door) 700b of the third variable prize winning device 700 is closed (closed state), the second opening/closing member 700b3 moves the ball through the first flow path (discharge path) 711a. A passable open state is established, and the ball that has entered the winning unit 710 passes through the first flow-down path (discharge path) 711 a and is discharged to the game board 13 .

In addition, in the state (closed state) where the opening/closing member (door) 700b of the third variable prize winning device 700 is closed (closed state), the ball flowing down on the first opening/closing portion (front door) 700b1 flows down to the detour 710b. . After passing through the detour 710 b , the ball flows down the upper surface of the second opening/closing portion 700 b 2 and is discharged to the game board 13 through the second discharge port 712 .

Next, when the opening/closing member (door) 700b of the third variable prize winning device 700 is open (open state), the second opening/closing member (guide plate) 700b3 allows the ball to pass through the first flow-down path (discharge path) 711a. The ball enters the winning unit 710 in a closed state where it cannot pass, and flows down the second opening/closing member (guide plate) 700b3 toward the first opening 700a1 of the third variable winning device 700. FIG.

Since the opening/closing member (door) 700b is in the open state, the ball that has flowed down to the first opening 700a1 wins the first opening 700a1. Also, the ball passing through the detour 710b also wins the second opening 700a2.

As described above, the third variable prize winning device 700 used in the present modified example 2, while the ball that failed to win from the first opening 700a1 flows down the detour 710b, the next small win Since the 3-variable winning device 700 is opened again, the ball flowing down the detour 710b can win from the second opening 700a2. With this configuration, when small wins occur frequently so that the third variable prize winning device 700 is continuously opened, balls flow down to both the first opening 700a1 and the second opening 700a2. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will win the third variable prize winning device 700 even if it is a small win that opens at high speed.

The difference between the ball passing time (about 1 second) on the first winning path 700d1 and the ball passing time on the second winning path 700d2 (about 0.3 seconds) should be within the period in which the V-gate 700c1 is in the guidance state. should be the difference between By configuring in this way, the possibility that a ball that has passed through either the first prize winning path 700d1 or the second prize winning path 700d2 will pass through the V gate 700c1 while the V gate 700c1 is in the guiding state is increased. It is possible to provide a more advantageous game state to the player.

In addition, since the opening width of the second opening is longer than the opening width of the first opening, the second opening is more likely to reach the third variable winning device 700 than the first opening. is a structure that makes it easy to win a prize. Therefore, it is possible to make the third variable prize winning device 700 in a state where the balls are likely to win when the small hits are consecutive.

Furthermore, in the normal game state in which the third variable prize winning device 700 does not operate, the opening/closing member 700b is closed and the second opening/closing member 700b3 is opened. The game ball flows down the first flow path 711 a and is discharged from the first discharge port 711 to the lower right area side of the game board 13 .

Therefore, in a game state other than the small win game, the ball shot to the right side area of the game board 13 by the player is suppressed (prohibited) from flowing down the second flow path 712a of the prize winning unit 710 . Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in a game state other than a small winning game (for example, a big winning game state), the ball flows down the second flow path 712a, suppressing the situation in which the flow time is delayed ( prohibited).

In addition, even if the right hitting game is performed in advance before the small winning game is executed, the ball does not flow down the second flow path 712a. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the execution of a game such as passing.

Furthermore, in the present modification 2, the second opening 700a2 where the ball winning from the second opening 700a2 flows down to the V gate 700c1 rather than the first winning path 700d1 where the ball winning from the first opening 700a1 flows down to the V gate 700c1. It is configured to shorten the passage time of the winning path 700d2. Therefore, the winning ball of the third variable prize winning device 700 can be made to flow down to the V gate 700c1 at different timings according to the winning opening, and the player can be given a big win in a small winning game. You can entertain whether or not.

In addition, for example, by configuring the period in which the V gate 700c1 is in an open state to be 0.5 seconds after the small winning game is executed, only the balls that have won from the second opening 700a2 are in the specific area ( It may be configured so that it can pass through the passage detection switch 700c2). By configuring in this way, small wins are continuously executed, and the ball can pass through the V gate 700c1 by creating a state in which the ball can pass through the second opening 700a2.

Further, the third variable prize winning device 700 used in Modification 2 has a first opening/closing portion 700b1 of an opening/closing member 700b and a second opening/closing member, as shown in FIG. 110 or FIG. 700b3 is configured to be less than one sphere. The gap may be covered by a guide plate on which balls can roll from the second opening/closing member 700b3 toward the opening/closing member 700b.

By doing so, during the small winning game, in the state where the opening and closing member 700b is open (the state where the second opening and closing member is closed), a plurality of balls rolling on the second opening and closing member are It is possible to flow down the opening/closing member 700b in a state in which the opening/closing member 700b is closed (a state in which the second opening/closing member is open).

In addition, in the present modified example 2, two openings (first opening 700a1 and second opening 700a2) are provided as a ball entering means for entering a ball into the third variable winning device 700. You may constitute a part into one. In this case, the second flow-down path 712a is configured so that the ball that did not enter the opening in the first small win among the consecutive small wins enters the opening in the later small win. Just do it. In this case, the second flow-down path 712a allows the ball to stay for a predetermined time (1 second in this modified example 2) until the next small hit is executed. should be configured to have

As described above, in the present modified example 2, when small wins are continuously executed, a game state is provided which is more advantageous than when a small win to be executed later is won alone. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to consecutive small winnings.

In addition, in the case of winning a series of small hits, it passed through the second flow path 712a during the previously executed small hit (the second flow path 712a during the ending period of the small hit (see FIG. 15(b)) A detour (guidance means) is provided so that the ball that has entered the second opening 700a2 can enter the second opening 700a2 during the small win executed after the special symbol variation time (1 second) corresponding to the small win. Therefore, it is possible to provide a more advantageous game state than when a small win to be executed later is won alone. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to consecutive small winnings.

Furthermore, in the present modified example 2, a small win can be executed a plurality of times at intervals shorter than the operating cycle of the V gate 700c1, which is the guiding means. Therefore, for example, when a small win is won three times in a row, by providing a game state in which the ball is likely to enter in the small wins (second and third times) to be executed later, When the V gate 700c1 is in the guiding state, it is possible to let the ball enter the third variable prize winning device, and the small win to be executed later is more advantageous than when the small win is won alone. The state can be provided, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play due to successive small winnings.

In addition, in this modification 2, a configuration is used in which the operation of the V gate 700c1 is always controlled at a constant cycle. It may be configured to execute for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the opening/closing member 700b of 700 is opened. By doing so, the balls flowing down the second flow-down path 712a can be awarded to the third variable prize winning device 700 immediately after the subsequent small wins are executed when the small wins are successively won. It becomes possible. Therefore, when small wins are executed continuously, it is possible to provide a more advantageous game state than when a small win to be executed later is won alone. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to consecutive small winnings.

In the present modified example 2 described above, the meandering detour 710b is used as the flowing-down period extending means for extending the flowing-down period of the ball in the second flowing-down path 712a, thereby extending the flowing-down distance of the ball to the second flow-down path 712a. Although it has been configured to extend the flow-down period of the flow-down path 712a, as another configuration for extending the flow-down distance of the ball, it is possible to use a Krun structure that causes the ball to flow down while rotating.

Further, as a method for extending the falling period of the ball, a configuration for reducing the falling speed of the ball may be used as a method other than the method for extending the falling distance of the ball. As such a configuration, for example, at least a part of the second flow-down path 712a is made of a material having a high coefficient of friction (urethane rubber, etc.) as a member capable of reducing the flow-down speed of the ball by friction generated between objects. In addition, by forming the ball rolling surface of the second flow-down path 712a roughly or by providing a protrusion, it is possible to reduce the flow rate between objects (the second The frictional force between the second flow path 712a and the ball) may be increased to reduce the flow speed of the ball.

Similar effects can be obtained by using such a configuration. In addition, in order to extend the flow period during which the ball flows down the second flow path 712a, both the flow distance extending means for extending the flow distance and the flow speed reduction means for reducing the flow speed of the ball may be used. good.

It should be noted that the board configuration of the game board 13 used in Modification 1 may be applied to the above-described first embodiment or second embodiment, or instead of various controls executed in the third embodiment, Various controls executed in the above-described first embodiment or second embodiment may be applied.

In each of the embodiments and modifications described above, output processing based on various determination processing is performed by the main controller 110, but all the output information is Also, even if the determination process is performed by a device other than the main controller 110, all information based on the determination result is output to the sound lamp control device 113 or the external output terminal board 261 It is configured to be possible. In addition, the output information can be identifiably notified to the outside. There is a connected display unit and the like.

It should be noted that the present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a variable machine) that shifts to a high-probability game state in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than normal once the jackpot hits once. In this case, a method of continuing the high-probability gaming state that shifts after the big hit until the next big hit, a method of continuing until the number of times the special symbols change reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), or a method of continuing until the special symbols change A lottery for shifting from the high-probability game state to the normal game state is performed, and if the lottery is won, the system shifts to the normal game state, but any pachinko machine may be implemented. It should be noted that, when the transition to the high probability gaming state, in addition to the high probability of the jackpot probability, the variation time of the special design is shortened, the probability of winning the normal design is high, the variation time of the normal design is It may be implemented in a pachinko machine that shortens or changes the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means that is variable when winning a lottery with normal symbols. In addition, once the jackpot hits, the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2-time rights product, 3-time rights product, etc.) that increases the expected value of the jackpot until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including that. may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. In addition, a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and enters a special game state on the condition that a ball wins in the special area, and two special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2) ) are changed at the same time, and based on the result of the lottery for one of the special symbols, the lottery for the other special symbol may be invalidated or interrupted. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

All or part of the above embodiments and modifications may be combined. Further, although the sub-controllers such as the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are used, all the functions may be integrated into the main controller 110 .

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Feature A group> (Make any of the small hits advantageous multiple times)
discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means; dynamic display means for statically displaying the identification information based on the result of determination by the dynamic display means, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the specific determination result is statically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means A privilege game execution means for executing a game, a specific area through which a ball can pass by satisfying a predetermined condition when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, and a ball passing through the specific area. and a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege advantageous to the player, in the case where the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a state where a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of times A gaming machine A1, characterized by comprising setting means for setting at least one privilege game among the privilege games to be executed so that a ball can pass through the specific area.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a variable winning device that is opened by a privilege game (small winning game, etc.), and a specific area provided in the variable winning device, in which a big winning game is executed by passing a ball. a guide member for guiding the ball to the specific area; and means for repeatedly controlling the guide member in a manner in which the ball easily passes through the specific area and in a mode in which the ball hardly passes through the specific area at a constant cycle, A pachinko machine has been proposed in which the occurrence of a large winning game in a specific small winning game is randomized by making the opening operation of the variable winning device based on the small winning game and the control operation of the induction member independent (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206309). In this case, the timing at which the variable winning device is opened by the small winning game and the timing at which the mode of the induction member changes are independent of each other, so at what timing did the ball win in the variable winning device? Although it is possible to provide the possibility of executing a jackpot game even as a I had a problem with the drop. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player's desire to play from declining.

According to the gaming machine A1, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times while a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, at least one privilege game among the privilege games to be executed a plurality of times is selected by the setting means. is set so that the sphere can pass through the specific area. Thus, by winning the privilege game multiple times, it is possible to provide the player with an advantageous state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

The gaming machine A1 has variable ball entry means for changing from a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter to an open state in which a ball can enter, based on the execution of the privilege game, and the variable ball entry means. A game machine A2, wherein the specific area is provided in means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a specific area is provided inside the variable ball entry that changes to the open state based on the execution of the privilege game. As a result, it is possible to execute the game aiming at the specific area only when the privilege game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the game value for the privilege game, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In the game machine A2, a variable means provided in the variable ball entry means, capable of changing between an advantageous state in which the ball can easily pass through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which the ball cannot easily pass through the specific area, and variable control means for alternately varying the means between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state, wherein the predetermined condition is met when the variable means is varied to the advantageous state by the variable control means. A game machine A3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means variably controls the variable means between an advantageous state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through, and when the variable means is in an advantageous state, the ball can pass through the specific area. A predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, when the variable means is in an advantageous state, the ball that enters the variable ball entry means after the privilege game is executed can pass through the specific area, so that the degree of difficulty for the ball to pass through the specific area is increased. is possible, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A3, the variable control means performs variable control such that the variable means is repeatedly varied between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state at a predetermined cycle.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the variable control means repeatedly changes the variable means between an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state at a predetermined cycle, the timing at which the variable means changes to the advantageous state is made random with respect to the timing at which the privilege game is executed. becomes possible. Therefore, even if the ball enters the variable ball entering means at any timing, there is a possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area.

A gaming machine A5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the specific condition is established when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since a specific condition is satisfied when a plurality of privilege games are executed in a predetermined order, a new game feature is provided in which a player is provided with an advantageous state based on a plurality of determination results by the determination means. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order, in addition to the order in which the privilege game is continuously executed a plurality of times, the result of determination by the determination means while the privilege game is performed may be set in a predetermined order. By doing so, even if the result of discrimination by the discriminating means is a failure, there is a possibility that the player will be provided with an advantageous state, so that the player can always have expectations. has the effect of

A gaming machine A6 characterized in that, in the gaming machine A5, the predetermined order is that the privilege games are executed consecutively.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the specific condition is established by continuously executing the privilege game, even if the ball does not pass through the specific region when the privilege game is won, the privilege game is won again next time. For example, it is possible to make it easier for the sphere to pass through the specific area. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the bonus game is won a plurality of times.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A6, a ball entry means capable of entering a ball, a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring ball entry information based on the ball entering the ball entry means, and storage means for storing a plurality of entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied; further comprising a second specification condition as the specification condition; The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the condition is established when a predetermined number or more of the entering ball information are stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of pieces of ball-entering information acquired by the ball-entering information acquisition means based on the fact that a ball has entered the ball-entering means are stored in the storage means until the determination condition is satisfied. The second specific condition is established by storing a predetermined number or more of pieces of entering ball information in the storage means. As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to play a game so as to store a plurality of pieces of winning ball information in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines A4 to A7, the variable control means sets a third period, which is a combination of the first period in which the advantageous state is established and the second period in which the disadvantageous state is established, as one operation period. The setting means has dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game, and the dynamic display period setting means The one privilege is provided so that when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the one privilege game and any of the other privilege games are executed at different timings for the one operation period. A gaming machine A8 characterized by having a special dynamic display period setting means for setting a special dynamic display period as a dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to a game.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means variably controls the variable means with the third period, which is the combination of the first period in which the advantageous state and the second period in which the unfavorable state are combined, as one operation period. Then, the dynamic display period setting means sets the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game. Further, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times by the special dynamic display period setting means, one privilege game and any other privilege game are performed at different timings in one operation period. A special dynamic display period is set to run. By doing so, it is possible to set a privilege game that allows passing through the specific area and a privilege game that makes it difficult to pass through the specific area, depending on the dynamic display period to be executed. Therefore, by controlling the operation of the variable means and the variable ball entry means, the burden of processing related to the game can be reduced compared to the case of setting the privilege game that can pass through the specific area and the privilege game that is difficult to pass through the specific area. has the effect of being able to

Here, in the configuration provided with the gaming machine A6, among the continuously executed privilege games, the first privilege game (first privilege game (corresponding to any other privilege game)) On the other hand, the special dynamic display period is set so that the execution timing of the next privilege game (the second privilege game (corresponding to the privilege game of 1)) is different. That is, by setting the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the second privilege game to the special dynamic display period, the execution timing of the privilege games that are continuously executed is set to one operation period of the variable means. can be different. As a result, the target for setting the special dynamic display period is only the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game, so there is an effect that the program capacity for executing the game processing can be reduced.

In addition, in the configuration without the game machine A6, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display corresponding to the loss) executed while a plurality of privilege games are executed is also the special dynamic display period. is configured to be set. As a result, the number of dynamic displays for which the special dynamic display period is to be set is increased compared to the configuration provided with the game machine A6, but a state advantageous to the player is provided when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times. There is an effect that the number of patterns can be increased.

In the gaming machine A8, the special dynamic display period setting means sets the execution timing of the first privilege game relative to the execution timing of any of the other privilege games when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times. is set so that the special dynamic display period is different by a predetermined period equal to or less than the first period.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by setting the special dynamic display period, the execution timing of one privilege game is different from the execution timing of any other privilege game by a predetermined period equal to or less than the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. It becomes possible to Thereby, when the execution timing of one privilege game and the execution timing of any other privilege game are made different, the execution timing of each privilege game is set across the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent such a situation. Therefore, by winning the privilege game multiple times, it becomes easier to provide the player with an advantageous state, so that when the privilege game is won multiple times, the player's desire to play can be suppressed. effective.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the predetermined period equal to or shorter than the first period is different from the first period. By doing so, it is possible to execute a plurality of privilege games at a wide range of timing without straddling the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state, so that a game state that is advantageous to the player is provided. It is possible to increase the probability of being Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In addition, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the execution timing of any one of the privilege games in the above 1 is set at least for a predetermined period of time equal to or longer than the first period with respect to the execution timing of any of the other privilege games. The special dynamic display period may be settable so as to be different in minutes. By doing so, it is possible to greatly vary the execution timings of the privilege games that are executed a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine A9, the special dynamic display period setting means is configured to be able to set the special dynamic display period up to a predetermined number of times, and when the special dynamic display period is set the predetermined number of times, the The predetermined number of times is set so that the interval between the execution timings of the privilege game that are the most distant from the one operation period among the execution timings of the privilege game that are executed a plurality of times is wider than the second period. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to set a special dynamic display period up to a predetermined number of times for each of the privilege games that are executed multiple times, and the farthest interval among the execution timings of the privilege games that are executed multiple times is variable. The predetermined number of times the special dynamic display period is set is set so as to be wider than the second period during which the means is in the disadvantageous state. As a result, when the special dynamic display period is set for a predetermined number of times, the privilege game can be executed at a timing other than the second period in any of the privilege games for which the special dynamic display period is set. That is, it is possible to reliably provide the player with an advantageous state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result, at least until the privilege game corresponding to the specific determination result is executed, the Advantageous privilege game discriminating means for discriminating whether the privilege game is an advantageous privilege game in which a ball can pass through the specific area, and information reporting means for announcing discrimination information reflecting the discrimination result of the advantageous privilege game discriminating means. A gaming machine A11 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, until the privilege game is executed, it is possible to notify the determination information reflecting the determination result as to whether the privilege game to be executed this time is the privilege game advantageous to the player. Therefore, even if the privilege game is won multiple times, the content of the information to be notified can be changed, so that the player's motivation to play will decrease when the privilege game is won multiple times. has the effect of suppressing

It should be noted that the information notification means for notifying information reflecting the determination result of the advantageous privilege game determination means may be any notification mode that can be recognized by the player. Preliminary determination information reflecting the determination result of the advantageous privilege game determination means may be reported as an effect, or may be reported using a sound output from a speaker. Alternatively, the notification may be made using light emitting means (such as an LED) provided in the gaming machine.

In any one of the game machines A7 to A11, a pre-determination means for determining the entered ball information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is established; When it is determined that the information indicates a privilege game, it is determined whether the privilege game is an advantageous privilege game in which a ball can pass through a specific area or a disadvantageous privilege game in which a ball cannot easily pass through the specified area. a second preliminary determination means for pre-determining; A game machine A12 characterized by having a second pre-determination information notification means for notifying the determination information.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A7 to A11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by executing the second preliminary determination for the entering-ball information stored in the storage means, the second preliminary determination information can be notified before the determination condition of the entering-ball information is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance whether the privilege game to be executed soon is an advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player, and diversification of the effects to be executed can be achieved.

The gaming machine A12 has a continuous effect executing means capable of executing a continuous effect accompanied by continuous dynamic display for any of the entering ball information stored in the storage means, wherein the continuous effect executing means A gaming machine A13 characterized by executing an effect reflecting the second prior determination information.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to perform continuous effects reflecting the second pre-determination information for continuous dynamic displays. Thereby, it is possible to determine not only whether or not there is information corresponding to a privilege game in the entry information stored in the storage means, but also whether or not there is entry information corresponding to an advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player. It is possible to notify the result of determination by continuous display accompanying a plurality of dynamic displays, and diversification of the effects to be executed can be achieved.

In the gaming machine A13, a bonus game effect setting means for setting a bonus game effect accompanying execution of the bonus game; a bonus game effect execution means for executing the bonus game effect set by the bonus game effect setting means; a determination means during continuous performance for determining whether the continuous performance is being performed when the privilege game performance is set by the privilege game performance setting means; A game A14 characterized by setting a specific privilege game effect when the determining means determines that the continuous effect is being performed.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if the privilege game is executed during the period in which the continuous performance is executed, it is possible to execute the specific privilege game performance for the continuous performance as the privilege game performance. Therefore, there is an effect that continuous effects can be provided to the player without causing discomfort.

In the gaming machine A14, the privilege game effect setting means sets, as the specific privilege game effect, a continuation suggestion effect suggesting continuation of the continuous effect in the case of the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game. A game machine A15 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game is executed during the period during which the continuous performance is executed, the performance suggesting the continuation of the continuous performance is executed. Therefore, when the privilege game is won multiple times during the continuous performance, the continuous suggestive performance is executed even if the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that a game has been executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to the execution of the privilege game a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine A14 or A15, the privilege game effect setting means suggests that the present privilege game is an advantageous privilege game in the case of the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game as the specific privilege game presentation. A game machine A16 characterized in that a suggestive effect is set.

According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A14 or A15, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed while the continuous performance is being executed, the suggestion performance suggesting that the privilege game of this time is the advantageous privilege game is executed. Therefore, when the privilege game is won multiple times during the continuous performance, the suggestive performance is executed when the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed, so that the player is provided with an advantageous state. can be recognized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to the execution of the privilege game a plurality of times.

Here, in the configuration including the gaming machine A15, when the privilege game is won a plurality of times during the continuous performance, when the disadvantage privilege game is executed, the continuation suggestion performance is executed and the advantage privilege game is executed. And the suggestion production is executed. Therefore, even if the privilege game is executed a plurality of times during the continuous production, until the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed, the production in which the continuous production continues is executed. can be executed as a continuous production of Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

<Feature B group> (There is a period during which multiple small wins are advantageously executed)
discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means; Dynamic display means for statically displaying identification information based on a result of determination by the means, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when identification information based on a specific determination result is statically displayed on the display means. variable ball entry means capable of changing from a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter to an open state in which a ball can enter when the privilege game is executed by the game execution means; A gaming machine having a specific area provided in a variable ball entry means, and privilege giving means for giving an advantageous privilege to a player based on the passage of a ball through the specific area, wherein the specific area A variable means capable of alternately changing between an advantageous state through which the ball can pass and a disadvantageous state in which the ball is more difficult to pass than the advantageous state, and the variable means is either the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state. A variable control means for variably controlling the variable means with a period from one state to the next being changed to the one state as one operation period; and specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state in which the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the balls reach the variable means a plurality of times within the single operation period. Game machine B1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a variable winning device that is opened by a privilege game (small winning game, etc.), and a specific area provided in the variable winning device, in which a big winning game is executed by passing a ball. Then, a guide member that guides the ball to the specific area, a mode in which the ball easily passes through the specific area, and a mode in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific area are repeatedly executed at a constant cycle. A pachinko machine has been proposed which randomizes the occurrence of a big win game in a specific small win game by providing a means and making the opening operation of the variable winning device based on the small win game and the control operation of the induction member independent. (For example, JP-A-2011-206309). In this case, the timing at which the variable winning device is opened by the small winning game and the timing at which the mode of the induction member changes are independent of each other. There is a problem that it is possible that the player cannot pass through and the player's motivation to play is lowered. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player's desire to play from declining.

According to the gaming machine B1, when a predetermined condition is established, the privilege game is performed so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period in which the variable means is variably controlled between an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state. It can be executed multiple times. Therefore, the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period, so that it is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game is executed during the period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In gaming machine B1, a ball entry means capable of entering a ball, a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring ball entry information based on the ball entering the ball entry means, and a ball entry information acquisition means and storage means for storing a plurality of entry information acquired by at least until the determination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by storing a plurality of pieces of ball-entering information in the storage means, it is possible to sequentially execute a plurality of dynamic displays. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation where the dynamic display is interrupted within one operation period, so there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility of executing the privilege game a plurality of times.

A gaming machine B3 characterized in that in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the predetermined condition is established when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, as the determination result by the determination means, in addition to the determination result of executing the privilege game, it has the determination result of setting the specific game state, There is an effect that various games can be offered to the player based on the determination result of the determination means.

A gaming machine B4 characterized in that in the gaming machine B2 or B3, the predetermined condition is established when a predetermined number or more of the ball-entering information are stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the specific game state is set when the number of entered ball information stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to always store the predetermined number or more of balls in the storage means, so that there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B1 or B4, the specific game state setting means has dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period during which identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, The period setting means has special dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a special dynamic display period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than usual, when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Game machine B5.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special dynamic display period, which is a shorter dynamic display period than usual, is set by the special dynamic display period setting means. This makes it possible to perform dynamic display multiple times within one operation period. Therefore, since the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period, by winning the privilege game a plurality of times, the variable means is in an advantageous state. It is possible to increase the possibility that a privilege game in which the ball can reach the variable means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In the configuration provided with the game machine B2, the storage means can store a plurality of winning ball information. Therefore, when the special dynamic display period is set, the dynamic display may be interrupted. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B5, when the predetermined condition is established, at least before the special dynamic display period is set, the ball entry assist state is set such that the ball entry information is likely to be stored in the storage means. A gaming machine B6 characterized by having auxiliary state setting means.

According to the gaming machine B6, it is possible to set the entry assistance state in which the entry information is likely to be stored in the storage means before the special dynamic display period is set. Therefore, since it becomes easy to set the special dynamic display period in a state in which a plurality of pieces of entering information are stored in the storage means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the specific game state is interrupted in the middle.

The ball-entering assistance state setting means can set, for example, a state in which the ball-entering information is likely to be stored in the storage means by setting a long dynamic display time, or regulate the ball-entering means. A configuration is conceivable in which the regulation means for controlling the ball is changed to a state in which it does not regulate the entry of the ball.

In the game machine B6, the entering assist state setting means sets a predetermined dynamic display period as the dynamic display period during which the dynamic display is performed.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, it is possible to set a state in which entry information is easily stored in the storage means simply by using a configuration of setting a predetermined dynamic display period. , there is an effect that it is possible to easily suppress a situation in which the specific game state is interrupted on the way.

As the predetermined dynamic display period, it is sufficient to set a period in which a plurality of balls can be entered by the ball-entering means. For example, a dynamic display period of about 30 seconds may be set. . Also, if the dynamic display period is intentionally set for the purpose of causing a plurality of balls to enter the ball-entering means, it is included in the dynamic display period longer than usual.

Furthermore, the object for which the predetermined dynamic display period is set includes the dynamic display of the identification information in which the determination result of the determination means is the predetermined determination result, and the first execution after the specific game state is set. display, etc. can be considered.

Here, the following configuration may be used as means for achieving the same effect as the game machine B7. That is, it may be configured such that a predetermined dynamic display period is set when it is determined that the number of entered ball information stored is less than or equal to a predetermined number during the specific game state. In this case, the predetermined number is preferably at least 1 or more. This is to allow the determination means to perform the determination at least a plurality of times in the remaining specific game states to be executed after the predetermined dynamic display period is set. As a result, the number of entered ball information stored in the storage means during the specific game state is less than or equal to the predetermined number, and even after the predetermined dynamic display period is set, the privilege game is executed a plurality of times during the specific game state. becomes possible.

In any one of game machines B1 to B7, the specific game state setting means has variable control period extension means for extending the one operation period variably controlled by the variable control means. Game machine B8 to play.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific game state is set, one operation period in which the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control period extending means is extended. Therefore, since the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period of the variable control means, the variable means is in an advantageous state by winning the privilege game a plurality of times. It is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game will be executed so that the ball reaches the variable means within the period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In the game machine B8, the variable control period extending means extends the first period of the one operation period.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of the game machine B8, the first period of one operation period of the variable control means is extended, so that the ball is delivered to the variable means within the period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. It is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game will be executed so as to reach. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

A game machine B10 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B9, the specific game state setting means has privilege game period shortening means for shortening the period in which the privilege game is executed.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the period during which the privilege game is executed can be shortened. A privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine B10, the privilege game period shortening means shortens a period during which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state during the period during which the privilege game is executed.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B10, it is possible to shorten the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the closed state in the period during which the privilege game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game is executed so that the ball reaches the variable means within the period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B11, the game machine B12 is characterized in that the specific game state setting means sets the specific game state until the determination by the determination means is performed a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific game state can be set until the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, a game state that is advantageous to the player is provided within a limited range, so that it is possible to provide the player with a period of expectation.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B12, when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result, the privilege is provided at least until the privilege game based on the specific determination result is executed. The game has advantageous privilege game discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the game is an advantageous privilege game in which a ball can pass through a specific area, and information reporting means for notifying information based on the discrimination result of the advantageous privilege game discriminating means. Characterized game machine B13.

According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, until the privilege game is executed by the information notification means, information based on the determination result as to whether the privilege game to be executed this time is a privilege game advantageous to the player is notified. Therefore, even if the privilege game is won consecutively, the contents of the information to be reported can be changed, so that the player's motivation to play is reduced when the privilege game is won multiple times. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B13, a pre-determination means for determining the entered ball information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is established, and the pre-determination information determined by the pre-determination means When it is determined that the information indicates a privilege game, the privilege game is an advantageous privilege game in which a ball can pass through a specific area or a disadvantageous privilege game in which a ball is more difficult to pass through the specific area than the advantageous privilege game. and the entering ball information pre-determined by the second pre-determination means is discriminated by the second pre-determination means during the period until it is discriminated by the discrimination means. and a second pre-determined information notification means for notifying the second pre-determined information.

According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by executing the second preliminary determination for the ball entry information stored in the storage means, the second preliminary determination information is notified until the determination means executes the determination of the ball entry information. can do. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance whether the privilege game to be executed soon is an advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player, and diversification of the effects to be executed can be achieved.

The game machine B14 has a continuous effect executing means capable of executing a continuous effect accompanying continuous dynamic display for any of the entering ball information stored in the storage means, and the continuous effect executing means A gaming machine B15 characterized by executing an effect based on the second prior determination information.

According to the gaming machine B15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to perform continuous effects reflecting the second pre-determination information for continuous dynamic displays. Thereby, it is possible to determine not only whether or not there is information corresponding to a privilege game in the entry information stored in the storage means, but also whether or not there is entry information corresponding to an advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player. It is possible to notify the result of determination by continuous display accompanying a plurality of dynamic displays, and diversification of the effects to be executed can be achieved.

In the gaming machine B15, a privilege game effect setting means for setting a privilege game effect accompanying execution of the privilege game; a privilege game effect execution means for executing the privilege game effect set by the privilege game effect setting means; a determination means during continuous performance for determining whether the continuous performance is being performed when the privilege game performance is set by the privilege game performance setting means; A game B16 characterized by setting a specific privilege game effect when the determining means determines that the continuous effect is being performed.

According to the gaming machine B16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B15, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if a privilege game is executed during the period during which the continuous performance is executed, it is possible to execute the privilege game performance for the continuous performance as the privilege game performance. Therefore, there is an effect that continuous effects can be provided to the player without causing discomfort.

In the gaming machine B16, the privilege game effect setting means sets, as the specific privilege game effect, a continuation suggestion effect suggesting that the continuous effect is continued in the case of the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game. A game machine B17 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine B17, in addition to the effects of the game machine B15, the following effects are produced. That is, when the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game is executed while the continuous performance is being executed, the performance suggesting the continuation of the continuous performance is executed. Therefore, when the privilege game is won multiple times during the continuous performance, the continuous suggestive performance is executed even if the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that a game has been executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

In the gaming machine B16 or B17, the privilege game effect setting means suggests that the present privilege game is an advantageous privilege game in the case of the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game as the specific privilege game presentation. A game machine B18 characterized in that a suggestive effect is set.

According to the gaming machine B18, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B16 or B17, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed while the continuous performance is being executed, the suggestion performance suggesting that the privilege game of this time is the advantageous privilege game is executed. Therefore, when the privilege game is won multiple times during the continuous performance, the suggestive performance is executed when the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed, so that the player is provided with an advantageous state. can be recognized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Here, in the configuration provided with the gaming machine B17, when the privilege game is won a plurality of times during the continuous performance, when the disadvantage privilege game is executed, the continuation suggestion performance is executed and the advantage privilege game is executed. And the suggestion production is executed. Therefore, even if the privilege game is executed a plurality of times during the continuous production, until the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed, the production in which the continuous production continues is executed. can be executed as a continuous production of Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

<Characteristic group C> (There is a period during which multiple small hits are likely to be executed)
A ball entry means that allows a ball to enter, a ball entry information acquisition means that acquires ball entry information based on the fact that a ball has entered the ball entry means, and a judgment is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition. determining means, display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determining means, and after dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period, the identification information based on the determination result by the determining means is stopped and displayed. and a dynamic display means for displaying the identification information based on the result of the determination that the entering ball information is the specific entering ball information by the determining means is stopped and displayed on the display means, which is advantageous to the player. a special game execution means for executing a special game, a specific area through which a ball can pass by satisfying a predetermined condition when the special game is executed by the special game execution means, and a ball in the specific area In a gaming machine having privilege granting means for imparting an advantageous privilege to a player when passing through, a specific game state in which the specific ball entry information is easily acquired based on the establishment of a specific condition is established. When the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a state in which a specific game state setting means to be set and a special condition that can be established in the specific game state set by the specific game state setting means are established, the predetermined condition is established. and setting means for setting at least one privilege game to be executed among the privilege games to be executed a plurality of times while the game machine C1 is playing.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a variable winning device that is opened by a privilege game (small winning game, etc.), and a specific area provided in the variable winning device, in which a big winning game is executed by passing a ball. and a guide member for guiding the ball to the specific area, and control means for controlling the guide member so that the ball can easily pass through the specific area and the ball cannot easily pass through the specific area. A pachinko machine capable of providing a jackpot game when passing through a specific area after winning a winning game has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206309). In this case, in order to provide a big winning game with a predetermined probability, it is necessary to execute a small winning game with a probability equal to or higher than the predetermined probability, so there is a risk that the small winning game will occur frequently, and the player will be uncomfortable. There is a problem in that the player's desire to play is lowered due to the pleasant feeling. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player's desire to play from declining.

According to the gaming machine C1, since it has a specific game state in which it is easy to acquire specific ball entry information, it is possible to suppress frequent occurrence of privilege games in a normal state other than the specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

In addition, although the specific game state is a state in which the privilege game is likely to occur frequently, if the privilege game is executed a plurality of times during the specific game state, it is possible to create a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play due to frequent occurrence of the privilege game.

In the game machine C1, the specific condition is satisfied when the determination result by the determination means is a predetermined determination result other than the specific determination result.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the determination result of the determining means has the determination result of setting the specific game state in addition to the determination result of executing the privilege game. There is an effect that various games can be offered to the player based on the determination result.

The game machine C1 or C2 has storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of the ball entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied, and the special condition is the storage means. A game machine C3 characterized in that it is established by storing a predetermined number or more of entering ball information in the .

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special condition is established by storing a predetermined number or more of pieces of information on entering a ball in the storage means. Therefore, in order to satisfy the special condition, the player can be urged to play the game so as to store a large amount of ball entry information in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

The game machine C1 or C2 has storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of the entering-ball information acquired by the entering-ball information acquiring means at least until the determination condition is satisfied, and the special condition is stored in the storage means. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that it is established when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of the stored ball entry information.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special condition is established when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of ball entry information stored in the storage means. Therefore, in order to satisfy the special condition, the player can be urged to play the game so as to store a large amount of ball entry information in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the game machine C4, the predetermined order is that the privilege game is executed consecutively for a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game is executed in succession and the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order, at least one of the privilege games executed a plurality of times is executed in the specific area. It is set to be executed in a state where the ball can pass through. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to play the game so as to store a large amount of ball-entering information in the storage means so that the privilege game can be continuously executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C5, the ball-entering means includes a first ball-entering means capable of entering a ball, and a ball-entering means provided separately from the first ball-entering means. and a second ball entering means that allows the ball to enter the second ball entering means, and the first ball entering information acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entering means. The game machine C6 is characterized in that the specific ball entry information is set higher for the second ball entry information acquired based on the ball.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, as the ball-entering means, there are a first ball-entering means that allows a ball to enter, and a second ball-entering means that is provided separately from the first ball-entering means and allows a ball to enter on the basis of the fulfillment of the release condition. A ball means is provided, wherein the second ball-entering information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball-entering means is higher than the first ball-entering information acquired based on the ball entering the first ball-entering means. Specific entry information is set high. As a result, there is an effect that the frequency with which the privilege game is executed can be reduced until the release condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine C6, a second determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition, a second display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result of the second determination means, and the second display. a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the means for a predetermined period of time, and then statically displaying the identification information based on the result of determination by the second determination means; and dynamic display by the second dynamic display means second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period of the identification information; and identification information based on a specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the second display means by the second dynamic display means. a second privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game that satisfies the opening condition of the second ball-entering means in the case where the determination result by the determination means is the predetermined determination result; and second special dynamic display for setting a second special dynamic display period, which is a second dynamic display period shorter than normal, as the second dynamic display period set by the second dynamic display period setting means. A gaming machine C7 characterized by having period setting means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the result of determination by the second determination means is the specific second determination result, and the identification information based on the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the second display means by the second dynamic display means, The second privilege game execution means has a configuration for establishing the opening condition of the second ball entry means, and when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result, the second dynamic display period setting means sets. A second dynamic display period shorter than usual is set as the second dynamic display period. As a result, it is possible to provide a game state in which the ball can be easily entered into the second ball-entering means when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result.

Here, in the configuration provided with the game machine C5, since the second ball entering means is more likely to acquire the specific ball entering information than the first ball entering means, when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result, In addition, it is possible to provide a game state in which it is easy to acquire a plurality of specific ball entry information, that is, in which a privilege game is easily executed a plurality of times.

In any one of game machines C3 to C7, the storage means has a first storage section capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the first ball entry information and a second storage section capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the second ball entry information. and further includes a second special condition as the special condition, wherein the second special condition is the case where the storage means stores a predetermined number of pieces of ball entry information that is greater than the upper limit of the number that can be stored in the first storage unit. A game machine C8 characterized in that it can be established in

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of ball entry information stored in the storage means is greater than the upper limit number that can be stored in the first storage section, that is, when the second storage section stores at least the ball entry information, the special condition holds. As a result, in a game state in which the privilege game is likely to be executed, it is possible to create an advantageous state for the player when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, in order to satisfy the special condition, the player can be urged to play the game so as to store a large amount of ball entry information in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C8, the second special condition is a state in which the storage means stores a predetermined number of pieces of entry information that is greater than the upper limit number of pieces that can be stored in the first storage section, and a predetermined number of pieces of the specific piece of entry information. A gaming machine C9 characterized by being established when the above is stored.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second special condition is satisfied when the storage means stores a predetermined number of pieces of information on entering a ball, which is larger than the upper limit of the number of pieces that can be stored in the first storage unit, and stores a predetermined number or more of pieces of specific information on entering a ball. do. Therefore, the conditions for establishing the second special condition can be complicated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Any one of the game machines C1 to C9 has variable ball entry means for changing from a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter to an open state in which a ball can enter, based on the execution of the privilege game. , a game machine C10 characterized in that the specific area is provided in the variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the specific area is provided in the variable ball entry means that changes to the open state based on the execution of the privilege game, it is possible to execute the game aiming at the specific area only when the privilege game is executed. becomes. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the game value for the privilege game, and therefore, when the privilege game is won a plurality of times, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. .

In the gaming machine C10, a variable means provided in the variable ball entry means and capable of changing between an advantageous state in which the ball can easily pass through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which the ball cannot easily pass through the specific area; variable control means for alternately varying the means between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state, wherein the predetermined condition is met when the variable means is varied to the advantageous state by the variable control means. A game machine C11 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means is configured to be variably controllable between an advantageous state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through. A predetermined condition that allows passage is established. As a result, when the variable means is in an advantageous state, the ball that enters the variable ball entry means after the privilege game is executed can pass through the specific area, so that the degree of difficulty for the ball to pass through the specific area is increased. is possible, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C11, the variable control means variably controls the variable means such that the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state are repeatedly varied at a predetermined cycle.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the variable control means repeatedly changes the variable means between an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state at a predetermined cycle, the timing at which the variable means changes to the advantageous state is made random with respect to the timing at which the privilege game is executed. becomes possible. Therefore, there is a possibility that the ball that enters the variable ball entering means at various timings will pass through the specific area, so that there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

In any one of the game machines C10 to C12, the variable control means sets a third period, which is a combination of the first period in which the advantageous state is established and the second period in which the disadvantageous state is established, as one operation period. The setting means has dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game, and the dynamic display period setting means When the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the one privilege game and any other privilege game are executed at different timings with respect to the one operation period. A gaming machine C13 characterized by comprising special dynamic display period setting means for setting a special dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to a game.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C10 to C12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means variably controls the variable means with a third period including the first period in which the advantageous state and the second period in which the disadvantageous state are combined is set as one operation period, and the dynamic display period of the setting means. A dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game is set by the setting means. Then, when the special dynamic display period setting means of the dynamic display period setting means executes a plurality of bonus games, one bonus game and another bonus game are executed at different timings for one operation period. A special dynamic display period is set so that any one of the bonus games is executed. By doing so, it is possible to set a privilege game that allows passing through the specific area and a privilege game that makes it difficult to pass through the specific area by changing the dynamic display period. Therefore, compared with the case of setting a privilege game that allows passing through the specific area and a privilege game that makes it difficult to pass through the specific area, there is an effect that the burden of processing related to the game can be reduced.

Here, in the configuration provided with the gaming machine C5, among the continuously executed privilege games, the first privilege game (first privilege game (corresponding to any other privilege game)) On the other hand, the special dynamic display period is set so that the execution timing of the next privilege game (the second privilege game (corresponding to the privilege game of 1)) is different. In other words, by setting the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the second privilege game as the special dynamic display period, the execution timing of the privilege games that are continuously executed can be changed within one operation period of the variable means. can be different for As a result, the target for setting the special dynamic display period is only the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game, so there is an effect that the program capacity for executing the game processing can be reduced.

In addition, in the configuration without the gaming machine C5, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display corresponding to the loss) executed while a plurality of privilege games are executed is also the special dynamic display. Configured to set a time period. As a result, the dynamic display for which the special dynamic display period is to be set increases the number of patterns that provide an advantageous state to the player when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, as compared with the configuration in which the game machine C5 is provided. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine C13, the special dynamic display period setting means sets the execution timing of the one privilege game with respect to the execution timing of any of the other privilege games when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times. is set so that the special dynamic display period is different by a predetermined period equal to or less than the first period.

According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by setting the special dynamic display period, the execution timing of one privilege game is different from the execution timing of any other privilege game by a predetermined period equal to or less than the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. It becomes possible to Thereby, when the execution timing of one privilege game and the execution timing of any other privilege game are made different, the execution timing of each privilege game is set across the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent such a situation. Therefore, by winning the privilege game multiple times, it becomes easier to provide the player with an advantageous state, so that when the privilege game is won multiple times, the player's desire to play can be suppressed. effective.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the predetermined period equal to or shorter than the first period is different from the first period. By doing so, it is possible to execute a plurality of privilege games at a wide range of timing without straddling the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state, so that a game state that is advantageous to the player is provided. It is possible to increase the probability of being Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In addition, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the execution timing of the one privilege game is made to differ by at least a predetermined period of time equal to or longer than the first period with respect to the execution timing of any of the other privilege games. The special dynamic display period may be settable as follows. By doing so, it is possible to greatly vary the execution timings of the privilege games that are executed a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine C14, the special dynamic display period setting means is configured to be able to set the special dynamic display period up to a predetermined number of times, and when the special dynamic display period is set the predetermined number of times, the The predetermined number of times is set so that the interval between the execution timings of the privilege game that are the most distant from the one operation period among the execution timings of the privilege game that are executed a plurality of times is wider than the second period. A gaming machine C15 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to set a special dynamic display period up to a predetermined number of times for each of the privilege games that are executed multiple times, and the farthest interval among the execution timings of the privilege games that are executed multiple times is variable. The predetermined number of times the special dynamic display period is set is set so as to be wider than the second period during which the means is in the disadvantageous state. As a result, when the special dynamic display period is set for a predetermined number of times, the privilege game can be executed at a timing other than the second period in any of the privilege games for which the special dynamic display period is set. That is, it is possible to reliably provide the player with an advantageous state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

<Feature D group> (Structure that makes it easy to win V prizes with small hits consecutively)
A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition, and a ball entry means for enabling a ball to be entered when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. a variable means that can be changed between an allowable position for allowing a ball to enter the ball-entering means and a regulating position for restricting the ball-entering means; A game machine having a specific area through which a ball can pass through and a privilege giving means for giving an advantageous privilege to a player based on the passage of the ball through the specific area, wherein the privilege game is a plurality of When the ball is executed twice, the ball whose entry into the ball entry means is restricted by the variable means positioned at the regulation position during the privilege game is transferred to the ball entry means during the next and subsequent privilege games. and a setting means for setting so that at least one of the following privilege games is executed during the period when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Characterized gaming machine D1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, in a small winning game in which the winning opening is opened, a first small winning game in which the variable ball entering means is opened and closed in a manner in which the ball is easy to enter, and a mode in which the ball is difficult to win. A gaming machine having a second small winning game that opens and closes the variable ball entry means has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233195). In such a gaming machine, even if the second small winning game is won, it is difficult to enter the ball into the winning opening. Since there is no advantage, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced when a plurality of wins are made in the second small winning game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player's desire to play from declining.

According to the game machine D1, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the ball whose entry into the ball entry means is restricted during the privilege game is guided to the ball entry means during the next and subsequent privilege games. It has a configuration that allows Further, it has a configuration in which at least one privilege game among the following privilege games is set to be executed in a state in which the ball can pass through the specific area. Therefore, when the privilege game is won multiple times, the player is in an advantageous state, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won multiple times. .

In the game machine D1, the guiding means has a flow-down passage through which the ball can flow down, and a flow-down period extension means for extending the period of time for the ball to flow down the flow-down passage. D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by extending the period during which the ball flows down the flow-down passage by the flow-down period extending means, the ball flowing down the flow-down passage is made to flow down to a position where the ball can enter the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably guide the player to the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

In the game machine D2, a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, a display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display of the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period. dynamic display means for statically displaying the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means; and dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. and wherein the specific condition is satisfied when identification information based on a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means, and the flowing period extension means includes the A game characterized in that the period during which the ball flows down the downflow path is extended so as to be longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to at least one of the following privilege games. Machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period during which the ball flows down the flow path is set to be longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to at least one privilege game among the following privilege games. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably guide the player to the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

In any one of gaming machines D1 to D3, the ball entering means has a first opening into which a ball can enter and a second opening provided separately from the first opening, and the guiding means a game machine D4, wherein a ball whose entry into the first opening is restricted by the variable means positioned at the restriction position is guided to the second opening.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball-entering means has a first opening and a second opening, and a ball whose entry into the first opening is restricted is guided to the second opening by the guiding means. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably guide the player to the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

In the gaming machine D4, the variable means has a covering member that covers the first opening and the second opening when positioned at the regulating position, and the covering member allows a ball to roll on the upper surface thereof. , wherein the area covered by the covering member is wider in the second opening than in the first opening.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means has a covering member capable of covering the first opening and the second opening, and the area covered by the covering member for the second opening is wider than that for the first opening. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to enter the second opening than the first opening, and when the privilege game is won multiple times, the player can be in an advantageous state. , there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the ball entering means is second guiding means for making it easier for a ball entered through the second opening to enter the specific area than a ball entered through the first opening. A gaming machine D6 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4 or D5, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, a ball that enters through the second opening flows down the second guiding means, so that the ball enters the specific area more easily than a ball that enters through the first opening. As a result, when the privilege game is won multiple times, the player can be in an advantageous state, and when the privilege game is won multiple times, the player's desire to play can be suppressed. effective.

In the gaming machine D6, a second variable means provided within the ball entry means and capable of being varied between an allowable position for allowing the ball to pass through the specific area or a restricting position for restricting the ball from passing through the specific area; , and a second variable control means for varying the second variable means to the allowable position for a predetermined period after the privilege game is executed, wherein the second guide means is operated from the first opening. The second passage, which is the passage until the ball entered from the second opening passes through the specific region, is longer than the passage period of the first passage, which is the passage until the ball that has entered the ball passes through the specific region. A game machine D7 characterized in that it is configured to shorten the passage period of the .

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second variable means is provided within the ball entry means that can be changed to an allowable position for allowing the ball to pass through the specific area or a restricting position for restricting the ball from passing through the specific area, and the second variable control means The second variable means is varied to the allowable position for a predetermined period after the privilege game is executed. Then, as the second guide means, there are provided a first passage, which is a passage through which the ball entering from the first opening passes through the specific region, and a passage through which the ball entering through the second opening passes through the specific region. A second passage is provided, and a passage period during which the ball passes through the second passage is shorter than a passage period during which the ball passes through the first passage. This makes it easier for a ball entering from the second opening to pass through the specific area than a ball entering from the first opening. Therefore, when the privilege game is won a plurality of times, the player can be in an advantageous state, and when the privilege game is won a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. There is

The period during which the variable means is in the allowable position by the second variable control means is set longer than the passage period during which the ball passes through the first passage and shorter than the passage period during which the ball passes through the second passage. good too. By doing so, it is possible to restrict the balls passing through the passages other than the second passage from passing through the specific region. Therefore, when the privilege game is won a plurality of times, the player can be in an advantageous state, and when the privilege game is won a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. There is

In the game machine D7, the game machine D8 is characterized in that the second path is formed to have a steeper downward slope than the first path.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second passage formed with a steeper slope than in the first passage, it is possible to increase the speed at which the balls flow down compared to the first passage.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably provide a state in which the ball that has won the prize at the second opening is more advantageous to the player than at the first opening.

The game machine D9 is characterized in that, in the game machine D7 or D8, the second path is formed in a shorter distance than the first path.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7 or D8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second path can be set at a shorter distance than the first path.

Therefore, there is an effect that the ball that has won the prize in the second opening can reliably provide the player with a more advantageous state than the first opening.

In any one of gaming machines D1 to D9, a ball entering device is configured to allow a ball to enter, and has a ball entering device having the ball entering means, the variable means, and the guiding means, wherein the ball entering device A third guiding means capable of guiding a ball to the ball-entering means, a discharge port capable of discharging the ball guided by the third guiding means to the outside of the ball-entering device, and a ball to the discharge port. a third variable means that is variable between a permissible position that permits passage and a restricted position that restricts passage of the ball to the discharge port, wherein the third variable means is adapted to execute the privilege game; A gaming machine D10 characterized in that the third variable means is varied to the restricted position based on.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a third guiding means is provided for guiding a ball that has entered a ball entering device having a ball entering means, a variable means, and a guiding means to the ball entering means. The third guiding means is provided with a discharge port capable of discharging the ball to the outside of the ball-entering device, and by varying the third variable means, the ball guided by the third guiding means is discharged to the outside of the ball-entering device. Switch whether to let it or guide it to the ball entry means. The third variable means is varied so as to guide the ball guided by the third guiding means to the entering ball means when the privilege game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the ball from being guided to the ball entering means until the privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball from entering from the second opening when the privilege game is executed alone.

In the game machine D10, the game machine D11 is characterized in that the third variable means is variable in conjunction with the variable operation of the first variable means.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effects of the game machine D10, the third variable means is variable in conjunction with the variable operation of the first variable means, so the drive source for varying the variable means can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to Further, by interlocking the variable operation of the third variable means with the first variable means that is variably controlled by executing the privilege game, there is an effect that the variable operation can be performed in accordance with the privilege game.

In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D11, the gaming machine D12 is characterized in that the flowing period extending means has a flowing distance extending means for extending the flowing period by extending the flowing distance of the flowing path. .

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D11, the flowing period extending means extends the flowing distance of the flowing path by the flowing distance extending means, so that the next and subsequent There is an effect that it can be guided to the ball-entering means during the privilege game.

In the gaming machine D12, the gaming machine D13 is characterized in that the flowing-down distance extending means is a meandering flow-down passage in which the flow-down passage is formed in a meandering shape.

According to the game machine D13, in addition to the effect of the game machine D12, since the meandering flow path is used to extend the flow distance, there is an effect that the space for installing the flow path can be reduced.

A game machine D14 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines D2 to D13, the flowing period extending means has a flowing speed reducing means for reducing the speed of the ball flowing down the flowing passage.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D13, the flowing-down period extending means reduces the speed of the ball flowing down the flowing-down passage by the flowing-down speed reducing means. , there is an effect that the player can be guided to the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

A gaming machine D15 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D14, the flow-down speed reduction means is a speed-reducing member for reducing the flow-down speed of the ball.

According to the game machine D15, in addition to the effect of the game machine D14, since the speed reduction member is used to reduce the flow speed, there is an effect that the space for installing the flow passage can be reduced.

As the speed reducing member, a member capable of reducing the falling speed of the ball by friction generated between objects is conceivable. For example, it is preferable to use a member (such as urethane rubber) that exhibits a high coefficient of friction that reduces the falling velocity of the ball due to the frictional force generated when the ball rolls. In addition, if a material having a larger rolling friction than the material used for the flow-down path is used, that material becomes the speed reducing member. For example, if the upper surface of the flow-down path of the ball is coated with a fluorine-based resin (such as PTFE), it may be made of a synthetic resin such as ABS resin that has greater rolling friction than the upper surface of the flow-down path. It also includes the case where the ball rolling surface of the flow-down passage is roughened or protrusions are provided to increase the frictional force between objects and reduce the flow-down speed of the balls.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls enter a prize winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through a prize winning opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
700 third variable winning device (entering means)
700a1 First opening 700a2 Second opening 700b Opening/closing member 700c2 Passage detection switch (specific area)
712a second flow path (guidance means)
S409 setting means

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a privilege game (for example, a small winning game) when a special symbol lottery result is a predetermined lottery result, and when a ball passes through a specific area during the privilege game, A gaming machine has been proposed in which a predetermined privilege (for example, winning game) is provided.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-301008

However, with the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the player's desire to play may decrease.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in a player's desire to play.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 has a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period and then stopping display with the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means; and a specific determination result on the display means. When the identification information based on is stopped and displayed, a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, a ball A variable ball-entering means that can change from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter a ball to an open state in which a ball can enter, a specific area provided in the variable ball-entering means, and a ball passing through the specific area. and a privilege imparting means capable of imparting an advantageous privilege to the player based on the advantageous state in which the ball can pass through the specific area and the disadvantage in which the ball is more difficult to pass than the advantageous state. and a period from when the variable means is changed to either the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state until it is changed to the other state. As one operation period, variable control means for variably controlling the variable means, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the privilege game can be executed multiple times so that the ball reaches the variable means multiple times. and specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1 , a determination means capable of performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period and then displaying the identification information to indicate the result of determination by the determination means; A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the display is stopped, and a ball difficult to enter when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. A variable ball-entering means that can be changed from a closed state to an open state in which a ball can enter, a specific area provided in the variable ball-entering means, and a player based on the passage of the ball through the specific area. alternately between an advantageous state in which the ball can pass through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which the ball is more difficult to pass than the advantageous state. A variable means and a period from when the variable means is changed to either the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state to when it is changed to one of the states is one operation period. , a variable control means for variably controlling the variable means, and a specific game state in which the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is set. and a specific game state setting means.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is the front view which expanded the partial area|region of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the inside of the second variable winning device. It is a front view showing the inside of the first ball entering device. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM in a main controller, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first winning random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first jackpot type selection table, (c) is the first It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit classification selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table for big wins, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table for winning. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation|variation pattern selection table for small hits. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a jackpot scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a jackpot scenario a, and (c) is a jackpot scenario b is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning scenario a, and (c) is a small It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the winning scenario b. 2(a) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device, and FIG. 3(b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM within the audio ramp control device; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a game specification storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a V-gate scenario, and (c) is a precursor effect. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a selection table; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a continuous effect type selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a continuous effect variation pattern selection table, (c) It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous production|presentation variation pattern selection table (additional prize-winning). (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small winning middle effect pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an indication effect variation pattern selection table. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of executing a big winning game via a small winning game, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of executing a big winning game based on a lottery of special symbols. Chart. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. It is the timing chart which showed about the flow of continuous production|presentation, and the operation control of various apparatuses. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third pattern display device. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third pattern display device. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. It is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous jackpot production and the operation control of various devices. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third pattern display device. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing variation execution determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a small winning start setting process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 starting winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 start winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the look-ahead process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is the flowchart which showed the door passage time process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the V passage time process performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing V gate drive control processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot ending control processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting ending control processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing V-gate command reception processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device; 10 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing the hit-related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot start production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the big-hit completion|finish effect|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting related processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit start production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing variation pattern selection processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the precursor variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio|voice ramp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous production|presentation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous production|presentation classification selection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 10 is a flowchart showing V passable variation determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a V-counter update process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. 4 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing jackpot opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing the final round command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot interval command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending-related command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) shows a small win opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flow chart. (a) is a flowchart showing small winning ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the door passing command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is. 10 is a flowchart showing V pass command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing SW-related command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the second embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the second embodiment It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small per type selection table in the second embodiment, (b) is the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table in the second embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment, (b) schematically shows the contents of the big hit variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table for failure in the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern selection table for small hits in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning scenario table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the small winning scenario a in the second embodiment. It is a figure and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit scenario b in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the timing of the special symbol game and the operation of the V gate 650d when the normal variation pattern is selected in the second embodiment, and (b) is the second It is a timing chart schematically showing the timing of the special symbol game and the operation of the V gate 650d when the special variation pattern in the second embodiment is selected. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing counter subtraction processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the second embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit ending control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage time processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the third embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the third embodiment It is a diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the 1st winning random number table 3 in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small per type selection table in the third embodiment, (b) shows the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table in the third embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modified example 1 of the third embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modified example 2 of the third embodiment. It is a front view showing typically the internal structure of the winning unit of the pachinko machine in the modification 2 of the third embodiment. (a) is a plan view schematically showing a winning unit with a second opening/closing member closed in Modification 2 of the third embodiment, and (b) is a modification of the third embodiment; 2 is a plan view schematically showing the winning unit in a state where the second opening/closing member is opened in FIG. 2. FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the relationship between the opening and closing drive of the third variable winning device and the ball flow in the modification 2 of the third embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 4 is a front view of the interior of the second variable prize winning device 650, FIG. 5 is a front view of the interior of the first ball entry device 64, and FIG. It is a diagram.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

The inner frame 12 is provided with a large number of nails and a winning opening 63, a first ball entrance device 64 having a first ball entrance 64a and a second ball entrance A64b (see FIG. 5), and a second ball entrance B640b. The game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having the second ball-entering device 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, etc. is detachably attached from the front side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. It's becoming

An upper tray 17 for storing balls is projected forward from the front frame 14 and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and award balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper tray 17. - 特許庁The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

The front frame 14 has a frame left button 22a provided on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1) and a frame right button 22b provided on the right side of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The left frame button 22a and the right frame button 22b (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22) are spaced apart (approximately 500 mm) to make it difficult to operate with one hand. , it is necessary to release the operating handle 51 and use both hands.

This frame button 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b), for example, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changes the effect contents of super reach. It is operated by the player when changing it. Further, although the details will be described later, an effect of simultaneously operating both frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a and frame right button 22b) is also executed.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are unified. One stage is provided. Then, variation effects and reach effects that are performed accompanying a ball entering a so-called starting winning hole (starting winning), such as a first ball hole 64a, a second ball hole A64b, and a second ball hole B640b, which will be described later. The various productions are designed to match the themes given to each stage. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during high-speed variation. Sky stage"→"Island stage"→"City stage"→... Immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the super ready-to-win effect mode during the normal ready-to-win when the normal ready-to-win effect is started and the normal ready-to-win is to be developed into the super ready-to-win. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is being displayed, the content of the effect at the time of super ready-to-win is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box" or a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. will be The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , rails 61 and 62, general winning opening 63, first ball-entering device 64 having first ball-entering opening 64a and second ball-entering opening A64b, second ball-entering apparatus 640 having second ball-entering opening B640b, first A variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). It is attached. A general winning port 63, a first ball-entering device 64 having a first ball-entering port 64a and a second ball-entering port A64b, a second ball-entering device 640 having a second ball-entering port B640b, a first variable winning device 65, a 2 The variable winning device 650 and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. Therefore, for example, by providing a movable accessory for decoration that moves according to the game on the rear surface side of the base plate 60, the movement of the movable accessory can be visually recognized by the player, so the range is limited. It is possible to three-dimensionally use the game area provided, and to provide the player with a variety of presentations.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area in front view (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball enters the second ball entrance (second ball entrance A 64b or When the ball enters the second ball entrance B640b), the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use the LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving mode or the normal mode by the lighting state, indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing by the lighting state, or display the stop symbols. The lighting state indicates whether it is a pattern corresponding to a big hit, a pattern corresponding to a small hit, or a missing pattern. In addition, the 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be notified with a small number of LEDs. is configured to

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance (the second ball entrance A64b or the second ball entrance B640b) is suspended up to four times each. However, the maximum hold count is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less (eg, 2) or 5 or more (eg, 8).

In this pachinko machine 10, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, a lottery for the first special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed, and the ball enters the second ball entrance A64b or the second When the ball enters the ball entrance B640b (hereinafter referred to as second ball entrances 64b and 640b), a lottery for the second special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed. Also, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) lottery is performed.

In the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol) for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, 640b, the special symbol is a jackpot or Whether or not a small win is won is determined, and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, the type of the big win is also determined.

When the result of judging whether or not the special symbol wins is a big win, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state (big win game). Here, when the jackpot game is executed, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed (after the opening period has passed), the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined period. It is opened (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won), and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). After the opening of the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is repeated a predetermined number of times, the jackpot game ends when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses (ending period elapses).

In addition, 15 balls are paid out to the player as prize balls by winning one ball in the first variable prize winning device. Also, a period (opening period) from when the jackpot game is executed until the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (opening period), or when the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). ) The period from the repetition to the end of the jackpot game (ending period), and the period during which the specific door 65f is closed between the opening operations of the specific door 65f that are repeatedly executed (interval period) are appropriately set. do it.

During the jackpot game, a large number of balls (approximately 100 (10 per round x 10 rounds)) enter the specific prize-winning port 65a of the first variable prize-winning device 65, so a larger number of prize balls (approximately 1000) (100 pieces x 10 shots)) are paid out.

As will be described later in detail, in the special symbol jackpot, one of two types of jackpots, "jackpot A" and "jackpot B", is determined (see FIG. 10(b)), and the number of times according to the jackpot type. Only the specific door 65f is opened. In addition, after the special game state ends, the time-saving game state is given to the player a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times).

Here, the time-saving gaming state (during time-saving) means that the probability of hitting the first symbol (special symbol) and the second symbol (normal symbol) is the same as the normal state, but the first symbol (special symbol) and the second symbol The variation time of the pattern (normal pattern) is shortened, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entry device 640, which is opened when the second pattern (normal pattern) wins, is extended. (For example, 1 second (2 times open for 0.5 seconds)). That is, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance B640b than in the normal game state.

Further, when it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit, the type of the small hit is also determined. That is, when the special symbol becomes a small win, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a specific game state (small win game), and the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined period (for example, (Until 1.5 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls have won).

As a result, the ball can enter the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650. Although the details will be described later, a V discharge channel 650e3 is provided inside the above-described second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 4), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the V discharge channel 650e3. When the switch 650e5 (see FIG. 4) is detected (hereinafter referred to as passing through a specific area), a jackpot game is awarded.

Although the details will be described later, when winning a small hit of a special symbol, one of three types of "small hit A", "small hit B", and "small hit C" is selected by referring to the first small hit type selection table 202c. is selected (see FIG. 11(a)). Then, a small winning game is executed based on the selected small winning type. In addition, for each small winning type, "big winning C" or "big winning D" is set as a large winning type that can be given as a result of a small winning game.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 wins a game (so-called type 1 game) aiming for a big win by lottery of special symbols, and wins a small win by lottery of special symbols, and the second variable winning device 650 by the small win game. It has a game property (so-called 1-type 2-type mixer) with a game (so-called 2-type game) aiming for a big hit by passing the winning ball to a specific area.

By having such game characteristics, the player can aim for a big win at a plurality of opportunities, so that it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the game.

On the other hand, in the lottery of normal symbols executed for the passage of the ball to the through gate (normal symbol starting port) 67, determination of whether the normal symbols are successful or not is performed. When the normal symbol (second symbol) is won, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry device 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second ball entrance B640b. The ball will be in a state where it is easy to enter. That is, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance B640b, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

Also, when the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device (not shown), and a predetermined time (eg, 1 second or 180 seconds) is reached. After a lapse of time, normal symbols indicating the lottery result are stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the second pattern display device is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B. be done.

As described above, the types of special symbol jackpots include "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" given by lottery of special symbols, and a detection switch (specific area) 650e5 provided in the V discharge channel 650e3. There are provided four types of "jackpot C" and "jackpot D" awarded by detecting a ball. As shown in FIG. 10(b), each jackpot type is set so that the operation content of the specific door (attacker) 65f in the jackpot game and the time-saving game state after the jackpot game end are different. Specifically, "jackpot A" is a jackpot (2R (round) jackpot) in which the specific door (attacker) 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened twice, and after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state (special A state in which the fluctuation time of the pattern and the normal pattern is shortened and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is lengthened) is set for a period until the special pattern fluctuates 8 times (the number of times of time reduction is 8 times). "Jack B" is a jackpot (5R (round) jackpot) in which the specific door (attacker) 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened five times, and after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state and special symbols are eight times. The period until it changes is set (8 times of time reduction). In addition, in any jackpot, the conditions for ending one round are set when 10 balls win in the first prize winning device 65 or when the opening time of the first prize winning device 65 elapses for 30 seconds. , the specific door 65f is closed to end one round when the conditions for ending one round are satisfied.

As described above, in the jackpot game according to the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the presence or absence of the time-saving game state after the jackpot game are changed according to the type of the jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot.

Also, depending on the type of jackpot, the period in which the "time-saving gaming state" is changed may be changed. The period may be set to the time-saving game state, and when the "jackpot B" is reached, the period from the end of the "jackpot B" until the special symbols fluctuate six times may be the time-saving game state.

Furthermore, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the period of the ``time-saving gaming state'' given after the jackpot ends may be changed. The period from the end of "A" until the special pattern fluctuates 3 times is set as a time-saving game state, and when "jackpot A" is won in the "time-saving game state", the special pattern fluctuates 8 times after the "jackpot A" ends. The period of may be the time saving game state. As a result, even if the same type of jackpot (for example, jackpot A) is won, a privilege (time saving game state) that is advantageous to the player according to the game state (normal game state or time saving game state) at the time of winning. can be made different.

As described above, various benefits can be provided to the player according to the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. In addition to the feeling of expectation for the event, it is possible to have the feeling of expectation for the content of the privilege to be given. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the jackpot game of the present embodiment, the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 continues to open during one round until the end condition of the round is satisfied. The specific door 65f may be configured to open and close multiple times. After opening for 1.5 seconds (first opening) and closing the specific door 65f once, it may be opened for 28.5 seconds (second opening).

To improve the amusement of a game by making it possible to open the game for a long period of time after making the player think that the player has won a jackpot with a special pattern but cannot secure the ball to be put out by such a constitution. can be done. In addition, for example, when the lottery of special symbols is not determined to be a big hit (when it is determined to be lost), the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened for a short period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds). is newly provided, as a result of the lottery with special symbols, at the timing when the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened for 1.5 seconds (first opening), the player can win the jackpot A or the small There is an effect that it is not possible to grasp whether or not the player has won a prize, and the player can enjoy the game by drawing attention to the subsequent operation of the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that even in the case of using a configuration in which the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened multiple times within one round, the condition for ending the round is that the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened within one round. For example, the timing when the total number of seconds in the open state within one round reaches 30 seconds, and the total number of game balls won during one round is 10 It is preferable to use the timing of the number of times as the end condition of the round. By configuring in this way, the round end conditions can be unified, so it is possible to share a part of the control processing during the big win. .

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, as a privilege after the jackpot game, it is configured to provide a time-saving gaming state according to the jackpot type, but as a privilege to be given after the jackpot game Even if another privilege is given Well, for example, a high probability state in which the special symbol jackpot probability or small hit probability is set higher than the normal game state may be given for a predetermined period. In this case, the predetermined period includes the period until the next big hit is won, the period until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (eg 10 times), and the transition to the normal game state with a predetermined probability (eg 1/5). The period from the time a lottery is held until winning the lottery, etc. can be considered. In addition, as other benefits, a privilege to increase the winning probability of normal symbols from the normal game state, and changing the opening pattern of each winning device executed in the big winning game and the small winning game to the opening pattern advantageous to the player. Benefits, etc. can be considered.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a small hit is set with a predetermined probability (397/399) as a special symbol lottery result (see FIG. 10(a)). As described above, there are three types of small hits: "small hit A", "small hit B", and "small hit C". A specific game state (small winning game) is executed based on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11( a ), “small win A” is a small win that opens the door (attacker) 650 f of the second variable prize winning device 650 once (1.5 seconds). It is a hit, and the detection switch 650e5 detects that the ball has passed through the V discharge flow path 650e3 during the small hit game (passes through the specific area), so that the big hit type (V passage A jackpot D is set as a jackpot at the time). "Small win B" is a small win in which the action of opening the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 is executed three times (0.1 seconds x 3 times), and the big win D when passing V is set. "Minor win C" is a small win in which the operation of opening the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 is executed three times (0.1 seconds x 3 times), and the big win C when passing V is set.

That is, the "small win A" opens the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 for a longer period of time than other small wins, so the second variable winning device 650 It becomes a small hit that the game ball easily enters the second specific winning hole 650a provided in the .

Now, with reference to FIG. 3, the configuration of the lower right area of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of the lower right region III of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, with the cover covering the front surface of the second variable winning device 650 removed. A cover body that covers the front surface of the second variable prize winning device 650 is made of a transparent member that allows the inside to be visually recognized.

It should be noted that, of the cover body, at least the part that covers the ball path in the second variable prize winning device 650 may be configured with a half mirror. With this configuration, when a decoration lamp (light emitting means) provided in the decoration portion 650g, which will be described later, emits light, the player can visually recognize the path of the ball inside the second variable prize winning device 650. When the lamp does not emit light (is extinguished), the ball path in the second variable winning device 650 can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize.

Therefore, for example, when the game state is a game state (small winning game state) in which the game ball is awarded to the second variable winning device 650, by lighting the decoration lamp provided in the decoration part 650g, the player can As a result, the player can easily notice that the game state is aimed at the second variable prize winning device 650, and the player can use the second variable prize winning device in a game state other than the non-playing state or the small winning game state. Since it is possible to make the ball path in 650 invisible (difficult), cheating (for example, a guide member that guides the ball that has won the second variable prize winning device 650 to the specific area V discharge flow path 650e3 By deforming the (V gate) 650d, the act of letting the game ball pass through the V discharge channel 650e3 and the act of grasping the operation timing of the guide member (V gate) 650d and the act of varying the special symbols at irregular timing. ) can be made difficult. The details of the internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 3, the description continues. The second specific prize winning port 650a of the second variable prize winning device 650 used in the pachinko machine 10 has a door 650f configured with a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board side, and a game ball can enter an open state and a ball entering state. variable to a difficult closed state. In the closed state, the opening of the second specific prize winning port 650a is completely covered with the door 650f, and the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the door 650f toward the lower left direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front.

In the open state, the door 650f is retracted toward the inside of the game board 13 to open the second specific prize winning opening 650a. In addition, on the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650, an inclined surface for rolling game balls toward the door 650f is formed on the upstream side of the door 650f (on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front).

Now, with reference to FIG. 3, the main flow of balls flowing down the right side area of the game board 13 will be described. A ball flowing down the right side area of the game board 13 passes through a passing path having a passage width corresponding to one game ball formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 2), reach the area. The ball that reaches the lower right area flows down toward the first variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, and if the first variable winning device 65 is closed, then the above-described second variable winning device It flows down to device 650 .

A ball that rolls on the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front of the game board flows down toward the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game. When the door 650f is closed, it rolls on the door 650f in the closed state, passes through the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67 that starts the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and flows down to the second ball entry device 640. do. Then, the ball that has reached the bottom of the game board 13 passes through the out port 71 and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

By constructing in this way, the small win game state, the time saving game state, and the big win game state, which are advantageous states for the player, are all executed in a game (right-handed game) aiming at the right side area of the game board 13. It is possible to reduce the control of notifying the player of the change in the game method (left-handed notification) accompanying the change of the game state, and reduce the trouble of the player operating the operation handle 51 in accordance with the change of the game state. You can play games easily.

Further, by providing the first variable winning device 65 on the most upstream side of the lower right area, it is possible to efficiently win a game ball hit to the right during a jackpot game. Furthermore, by providing the second ball entry device 640 downstream of the normal symbol start port 67, the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 enters the second ball entry port B640b of the second ball entry device 640. It is possible to make the ball to be shot, and the shot ball can be efficiently used in the game. In addition, by providing the second ball-entering device 640 on the re-downstream side of the lower right area, the first variable prize-winning device is capable of awarding a greater privilege to the player than entering the ball into the second ball-entering device 640. The driving of the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entering device 640 does not hinder the winning of the game ball to 65 or the second variable ball entering device 650, and the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable during the game. can do.

Next, the internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4(a) is a rear view showing the internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 arranged on the game board 13, showing an open state in which the door 650f is open to allow balls to enter. ing.

First, the outline of the configuration of the second variable winning device 650 will be described. The second variable winning device 650 is variably controlled to an open state in which the door 650f can win a prize when a small winning game is started.

Here, the small winning game will be explained. The small winning game is a game state that shifts after the fluctuation of the special symbol stops (the symbol is fixed) when the determination result of the special symbol is a determination result corresponding to the small winning, and a predetermined period (opening period). This is a game in which the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened after the lapse of time so that a ball can enter the second variable winning device 650.例文帳に追加Although the detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of types of small wins set (small win A to small win C), and a mode of opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 ( Open pattern) and the jackpot type that can be given after the small hit game is finished are set to be different.

Returning to FIG. 4, the description is continued. A winning ball in the second variable winning device 650 is configured to pass through either a V discharge channel 650e3 or a normal discharge channel 650e4, which will be described later, and discharged out of the gaming machine. Then, when the ball passes through the detection switch 650e5, which is a specific area in the V discharge channel 650e3, execution of the big winning game is started after the small winning game ends.

Therefore, when the small winning game is started, the player shoots a ball so as to aim at the second variable winning device 650, and the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 passes through the specific area (detection switch 650e5). It is possible to play the game while paying attention to the flow of the ball as if doing so, and there is an effect that the desire to play can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 4A, each configuration will be described. The second variable prize winning device 650 is provided with a second specific prize winning port 650a having a horizontally long and short shape in the approximately central portion of the upper surface thereof, and the second specific prize winning port 650a is in an open state in which a ball can (easily) win a prize. A door 650f is provided for changing between a closed state and a closed state in which the ball cannot (difficultly) win a prize.

The door 650f is composed of a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side, and in the open state of the second specific winning opening 650a shown in FIG. In the closed state of the second specific winning opening 650a, the second specific winning opening 650a, which has an opening width (50 mm) that allows multiple winnings at the same time, is completely covered. In addition, the door 650f is configured so that balls can roll in a line on the upper surface thereof in a state of protruding so as to completely cover the second specific winning opening 650a. In other words, a plurality of balls rolling on the door 650f can simultaneously enter the second variable prize winning device 650 at the timing when the second specific prize winning port 650a changes from the closed state to the open state.

The balls that have won the second variable prize winning device 650 are aligned in a line along an alignment path (not shown), and then pass through the passage detection switch 650a1 that detects the winning of the second variable prize winning device 650. Specifically, an alignment path whose flow direction is the width direction of the second specific prize winning port 650a (horizontal direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 4(a)) is arranged at a lower position for receiving the winning ball from the second specific prize winning port 650a. do. The alignment path has a passage width (approximately 15 mm) that allows one ball to pass through, and is configured to allow the ball to flow down in the lower right direction (lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 4(a)). ing.

With this configuration, when the second specific prize winning opening 650a is opened while a plurality of balls are rolling on the door 650f, the plurality of balls rolling on the door 650f are aligned. It will fall along the flow direction of the path, and it is possible to align the winning balls efficiently.

An intermediate partition member 650f3 is provided in the second variable winning device 650. A first passage 650e1 in which the ball flows down above the intermediate partition member 650f3 and a second passage in which the ball flows down below the intermediate partition member 650f3. A flow path 650e2 is formed. The first flow path 650e1 is a flow path that communicates with the normal discharge flow path 650e4, and the balls that flow down the first flow path 650e1 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e4, are collected in a collection port (not shown), and exit the gaming machine. and discharged. The normal discharge channel 650e4 is provided with a passage detection switch 650e6 for detecting balls that have flowed down the channel, and is configured to be able to calculate the number of balls that have flowed down the normal discharge channel 650e4.

On the other hand, the second flow path 650e2 is a flow path provided with a later-described stopper (ball stopper) 650c and a V gate 650d, and the ball can flow down either the normal discharge flow path 650e4 or the V discharge flow path 650e3. It is formed as a flow path. The V discharge channel 650e3 is provided with a passage detection switch 650e5 for detecting the ball that has flowed down the channel, and based on the detection of the ball by the passage detection switch 650e5, the big win game is started after the small win game ends. configured to run. The ball flowing down the V discharge channel 650e3 is collected by a collection port (not shown) and discharged out of the game machine.

Flow-down of the ball to the first flow path 650e1 or the second flow path 650e2 described above is switched by the flow path switching member 650b. The flow path switching member 650b is rotatably supported by a shaft support portion 650b1 provided at one end thereof, and is pushed downward by the dropped ball to rotate to the abutting position where it abuts against the restricting piece 650b2. is configured as When the flow path switching member 650b rotates to the contact position, the flow paths are switched such that the ball pushing down the flow path switching member 650b flows down to the second flow path 650e2.

Further, the flow path switching member 650b is provided with a plate spring (not shown) as a biasing member that biases the flow path switching member 650b in an upward direction at the shaft support portion 650b1, and moves from the initial position (Fig. 4(a) shown by solid lines).

Further, the flow path switching member 650b is configured so that the tip portion 650b3 thereof can be bent in one direction by the bending portion 650b4. Specifically, it is configured to be bendable about the lower surface side of the flow path switching member 650b, and the distal end portion 650b3 is configured to bend downward with respect to the flow path switching member 650b. As a result, when the flow path switching member 650b rotates (returns) from the contact position to the initial position, even if there is an obstacle in the range in which the distal end portion 650b3 rotates, the distal end portion 650e3 can be bent to return to the initial position. It is configured to be able to rotate (return) to.

Next, the stopper (ball stop member) 650c provided in the second flow path 650e2 will be described. A stopper (ball stopper member) 650c provided in the second flow path 650e2 is configured to be movable between a ball stopper position to stop the ball from flowing down and a release position to allow the ball to flow down. The control for moving the stopper (ball stop member) 650c will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 4.5 seconds) has passed, it is controlled to move to the release position.

When the stopper (ball stopper member) 650c described above is positioned at the ball stopper position, the ball is retained by the stopper (ball stopper member) 650c as shown in FIG. 4(a). The remaining ball abuts against the tip portion 650b3 of the flow path switching member 650b that has returned to the initial position, and the flow path switching member 650b is in a state of restricting rotation (downward rotation) to the contact position. . In this state, when the winning ball of the second variable winning device 650 passes through the passage detection switch 650a1 and falls onto the flow path switching member 650b, the ball flows down the above-described first flow path.

Note that when the flow path switching member 650b moves upward in a state in which the ball is retained by the stopper 650c, the tip portion 650b3 of the flow path switching member 650b3 buffers the retained ball. As described above, since the tip portion 650b3 of the flow path switching member 650b is configured to be bendable, it rotates (returns) to the initial position with the tip portion 650b3 bent downward.

Then, the flow path switching member 650b that has rotated (returned) to the initial position is pushed downward again by the subsequent winning ball, but the tip portion 650b3 comes into contact with the ball staying at the staying position. Therefore, the downward movement is restricted, and the distal end portion 650b3 that has been bent by the bending portion 650b4 returns to the normal state (the state indicated by the solid line in FIG. 4A).

Next, the V gate (induction member) 650d provided in the second variable winning device 650 will be described. This V gate 650d has two states (induction position) in which the ball can pass through the passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 in the V discharge flow path 650e3, and The passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 is configured to be alternately changed to a regulated state (regulated position) in which it is difficult to pass through, and while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, A certain action is performed repeatedly. The V gate 650d in the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an inclination so that the ball flows down to the lower left side (lower left side from the point of view of FIG. 4(a)) when attached to the game board 13. , to cover the rolling surface 650f1 on the downstream side of the stopper 650c. When the ball flows down when the V gate 650d is in the regulated state, the ball smoothly flows down to the second flow path 650e2, and when the ball flows down when the V gate 650d is in the guided state. Secondly, it is to surely guide the ball to the V discharge channel 650e3. A detailed description will be given later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4(b), the positional relationship of each component provided in the second variable winning device 650 will be described in detail. The upstream end side of the intermediate partitioning member 650f3 is provided at a position so as to communicate with the downstream end side of the flow path switching member 650b located at the initial position, and the downstream end side of the middle partitioning member 650f3 is provided so that the ball flowing down normally flows into the discharge flow path 650e4. It is provided to a position protruding leftward from the partition wall 650f2 provided for partitioning the V discharge channel 650e3 and the normal discharge channel 650e4 so as to flow down reliably.

Specifically, a gap (for example, , a gap less than half a sphere) is provided, and the upstream end of the intermediate partitioning member 650f3 has a predetermined step ( For example, a step less than half a sphere) is provided. As a result, when the subsequent ball that has won the second prize winning device 650 falls onto the flow path switching member 650b, even if the flow path switching member 650b moves slightly in the vertical direction, the ball can be smoothly transferred to the second flow path. This is to make it flow down into the water. By configuring in this way, even if there is a slight error in the attachment position of the stopper 650c or the flow path switching member 650b, it is possible to prevent the spherical flow from being affected. In addition, even if the installation state of the pachinko machine 10 has some error with respect to the horizontal, it is possible to prevent the flow of balls from being affected.

Next, the downstream configuration of the intermediate partitioning member 650f3 will be described. The downstream end of the intermediate partitioning member 650f3 is formed in a downwardly arcuate shape. (a2 in FIG. 4(b)) is less than one sphere. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the first flow path 650e1 from flowing down to the V discharge flow path 650e3.

It is desirable that the height position of the upper end of the partition wall 650f2 (a2 in FIG. 4(b)) and the height position of the downstream end of the intermediate partition member 650f3 (a4 in FIG. 4(b)) be half a sphere. It should be less than one piece. With this configuration, when the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 650e1 and the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 join, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 will be at a higher position. Therefore, it is possible to preferentially flow down the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2. Therefore, by colliding with the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 650e1, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 stays. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent a situation in which an unexpected game such as the flow of water is performed.

Next, a detailed configuration of V gate 650d will be described. The V gate 650d is constructed such that the height position (a1 in FIG. 4(b)) on one end side of the upper surface is higher than the height position (a2 in FIG. 4(b)) on the other end side where the partition wall 650f2 abuts. , and the other end side of the partition wall 650f2 are configured to be at substantially the same height position as the upper end portion of the partition wall 650f2. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to cause the ball rolling on the upper surface of the V gate 650d to smoothly flow down to the normal discharge flow path 650e4.

The upper surface of the V gate 650d may be inclined downward to the left, and the height of the other end may be higher than the upper end of the partition wall 650f2. Further, in this embodiment, the upper surface of the partition wall 650f2 is flat, but it may be inclined in the same direction as the upper surface of the V gate 650d. By forming in this way, it becomes possible to cause the ball to flow down to the normal discharge flow path 650e4 more smoothly. Furthermore, a gap may be provided between the V gate 650d and the partition wall 650f2 to the extent that the rolling of the ball is not hindered.

Next, the rolling surface 650f1 is formed in an arc shape toward the V discharge flow path 650e3, and the height position (a3 in FIG. 4B) on the upstream end side of the rolling surface 650f1 is the partition wall 650f2. is configured to be lower than With this configuration, when the V-gate 650d is in the guiding state (the V-discharge channel 650e3 is open), the ball flowing down jumps over the partition wall 650f2 and flows down the normal discharge channel 650e4. It is possible to prevent troubles that may occur.

In the present embodiment, the rolling surface 650f1 is formed in an arc shape. A slanted linear shape may be used.

Further, in this embodiment, the V gate 650d and the rolling surface 650f1 are configured to substantially abut, but a space may be provided between the V gate 650d and the rolling surface 650f1. By configuring in this way, the shape of the V gate 650d can be made simple, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b), the flow of winning balls in the second variable winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 4(a) is a rear view showing the internal configuration of the second variable prize winning device 650 arranged on the game board 13, showing an open state in which the door 650f is open to allow balls to enter. It is a diagram. FIG. 4(b) is a rear view showing the internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 arranged on the game board 13, and the door 650f is closed so that the ball cannot (difficultly) enter. FIG. 10 shows a closed state;

A small winning game is started, and a ball that has won the second variable prize winning device 650 first flows down an alignment path (not shown), and its passage is detected by the passage detection switch 650a1. After that, the first winning ball pushes down the channel switching member 650b, flows down to the second channel 650e2, and is retained by the stopper 650c positioned at the ball stop position (see FIG. 4A). When a predetermined time (4.5 seconds) has passed since the start of the small winning game, the stopper 650c is moved to the release position, and the ball retained by the stopper 650c flows down the second flow path 650e2 toward the V gate 650d. (see FIG. 4(b)). When the V gate 650d is in the guidance state, the ball flows down the V discharge passage 650e3. Run down 650e4.

Next, the flow of subsequent balls that have won the second variable prize winning device 650 will be described. As described above, when the subsequent ball flows down in the second variable winning device 650, the ball has already stayed at the staying position, and the flow path switching member 650b has moved (returned) to the initial position. is. In this state, the winning ball rolls on the channel switching member 650b and passes through the normal discharge channel 650e4 while flowing down the upper surface of the intermediate partitioning member 650f3 (see FIG. 4A).

Also, the ball that has won the second variable prize winning device 650 is detected by the passage detection switch 650a1, the ball that has flowed down the V discharge channel 650e3 is detected by the passage detection switch 650e5, and the ball that has flowed down the normal discharge area 650e4. is detected by the passage detection switch 650e6. In this way, the total number of winning balls (the total number of balls detected by the passage detection switch 650a1) and the total number of ejected balls (the total number of balls detected by the passage detection switches 650e5 and 650e6) can be detected. Since it is possible to monitor whether the winning ball is discharged within a predetermined time, for example, a clogged ball generated in the second variable winning device 650 or an intentional ball in the second variable winning device 650 It becomes possible to easily discover a fraudulent act that leaves

In addition, the following detection sensors may be provided in the second variable winning device 650 . For example, a switch capable of detecting that the flow path switching member 650b is positioned at the initial position or the contact position may be provided. By providing such a switch, it becomes possible to easily detect a failure of the flow path switching member 650b. Further, a switch capable of detecting that the flow path switching member 650b is continuously positioned at the contact position for a predetermined time may be provided. By providing such a switch, it becomes possible to easily grasp the state in which the flow path switching member 650b cannot be moved (returned) to the initial position for some reason.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as a result of the special symbol game, when the small winning game given when winning the small winning is started, the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. , the second specific winning opening 650a is opened. When a ball wins the second variable prize winning device 650 in the open state, one ball is retained by the stopper 650c as a ball that can pass over the V gate 650d. Subsequent balls that have won the second variable winning device 650 flow down the first flow path 650e1 and pass through the normal discharge path 650e4. After a predetermined period of time has passed, the door 650f is closed to close the second specific prize winning opening, so that the second variable prize winning device 650 no longer wins new prizes. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the stopper 650c moves to the release position, and the stagnant ball flows down toward the V gate 650d. When the ball reaches the V gate 650d, if the V gate 650d is in an induced state (open state), it passes through a passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 in the V discharge channel 650e3 and a jackpot is given. be done. On the other hand, if the V gate 650d is in the regulated state (closed state), it rolls on the V gate 650d, flows down the second flow path 650e2, and passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e4.

The ball that has flowed down the first flow path 650e1 and the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 join at the confluence position 650e7, but the sphere that flows down the second flow path 650e2 preferentially flows down the confluence position 650e7. is configured as Therefore, even if a plurality of balls win in the second variable prize winning device 650, all the balls can be processed smoothly.

The opening timing of the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650, the operation timing of the stopper 650c, and the operation timing of the V gate 650d will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the configuration of the first ball-entering device 64 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(a) and 5(b) are diagrams schematically showing the internal structure of the first ball-entering device 64. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through. It is configured so that it is difficult to visually recognize the inside.

At the top of the first ball entry device 64, a passage opening through which a game ball can enter is provided, and a transmissive ball entry sensor 64c is arranged to detect that a game ball has passed through the passage opening. It is A game ball that has passed through the passage port is alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entry port 64a and the second ball entry port A64b arranged therebelow.

The distribution member 900 receives the entering game ball in the accommodating portion 900a or 900c of the distribution member 900. - 特許庁When a game ball is received by the storage portion 900a, the distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise due to the weight of the game ball (see FIG. 5(a)), and the game ball is first entered. It is guided to the mouth 64a. Here, each of the distribution members 900 is configured to be rotatable about 30 degrees in the left-right direction, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the storage section 900a and the storage section 900c.

A magnet 900b of a sorting member 900 is arranged on the base body provided on the back side of the first ball-entering device 64, and a base-side magnet 901 is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage opening. The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the distribution member 900 side.

The magnet 900b is also made of a rod-shaped magnet similar to the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 so that the tip thereof faces the base-side magnet 901 side. At a position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the storage portion 900a and the storage portion 900c is directly above (on the center line of the interval where about one game ball can enter the passage port), the base side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at a position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward. It is maintained at a position rotated to either the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 is positioned on the center line of the passage opening (upper position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other. Then, either one of the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) for receiving the game ball entering the first ball-entering device 64.例文帳に追加Therefore, by receiving the entered game ball in either one of the accommodation part 900a and the accommodation part 900c, the game ball is appropriately distributed to either the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance A 64b. be able to.

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, for example, after the accommodation portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 15 degrees to the left, guiding the game ball to the first ball entrance 64a, It is possible to prevent the distribution member 900 from rotating to the right (accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after the game ball is guided to the first ball entrance 64a, the accommodation portion 900b faces upward, and the game ball that enters the first ball entry device 64 is received by the accommodation portion 900b. Then, the distribution member 900 rotates about 30 degrees to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the second ball inlet A64b. In this way, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide game balls entering the first ball entering device 64 to the first ball entering port 64a and the second ball entering port A64b. Therefore, the game balls can be equally distributed to the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance A64b to win a prize, and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as A first lottery game) and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as a second lottery game) caused by winning a prize to the second ball entrance A64b can be executed efficiently.

The second ball entrance B640b provided in the second ball entrance device 640 is a ball entrance where the lottery for the second special symbol is started when a game ball is entered in the same manner as the second ball entrance A64b. . The second ball entry device 640 has an electric accessory 640a which is variable means (see FIG. 2). is configured to be This electric accessory 640a is configured to be in an open state for a predetermined period when a winning game is given by a normal symbol lottery. In addition, the second special symbol has four reserved balls, including the second entrance A64b and the second entrance B640b.

In addition, only the game ball that has passed through the left side of the variable display unit 80 can enter the passage opening of the first ball entry device 64 (which is large enough for one game ball to pass through). The ball opening B640b is configured so that only game balls that have passed through the right side can enter.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) using this as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The center frame 86 is provided with decorative movable accessories 400, 500 and 600 which are movable in response to the variable display of the third pattern executed by the third pattern display device 81 and the effect display during the winning game. It is The decorative movable accessories 400, 500, and 600 can provide a lively performance to the player by moving or emitting light from the built-in LEDs.

In addition, each decorative movable accessory 400, 500, 600 is movable so as to cover the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third pattern display device 81, respectively.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later. columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described. The third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are composed of 10 types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main pattern is constructed by adding numbers from "0" to "9" on the handle.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 7) to be described later is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbols is a small hit, a variable display is performed such that a plurality of main symbols are stop-displayed in a specific combination (for example, "341" or the like).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, all numbers from "0" to "9" are used regardless of the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) to be given. may be aligned. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an effect (pseudo-interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed between rounds during the big win is executed in a predetermined period (special fluctuation period) after the end of the big win. there is In order to effectively carry out this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured so that it is difficult to predict the kind of big win based on the kind of the main symbol displayed when the big win occurs. In addition, when the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a small win, chance numbers composed of random numbers of "341" are displayed. In the present embodiment, the chance number is one type of "341", but the number is not limited to this, and other random numbers may be used.

The variable display of the special symbols indicating the lottery result of the lottery game of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not performed at the same time, but only one of them is performed. When reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively stored, the variation of the special symbols is set in the winning order. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special pattern reserved memory (maximum 4) and the second special pattern reserved memory (maximum 4) are configured to be changed in the order of reserved storage (winning order). However, other configurations may be used, for example, the second special symbol is set to be preferentially changed, and if the second special symbol has pending storage, the first special symbol pending storage status Regardless, the second special symbol may be preferentially changed. Also, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be simultaneously variably displayed.

In this embodiment, although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11(a) to (b), the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol (special figure 1). The rate at which the small hit A, which is the small hit type, is selected is set high. Here, since the first ball entrance device 64 alternately wins the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance A 64b, the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is alternately performed. is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the winning of prizes from being biased toward one of the winning holes, and to suppress the loss of the player from becoming excessive. It is configured so as to be able to suppress problems such as remarkably high resistance. In addition, it is possible to reduce the occurrence frequency of so-called over-winning, in which the number of reserved balls exceeds the upper limit due to winning in one winning opening, so that even if the ball enters the opening, Dissatisfaction of a player due to not winning a prize can be reduced, and the player stops shooting balls every time the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, and the turnover rate of the game deteriorates, preventing the increase in sales on the game parlor side. can be prevented.

Furthermore, by providing the time-saving game state, when a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is performed in order to enter the ball into the second ball entrance B640b, the second game that is advantageous to the player Since the game is shifted to a special symbol variation game mainly composed of special symbols (special symbol 2), the time-saving game state can be provided as a more advantageous game state for the player.

Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 26, the display screen (P) of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The other lower side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of held balls and the like.

Three symbol rows are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each symbol row, and each symbol row is cyclically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row and the right symbol row are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each symbol row. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as an active line, and the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line in the order of left symbol row→right symbol row→middle symbol row in each game. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the activated line, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning. Also, if a combination of small winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of "341" as the main symbol) is aligned on the activated line, a small winning moving image is displayed as a small winning.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a plurality of types of small wins (small wins A to small wins C). Among these types of small hits, there are small hits (for example, small hits A) and right hits that are advantageous to the player by executing a game (right-handed game) that aims at the right side area of the game board 13 during the small hit game. A small hit (for example, a small hit C) that does not give the player an advantage even if a beating game is executed is set. In the above-described small winning animation, a guide display that guides a game method that is advantageous to the player according to the small winning type (for example, a display that guides the right-handed game in the small winning animation corresponding to the small winning A) It is included.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 stores the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been performed among the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, 640b. This is the area to display. Specifically, in the small area Ds1, the reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbols are displayed in such a manner that the special symbols 1 and 2 can be identified.

In the small area Ds2, a changing design is displayed in the same manner as the reserved design corresponding to the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether the special symbol that is currently being variably displayed is the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 by looking at the symbol during variation. In addition, as a production that suggests the possibility that the special design corresponding to the reserved design is a big hit, even when adopting the production that changes the mode of the reserved design (so-called reservation notice production), the special design that is currently fluctuating It is possible to easily grasp the presence or absence of the suspension notice effect.

Therefore, it is possible to easily associate the suspension notice effect performed in advance with the variable display of the special symbols, and to provide a gaming machine in which the player is interested in the effect. In addition, as the above-mentioned pending notice effect, for example, the effect of changing the color of the pending pattern (white → blue → red), the effect of changing the background effect of the pending pattern (suggested by the size of the flame), and the pending pattern Any effect may be used as long as the effect allows the player to determine the possibility of a big win, such as an effect in which the characters appear on the screen.

In the small area Ds3, a game explanation (“explanation indicating pressing a button”) for the special symbol game in which variable display is being performed, and the content of notifying the current game state are displayed. In addition, the guide display of the game method during the small winning game displayed in the small winning moving image displayed in the main display area Dm can be displayed in any of the various display areas (Ds1 to Ds3) constituting the sub display area Ds. You may make it display. By doing so, a powerful effect display corresponding to the small winning game and a decorative display for congratulating the winning of the small winning game are executed in the main display area Dm, and in an area different from the main display area Dm. Since the guide display for guiding the game method can be executed in a certain sub-display area Ds, the guide display is intrusive and the effect display becomes difficult to see, or the decorative display is too conspicuous and the guide display is overlooked. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol reserved ball and the second special symbol reserved ball are configured to be identifiable. It may be a (difficult) mode in which it is not possible to distinguish from the held ball.

Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box may be damaged. Cover side and cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 7) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers such as the sound lamp controller 113 by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. It is transmitted in only one direction from the controller 110 to the sub-controllers. On the other hand, data can be transmitted and received bi-directionally to the payout control device 111 .

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, various switches including sensors (magnet sensors, radio wave sensors) for detecting balls and detecting illegal games. 208, a door solenoid 650f2 for opening and closing the door 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650, a ball stop solenoid 650c2 for driving the stopper 650c in the second variable prize winning device 650, and the second variable prize winning device 650 A V gate solenoid 650d2 for driving the V gate, a specific door solenoid 65f2 for opening and closing the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65, etc. Various solenoids 209 are connected. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to them through the port 205 .

Also, the input/output port 205 is connected to a later-described RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 , and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and RAM erasure signals output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253 . Various processes are executed based on the signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 48) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 continuously pays out prize balls one by one. More specifically, one prize ball is paid out each time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation). Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). In addition, every time a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is suspended for a predetermined period (1 second). Thus, for example, when a large amount of prize balls need to be paid out continuously, such as during a big win, the payout motor 216 continues to pay out prize balls without a break, and the heat generation of the payout motor 216 is suppressed. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from breaking down due to the melting of the resin portion or the elastic portion of the pachinko machine 10 due to the heat generated by the payout motor 216 . In addition, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable parts of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the lower tray unit 15 operation and the parts touched by the player such as the handle 51), causing injury such as burns to the player. It can be suppressed. It should be noted that the number of payouts until the payout motor 216 suspends the payout of prize balls and the pause period of payout are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. can. For example, the payout may be suspended every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 . Also, for example, the pause period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and produces a variation pattern ( It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b), and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage to be played or change the contents of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Since the details of the display control device 114 are known, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply circuit (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 48).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The main controller 110 executes major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, and display setting in the second symbol display device. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 8, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display on the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. A first hit type counter C2 used for , a stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the special symbol, and a small hit type counter C5 used to select the small hit type of the special symbol. , a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 50). Then, the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 as appropriate. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each area has a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, And each value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the pattern starting port (through gate) 67. - 特許庁

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 50).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, the special symbol 1 is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 64b, 640b. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 64b, 640b.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that will result in a loss, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is lost.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there is one random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, and the random number "0" is stored in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 10(a)). there is In this way, among the total number of random numbers of 400, since the total number of random number numbers that result in a big win is 1, the probability of a big win with a special symbol is "1/400".

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the value provided in the ROM 202 The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10(b)). As shown in FIG. 10(b), in the case of a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type when the random number is "0 to 49" in the first hit type counter C2 is "jackpot A". Become. Also, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B".

In addition, in this embodiment, as a kind of special symbol loss (other than the big win), a small win is provided in which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state. In the first winning random number counter C1, there are 398 random numbers that become a small winning special symbol. stored. Among the total number of random numbers of 400, the total number of small winning random numbers is 398, so the probability of winning a special symbol is "398/400".

In addition, the value of the small hit type counter C4 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 398, and the value of this small hit type counter C4 and the value provided in the ROM 202 The small hit type is determined based on the first small hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 10(c)). In addition, in this embodiment, the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 for the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 for the second special symbol (special figure 2) (see FIG. 10(c)). Then, depending on each table, the range of random numbers for which each small hit type is set is changed (see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)). This is because, as described above, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol (special symbol 1), so that the ratio of selecting the small win A is increased. be. In addition, the contents of the small winning game corresponding to each small winning type will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach out of front and back" (for example, range of 98 to 99) that stops at the same time, and "Reach other than front and rear out" (for example, range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops outside the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. , and "Completely out of range" (range of 0 to 89, for example), which does not generate reach, are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, the special symbol 1 reserved ball in the RAM 203 It is stored in the storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrances 64b and 640b.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, the table is divided into normal gaming state and time-saving gaming state, and the range of random numbers set for each stop type of failure is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state or in the time-saving game state.

For example, in the time-saving gaming state, a table for high probability with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. “Out” is more likely to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the case of a normal game, the random number range corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is set to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, 640b. A narrow low-probability table of 0 to 79 is selected, making it difficult to select "complete failure". In addition, in the normal game state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front and back" is widened from 80 to 97, and "Reach other than front and rear" is more likely to be selected. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long presentation time, so that it is possible to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrances 64b, 640b, and display the third symbol. It becomes easier for the device 81 to continuously perform the variable display. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "front-back reach" is set to 98-99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variable time refers to the time from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop display of the symbol and the determination of the symbol. For example, if the symbol is stopped for 0.5 seconds after the symbol variation is executed for 9.5 seconds and the symbol is fixed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.5 seconds + 0.5 seconds). It is written as Based on this variation time, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the voice ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 . The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 50), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern selection table 202e (FIG. 11(c), FIGS. , FIG. 13) are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9A).

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 398, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 398). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the normal symbol win is set by a normal symbol random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the normal symbol. If the winning random number value matches the winning random number set by the winning random number table, it is determined as a winning of the normal design.

There are 200 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "0 to 199". These random numbers are normally stored in a random number table per symbol. In this way, the total number of random numbers for the normal design is 399, and the total number of random numbers for winning the normal design is 200. Therefore, the probability of winning the normal design is approximately "1/2".

In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and normal symbol variable display is performed for 180 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 199", it is determined as winning, and after the variable display is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is illuminated and displayed. , the second ball entrance B640b is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the second ball entrance B640b is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. , the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving game state (during time-saving), the probability of winning the normal symbols is "1/2", which is the same as in the normal game state, but the normal symbols are variably displayed. time is set to 1 second. In addition, the opening pattern is set so that the second ball entrance B640b is opened "0.5 sec x 2 times" when the normal symbol wins. Thus, in the time-saving game state, it is configured so that the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entrance B640b than in the normal game state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 398), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 50).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 sets the special symbol lottery and variation pattern and the normal symbol lottery and variation pattern setting according to the value of the counter and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 can be executed.

In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 50) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 49) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 48) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11. FIG. FIG. 9(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 9( a ), the ROM 202 contains the first per random number table 202 a, the first big per type selection table 202 b, the first small per type selection table 202 c, the second per random number table 202 d, and the variation At least a pattern selection table 202e, a big win scenario table 202f and a small win scenario table 202g are provided.

As described above, the first winning random number table 202a is a table in which the values of random numbers that are special symbol jackpots are defined. When the random value defined in the first winning random number table 202a and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Incidentally, in the first winning random number table 202a, the value of the random number that becomes the small winning of the special symbol is also set. Details of the first hit random number table 202a will be described later with reference to FIG. 10(a).

The first jackpot type selection table 202b is a data table in which the determination value of the first jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. The detailed contents of the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described later with reference to FIG. 10(b).

The first small hit type selection table 202c is a data table in which the determination value of the small hit type counter C5 for determining the small hit type is set for each small hit type. This first small hit type selection table 202c is different data in the case of winning a small hit with the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the case of winning a small hit with the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured to determine the small hit type by referring to the table, and when the small hit is made with the special figure 1, the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 is used. The usage type selection table 202c2 is referred to (see FIG. 10(c)). In addition, the detailed content of the 1st small hit classification selection table 202c is later mentioned with reference to Fig.11 (a).

The second winning random number table 202d is a data table in which the winning judgment value of the normal symbol is stored. For example, the value of the second winning random number counter C3 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer ranges from 0 to 199. In the case of , it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design. It should be noted that, as described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol wins in the normal game state, after the variable display for a predetermined time (180 seconds) ends, the stop symbol is lit and displayed, and the second ball entrance B640b The electric accessory 640a associated with is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state (during time-saving), the value of the second winning random number counter C3, which is determined to be a hit of the normal design, does not change, but the variation time when it is determined to be a hit of the normal design is set to 1 second. , after the variable display is completed, the stop symbol is lit and displayed, and the electric accessary 640a associated with the second entrance B 640b is opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

In addition, the value of the second winning random number counter C3, which is determined to be a winning of normal symbols, may be changed between the normal game state and the time saving game state (during time saving).

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202e is a data table used for determining the display form of the fluctuation pattern, and the display form is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern selection table 202e, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11(c), the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a large winning variation pattern selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 12(a)) dedicated to the case where the winning determination result is a winning The determination result is out, and the deviation pattern selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 12 (b)) dedicated to the case of the normal game state, and the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 dedicated to the case where the success/failure determination result is a small hit (see FIG. 13).

The jackpot scenario table 202f is a data table used to determine the opening scenario for opening the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, and defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the types of jackpots won. It is Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the jackpot scenario table 202f includes a jackpot scenario a 202f1 (see FIG. 14(b)) dedicated to the case where the jackpot type is jackpot A, and the jackpot type is jackpot B. It consists of a case-only jackpot scenario b202f2 (see FIG. 14(c)) and a jackpot scenario c (not shown) dedicated when the jackpot type is jackpot C or D.

In this jackpot scenario, various events (scenario contents) are defined based on the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p (see FIG. 9(b)) that counts when the jackpot scenario is set. The opening/closing control of the specific door 65f is executed based on the content.

The small winning scenario table 202g is a data table used to determine the opening scenario for opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game, and is a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning small winning types. is stipulated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), the small hit scenario table 202g has a small hit scenario a202g1 (FIG. 15(d)) for exclusive use when the small hit type is the small hit A, and the small hit type is It is composed of a small winning scenario b202g2 (see FIG. 15(c)) dedicated to the case of small winning B or C.

In this small winning scenario, various events (scenario contents) are defined based on the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q (see FIG. 9(b)) which counts when the small winning scenario is set. , the opening/closing control of the door 650f is executed based on the content of the scenario, and the operation control of the stopper 650c provided in the second variable winning device 650 is executed. In addition, in the process of determining whether or not the passage of the ball into the second specific prize winning port 650a and the V discharge channel 650e3 is normal, the range in which the ball is allowed to pass is also based on the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q. stipulated.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 9(b). FIG. 9(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9B, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a time saving medium counter 203h, a counter buffer 203i, a fluctuation execution flag 203j, a fluctuation order storage area 203k, and a V flag 203m. , an open counter 203n, a closed counter 203o, a big win scenario counter 203p, a small win scenario counter 203q, a special figure 2B validity period flag 203r, a validity period measurement counter 203s, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first ball entrance 64a (first special symbol), and has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first big hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the first small hit type counter C5 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 and C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for the special symbol 1 is performed in the main controller 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 and C5 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and C5 that are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, a special symbol lottery or the like is determined.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning) and each value of each counter C1-C3 and C5 is acquired according to the starting winning, those values are included. A winning information command is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 from the winning information command and stores them as the winning information in the RAM 233. Store in the storage area 223a.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second special symbol (second entrance A64b, second entrance B640b). The only difference is that the first special symbol (first entrance 64a) is changed to the second special symbol (second entrance A64b, second entrance B640b). omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the holding area of 1 to a holding area with an area number smaller by 1. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (waiting number of times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added (see S704 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S207 in FIG. 35).

In the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the first special symbol (first entrance 64a) is the second special symbol (second entrance A 64b, second The only difference is that it is changed to the 2-ball entrance B640b), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times of holding variable display in special design 1 N1) or the value of special design 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times of variable display reserved in special design 2 N2) is reserved. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the number-of-balls command (see S208 and S211 in FIG. 35, S705 in FIG. 40, and S808 in FIG. 41). The reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. is.

The voice lamp control device 113 is controlled by the reserved ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of pending balls in the variable display that is held in the device 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the displayed variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device based on the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port 67 to a maximum of 4. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol starting port) 67 and the number of variable display reserved balls increases. 1 is added up to (see S1104 in FIG. 44). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1009 in FIG. 43).

When the ball passes through the through gate (ordinary design start opening) 67, if the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in the normal design) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1106 in FIG. 44). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S1103 in FIG. 44: No).

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving gaming state (time-saving), and if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving gaming state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with normal symbols (normal game state). The initial value of the counter 203h during time saving is set to zero, and in the main controller 110, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot ending (that is, the jackpot end timing). Specifically, 8 is set when the jackpot types are "jackpot A", "jackpot B" and "jackpot D", and 0 is set when the jackpot type is "jackpot C". After that, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect ends until the value of the time saving medium counter 203h becomes 0 (S222 in FIG. 35).

When the lottery for winning the normal pattern is performed, if the lottery result is a win, the value of the time saving counter 203h is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, 0 as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a. .5 sec x 2 opening patterns are set (S1017 in Fig. 43), and the variation time of normal symbols is set to 1 sec (S1018 in Fig. 43). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, the fluctuation time of the normal design is set to 180 seconds (S1017 in FIG. 43), similarly to the case where the lottery result of the normal design is other than winning.

The counter buffer 203i is a buffer area used for counting each counter value, as described above.

The variation execution flag 203j is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is varied or the second special symbol is varied. If the pending data stored in the first memory area of the variable order storage area 203k, which will be described later, is the pending data based on the first special design, the variation execution flag 203j is set to the first special symbol, the second If it is the reserved data based on the special design, the second special design is set as the special design for which the variable execution is performed. It should be noted that this flag is an area that is backed up even when power is cut off, and in the initial state where the RAM is cleared, etc., the first special symbol is preferentially set.

The variable order storage area 203k is an area for storing the winning order of each reserved data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Eight storage areas are set in the variable order storage area 203k, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in order of winning. In addition, the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

The V flag 203m is a flag for storing that the ball has passed through the passage detection switch 640e5, which is a specific area of the second variable prize winning device 650. When the small winning is completed, the value of the V flag 203m is changed. Based on this, a jackpot is awarded. This V flag 203m, in the V passing time process, the type of jackpot based on the type of small hit is set (S1306, S1309 in FIG. 46), referred to in the small hit ending control process (S2107 in FIG. 54), and then turned off (S2108 in FIG. 54).

The open counter 203n is a counter used for drive control of the V gate 650d, which is an induction member provided in the second variable prize winning device 650, and the V gate solenoid 650e2 turns on (moves the V gate 650d to the induction position). ), the count is started, and when the counter value of the open counter 203n exceeds a predetermined value, the V gate solenoid 650e2 is turned off (the V gate 650d is moved to the regulation position). The open counter 203n performs addition of the counter value (S1404 in FIG. 47), discrimination of the counter value (S1405 and S1406 in FIG. 47), and resetting of the counter (S1407 in FIG. 47) in the V gate drive control process. done.

The closed counter 203o is a counter used for driving control of the V gate 650d, which is an induction member provided in the second variable winning device 650, and turns off the V gate solenoid 650e2 based on the counter value of the above-described open counter 203n. By doing so, counting is started, and when the counter value of the closing counter 203o exceeds a predetermined value, the V gate solenoid 650e2 is turned on (the V gate 650e is moved to the guidance position). The closing counter 203o performs addition of the counter value (S1410 in FIG. 47), determination of the counter value (S1411 in FIG. 47), and resetting of the counter (S1407 in FIG. 47) in the V gate control process.

The above-described open counter 203n and closed counter 203o are configured to add 1 to their values during timer interrupt processing that is executed every 2 milliseconds. Therefore, if the opening time of the V gate is set to 1.5 seconds, it is determined whether the value of the open counter 203n exceeds 750. If the closing time of the V gate 650d is set to 3.5 seconds, It is sufficient to determine whether the value of the closing counter 203o exceeds 1750 or not.

In this embodiment, a configuration is shown in which various counter values are added by timer interrupt processing. It may be measured using a period of time. Further, in this embodiment, the open counter 203n and the closed counter 203o are configured separately, but a single counter may be configured to measure the open period and the closed period.

The jackpot scenario counter 203p is a counter for updating the jackpot scenario in which the opening/closing timing of the specific door 65f is defined. Opening control is executed. This jackpot scenario counter 203p is incremented by 1 when it is determined that a jackpot scenario is set in the jackpot control process (S1802 in FIG. 51), and in the jackpot ending control process, when control based on the jackpot scenario is completed, the jackpot scenario counter 203p is set. is cleared (S1905 in FIG. 52).

The small winning scenario counter 203q is a counter for updating the small winning scenario in which the operation timing of various devices (the ball stopper member 650c and the door 650f) is defined. Operation control of various devices is executed during the small winning based on the winning scenario. This small winning scenario counter 203q is incremented by 1 when it is determined that a small winning scenario is set in the small winning control process (S2002 in FIG. 53), and in the small winning ending control process, control based on the small winning scenario is completed, and the setting of the small winning scenario is cleared (S2111 in FIG. 54).

The special figure 2B valid period flag 203r is a flag for storing the period during which the winning to the second entrance B (special figure 2B) 640b is valid among the second special symbols (special figure 2), In addition to the period during which this special figure 2B valid period flag 203r is set to ON (the period during which winning to the second entrance B (special figure 2B) 640b is valid), the second entrance B (special figure 2B) It is used in the process of determining that the detection of winning in 640b is an error (S803 in FIG. 41).

This special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is set to ON during the period from when the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entering device 640 is started until the validity period measurement counter 203s described later measures a predetermined period. be. This special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is normally set to ON in the design variation process (S1025 in FIG. 43), and is normally set to OFF in the design variation process after the elapse of a predetermined period (S1004 in FIG. 43).

Validity period measurement counter 203s is for measuring the period during which the above-described special figure 2B valid period flag 203r is set to ON (the period during which winning to the second entrance B (special figure 2B) 640b is valid) It is a counter, while the value of this valid period measurement counter 203s is subtracted (after 1000 is set as the value of the counter, the value of the counter is subtracted until it becomes 0), the special figure 2B valid period flag 203r is set on.

This effective period measuring counter 203s is normally set to ON in the symbol variation process (S1026 in FIG. 43), and 1000 is set as the value of the counter. Then, 1 is subtracted (S1002 in FIG. 43) in normal symbol variation processing executed every 2 milliseconds as a timer interrupt processing, and this is repeated until the counter value becomes 0 (until 2 seconds elapse).

Next, details of various tables held in the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG.

First, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 10(a). FIG. 10(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 10(a), in the first winning random number table 202a, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0" as the determination value of the big win, and the value of the first random number counter C1 as the determination value of the small win. "1 to 398" is set, and the value "399" of the first winning random number counter C1 is set as a determination value other than a big hit and a small hit (loss).

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a special symbol lottery with a probability of "1/400" for a big win, a probability for "398/400" for a small win, and a probability for "1/400" for a loss. It is configured as follows, and the lottery result of the special pattern is almost a small hit.

Next, the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 10(b). FIG. 10(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 10(b), in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, the value "0 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 as the judgment value of the jackpot A is "50 to 99" as the judgment value of the jackpot B. ” is set. For the jackpot C and the jackpot D, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is not set. It is a jackpot type set by passing through the V discharge channel 650e3, which is a specific area in the second variable winning device 650. FIG.

Here, when a jackpot game is started in the pachinko machine 10, the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened, and a lot of prize balls are obtained by entering game balls into the specific prize winning opening 65a. A game is executed. In addition, a time-saving game state advantageous to the player is imparted after the end of the jackpot game according to the jackpot type.

Next, the contents of each jackpot type will be described. When the jackpot A is selected, a jackpot game is started in which the first variable winning device 65 opens two rounds (2R), and after the jackpot game ends, a time-saving game state (time-saving) is provided eight times. When the jackpot B is selected, a jackpot game is started in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 5 rounds (5R), and after the jackpot game ends, a time-saving game state (time-saving) is provided eight times.

When the jackpot C is selected, a jackpot game in which the first variable prize winning device 65 opens 10 rounds (10R) is started, but after the jackpot game ends, the time saving game state (time saving) is not provided. When the jackpot D is selected, a jackpot game is started in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 10 rounds (10R), and after the jackpot game ends, a time-saving game state (time-saving) is provided eight times.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, by winning a special symbol jackpot (jackpot A or jackpot B), the state is always shifted to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed. The number is set smaller than the jackpot C or jackpot D. This is because the big win (jackpot C or jackpot D) executed by adding a specific area to the game ball during the small win game can make the player think that he/she has won the big win by himself/herself. This is to make the privilege of C or the jackpot D more advantageous to the player.

FIG.10(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st small hit classification selection table 202c. As shown in FIG. 10(c), the first small per type selection table 202c is set with a special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 and a special figure 2 type selection table 202c2. The selection ratio of the small hit type is changed with the hit and the small hit by the special figure 2. Here, the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 will be described with reference to FIG. 11(a).

FIG. 11(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1. As shown in FIG. 11 (a), in the case of a small hit of the first special symbol (special figure 1), in the small hit type counter C5, the small hit when the random value is "0 to 34" The type is "small hit A". Further, when the random number is "35 to 40", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number is "41 to 398", the small hit type is "small hit C".

Here, the small hit type will be described with reference to FIG. 11(a). First, when the "small win A" is selected, the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is set to 1 during the small winning game as an opening pattern that makes it easy for the game ball to win the second variable winning device 650. An opening scenario of opening for 0.5 seconds is set, and "jackpot D" is set as the jackpot type given when passing through a specific area provided in the V discharge channel 650e3 (at the time of V passage). Further, when "small hit B" is selected, as an opening pattern in which it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable prize winning device 650, the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened at 0.00 during the small winning game. An opening scenario is set in which the action of opening for one second is performed three times, and "jackpot D" is given as a jackpot type when passing through a specific area provided in the V discharge channel 650e3 (at the time of V passage). is set. Also, when "small win C" is selected, the same opening scenario as "small win D" is set, and when passing through a specific area provided in the V discharge flow path 650e3 (when passing V ) is set to “jackpot C” as the jackpot type.

In this way, the opening pattern of the door (attacker) 650f during the small winning game and the big winning type given at the time of V passage are different depending on each small winning type, so that the second variable winning device 650 is opened. Advantageous small wins and disadvantageous small wins can be set for the player, and various game properties can be provided.

Next, the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 11(b). FIG. 11(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2. As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a small hit, the small hit when the random number is "0 to 85" in the small hit type counter C5 The type is "small hit A". Further, when the random number is "86 to 90", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number is "91 to 398", the small hit type is "small hit C".

In this embodiment, the winning ratio of each special symbol (first special symbol (special symbol 1) and second special symbol (special symbol 2)) is varied according to the game state (normal game state or time saving game state). is configured to Specifically, since the game aiming at the first ball entry device 64 is performed in the normal game state, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are alternately won, so the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are won. The ratio is 1:1, but in the time-saving game state, the game (right-handed game) aiming at the second ball-entering device 640 is performed, so there is no special figure 1 winning.

Therefore, as described above, by changing the selection ratio of the selected small hit type between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, it is possible to provide an advantageous game to the player according to the game state. In addition, although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to provide a state that is more advantageous to the player (easy to pass V) by continuing the "small hit A". In the normal game state in which , and special figure 2 win alternately, the expectation that ``small win A'' will be won continuously depending on whether the next winning prize after winning ``small win A'' is special figure 1 or special figure 2 Since the odds are changed, it is possible to provide the player with a new game feature of continuously winning the "minor win A", which is effective in improving the interest.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 11(c). FIG. 11(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e. This variation pattern selection table 202e includes, as shown in FIG. ) and a small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 (see FIG. 13) are set at least.

First, with reference to FIG. 12(a), the large winning variation pattern selection table 202e1 will be described. FIG. 12(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern selection table 202e1. The large winning variation pattern selection table 202e1 is a data table that defines the display mode (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a large winning. Variation patterns of various jackpots are selected based on the number of held balls, the presence or absence of the time-saving gaming state (time-saving), and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot indicates how many times the special pattern lottery for which the variation pattern is selected this time is the lottery after the end of the jackpot game. When selecting a variation pattern indicating a result, the number of variations after the big win "1" is referred to, otherwise the number of variations after the big win "2~" is selected. In this way, in the selection of the variation pattern of the special symbol, by setting a variation pattern that differs only in specific variation timing, it is possible to provide the player with a variation pattern that appears only at a specific variation timing, and the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the user becomes bored with the content of the program.

Here, although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute a special effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the case where the first spin after the end of the big win is "small win A". (See FIGS. 32-33). Therefore, the large winning variation pattern selection table 202e is defined so that a different variation pattern display mode from the other cases is selected only for the first rotation after the end of the big winning.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, when the number of held balls is a predetermined number or more (7 pieces) at the timing of selecting a variation pattern, V discharge in a small winning game when a predetermined condition is satisfied It is configured to provide a situation in which it is easy to pass through the specific area provided in the flow path 650e3. Therefore, the big hit variation pattern selection table 202e is set so that the display mode (variation time) of the variation pattern differs according to the number of held balls.

Returning to FIG. 12(a), the description is continued. In the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1, time-saving variation A to time-saving variation D are set as variation patterns to be selected in the time-saving gaming state (with time-saving), and jackpot variation A to C is set. First, the time-saving variation A to time-saving variation D selected in the time-saving gaming state will be described. Short-time fluctuation A is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, which is set when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 98" when the number of fluctuations after the jackpot is 1 and the number of held balls is 0 to 2. is. The time saving variation B is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 30 seconds when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "99 to 198" in the same state as the time saving variation A.

The time saving variation C and the time saving variation D are the time saving variation C (variation time 4 seconds), and in the case of "99 to 198", the time reduction variation D (variation time 6.5 seconds) is set respectively.

Next, the big hit fluctuations A to C selected in the normal game state will be explained. In the normal game state, the variation pattern is set only by the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the game state (the number of variations after the end of the jackpot and the number of held balls). The jackpot variation A is a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds set when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 98", and the jackpot variation B has a variation type counter CS1 value of "99 to 149 is a variation pattern with a variation time of 25 seconds, and the jackpot variation C is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds, which is set when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "150 to 198". be.

Next, the deviation variation pattern selection table 202e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(b). FIG. 12(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern selection table 202e2. As with the above-described jackpot variation pattern selection table, this deviation variation pattern selection table 202e2 also depends on the number of variations after the completion of the jackpot, the number of currently held balls, the presence or absence of the time-saving gaming state (time-saving), and the value of the variation type counter CS1. Variation patterns for various losses are selected based on the above, and the only difference is that the variation pattern (variation time) selected for the big hit variation pattern is different, so the description is omitted.

Next, the small winning variation pattern selection table 202e3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning variation pattern selection table 202e3. This small winning variation pattern selection table 202e3 is also similar to the selection of the large winning variation pattern described above. Variation patterns for various small hits are selected based on the value of .

The small winning variation pattern selection table 202e3 has a special variation A when the number of fluctuations after the big winning is 1 and the time saving game state (time saving), and the special symbol lottery result is a small winning A, In addition, special variations B to C are selected when the number of variations after the end of the jackpot is 2 or more and the number of reserved balls is 5 to 7.

Here, the special variation A will be explained. The special variation A is a special variation selected when executing a continuous jackpot effect (see FIGS. 31 to 34), which will be described later. For the special variation A, a specific variation time (30 seconds) is defined as a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation for the first rotation after the end of the big win, in order to execute a continuous big win effect.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIGS. The timing at which the door 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened in the winning A game and the timing at which the V gate 650d provided in the second variable prize winning device 650 is in the guided state are calculated in advance, and after the big win is completed. It is determined whether the timing at which the variation of the special symbols in the first rotation starts, that is, the timing at which the big winning game ends is the timing at which the small winning A game in the first rotation after the big winning ends can pass through the V discharge channel 650e3. Then, based on the determination result, the effect during the jackpot game (the effect during the final round and the ending period) is determined.

Next, the special variation B will be explained. The special variation B is a special variation that is selected when executing a small winning continuous effect (FIGS. 27 to 30), which will be described later. As a result of the special symbol lottery, when the small winning A is continuously executed, the special variation B is selected as each variation pattern when the small winning A is continuously executed. It is a variation pattern for making the timing of opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 in the small hit A game different from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d.

Here, the variation pattern (variation time) set when the special variation B is selected will be described. In this embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit A, and the special variation B is selected when the number of retained balls is 5 or 6 at the time of selecting the variation pattern. This special variation B is defined as a variation pattern with a variation time of 5.5 seconds. A detailed explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 27. When the small winning A is won continuously and the special variation B is selected, the execution timing of the continuous small winning A is determined by the V gate 650d. A small hit A is executed at a timing different from the execution cycle (in this embodiment, a timing different by 1.5 seconds).

In this way, in the next special symbol lottery after winning the small win A, when the predetermined condition (the number of balls held is 5 to 6) is satisfied, if the small win A is won (continuously winning the small win A winning), since the variation pattern (variation time) is defined so that the small winning A is executed at different timings with respect to the operating cycle of the V gate 650d, when winning the small winning A continuously, the induction It is possible to make it easier to execute the small winning A at the timing when the ball can be passed through the V gate 650d in the state (making it easier to execute the advantageous small winning game).

Next, the special variation C will be explained. The special variation C is a special variation selected when executing a small winning continuous effect (FIGS. 27 to 30) described later, and when the small winning A is continued, the first small winning game is executed. This is a variation pattern for making the timing of the change constant.

The small winning variation pattern selection table 202e3 is similar to the large winning variation pattern selection table described above, except that the above-described special variations A to C are provided. Variation patterns for various small hits are selected based on the presence or absence of the time-saving gaming state (time-saving) and the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected for the big hit variation pattern is different. Since they are only different, the description is omitted.

In addition, in the various variation pattern tables described above, various variation patterns (variation time) are selected according to the game state (the number of variations after the end of the jackpot, the number of retained balls, whether or not there is time saving) and the value of the variation type counter CS1. However, in the pachinko machine 10, it is better to accumulate a large number of reserved balls, to achieve a big win via a small winning game, that is, a specific area in the second variable winning device 650 (V discharge channel 650e3 Pass detection Since it is configured to be able to increase the degree of expectation of passing through the switch 650e5), it is configured to select a long variable time (for example, 60 seconds) as an opportunity to accumulate a plurality of the number of held balls.

Next, referring to FIG. 14, the jackpot scenario table 202f will be described. FIG. 14(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot scenario table 202f. This jackpot scenario table 202f is defined so that jackpot scenarios corresponding to the jackpot types selected by the first jackpot type selection table 202b can be selected, and a jackpot game is executed based on the selected jackpot scenario.

The jackpot scenario table 202f has, as jackpot scenarios to be selected, a jackpot scenario a 202f1 dedicated to jackpot A, a jackpot scenario b 202f2 dedicated to jackpot B, and a jackpot scenario c 202f3 dedicated to jackpot C or D.

Next, the jackpot scenario a202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 14(b). FIG. 14(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the jackpot scenario a202f1. When the jackpot scenario is set, the jackpot scenario counter 203p starts counting (S1802 in FIG. 51), and various controls set corresponding to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p are executed. Note that the counter value is incremented in the main processing of main controller 110 which is executed at a 4 millisecond cycle, and when the counter value is incremented by 1, 4 milliseconds have elapsed.

When the jackpot scenario a is set and the counter value reaches 1250 (5 seconds have elapsed), the jackpot opening period ends, and when the counter value is updated to 1251, the specific door 65f of the first variable ball entry device 65 is opened. To do so, the specific door solenoid 65a2 is turned on (1 round starts). After that, when the counter value reaches 8750 (35 seconds have passed), that is, when 30 seconds have passed since the specific door 65f was opened, the specific door solenoid 65a2 is turned off to close the specific door 65f (1 round ends). .

The closing condition (end condition) of the specific door 65f in one round of this pachinko machine is when 30 seconds have passed since the specific door 65f was opened and when 10 balls have won in the specific winning hole 65a. be. Details will be described later, but if 10 balls win in the specific winning opening 65a within 30 seconds after the specific door 65f opens, the value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is set to 8749 (1 at the end of one round). It is configured to execute the process of updating up to the previous).

With this configuration, the counter value is incremented by 1, and the counter value becomes 8750. Since the operation control for closing the specific door 65f is executed, the door closing control is executed for each of a plurality of round end conditions. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load, and it is possible to prevent the operation control of the specific door solenoid from malfunctioning when the respective round end conditions occur substantially at the same timing.

After that, until the counter value reaches 9250, that is, until 2 seconds have elapsed since the end of the first round, a state in which the specific door 65f is closed is maintained as the inter-round interval period, and the counter value reaches 9251. Then, operation control is executed to start the next round, and the specific door solenoid is turned on to open the specific door 65f (second round). When the counter value reaches 16750, the specific door solenoid is turned off as in the first round (end of the second round).

Since this jackpot scenario a202f1 is a jackpot scenario corresponding to jackpot A, which is a two-round jackpot, when the second round ends, until the counter value reaches 18000 (5 seconds after the end of the second round) jackpot ending period is executed. In this way, the jackpot A in which the jackpot scenario a is set is provided with a jackpot game that is executed until the counter value reaches 18000 (72 seconds) at the longest.

Next, the jackpot scenario b202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 14(c). FIG.14(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot scenario b202f2. This jackpot scenario b202f2 is a jackpot scenario in which the jackpot type is set to jackpot B (5-round jackpot), and the above-described jackpot scenario a202f1 differs only in the number of rounds to be executed, so the explanation is omitted. do.

In this embodiment, only the operation control of the specific door 65f is shown as the control executed based on the big win scenario, but other control may be executed based on the big win scenario. For example, a period obtained by adding a predetermined time to the period during which the specific door 65f is opened is set as the effective winning period for the first specific winning opening 65a, and it is determined whether or not the winning of the ball to the first specific winning opening 65a is normal. You may make it possible.

Next, referring to FIG. 15, the small winning scenario table 202g will be described. FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning scenario table 202g. The small winning scenario table 202g stores selectable small winning scenarios respectively corresponding to the small winning types selected by the first small winning type selection table 202c, and based on the selected small winning scenario. A game is executed.

The small winning scenario table 202g has a small winning scenario a202g1 dedicated to the small winning A and a small winning scenario b202g2 dedicated to the small winning B or C as selected small winning scenarios.

Next, the small winning scenario a202g1 will be described with reference to FIG. 15(b). FIG.15(b) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of small hit scenario a202g1. When the small winning scenario is set, the small winning scenario counter 203q starts counting (S2002 in FIG. 53), and various controls set corresponding to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q are executed. Note that the counter value is incremented in the main processing of main controller 110 which is executed at a 4 millisecond cycle, and when the counter value is incremented by 1, 4 milliseconds have elapsed.

When the small winning scenario a is set and the counter value becomes 1, the small winning opening period is started and the ball stopping solenoid 650c2 is set to ON to project the stopper 650c to the ball stopping position. Then, when the counter value reaches 625 (2.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win), the opening period for the small win ends, and when the counter value reaches 626, the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. Set door solenoid 650f2 on (start round). After that, when the counter value reaches 1000 (4 seconds have passed), that is, when 1.5 seconds have passed since the door 650f was opened, the door solenoid 650f2 is turned off to close the door 650f (end of the round).

Then, when the counter value reaches 1001, the ending period for the small win is started. During the ending period of this small hit, when the counter value reaches 1125, that is, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the door 650f was closed, the ball stopper solenoid is activated to retract the stopper 650c to the ball stopper release position. 650c2 is set off. This ejects the balls staying in the second variable winning device 650 with the door 650f closed (excluding the balls staying at the ball stop position) out of the second variable winning device 650. In order to provide a grace time (0.5 seconds) for this, the small hit scenario is configured to turn off the door solenoid 650f2 and then turn off the stopper ball stopping solenoid 650c2 after 0.5 seconds. It is.

With this configuration, when the stopper 650c is released, balls other than the balls retained at the ball stop position can be prevented from flowing down toward the V gate 650d, thereby preventing an unexpected game ( It is possible to prevent execution of a game in which a plurality of balls flow down toward the V gate in one small winning game.

Returning to FIG. 15(b), the description is continued. When the counter value reaches 1250, that is, 0.5 seconds after the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is turned off, the ball passes through the passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 in the V discharge passage 650e3 (V passage). A period (counter value 1250 to 1500) for validating the fact is set. The period from when the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is turned off until the V passage is enabled is from when the ball staying at the ball stop position is released from the stopper 650c to when it passes through the specific area. A minimum time (0.5 seconds) is set. Therefore, it is possible to effectively handle the passing of the ball retained by the stopper 650c through the specific area, and invalidate the ball passing through the specific area during a period other than the period during which the V passage is valid even during the small winning game. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent fraudulent games in which balls are intentionally retained in the second variable winning device 650 and passed through a specific area during a small winning game.

Then, when the counter value reaches 1500, the small winning ending period ends, the V passage effective period ends, and the small winning game ends. In addition, in the small winning scenario a202g1, the door passable period is set between the counter value 626 and 1125 as the period during which the winning of the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a is enabled. By setting the validity period in this way, it becomes possible to easily determine whether or not the winning or passing of the ball is normal.

Next, with reference to FIG.15(c), small hit scenario b202g2 is demonstrated. FIG.15(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of small hit scenario b202g2. The small winning scenario b202g2 is a small winning scenario corresponding to the small winning B or the small winning C, and it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 650 by opening and closing the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 at high speed. This is a scenario that provides a small winning game.

The opening period during the small winning game is different from the small winning scenario a202g1 in that it is set 1 second shorter, so the explanation thereof will be omitted. Also, the ending period during the small winning game is the same as the small winning scenario a202g1, so the explanation thereof is omitted. Hereinafter, the contents of the scenario during the round period during the small winning game will be described.

When the small winning game is started and the counter value reaches 376, the door solenoid 650f2 is turned on to open the door 650f, and when the counter value reaches 401 after that, the door solenoid 650f2 is turned off to close the door 650f. set. That is, in the small winning scenario 202g2, the opening time of the door 650f is set to 0.1 second. This opening operation is repeated three times, and when the counter value reaches 901, the round ends.

In this way, in the small hit scenario b, the opening time of the door 650f is set to 0.1 second, which is a difficult time for the ball to enter. Furthermore, the total opening time (0.3 seconds (0.1 seconds x 3 times)) in which the door 650f is opened in the small winning scenario b is the door 650f opening time (1.5 seconds) in the small winning scenario a. On the other hand, since the time is set to 1/5, a small winning game in which it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 650 is provided.

Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a game specification storage area 222b, a V gate scenario 222c, a precursor effect selection table 222d, a continuous effect type selection table 222e, and a continuous effect variation pattern selection. At least a table 222f, a continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional prize winning) 222g, a small hit middle effect pattern selection table 222h, and an indication effect variation pattern selection table 222i are stored. The variation pattern table 222a is already known and will be briefly described. More detailed fluctuation contents are determined from the type (reach, out, etc.). This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes.

The game specification storage area 222b is an area in which various specifications set by the main controller 110 are stored. Information of the scenario table 202f and the small winning scenario table 202g is stored.

The information stored in the game specification storage area 222b is referred to when acquiring the opening timing of the door based on the next or next change in the V passable change determination process (S3702, S3703 in FIG. 70), In the start process, it is referred to when acquiring the door opening timing in the small winning game of the first rotation after the end of the big winning game (S2804 in FIG. 61).

The V gate scenario 222c is a scenario in which the operation timing of the V gate 650d driven and controlled by the main controller 110, that is, the timing to set the V gate solenoid 650d to ON and the timing to set it OFF are set. , in the V gate command reception process, the V gate scenario 222c is set (S2506 in FIG. 58), and based on the counter value of the V counter 223t described later, the sound lamp controller 222 grasps the operation timing of the V gate 650d. used for It is also used when determining whether the V gate status command received from the main controller side 110 side matches the contents of the V gate scenario 222c corresponding to the counter value of the V counter 223t (S2504 in FIG. 58). .

The portent effect selection table 222d is a table that defines the effect contents of the portent effect to be executed based on the pending number and the value of the effect counter 223g when the portent effect counter 223p, which will be described later, is 3 or more. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 17(c). This portent effect selection table 222d is referred to when selecting a portent effect in the portent variation pattern selection process (S3403 in FIG. 67).

Here, the sign effect is a state in which the reserved memory of the special symbol lottery result of the special symbol lottery is continuously variable and displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "small winning A continuous executable state"). ), and notifies the player to set the reserved memory number of special symbols to a predetermined number or more (e.g., 8) when the variable display is performed. It is a production that performs

The continuous effect type selection table 222e is a table that defines the type of continuous effect that is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. A continuous effect type is selected based on the order of execution (this time, the next time, or the next time). This continuous effect type selection table 222e is referred to when selecting a continuous effect type in the continuous effect type selection process (S3606, S3607, S3610, S3612, S3613 in FIG. 69).

Here, the continuous performance means that when selecting the variation pattern corresponding to the first small win A in the state where the small win A can be continuously executed, the number of reserved and stored special symbols is a predetermined number or more (7 or more). This is an effect executed in the case where the variation display corresponding to the continuous small win A and the display during the small win game are associated with each other.

The continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f is a table that defines a variation pattern corresponding to each variation during continuous effect. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. This continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3505 in FIG. 68).

The continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g is a table defining a variation pattern corresponding to each variation when a new winning (additional winning) occurs during the continuous effect. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 18(c). This continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3504 in FIG. 68).

The small hit middle effect pattern selection table 222h is a table that defines the effect display contents to be executed during the small hit game. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. This small hit middle effect pattern selection table 222h is referred to when selecting a small hit effect pattern in the small hit start effect process (S3101 in FIG. 64).

The portent effect variation pattern selection table 222i is a table that defines whether or not to execute the SW effect as the portent effect when the conditions for executing the portent effect are satisfied. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. The portent effect variation pattern selection table 222i is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the portent variation pattern selection process (S3401 in FIG. 67).

Next, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 16(b). FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, and a fluctuation start flag 223e. , a stop type selection flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a round number accumulation counter 223h, a V gate initial flag 223i, a V gate state storage area 223j, an opening timing storage area 223k, and a V passable variation storage area 223m. , a specific small winning continuation counter 223n, a small winning consecutive number of times storage area 223o, an indication production counter 223p, a continuation flag 223q, an end information storage area 223r, a continuous big winning production flag 223s, a V counter 223t, and continuous At least an effecting flag 223u, a continuous effecting counter 223v, a continuous effect type selected flag 223w, an additional winning flag 223x, a SW valid time 1 counter 223y, and a SW valid time 2 counter 223α are provided.

The prize winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first area to eighth area). are stored respectively. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 starts winning, the first winning random number counter C1, the first big winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the small winning are obtained according to the starting winning. From each value of the type counter C5, various information obtained when the lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize (won or not, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, Various types of predicted information are notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by winning information commands.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 8th) among the 8 areas (1st to 4th areas) that are vacant. be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b counts the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by the ball entering first ball entrance 64a, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in special symbols. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (S2410 in FIG. 57). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several patterns are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that they are different, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, the reserved ball number corresponding to the normal symbol is stored based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 with respect to the above-described special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. Since the only difference is in , the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2402 in FIG. 57), and in the fluctuation display setting process, the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. is set to OFF (S3202 in FIG. 65). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 (S2302 in FIG. 56). It is transmitted towards device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2405 in FIG. 57), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S3208 in FIG. 65). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command is set. Also, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is performed so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. is controlled.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for notice effects and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S2312 in FIG. 56).

The round number accumulation counter 223h is a counter that counts the number of rounds during the jackpot game. Every time the round number command sent from the main controller 110 is received, 1 is added (S2704 in FIG. 60), and the value of the counter is reset to 0 in the jackpot ending effect process (S2906 in FIG. 62). In the sound lamp control device 113, a display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223h (S2708 in FIG. 60), and the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h indicates the final round of the jackpot game. When it reaches the value, the final round command for display is set (S2707 in FIG. 60), and the effect based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .

The V-gate initial flag 223i is a flag used by the sound lamp control device 113 to grasp the opening timing of the V-gate. , it is set to off after the V gate scenario 222c is set (S2507 in FIG. 58). This V gate initial flag 223i is for synchronizing the operation state of the V gate based on the V gate state command received from the main controller 110 with the scenario contents of the V gate scenario 222c by updating the counter value of the V counter 223t, which will be described later. It is set to ON only after the power is turned on.

With this configuration, among the V gate state commands transmitted from the main controller 110 every 4 milliseconds, the first V gate state command (S1403 in FIG. ) can be used as a reference to set the V gate scenario 222c. Further, by setting the V gate scenario 222c on the audio lamp control device 113 side, it becomes possible to predict the timing at which the V gate opens in the future.

The V gate state storage area 223j is an area for storing V gate state information (information indicating whether the V gate is open or closed) based on the V gate state command received from the main controller 110. FIG. This V gate state storage area 223j stores V gate state information in the V gate command reception process (S2501 in FIG. 58), and is referred to when determining whether it matches the contents of the V gate scenario 222c (FIG. 58 S2504).

The opening timing storage area 223k is an area for storing the V gate opening timing calculated based on the set V gate scenario 222c. The opening timing storage area 223k stores the V gate opening timing in the V gate command reception process (S2508 in FIG. 58), and is referred to in the V passable fluctuation determination process when determining the V passable fluctuation ( S3704 in FIG. 70).

The V passable variation storage area 223m is an area for storing the variation determined to be V passable in the V passable variation determination process. The V-passable variation storage area 223m stores whether the variation determined to be V-passable in the V-passable variation determination process is the current variation, the next variation, or the next variation (Fig. 70 S3706, S3708, S3709), the stored information is referenced in the continuous effect type selection process (S3605, S3609, S3611 in FIG. 69), and in the small hit start effect process, the value of the continuous effect counter 223v described later is 0 (S3109 in FIG. 64).

The specific small winning continuation counter 223n is a counter that counts the number of consecutive times that a winning command including winning information indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a small winning A is received from the main control device 110 . This specific small winning continuation counter 223n is incremented by 1 when it is determined that a winning command including winning information indicating that it is a small winning A is received in the winning command receiving process (S2610 in FIG. 59), and the winning command is received. In the process, it is referred to when it is determined that a winning command including winning information indicating other than the small hit A is received (S2605 in FIG. 59), and then reset to 0 (2608 in FIG. 59).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the value of the specific small win consecutive counter 223n becomes 2 or more, that is, when the winning command is received so that the small win A is continuously executed, the small win A can be continuously executed. state.

Small hit consecutive times storage area 223o, when it is determined in the winning command reception process that it has received a winning command including winning information indicating other than the small winning A, the value of the specific small winning consecutive counter 223n is set to a predetermined number ( In the present embodiment, it is an area for temporarily storing the value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n when it is 2) or more. The value temporarily stored in this small hit consecutive number storage area 223o is set to the counter 223v during continuous production in the continuous production type selection process (S3601 in FIG. 69), and then the stored value is cleared ( S3602 in FIG. 69).

This small winning continuation number storage area 223o stores the value of the specific small winning continuous counter 223n added based on the winning command received from the main control device 110 until the timing of selecting the variation pattern based on the winning command. is a storage area for

The portent effect counter 223p is a counter in which the current number of pending balls is set when the small hit A continuous executable state is reached. This portent effect counter 223p, when it is determined that the value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 2 in the winning command reception process, the current number of pending balls is set (S2612 in FIG. 59), and the portent variation pattern Subtraction is performed in the selection process (S3405 in FIG. 67).

Then, it is referred to in the variation pattern selection process (S3302 in FIG. 66), and is reset to 0 when the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is determined to be 0 in the small hit start effect process (S3108 in FIG. 64). . When the value of the portent effect counter 223p is larger than a predetermined value (2 in this embodiment), the portent effect can be executed.

The continuation flag 223q is a flag that is set to ON in order to execute a continuous jackpot effect that is executed during the jackpot game. This continuation flag 223q is set when the variation determined as the V passable variation in the V passable variation process is not the final variation in which the continuous effect is set, that is, as a result of the small winning game with the V passable variation, A jackpot game is executed, and when the variation of the first special symbol that is started after the jackpot game ends is the variation of winning the small win A, it is set to ON (S3608 in FIG. 69), and the jackpot start effect is set. In the process, after the consecutive big hit effect flag 223s is set to ON, it is set to OFF (S2811 in FIG. 61).

By setting this continuation flag 223q to ON, continuous jackpot effect is executed in the final round of the jackpot game.

The end information storage area 223r stores the opening timing of the door 650f in the small winning game and V stored in the V gate opening timing storage area 223k when the result of the variation in the first rotation after the end of the big winning is a small winning A. This is a storage area for storing the jackpot end timing (the end timing of the final round in the jackpot game) at which the small win game in the first rotation after the jackpot end becomes a small win game that can pass through V based on the gate opening timing.

This end information storage area 223r stores the jackpot end timing calculated when it is determined that the continuation flag 223q is set to ON in the jackpot start effect process (S2809 in FIG. 61), and the jackpot end effect process. (S2903 in FIG. 62) and then cleared (S2907 in FIG. 62).

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the end timing of the final round in the jackpot game matches the end timing stored in the end information storage area 223r. sets the display jackpot success ending command.

The continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is a flag that is set to ON in order to make the final round effect in the big win game a continuous jackpot effect. This continuous big win effect flag 223s is set to ON after the final round end timing is stored in the end information storage area 223r in the big win start effect process (S2810 in FIG. 61), and is referred to in the big win end effect process (see FIG. 62). S2901), and after the ending command for display based on the end timing of the final round is set, it is set to OFF (S2905 in FIG. 62).

The V counter 223t is a counter for updating the V gate scenario 222c. This V counter 223t is incremented by 1 (S3903 in FIG. , the value of the V counter 223t is set to 1 (S3904 in FIG. 72).

The V counter 223t is configured such that its value is set to 1 when the count is updated to 5000. FIG. This is because the control content based on the scenario defined in the V gate scenario 222c is to repeatedly execute control for 5 seconds, so the value of the V counter 223t is also 5 seconds (counter value 5000). After counting, it was configured to be set to 1 again. By configuring in this way, the area for storing the value of the V counter 223t can be reduced.

During continuous production flag 223u is a flag that is set to ON during continuous production. This continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON when the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is 2 and the number of pending balls is greater than 6 in the portent variation pattern selection process (S3408 in FIG. 67), and the small hit starts. It is referred to when selecting an effect pattern in the effect process (S3101 in FIG. 64), and is set to OFF when a continuous effect counter 223v, which will be described later, reaches 0 (S3106 in FIG. 64).

Here, the continuous effect means that the number of pending memories is greater than a predetermined number when selecting the variation pattern corresponding to the first pending memory among the pending memories in which the small hit A can be continuously executed (in this embodiment It is an effect that is executed in the case of more than 6), and is an effect that is continuously executed in association with a plurality of variable display effects and effects during the small winning game. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30. FIG.

The continuous effect counter 223v is a counter that counts the number of times (remaining times) of continuous effects. This continuous production counter 223v is set to the value stored in the small hit consecutive number storage area 223o in the continuous production type selection process (S3601 in FIG. 69), and 1 is subtracted in the small winning start production process (FIG. 64 S3104). Further, it is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3504, S3505 in FIG. 68). It should be noted that the subtraction in the small winning start effect process is executed until the counter value becomes zero.

Based on the value of the continuous production counter 223v, by identifying how many times of the continuous production the fluctuation to select the fluctuation pattern this time is, the continuous production fluctuation pattern selection table 222f and the continuous production fluctuation pattern selection table (additional winning) At 222g, an appropriate variation pattern is selected.

The continuous effect type selected flag 223w is a flag that is set to ON so as not to reset the continuous effect type. This continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON when the continuous effect type is selected in the continuous effect type selection process (S3614 in FIG. 69), and is referred to in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3501 in FIG. 68). , When the value of the counter 223v during continuous production is determined to be 0 in the small winning start production process, it is set to OFF (S3110 in FIG. 64).

The additional winning flag 223x is a flag that is set to ON when a new winning (additional winning) occurs while the continuous effect is being executed. This additional winning flag 223x is set to ON when the continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON in the winning command receiving process (S2603 in FIG. 59), and is referred to in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (FIG. 68 S3503). Then, when the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 0 in the small winning start effect process, it is set to OFF (3107 in FIG. 64).

This additional winning flag 223x is for the process of estimating the next variation or the variation pattern (variation time) of the next variation or the one after another variation that is executed when selecting the variation pattern that starts the continuous presentation by the additional winning during the execution of the continuous presentation. The number of held balls used is different from the number of held balls used when selecting the actually executed variation pattern (variation time), indicating that a variation pattern different from the previously assumed variation pattern is selected. It is.

Therefore, when additional winning occurs during execution of the continuous effect and the additional winning flag 223x is set to ON, the continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional Winning) 222g.

The SW valid time 1 counter 223y is a counter that counts the time for validating the operation of the frame button 22 (the left frame button 22a or the right frame button 22b) during the SW effect. This SW effective time 1 counter 223y counts the effective time of the SW effect (see FIGS. 28 and 29) executed during the continuous effect, and a predetermined time is set in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 29). 68-3506), it is subtracted in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3802 in FIG. 71), and the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the frame button 22 is operated (S3805 in FIG. 71).

The SW valid time 2 counter 223α is a counter that counts the time for validating the operation of the frame button 22 (the left frame button 22a or the right frame button 22b) during the SW effect. This SW effective time 2 counter 223α counts the effective time of the SW effect (see FIG. 26) executed in the portent effect, and when a variation pattern having the SW effect is selected in the portent variation pattern selection process. is set to a value of 5000 (equivalent to 5 seconds), and is subtracted in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3807 in FIG. 71). Then, when the frame button 22 is operated, the value of the counter is reset to 0 (S3810 in FIG. 71).

In this way, by setting the SW effective time in advance in each SW effect, for example, the frame button can be operated only while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a guide to operate the frame button 22 . Since the operation of 22 can be validated, the player unintentionally operates the frame button 22, and as a result, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 does not correspond to the operation of the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the situation of switching based on the game machine, and to improve the quality of the SW effect in the game machine.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19, various tables and the like held in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described. First, the game specification storage area 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 17(a). FIG. 17(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the game specification storage area 222b. Various game specifications (game information) set by the main controller 110 are stored in the game specification storage area 222b. is stored. The small winning scenario information stores the time of each small winning scenario, the opening timing and the opening period of the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 in the small winning A and the small winnings B to C as information, and variation pattern information. , each variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection table 202e and its variation time are stored as information. In addition, information based on selection conditions and jackpot scenarios when special fluctuations A to C are selected is also stored (not shown).

By storing the various game specifications stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 on the voice lamp controller 113 side in this way, based on the prize winning command and the pending ball number command received from the main controller 110, the voice Future game timing can be assumed on the lamp control device 113 side. For example, by the winning command receiving process, the winning command containing the winning information that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit is continuously received, and when the variation pattern based on the first winning information is selected, the number of reserved balls is 7. Then, as the variation pattern based on the first winning information, the variation pattern corresponding to the special variation C (variation time of 4 seconds) is selected by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 . Then, if a winning command based on a new winning (additional winning) does not come before the next variation starts, the next variation is that the lottery result is a small hit A and the number of balls held when the variation pattern is selected is Since there are six, it is possible to assume that main controller 110 will transmit a variation pattern corresponding to special variation B (variation time of 5.5 seconds).

In addition, since the game specification storage area 222b also stores information indicating the opening timing and opening period of the door 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 during the small winning game, the variation this time is the special variation B (variation Time 4 seconds) after the small winning game A is executed, it is possible to grasp that the door 650f is opened for 2.5 to 4 seconds after the small winning game is started.

Furthermore, since it is assumed that the next fluctuation is the special fluctuation B, if the big hit game is not executed by the small hit A game due to this fluctuation, after the end of the small hit game this time, special as the next fluctuation Variation B (fluctuation time of 5.5 seconds) is executed, then a small winning game of A is executed, and the door 650f is opened for 2.5 to 4 seconds after the small winning game is started. can be grasped.

That is, at the stage of selecting the current variation pattern, the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened 6.5 to 8 seconds and 16 to 18.5 seconds after the current variation starts. can be assumed.

Also, by comparing with the opening timing information of the V gate stored in the opening timing storage area 223k described above, the opening timing of the door 650f based on the current fluctuation and the opening timing of the door 650f based on the next fluctuation are It is also possible to determine whether or not it is time to open the V-passage, and it is also possible to display a preliminary effect based on the determination result on the third symbol display device. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of pre-effects than the pre-notification based only on winning commands, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The game specification storage area 222b of this embodiment stores only the game specifications referred to in the control of the sound lamp control device 113, thereby reducing the storage capacity. All the information stored may be stored in the game specification storage area 222b. By doing so, the work of creating separate data for the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Next, the V gate scenario 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 17(b). FIG. 17(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V gate scenario 222c. In this V gate scenario 222c, the V counter 223t is incremented by 1 each time the V counter update process (see FIG. 53) executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 is updated every millisecond. , and scenarios corresponding to the count values 1 to 5000 of the V counter 223t are set.

The scenario content of the V gate scenario 222c represents a state in which the V gate 650d is open until the counter value of the V counter 223t reaches 1 to 1500 (1.5 seconds), and the counter value reaches 1501 to 5000. The V-gate 650d is closed for 3.5 seconds.

Then, when the counter value reaches 5000, the process of setting the counter value to 1 again and updating the counter value is performed (S3904 in FIG. 72). By having this V gate scenario 222c in the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 side can grasp the state of the V gate 650d (whether it is open or closed), and also assume the future opening timing. becomes possible.

In addition, since it is possible to compare the V-gate state command received from the main controller 110 and the update status of the V-gate scenario 222c, it is possible to quickly discover that a malfunction has occurred in the operation control of the V-gate 650d. becomes possible. It should be noted that the actual operation status of the V gate 650d may be detected using a sensor or the like, and the actual operation status may be compared with the update status of the V gate scenario 222c. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that a fraudulent act such as outputting a fraudulent signal to the V-opening solenoid 650d2 to fraudulently operate the V-gate 650d can be detected early.

Next, the precursor effect selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 17(c). FIG. 17(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the portent effect selection table 222d. This portent selection table 222d is a table that prescribes the effect contents of the portent effect to be executed based on the number of reserved balls (retained number) and the value of the effect counter 223g when the portent effect counter 223p is 3 or more, and is a table that defines the effect contents of the portent effect. In the pattern selection process, it is referred to when selecting the portent effect (S3403 in FIG. 67).

Specifically, when the value of the portent effect counter 223p is 3 to 4, that is, when the order of execution of the change based on the reserved memory to be the target of the continuous effect is close, and when the value of the portent effect counter 223p is 5 to 5 In the case of 8, that is, when the order in which the change based on the reserved memory to be the target of the continuous effect is executed is far, the content selected in the portent effect changes. For example, when the value of the omen effect counter 223p is 3 to 4 and the number of reservations is 7, the number of reservations of special symbols is equal to or greater than a predetermined number at the timing when variation based on the reservation memory that is the target of continuous effects is executed. Therefore, an effect (for example, a big chance!) that gives the player expectations is selected.

On the other hand, when the value of the omen effect counter 223p is 5 to 8 and the number of pending balls is 0 to 3, there is time before the variation based on the pending memory that is the target of the continuous effect is executed. A presentation is selected that suggests increasing the number (eg, full force fire!).

In this embodiment, it is set as a condition for executing a continuous effect that the number of reservations is a predetermined number or more (7 or more) when the small win A is successively won and the variation is executed. In the above-mentioned sign effect, in a situation where the holding memory that won the small win A is continuously stored, the number of holdings is set to a predetermined number or more (7 It is a production that makes suggestions to make more than one).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prompt the player to store the reserved number up to a predetermined number or more, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the indication effect is changed based on the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p and the number of reservations. The display mode of the precursor effect may be changed. For example, when the variable time is long, it is a chance to acquire a plurality of reserved memories, so it is preferable to display the content to that effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player stops launching the game ball while a variation with a long variation time is being executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the indication effect can be executed only in a state in which the holding memory of winning the small win A is continuously stored, but the holding memory of winning the small win A is not continuously stored. Even in such a case, the precursor effect may be configured to be executable. By constructing in this way, even when the holding memory of winning the small win A is not continuously stored, the player who sees the performance display by the premonition performance tries to store the number of holdings up to the upper limit. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the continuous effect type selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 18(a). FIG. 18(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect type selection table 222e. This continuous effect type selection table 222e includes the value of the continuous effect counter 223v (2 or 3 in this embodiment) and the order of variation determined to be V passable in the V passable determination process (in this embodiment, this time , the next time, or the next time).

Specifically, when the value of the counter 223v during continuous production is 2, a continuous production type in which two continuous productions (continuous productions executed over two fluctuations) are executed is selected, and the value of the counter 223v during continuous production is selected. is 3, a continuous performance type in which 3 continuous performances (continuous performances executed over 3 fluctuations) are executed is selected.

Furthermore, if the order of variation that can pass V is this time, the type of 2 consecutive effects A or 3 consecutive effects A will be the type, and if the next time, the type of 2 consecutive effects B or 3 consecutive effects B will be the next time. The type of 3 consecutive effects C is selected. In addition, when the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2, the target of the continuous effect is two changes, so the third change (next time) is not selected.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is set to 3, but this is not the only option. It may be set within a range up to the upper limit (8 in this embodiment). By doing so, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the continuous effect is executed, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 18(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f. This continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f is referred to in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3505 in FIG. 68). The selected continuous effect type (S3606, S3607, S3610, S3612 in FIG. 69) and the value set to the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous effect in the continuous effect type selection process (S3601 in FIG. 69) Variation pattern based on is selected.

As an effect display mode of the variation pattern selected here, a chance effect is an effect indicating that a small win that can pass through V will be executed in the next and subsequent variations (see (b) and (c) of FIG. 28). , super chance production (see (a) and (b) in FIG. 29), which is a production showing that the small win that can pass through V is executed, and after the small win that can pass through V is executed There are three types of pounding effects (see (c) in FIG. 29), which are effects that are executed by variation.

Also, based on the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production, a variation pattern is selected in which a different variation time corresponding to each chance production is set. Specifically, when the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2 in a state where the 2-continuous effect A is selected as the continuous effect type, the super chance effect A with the change time of 4 seconds is selected as the variation pattern. be.

This is the case where the 2-continuous effect A is selected as the continuous effect type and the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win A, and the number of reserved balls is 7. This is because the variation pattern corresponding to the special variation C (variation time 4 seconds) is set because the variation pattern is set in the state of .

It should be noted that the above-mentioned thrilling effect means that when the big winning game is not executed after the end of the small winning game that can pass the V, that is, the second variable winning device 650 wins the ball in the small winning game that can pass the V. is not possible and the ball does not pass through the specific area during the small winning game, the performance corresponding to the variation of the special pattern is executed after the small winning game that allows the V to pass is finished. This heart-pounding effect is executed without suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether or not the small winning game based on the variation of the corresponding special symbols can pass the V.例文帳に追加

If a new winning (additional winning) occurs during the continuous effect, the variation pattern (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command actually received from the main controller 110 and the V passable variation determination process are assumed. The variation pattern (variation time) is different from the calculated variation pattern (variation time), and there is a possibility that the determination result as to whether or not it is possible to pass through the V is not a correct determination result. Therefore, when additional winning occurs, a variation pattern is selected using a dedicated variation pattern selection table (continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g).

Next, with reference to FIG. 18(c), variation pattern selection when additional winning occurs will be described. FIG. 18(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g. The continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g is a table that is referred to when an additional winning occurs, and a heart-pounding effect is executed based on the variation pattern (variation time) received from the main controller 110. is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, even if an additional winning occurs and the variation pattern selected by the main controller 110 and the variation pattern assumed by the sound lamp control device 113 are different, the main controller 110 The third symbol display device 81 can execute an effect corresponding to the content of the received variation pattern command.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of continuous effects is changed at the time when additional winning occurs. A process of correcting the effect content of the continuous effect may be performed based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, when the big winning game can be executed via the small winning game, it becomes easy to execute the continuous performance, and there is an effect that the performance expected by the player can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit A, and the variation pattern (special variation B) selected when the number of retained balls is 5 to 6, and the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit. The variation pattern (special variation C) selected when A and the number of pending balls is 7 is different, but the same variation pattern is selected, even if an additional winning occurs. The determination result of the V passable variation determination process may not be affected. For example, even when the number of held balls is 7, the special variation B may be selected.

By configuring in this way, even if additional winning occurs during the continuous effect, the determination result of the V passable variation determination process calculated in advance and the result of the actually performed game will not differ. There is an effect that an appropriate performance can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19(a), the effect pattern selection table 222h during the small winning will be described. FIG. 19(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning middle effect pattern selection table 222h. Here, the small winning middle production pattern selection table 222h is a table for selecting the content of the production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small winning game, and additional winning in the small winning game by the small winning A. A performance pattern (small winning performance pattern) during the small winning game is selected according to the presence or absence of the flag 223x or the flag 223u during continuous performance and whether or not the small winning game of this time is a small winning that can pass V (V possible). is stipulated as

Next, referring to FIG. 19(b), the precursor effect variation pattern selection table 222i will be described. FIG. 19(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the portent effect variation pattern selection table 222i. The portent effect variation pattern selection table 222i is a table referred to when it is determined that the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is greater than 2, and is a variation pattern command and effect counter received from the main controller 110. Based on the value of 223g, a variation pattern in which the SW effect (forecast effect) is performed or a variation pattern in which the SW effect is not performed is selected.

If the variation pattern type received from the main controller 110 is less than the predetermined time (5000 milliseconds), it is impossible (difficult) to execute the SW effect during the variation. The variation patterns for which the presence or absence of the SW effect is selected are defined in advance only for variation patterns whose variation time is longer than a predetermined time (5000 milliseconds).

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 24. FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND-type flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed. This may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the second predetermined address is the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (S4001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Set the start address of the corresponding program.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 24) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 75(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the selection is made.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 73).

The power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 (display of "O" and "X" on the third pattern display device 81).

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, an image is displayed for a fixed period after stopping the variation performance in the case of ``a special pattern jackpot'', and an image is displayed for a fixed period after the suspension of the variation performance in the case of ``out of the special pattern''.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts a game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball entry into the first ball entrance 64a is detected, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the power-on varying image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image resident in the area 235b, and the images are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. directed against. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64a is detected while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 21, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 21A and 21B are explanatory diagrams for explaining two types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 21(b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "town stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage".

As shown in FIG. 21, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the "city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 moves the corresponding rear image from position a to position a' to the initial position of the display area. , and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 21(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the town stage, is displayed. 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage, as shown in FIG. back image area 235c.

Here, the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at arbitrary timing based on the player's will. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed within the range from position a to position a', and from position a including the initial position to position a Since the image data corresponding to the image during b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the player can press the frame button. When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 22, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial position of the back B is immediately displayed in the third pattern. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing color tone over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the back surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 20) of the normal-use video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b' and positions b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the variable performance is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. , the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

A player can easily recognize the time period of normal symbols by informing the time period of normal symbols in the ending performance. The longer the time period of this normal pattern, the more chances the ball will pass through the second ball entrance B640b. Become. Therefore, there are more chances that the electric accessory will be released as a jackpot of the normal symbol, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance B640b, and the lottery of the special symbol can be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first ball entrance 64a is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a jackpot of normal symbols, and the ball wins the second prize. If it becomes easier to enter the opening 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand, or in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if the game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that any one of the pending special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can receive special symbols in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that a big win will occur, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will surely win a big win. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information change over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or to display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (FIG. 24), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer 233d is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The created configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (FIG. 24) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. do.

For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third pattern display device 81 . This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (S4005 in FIG. 73). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the transfer setting processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, It is set to OFF (S6405 in FIG. 88(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (S4301 in FIG. 75(b)). When the display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination processing (see S4308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting processing (FIG. 75) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (b) S4309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (FIGS. 76 to 85) and display setting processing (FIG. 86) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (S6301 in FIG. 88A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident object image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (FIG. 88(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, When the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (FIG. 89) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (FIG. 24) is generated in which the content of the instruction to draw an image for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (FIG. 24) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. do.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 executes display setting processing for V interrupt processing (S4303 in FIG. 86) based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed. ), pointer update processing (S6005 in FIG. 86) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 24), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing of one frame image are completed, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 is performed. Each time it is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (S6007 in FIG. 86). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (S1902 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 231. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S6513 in FIG. 89). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (S6514 in FIG. 89), The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (S6602 in FIG. 90).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (FIG. 75(b)) is executed (S6603 in FIG. 90).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

Next, referring to FIG. 25, the time from when the ball passes through the ball entrance (first ball entrance 64a, second ball entrance A64b, or second ball entrance B640b) to execution of the jackpot game is I will explain the flow of the game. FIG. 25(a) is a timing chart showing a flow in which a big winning game is executed via a small winning game. FIG. 25(a) shows a pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the small winning type A, and the big winning game is executed after the small winning game ends.

First, the main controller 110 changes the special symbol (especially Figure variation) is executed, and a special figure variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 (for example, variation time 10 seconds).

In addition, a V gate solenoid (V opening solenoid) 650d2 for opening or closing the V gate 650d provided in the second variable winning device 650 is repeatedly turned on and off at a constant timing after the power is turned on. It is controlled by the main controller 110 so that Here, the V gate solenoid (V opening solenoid) 650d2 is set to ON to move the V gate to the guidance position (the position where the V gate 650d is opened so that the ball can pass through the V discharge passage 650e3). It is configured to position the V gate at the regulated position (the position where the V gate 650d is closed so as to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3) by setting it to OFF.

This V-gate solenoid (V-opening solenoid) 650d2 positions the V-gate 650d at the guidance position for a period of time t5 (1.5 seconds) after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and then during a period of time t6 (3.5 seconds). ), i.e., the period from when the V-gate 650d is positioned to either the guidance position or the regulation position to when it is positioned to either of them is one operation cycle. , and is controlled so that its operation cycle is repeatedly executed.

As a result of the above-described special figure fluctuation, when the pattern (identification information) indicating the small hit A stops, the small hit A game is executed after that, and the effect of the small hit A is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114. be done. The control contents of various devices executed during the small winning game are determined based on the small winning scenario selected by referring to the small winning scenario table 202g stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, In the small winning scenario a corresponding to the small winning A, when the small winning game is executed, the ball stopping solenoid 650c2 is set to ON during the period t4 (4.5 seconds). Then, when the period t1 (2.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the small winning game, the door solenoid (opening solenoid) 650f2 for opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is turned on during the period t2 (1.5 seconds). set.

At this timing, the second variable winning device 650 is in a state where the ball can win, and the first winning ball pushes down the flow path switching member 650b and stays by the stopper 650c. Then, the subsequent winning ball rolls on the upper surface of the flow path switching member 650b that has returned to the initial position, flows down the first flow path 650e1, and passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e4 (see FIG. 4).

After the period t2 (the period during which the door solenoid (opening solenoid) 650f2 is set to ON) has elapsed, the door solenoid (opening solenoid) 650f2 is set to OFF for a period t3 (2 seconds), and the second variable winning device 650 to make it impossible (difficult) to win the ball. At the timing when the period t4 has passed, that is, at the timing when 0.5 seconds have passed since the period t2 ended, the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is turned off, and the stopper 650c moves from the ball stop position to the ball stop release position (release position). position).

It should be noted that the time (0.5 seconds) provided from when the door solenoid 650f2 is set to OFF to when the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF is the ball staying in the second variable winning device 650. 2 It is set as a grace period for discharging to the outside of the variable winning device 650 .

By moving the stopper 650c to the release position, the ball staying at the ball stop position (the ball that entered first) flows down toward the V gate 650d, and the timing of this flow changes when the V gate 650d is in the guidance state. At the timing of (guidance position), the ball passes through a passage detection switch (specified area) 650e5 (described as V detection SW in FIG. 25) provided in the V discharge passage 650e3, while the V gate 650d is regulated. At the timing of the state (restricted position), it rolls on the upper surface of the V gate 650d, flows down the second flow path, and passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e4 (see FIG. 4).

Then, when the passing detection switch (specific area) 650e5 in the V discharge flow path 650e3 detects the ball (by passing the ball through the specific area), the main controller 110 starts the big winning game after the small winning game ends. After a predetermined period of time from the start of the jackpot game, the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and the display control device 114 displays the jackpot effect on the third symbol display device 81. .

As described above, by operating various devices (the door 650f and the stopper 650c) at a predetermined timing during the small winning game, it is possible to cause only one ball to flow down toward the V gate at a predetermined timing. , a proper game can be surely executed. In addition, since operation control of various devices is executed based on one small winning scenario, there is less risk of error occurring in operation control timing between devices than when operation control is performed independently for each device. , a proper game can be executed more reliably.

In addition, by using the above-described configuration, the timing at which the ball flows down on the V gate 650d after the small winning game is started is fixed (in this embodiment, about 5 seconds after the small winning game starts). However, since the V gate 650d is always controlled in a constant cycle regardless of the game state, it is determined at random whether or not the ball won by the second variable winning device 650 in the small winning game passes through the specific area. be able to.

Further, by configuring the operation timing of the V gate 650d to be comprehensible by the voice ramp control device 113, it is possible to determine whether the small winning game of this time is a small winning game that can pass V.

FIG. 25(b) is a timing chart showing a flow in which a big winning game is executed based on a special symbol lottery. First, the main controller 110 changes the special symbol (especially While the figure fluctuation) is executed, the display control device 114 through the sound lamp control device 113 executes a special figure fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 .

Then, when the special symbol variation ends and the special symbols indicating the big win are stopped and displayed, the big win game is executed by the main control device 110, and the first variable winning device 65 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the big win game is started. When the specific door 65f is opened, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a big win effect.

It should be noted that the time from the start of the special figure fluctuation shown in FIG. 25 (a) until the jackpot game is executed, and the time from the start of the special figure fluctuation shown in FIG. It is good to set the variation time of each special figure variation or the game time of the small hit game so that it is the same. By constructing in this way, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the player has won a big win in the special symbol lottery or whether the big win has been granted as a result of the small winning game, and the third symbol display device 81. There is an effect that it is possible to entertain the performance displayed on the screen until the end.

Also, when adopting the configuration described above, the second variable prize winning device 650 is preferably arranged in the lower center of the game board 13 . By doing so, there is no need to notify the third symbol display device 81 of the position where the game ball is to be shot (so-called right-handed display) during the small winning game, and the special symbols can be presented to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether a big win has been won in a lottery or a big win has been granted as a result of a small winning game.

Furthermore, the time from the start of the special figure fluctuation shown in FIG. 25(a) to the execution of the jackpot game and the time from the start of the special figure fluctuation shown in FIG. 25(b) to the execution of the jackpot game The third symbol display device 81 may be made the same and the same effect display may be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp whether the big win has been won in the lottery of the special symbols or the big win has been granted as a result of the small winning game.

Also, even if the V passable small win is executed, if the second variable winning device 650 cannot win the ball, the big win is not given. Among the effect displays to be displayed, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed until the V passage time processing for determining whether or not the ball has passed through a specific area in the V discharge channel 650e3 during the small winning game is executed. The effect display to be executed is the same, and when it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area in the V discharge flow path 650e3 as a result of the determination of the V passage time processing, the same effect display is continuously executed and the V Only when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the specific area in the discharge channel 650e3, it is preferable to execute the process of switching the content of the effect display displayed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the determination result.

By configuring in this way, in the normal game flow in which the ball is passed through the specific area during execution of the V-passable small win and the big win is executed after the small win game is completed, the third symbol display device Since there is no need to switch the contents of the effect display displayed at 81, there is an effect that the processing load of the effect display can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, an indication effect among the display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the prognostic effect. The premonition performance is a performance executed when a reserved ball with a special symbol lottery result of a small win A is continuously stored among the stored reserved balls, and the special symbol is a special symbol. This is an effect for urging the player to accumulate reserved symbols up to the upper limit before the variation based on the reserved ball whose lottery result is a small hit A is executed.

Here, the display screen (P) of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. The display screen (P) of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, the upper part being the main display area Dm for displaying the third symbol variably, and the other lower part being the secondary display area for displaying the number of pending balls. area Ds.

Three symbol rows are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is divided into three display areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is a held ball that has not been changed among the balls that have entered each ball entrance (first ball entrance 64a, second ball entrance A64b, or second ball entrance B640b). Reserved symbols indicating the number of are displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the reserved design of the special figure 1 and the reserved design of the special figure 2 are displayed in an unidentifiable (difficult) manner, but the reserved design of the special figure 1 and the reserved design of the special figure 2 The display mode of the reserved symbols may be changed so that the player can identify the . Further, another display body (mark) capable of distinguishing the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be displayed in the vicinity of the reserved design without changing the display mode of the reserved design. By doing so, the player can easily grasp whether the next variation is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2.

In the small area Ds2, a changing design is displayed in the same manner as the reserved design corresponding to the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. By configuring in this way, as a production that suggests the possibility that the special design corresponding to the reserved design is a big hit, even if the production that changes the mode of the reserved design (so-called reservation notice production) is adopted. It is possible to easily grasp the presence/absence of the suspension notice effect for the special pattern during fluctuation.

Therefore, it is possible to easily associate the suspension notice effect performed in advance with the variable display of the special symbols, and to provide a gaming machine in which the player is interested in the effect. In addition, as the above-mentioned pending notice effect, for example, the effect of changing the color of the pending pattern (white → blue → red), the effect of changing the background effect of the pending pattern (suggested by the size of the flame), and the pending pattern Any effect may be used as long as the effect allows the player to determine the possibility of a big win, such as an effect in which the characters appear on the screen.

In the small area Ds3, a game explanation (“explanation indicating pressing a button”) for the special symbol game in which variable display is being performed, and the content of notifying the current game state are displayed.

Returning to FIG. 26(a), the description is continued. In FIG. 26(a), six reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1, and among the reserved symbols, the result of the special symbol lottery is a small winning A reserved design (in FIG. 26(a) (shown as a star pattern) are continuously stored.

In this state, that is, in a state in which reserved balls with a special pattern lottery result of a small win A are continuously stored among the reserved balls, the indication effect can be executed, and the game is played in the small area Ds3. The content prompting the user to operate the frame button 22 is displayed.

Here, when the player operates the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 26(b), the characters "Just a little more!!" are displayed in the small area Ds3. This character is selected by referring to the portent effect selection table 222d in the portent variation pattern selection process (S3403 in FIG. 67).

In the example shown in FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), for ease of explanation, the reserved symbols corresponding to the reserved ball whose special symbol lottery result is a small hit A are indicated by asterisks. In fact, it is displayed as a reserved design in a display mode indistinguishable (difficult) from other reserved designs. By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp in advance which sign performance is being executed for which reserved symbol, and when the sign performance is executed, the number of reserved balls should always be accumulated to the upper limit. The game can be played enthusiastically, and the operation of the game machine can be increased.

Further, the form of the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 may be changed to a display form suggesting that the reserved balls winning the small hit A are continuously stored. In this case, the display mode of the two consecutive reserved patterns may be changed to suggest the possibility that the reserved pattern whose display mode has been changed has won the small win A, or one of the reserved patterns may be reserved. The display form of the pattern is changed, and in addition to the reserved pattern whose display form is changed, either the reserved pattern that fluctuates before the reserved pattern or the reserved pattern that fluctuates after the reserved pattern wins the small win A. It may be configured to suggest that it is a reserved symbol corresponding to a sphere.

By constructing in this way, before the player starts the variation based on the specific reserved pattern (the reserved pattern whose display mode is changed), the game is motivated to accumulate the reserved balls to the upper limit. In addition, if you succeed in accumulating the reserved balls to the upper limit at the timing when the fluctuation based on the specific reserved pattern starts, you can see the fluctuation production based on the reserved pattern with a sense of superiority. effective.

It should be noted that this sign effect is configured to be executable until the fluctuations before the fluctuations based on the held balls whose lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit A are started.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30, the continuous effect among the display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous effects and operation control of various devices.

Here, the continuous effect will be explained. The continuous effect is when the lottery results of the special symbols are consecutive small hits A, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the first small hit A is selected from the consecutive small hits A, the ball is held. is stored in a predetermined number (seven in this embodiment), and in the continuous small hit A game, the V discharge channel 650e3 provided in the second variable winning device 650 It is an effect for highlighting a small hit A game (hereinafter referred to as V passable small hit) that the ball can pass through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5).

This continuous effect includes at least the special symbol variation display corresponding to the first small win A among the consecutive small wins A (hereinafter referred to as the first special figure variation display) and the first special figure variation display. As a result, a small winning A game (hereinafter referred to as the first small winning A game) and a special symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the second small winning A among the consecutive small winnings A (hereinafter referred to as the second (referred to as a special figure fluctuation display) and a small hit A game (hereinafter referred to as a second small hit A game) executed as a result of the second special figure fluctuation display. .

As shown in FIG. 27, in the case where the conditions for executing the continuous effect are satisfied, the main controller 110 selects the special variation C (variation time 4 seconds) as the first special variation, and the special variation After the fluctuation of C stops, the first small winning A game is executed (6 seconds). Then, as the second special figure variation, the special variation B (variation time 5.5 seconds) is executed, and after the variation of the special variation B stops, the second small hit A game is executed.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, based on various commands set by the main control device 110, the special figure variation display 1 corresponding to the first special figure variation and the first small hit A game are displayed. A small winning middle display 1, a special figure variation display 2 corresponding to the second special figure variation, and a small winning middle display 2 corresponding to the second small winning A game are displayed.

On the other hand, the V gate 650d changes its operation to the guidance state (the state in which the ball can pass through the V discharge passage 650e3) for 1.5 seconds, and then to the regulation state (the V discharge flow path 650e3) for 3.5 seconds. One cycle (five seconds) is set to the state in which the ball cannot pass through the flow path 650e3 (difficult state), and the cycle is repeated.

Here, in the state where the continuous effect is executed, the winning ball V gate arrival timing (see FIG. 27) is the timing at which the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 in the first small winning A game reaches the V gate 650d. ) and the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the second small hit A game is 11.5 seconds.

This is the time (1 second) from the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate to the end of the small hit A game in the first small hit A game, and the second special figure fluctuation fluctuation time (5.5 seconds) , and the time (5 seconds) from when the small winning game is executed in the second small winning A game to when the winning ball reaches the V gate.

In this way, by setting the interval of the winning ball reaching the V gate, it is possible to cause the ball to flow down at different timings to the V gate 650d whose operation is controlled in a 5-second cycle.

To explain in detail, since one period of V gate 650d is set to 5 seconds, the operating state is the same as that of V gate 650d corresponding to the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the first small hit A game. 5 seconds and 10 seconds after the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the first small hit A game, and at intervals of 5 seconds. In this embodiment, since the interval between the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the first small winning A game and the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the second small winning A game is 11.5 seconds, the second small winning ball The winning ball arrival timing at the V gate in the winning A game is 1.5 seconds behind (different from) the winning ball arrival timing at the V gate in the first small winning A game.

Here, the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate that can provide the player with a more advantageous game state when the small hits A are won in succession will be described. In this embodiment, the period during which the V gate 650d is in the induction state is set to 1.5 seconds. That is, if the timing of the first and second winning balls reaching the V gate differs from the operating cycle of the V gate 650d by less than 1.5 seconds (for example, 0.5 seconds), the first and second winning balls The probability that the V gate 650d is in the restricted state (3.5 seconds) for both the sphere V gate arrival timings increases.

Conversely, if the winning ball reaches the V gate for the first time and the second time differs from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d by more than 1.5 seconds (for example, 2 seconds), the V gate 650d enters the induction state. There is a possibility that the period will be crossed.

Therefore, by setting the timings of the winning balls to reach the V gate for the first time and the second time to be different from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d by the period (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the V gate 650d is in the regulated state at both the first and second winning ball arrival timings to the V gate without straddling the period in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the V gate 650d is changed to the guidance state (the state in which the ball can pass through the V discharge passage 650e3) for 1.5 seconds, and then for 3.5 seconds. One cycle (five seconds) is set to the control state (a state in which the ball cannot (is difficult) pass through the V discharge passage 650e3), and the cycle is repeatedly executed. That is, V-gate 650d is configured to be in the induction state for 1.5 seconds with an interval of 3.5 seconds. In other words, V-gate 650d is configured to be in the regulated state for 3.5 seconds with an interval of 1.5 seconds.

In addition, in the small hit A game, the playing time of the small hit game is set to 6 seconds, and the ball enters the V gate 650d at the timing when about 5.5 seconds have passed since the small hit game was started. designed to reach

Therefore, when the reserved memory of the special symbol lottery result of the small win A is stored in the state of continuously fluctuating display (small win A continuous executable state) in the reserved memory of the special symbols, From the timing when the winning ball during the first small hit game of the consecutive small hits A reaches the V gate 650d (timing 5.5 seconds after the start of the small hit game), the second special After the figure fluctuation display, if the time until the winning ball reaches the V gate 650d during the second small win game is an integer multiple of the operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d, then the continuous small win A Any small winning game based on will cause the ball to reach the V gate 650d at the timing when the V gate 650d is performing the same operation.

That is, if the total time of the game time of the small hit A game and the variation time of the special symbol is an integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, the V gate 650d operating in a predetermined operation cycle The ball will flow down at the same timing. In such a configuration, even if the player wins small wins A consecutively, there is no merit for the player, and the player's willingness to play is lowered.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game time (6 seconds) of the small hit game (small hit A game), and the variation time of the second special figure fluctuation display (special fluctuation B : 5.5 seconds) is configured so that the total time (11.5 seconds) does not become an integral multiple of the operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d.

As a result, when small winning games occur continuously, the continuous small winning games do not cause the ball to flow down at the same timing to the V gate 650d operating in a predetermined operation cycle. That is, it is possible to cause the balls to flow down at different timings to the V-gate 650d which is operating in a predetermined operation cycle by continuously generating small winning games. Therefore, when the player wins the small winning game continuously, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state than when the player wins the small winning game alone, and wins the small winning continuously. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to the fact that the game is played.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game time of the small hit A game (6 seconds), and the variation time of the second special figure fluctuation display (special fluctuation C: 5.5 seconds) among the consecutive small hits A The total time (11.5 seconds) is different from the time corresponding to the integral multiple of the operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d by the period (1.5 seconds) during which the V gate 650d is in the induction state. The fluctuation time of the special pattern is set.

This is set in order to increase the probability of causing the ball to flow down to the V gate at the timing when the V gate 650d is in the induced state in any of the small winning games in the consecutive small winning games. That is, the time to be in the induced state in the operation cycle of the V gate 650d is 1.5 seconds, and the time to be in the regulated state is 3.5 seconds, so the game time of the small hit A game and the continuous small If the total time between the winning A and the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the latter is less than 1.5 seconds from the time corresponding to the integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, the former (first ) and the latter (second) small winning game may be V-passable small winning games. In this way, the fact that the small winning game that can pass V in the continuous small winning game overlaps means that the former (first) small winning game and the latter (second) small winning game cannot pass V (difficult ), the possibility of becoming a small winning game increases accordingly.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game time of the small hit A game (6 seconds), and the variation time of the second special figure fluctuation display (special fluctuation B: 5.5 seconds) of the continuous small hit A Set the fluctuation time of the special pattern so that the total time (11.5 seconds) is different from the time corresponding to the integral multiple of the operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d by 1.5 seconds, and continuous small wins When the V gate 650d is in a regulated state at the timing of causing the ball to flow down to the V gate 650d in the first small winning game among the games, the ball is caused to flow down to the V gate 650d in the second small winning game. Timing can increase the probability that the V gate 650d is in the induced state, and the game is more advantageous to the player when winning the small winning game continuously than when winning the small winning game alone. It is possible to provide the state, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation to play due to the successive winning of small winnings.

It is desirable that the difference is 1.5 seconds or longer with respect to the integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, but it may be less than that. For example, with respect to the operating cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d, if the time (for example, 1 second) is shorter than the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state, the number of consecutive small hits It is preferable to make the number of times more than two (for example, five times) and to make the difference by one operation cycle (five seconds) of the V gate 650d.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the small winning game continues five times, among the small winning games that are continuously executed, at least one small winning game that can pass V is executed, so the game It is possible to provide a player with a more advantageous game state than in the case of winning the small winning game singly when winning the small winning game continuously.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation cycle is set to a period that is not an integral multiple of the period (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state. By doing so, for example, when the number of consecutive small wins is made more than 2 times (for example, 5 times), and the total is different by one cycle or more (7.5 seconds) of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. In the first period and the second period, the timing of causing the ball to flow down to the V gate 650d in the small winning game can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that a more advantageous game state can be provided to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the interval between the winning balls reaching the V gate in consecutive small winning A games is set to a specific interval by setting the variation time of the special symbols to a specific variation time. In addition, for example, the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the first small winning A game and the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the second small winning A game may be different. Furthermore, the operating period of the V gate 650d may be changed based on the continuation of the small winning A game. Even if it is configured in this way, it is possible to set the interval of the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the continuous small winning A game to a specific interval as in the present embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, the continuous effect display displayed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 28(a) is an example showing the first half of the special symbol variation display 1 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the first special symbol variation in which continuous production is executed, and FIG. 28(b) is a special symbol variation. It is an example showing the second half of display 1 (see FIG. 27), and FIG. 28(c) is the first half of small hit middle display 1 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the first small hit A game in which continuous production is executed. is an example showing

FIG. 29(a) is an example showing the first half of the special figure variation display 2 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the second special symbol variation in which continuous production is executed, and FIG. 29(b) is a special figure variation. It is an example showing the latter half of the display 2 (see FIG. 27), and FIG. 29(c) is another example showing the latter half of the special figure fluctuation display 2 (see FIG. 27).

FIG. 30(a) is an example showing the first half of the small winning middle display 2 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the second small winning A game in which continuous production is executed, and FIG. 30(b) shows a small winning. This is an example showing the second half of middle display 2 (see FIG. 27).

First, (a) of FIG. 28 shows the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the continuous effect is executed. When the continuous effect is started, the variable display of the third pattern is executed in the variable display area Dm1 provided on the upper left side of the main display area Dm, and the empty area of the main display area Dm (out of the main display area Dm) is displayed. A mode (corresponding to the chance presentation in FIG. 18B) indicating that the continuous presentation has started is displayed in an area other than the variable display area Dm1.

In the small area Ds1, seven reserved symbols are displayed, and the leftmost reserved pattern (reserved pattern corresponding to the next fluctuation) is the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved ball whose lottery result is a small hit A (second time Reserved design corresponding to special figure fluctuation) is displayed (star design), and in the small area Ds2, the design during fluctuation is displayed (star design). For convenience of explanation, the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved ball whose lottery result is a small hit A is displayed as a star pattern. is displayed.

After that, in the latter half of the special figure variation effect corresponding to the first special figure variation, a display indicating that both the frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b are pressed is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the frame left button is displayed. A guide display indicating the locations of 22a and the frame right button 22b is displayed in the guide display area Dm2 on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. In addition, a mode (corresponding to the chance presentation in FIG. 18(b)) indicating that continuous presentation is being performed is displayed in the small area Ds3 (see FIG. 28(b)).

The frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b provided in the pachinko machine 10 are arranged at an interval (500 mm) that makes it difficult to operate with one hand. You need to let go of 51. This is when a new winning prize (additional winning prize) occurs during continuous production, the second fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special figure fluctuation received from the main controller 110 is V passage of the voice ramp control device 113 Since it differs from the variation time of the second special figure variation referred to in the possible variation determination process, it is an effect for preventing the occurrence of additional winnings.

After the left and right frame buttons 22 (the left frame button 22a and the right frame button 22b) are operated at the same time, when the first small win A game is started, the continuous effect continues in the main display area Dm in the small win middle effect. (corresponding to the chance presentation in FIG. 19(a)) is displayed as a continuous display indicating that the game will be played (FIG. 28(c)). In this state, the symbol "757" indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win is stopped and displayed in the variable display area Dm1. Also, in the small area Ds3, "Right shot" is displayed to indicate that the game state is aimed at the second variable winning device 650. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 28(c), during the continuous performance, for the small hits that are not determined to be passable through the V, the performance for informing the player that the continuous performance will continue is emphasized and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that a small winning game has occurred.

In addition, by notifying the player that the continuous effect will continue, even if the current small winning game is a small winning game that cannot pass V (difficult), the player can participate in the small winning game after the next time. Since it will attract attention, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce dissatisfaction due to the occurrence of a small winning game in which V passage is impossible (difficult).

And, the second special figure variation is started. First, the case where the second special figure variation is a special figure variation that is determined as a V passable variation in the V passable variation determination process will be described. When the second special-figure variation is started, as shown in FIG. (corresponding to a chance effect) is performed, and a guidance display for guiding the position of the frame button is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2. In this state, in the variable display area Dm1, the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is varied, and six reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1. Then, in the small area Ds2, a pattern during variation indicating the second special figure variation is displayed, and in the small area Ds3, "Continuous presentation" indicating that the continuous presentation is being performed is displayed.

The display indicating that the continuous effect is being performed, which is displayed in the small area Ds3, is configured so that the display mode changes so as to suggest that the current variation is a V-passable variation. By changing the color of the comment, the color of the background on which the comment is displayed, etc., it is possible to suggest to the player that the current variation is a V-passable variation. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while predicting when the variation corresponding to the V passable variation will come, and suppresses the situation of getting tired of the performance of the pachinko machine 10 early. It has the effect of being able to

Also, after the variable display determined as the V passable variation starts (after the variation pattern (variation time) of the variable display corresponding to the V passable variation is determined), a new winning (additional winning) occurs. However, since the variation pattern is not changed, a normal mode other than the operation effect of the frame button 22 using both hands is executed.

After the player operates one of the frame buttons 22, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a "super-chance presentation" suggesting that the small win to be provided this time in the main display area Dm is a small win that can be passed through V. Rush" (corresponding to super-chance effect in FIG. 18(b)) is displayed (FIG. 29(b)). In this state, the symbol "757" indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win is stopped and displayed in the variable display area Dm1.

In addition, the display screen displayed in FIG. 29(c) is a display screen when the second special figure variation is stopped and displayed when additional winning occurs during the first special figure variation. When the variation pattern (variation time) that is assumed in advance and the variation pattern (variation time) that is actually received from the main controller 110 are different due to the occurrence of the additional winning in this way, the current variation passes V. This display (corresponding to the heart-pounding effect in FIG. 18(b)) is used in which the degree of expectation indicating whether or not it is a possible change is unknown. It should be noted that this display screen is displayed even when an additional winning occurs, for example, when the player does not operate the frame button 22, or when the variation other than the final variation of the continuous effect is the V passable variation, and the V It is configured to be displayed even when the remaining variation is started without giving the big win in the small winning game won by the passable variation.

By using such a display screen, it is possible to execute a series of effects in which a plurality of variations are associated with each other even when additional winnings occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect display that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, after the screen of FIG. 29(b) is displayed, when the V passable small win is executed, as shown in FIG. 30(a), the main display area Dm emphasizes that V can pass. (corresponding to the super-chance effect in FIG. 19(a)), which is a V-pass highlighting display, is displayed, and the position of the second variable winning device 650 is guided in the guide display area Dm2. A guidance display is displayed.

In addition, in the small area Ds3, "super chance" is displayed to indicate that the continuous effect is being performed, and "right hitting" is displayed to indicate that the game is aimed at the second variable winning device 650. - 特許庁In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display indicating that the continuous performance is being performed is "continuous performance" (Fig. 28(b)), "chance in progress" (Fig. 29(a)), "super chance in progress" (Fig. 30(a)), which is executed after whether or not the current special symbol variation is a V-passable variation, or after the special symbol variation has stopped. It is set to indicate the degree of expectation indicating whether or not the small winning A game is a V passable small winning. Therefore, if the first special figure variation during continuous production is V passable variation, it may be displayed as "super chance" suddenly.

Finally, during the small winning game, the ball passes through the V discharge channel 650e3, which is a specific area in the second variable winning device 650, and when the big winning is awarded, the main display area is displayed as shown in FIG. 30(b). A display indicating that a big win has occurred is displayed in Dm, and a guide display for guiding the position of the first variable winning device 65 to be opened during the big win game is displayed in the guide display area Dm2.

As described above, in the continuous performance in the pachinko machine 10, from the start of the first special figure fluctuation (special figure fluctuation display 1 (see FIG. 27 (a))) to the small winning game corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation ( Since it is executed as a series of effects that are associated with the execution of the small win game based on the small win middle display 2 (see FIG. 28 (a))), the first small win and the second small win are the same production The display is not executed, but continuous highlighting is executed for the first small win to emphasize that the continuous performance continues, and the second small win emphasizes that it is a small win that can be passed through V. Since the highlighted display is executed, the player can be made to recognize two continuous small winning games as one continuous game, and a small winning game which is impossible (difficult) to pass through V is executed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.

In addition, after the first special figure fluctuation is started, if additional winning occurs between the start of the second special figure fluctuation, the second special figure fluctuation fluctuation pattern (variation time) However, since it differs from the previously assumed fluctuation pattern (variation time), the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the small hit game corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation assumed in advance, and the actual second time There is a problem that the arrival timing of the prize ball V gate in the small winning game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation is different, and a satisfactory continuous performance cannot be executed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined period (period from the start of the first special figure fluctuation to the start of the second special figure fluctuation), it is difficult to generate additional winning of the ball. As an additional winning prevention effect, an operation effect (see FIG. 29(b)) of the frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a and frame right button 22b) using both hands is executed. By executing such an effect, the player releases the operation handle 51, so the number of balls shot during that period can be reduced, and as a result, the occurrence of additional winnings during the predetermined period is suppressed. It becomes possible to

In this embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of the above-described additional winning, an effect using the frame button 22 is executed to cause the player to suspend the game. If it is an effect, other effects may be used, or a display to the effect that the shooting of the ball should be stopped may be made on the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display content of the continuous effect is different when additional winning occurs. The winning ball V gate arrival timing is calculated again, and based on the calculation result, the effect display corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation (special figure fluctuation display 2 (see FIG. 27)) and based on the second special figure fluctuation You may reset the content of the production|presentation display (display 2 (refer FIG. 27) in a small hit) corresponding to a small hit game. By doing so, even when an additional prize is generated, a continuous effect can be executed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol used during continuous production, special variation B to special variation C are defined for each number of retained balls (see FIG. 13), but the retained ball Even if the numbers are different, it may be specified that the same variation pattern is selected. By configuring in this way, for example, the variation pattern selected when the number of retained balls is 7 and the variation pattern selected when the number of retained balls is 6 are the same variation pattern (for example, special variation B) By doing so, even if an additional prize is generated during the continuous performance and the second special figure variation is executed with the reservation 7, the variation pattern will not be different. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of preset continuous effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether the special figure variation (small hit game) during continuous production is executing a chance production (production that suggests that the possibility of becoming a big hit is low based on the variation), super chance It is configured to be able to inform the player whether the effect (the effect that suggests that the probability of winning a big win is high based on the change) is being executed. is being executed, and it is difficult to grasp whether this special figure variation (small winning game) is executing a chance production or a super chance production. Display mode may be used. By doing so, the player can have expectations for a plurality of special figure fluctuations that are executed until the continuous performance is finished, so that the situation of getting bored with the game early is suppressed. It has the effect of being able to

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the V passable variation is determined in the V passable variation determination process, the continuous effect is executed. Alternatively, the continuous effect may be executed on the condition that the small win A continues. Also, when the small win A and another small win (small win B or small win C) are consecutive, a continuous effect may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the continuous effect, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the above-described continuous effect is executed when the special symbol winning information is reserved and stored so that the small hit A is continuously executed. In some cases, a continuous effect may be executed. For example, even if a plurality of small wins A are stored in the pending and stored prize winning information (up to 8 pieces) in an order in which they are not continuously executed, continuous performance may be executed. . In the case of configuring in this way, if the result of the judgment of the special design is not a small hit A (if the judgment result is off or a small hit other than the small hit A), the fluctuation time of the special design and the winning game The time (small win game time) can be calculated in advance, and continuous performance can be executed when the reserved and stored small win A is determined to be a V passable small win.

Furthermore, as described above, in the case of executing continuous production including the case where the success/failure determination result of the special symbol is not a small hit A, the variation time defined when the success/failure determination result of the special symbol is a small hit A The time obtained by summing the playing time of the small hit A is set so as to be the same as the fluctuation time prescribed when the result of the right/wrong judgment of the special symbol is wrong, and furthermore, the right/wrong judgment result of the special symbol is the small hit A.例文帳に追加The total time of the fluctuation time and the playing time of the small hit A that is specified in the case of It is preferable to set so that the time obtained by adding up the game time is the same.

By doing so, regardless of the validity determination result of the special design, the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special design to the start of the fluctuation of the next special design, that is, the judgment result of the special design is off. In the case of , the period from the start of the special symbol variation to the stop display of the symbol indicating that the special symbol discrimination result is out, In the case of winning, the period from the start of the variation of the special symbols to the end of the small winning game which is executed after the symbol indicating that the discrimination result of the special symbols is a small winning other than the small winning A is stopped and displayed. Since the period can be unified, it is possible to reduce the determination processing of whether or not the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied.

In addition, in the first embodiment, there is one small win type (small win A) that is determined as a V-passable small win, but a plurality of types of small wins that are determined as V-passable small wins are provided. In some cases, the continuous effect described above may be executed. For example, a small hit A1 (as a big hit set when passing V, no 8R time saving) and a small hit A2 (as a big hit set when passing V, 10R time saving) 8 times).

Then, a small win A1 that can be passed through V is stored as the winning prize information to be executed first in the reserved and stored winning prize information, and a small winning game corresponding to the small winning A1 is stored in the winning prize information to be executed later. If a small win A2 to be executed at a timing when V can be passed if V is not passed is stored, an effect is provided to notify the player not to let the ball pass V during the small win game corresponding to the small win A1. Run.

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of types of small wins with different benefits (big win types) granted by passing the ball through the V during the small win game, the small wins that are more advantageous to the player are provided. It is possible to guide the ball to pass through the V at the hit. In the above-described example, an example is shown in which a guidance effect is displayed that allows V to be passed by a small win that is advantageous to the player among a plurality of small win types. The information may be configured to notify only that there are a plurality of small wins that can be passed through V. As a result, since the player decides by himself which small winning game the ball should pass through the V by himself, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, of the display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous jackpot effect will be described. FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous jackpot effects and operational control of various devices.

Here, the continuous jackpot effect will be described. The continuous jackpot performance is the timing at which the door 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened in the jackpot A game when the jackpot A is won in the variation of the special symbol in the first rotation after the jackpot ends. and the timing at which the V gate 650d provided in the second variable prize winning device 650 is in the induced state is calculated in advance, and the timing at which the special symbol changes for the first rotation after the end of the jackpot, that is, the jackpot game is started. It is determined whether or not the end timing is the timing at which the small win A game in the first rotation after the end of the big win can pass through the passage detection switch 650e5 in the V discharge channel 650e3 which is the specific area, and the performance is produced based on the determination result. is determined.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the condition for executing the continuous jackpot effect is satisfied, the main controller 110 executes the special fluctuation A as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation for the first rotation after the jackpot is finished (FIG. 13 See), then a small winning A game is executed.

In addition, when the condition for executing the continuous jackpot production is satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 displays the passage detection switch in the V discharge flow path 650e3 where the small hit A game in the first rotation after the jackpot ends is the specific area. A performance display (final round performance display) based on the timing at which the ball can pass through 650e5 is executed in the final round of the jackpot game. Then, the ending effect display of the jackpot game is executed based on the game result of the final round. Then, based on various commands set by the main control device 110, the special figure variation display and the effect display during the small hit are executed.

On the other hand, the V gate 650d is changed to the guidance state (the state in which the ball can pass through the V discharge passage 650e3) for 1.5 seconds as its operation during the jackpot game, and then for 3.5 seconds. One cycle (five seconds) is defined as the operation of changing the state (the state in which the ball cannot (is difficult) pass through the V discharge channel 650e3), and the cycle is repeatedly executed.

Here, the jackpot end timing for making the small hit game based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the jackpot end a small hit that can pass through V will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, when the condition for executing the continuous jackpot production is established, after the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the jackpot is completed, the small hit based on the special figure fluctuation is performed. The time until the winning ball reaches the V gate, which is the timing at which the ball that has won the second variable prize winning device 650 in the game reaches the V gate 650d, is set to 35 seconds (special variation A: 30 seconds + small winning game 5 seconds from the time the winning ball reaches the V gate).

Also, the ending period of the jackpot game is fixed to 5 seconds (see FIG. 14). That is, 40 seconds after the end of the final round of the jackpot game, the prize ball reaches the V gate timing. Therefore, if the operation status of the V gate 650d at the timing when the final round of the jackpot game ends is the timing when the V gate 650d is in the induction state after 40 seconds, the small hit based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the jackpot ends A game can be made into a small prize that can be passed through V.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the V gate 650d repeatedly executes constant operation control at a cycle of 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. , the small winning game based on the special figure variation of the first rotation after the end of the big winning can be a small winning game that can pass V.

The end timing of the final round of this jackpot game is when the time runs out (30 seconds have elapsed) in the final round, or when a predetermined number of balls (10 in this embodiment) have won in the first variable winning device 65 in the final round. It's a matter of timing. Specifically, if the game is played normally, it is designed so that a predetermined number of balls (10 in this embodiment) wins the first variable winning device 65 before the time runs out. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the tenth prize is won in the final round of the jackpot game is the end timing of the final round of the jackpot game.

In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. A selection object (for example, an omikuji) is displayed, a selection part (for example, a cursor) for switching the selection object at a predetermined interval (for example, 1.5 second interval) is displayed, and the end timing of the final round of the jackpot game is the jackpot If it is the timing at which the small winning game based on the special figure variation in the first rotation after the end can be made a small winning that can pass through V, it is configured to display that effect using the ending time of the big winning game. .

In this embodiment, the operation period of the V gate 650d is 5 seconds, and the final round of the jackpot game is set to 30 seconds at the longest. It is possible to set a plurality of timings when a small hit based on the special figure fluctuation of the next 1st rotation becomes a small hit that can pass V. Therefore, even if the ratio of the balls shot during the jackpot game to win the first variable prize winning device 65 is different (whether the ball easily enters the first variable prize winning device 65 or not), continuous jackpot performance is provided. There is an effect that you can enjoy

Furthermore, since the end timing of the final round is determined when a predetermined number of balls shot by the player win the first variable prize winning device 65, for example, during the ending period of the big win game as a continuous big win effect, after the big win When there is a display showing that the small win game based on the special figure variation of the first rotation is a small win that can pass V, a game state that is advantageous to the player by itself (a small win that can pass V). It is possible to grasp that the has been acquired. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to change the outcome of the game on his or her own.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 displays the result of the continuous jackpot effect. may be configured to notify the player by changing . By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform an effect that the player notices but the surrounding people do not notice.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the V gate 650d is always driven after turning on the pachinko machine 10, in the final round period of the jackpot game, a small hit game based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the jackpot Since it is possible to make uncertain when the timing of making a small win that can pass through V comes, it is possible to prevent the player from being attacked, and to provide the player with fair playability. It has the effect of being able to

It should be noted that during the jackpot game state in which the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened, the internal structure of the second variable prize winning device 650 should be made invisible (difficult) to the player. By constructing in this way, during the jackpot game in which the above-described continuous jackpot effect is executed, the player can perform the jackpot game while grasping the operation status of the V gate 650d in the second variable prize winning device 650. can be prevented, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a fair game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, the continuous jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Fig. 32(a) shows the display screen of the last round (9 rounds) before the final round (10 rounds) in the jackpot game, or the effect before the final round (see Fig. 31) executed in the subsequent interval period. FIG. 32(b) is an example showing a display screen in the first half of the final round effect (see FIG. 31) executed during the final round of the jackpot game.

FIG. 33(a) is an example showing a display screen in the second half of the final round effect (see FIG. 31) executed during the final round of the jackpot game, and FIGS. It is an example showing the display screen of the ending effect display (see FIG. 31) executed during the ending period of the game.

First, in FIG. 32(a), in the final round (10th round), an advance notification display is displayed in the main display area Dm to notify that the Omikuji game, which is a continuous jackpot effect, will start. In addition, in the secondary display area Ds, a comment explaining the contents of the omikuji game, which is a continuous jackpot effect, is displayed in the small area Ds2. In the small area Ds3, "Right-handed" is displayed to indicate that the game is aimed at the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. This display is displayed from the middle of the 9th round and the interval period between the 9th round and the 10th round (final round).

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(b), in the final round (10th round), three oracles Dm4 are displayed in the main display area, and the selection cursor Dm3 pointing to each of the oracles in turn is moved at predetermined intervals (1. 5 seconds), a movement display that moves to the right is performed. In the small area Ds1, the winning number (10) and the winning ball number (7), which are the conditions for closing the attacker (specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65), are displayed. An explanation that the attacker is closed when the number of balls reaches 10, that is, the omikuji is determined, and a comment explaining that the winning balls are counted and displayed in the small area Ds1 are displayed.

The plurality of omikuji Dm4 displayed in the main display area Dm have different display modes, and are configured so that comments with different contents are displayed depending on the selected omikuji. Then, the selection cursor is displayed at the timing when the closing condition of closing the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 (when the number of winning balls exceeds 10, or when a predetermined time (30 seconds) is reached) is satisfied. Dm3 stops, and the omikuji indicated by the stopped selection cursor Dm3 is enlarged and displayed (FIG. 33(a)). In this state, the number of winning balls is displayed as 10 in the small area Ds1, and an explanatory comment indicating that the omikuji Dm4 has been determined is displayed in the small area Ds2.

Then, during the ending period of the jackpot game, the contents of the selected omikuji Dm4 are displayed as shown in FIG. The results of past omikuji games are displayed. FIG. 33(b) displays "super good luck" as the result of the omikuji game, and FIG. 33(c) displays "great good luck" as the result of the omikuji game.

The results of the omikuji game include ``super good luck'', ``great good luck'', ``middle good luck'' and ``small good luck''. It is selected when the jackpot game is finished at the timing and there is a jackpot with a special pattern in the subsequent reserved balls, and ``great good luck'' means that the first variation of the jackpot game after the jackpot ends can pass through V. Selected when the jackpot game ends at the timing, and "middle good luck" and "small good luck" are selected when the jackpot game ends at the timing when the small hit game of the first variation after the jackpot ends is impossible (difficult) to pass V. When it is selected and "Nakayoshi" is selected, a privilege (gift of music or image) that does not directly affect the game is given.

In this way, by displaying the past history, even if no consecutive big wins were provided as a result of the current consecutive jackpot production, if the past history includes "super good luck" or "great good luck", the next consecutive big win production can be performed. In addition, even if there is no "super good luck" or "great good luck" in the past history, if the end timing of the jackpot game is intentionally shifted slightly, it may become "super good luck" or "good luck". Since the game is played while performing such analysis, there is an effect that the player can actively play the game.

In the case of executing such a continuous jackpot effect, the inside of the second variable prize winning device 650 is visually recognized by the player during the jackpot, that is, during the game in which the ball is awarded to the first variable prize winning device 65. It is better not to do so. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to be attacked by completing the final round while grasping the opening/closing status of the gate and gradually adjusting the timing. In such a case, the cover member of the second variable winning device 650 is formed of a half mirror, and the lamp provided in the second variable winning device 650 is provided only when a game aiming at the second variable winning device 650 is performed. It is preferable to employ a configuration in which the (light-emitting means) emits light so that the inside can be visually recognized.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 34 to 54. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Processing and main processing will be described.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (398 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4 and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum When the values (399, 99, 99, 398 and 398 respectively in this embodiment) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 (counter buffer 203i).

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern (variation time) of the third symbol to be variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81, etc., along with the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37. (S104), and thereafter, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64a, second ball entrance A 64b, or second ball entrance B 640b is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the starting winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35-38 and 39-42.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 7), is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 A thru-gate passing process is executed as the ball passes (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and furthermore, the door passage processing (S109), the V passage processing (S110) and the V gate drive control processing (S111) are executed. Details of the door passing process (S109), the V passing process (S110) and the V gate drive control process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After completing the process of S111, other processes to be periodically executed are then executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the fluctuation display in the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of fluctuation display in the special symbol) The number of times of suspension N2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S203 is 0 and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0.

In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: Yes ) Since there is no held ball to start the variable display, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that either the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204: No), then, Variation execution determination processing is executed to determine which special symbol to start variation based on (S205). By executing the variation execution determination process (S205), a variation execution flag 203j indicating a special symbol to start variation is set. The details of this variation execution determination process (S205) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S205 is finished, it is then determined whether or not to execute variation in special figure 1 (S206). In the process of S206, it is determined whether or not the variable execution flag 203j set by the variable execution determination process (S205) indicates the variable execution in special figure 1 (S206). In the process of S206, if it is determined that the variation execution flag 203j indicates the variation execution in the special figure 1 (S206: Yes), the process proceeds to S207 in order to perform the variation in the special figure 1 .

In the process of S207, 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S207), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set. (S208). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S208, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S209). In the process of S209, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S213). In this embodiment, the same special symbol variation start processing is executed for the variation of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the variation of the special symbol based on the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S206, if it is determined that the variation execution flag 203j is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (S206: No), the variation execution flag 203j is the variation execution in the special figure 2, so In order to execute the variation in FIG. 2, the process proceeds to S210. In the processing of S210-S212, the same processing as the above-described processing of the reserved ball of special symbol 1 (processing of S207-S209) is performed for the reserved ball of special symbol 2.

Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set. (S211). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S212), and the special symbol for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37. A fluctuation start process is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (not shown), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbols are set in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the variation execution determination process (Fig. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area by S205 of 36), the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol is set. More specifically, when the special symbol 1 is a big win, it is determined whether the big win is a big win A or a big win B according to the value of the first winning type counter C2. Similarly, in the case of the special symbol 2 jackpot, it is determined whether the jackpot A or B will be the jackpot according to the value of the first win type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37) (this lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S216). Then, if the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set using the jackpot scenario table 202f (see FIG. 14(a)) (S217).

Specifically, if the lottery result of this time is a jackpot A, a jackpot scenario a202f1 (see FIG. 14(b)) is set, and if it is a jackpot B, a jackpot scenario b202f2 (see FIG. 14(c)) is set. ) is set.

After finishing the process of S217, the counter 203h is set to 0 (initialization) during a time saving (S218), and it transfers to the process of S223.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is the loss of the special symbol (S216: No), then it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery this time is a small hit of the special symbol (S219). In the process of S219, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is the small winning of the special symbol, the small winning start setting process is executed to start the small winning (S220), and the process proceeds to the process of S221. . Details of the small winning start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S219, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit of the special symbol (S219: No), the lottery result of this time is a loss of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S221.

In the process of S221, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S221). The value of the counter 203h during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 1 or more (it is 0) (S220: No), the process of S222 is skipped and the process proceeds to S223.

In the process of S223 executed after the process of S218, S221 or S222, the lighting of the LED and the third symbol display device 81 which are the display modes of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S215 A stop command is set (S223) to synchronize the fluctuation stop.

Next, the variation execution determination process (S205) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the variation execution determination process (S205). This variation execution determination process (S205) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display The effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether or not to execute based on the variation order stored in the variation order storage area 203k.

In the variation execution determination process, first, the variation execution flag 203j is initialized by setting 0 (S301), and then the data in the variation order storage area 203k is acquired (S302). Then, the data in the change order storage area 203k is shifted (S303). In the process of S303, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the variation order storage area 203k are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area, 5th area→4th area, 6th area→3rd area. 5 area, 7th area→6th area, 8th area→7th area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area of the variation order storage area 203k is special figure 1 (1) (S304).

In the process of S304, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (1) (S304: Yes), the variation execution flag 203j is set to variation execution (1) with special figure 1 (S305 ), end this process, and return to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the special figure 1 (1) (S304: No), the data in the execution area is the special figure 2 (2), so the variable execution flag 203j is set to the special figure 2 (S306), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area. Based on the values of various counters, it is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 .

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired and stored in the execution area in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (S401). Next, the data stored in the execution area in the special symbol holding storage area storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the process of S401 is acquired (S402). Specifically, each value of the first hit random number counter C1 of the special symbol, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter C5 is acquired.

After finishing the process of S402, the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202a corresponding to the type of special symbol acquired in the process of S402 (S403). More specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S402 is compared with the big winning determination value stored in the first winning random number table 202a to acquire the lottery result. As described above, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0", the lottery result is a big win, and when the value is "1 to 398", a small win is selected as a lottery result other than the big win (loss). In the case of "399", the lottery result is a lost lottery result (see FIG. 10(a)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in the process of S403 is a big win (S404). In the process of S404, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big win (S404: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the big win type is set (S405).

More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S402 is referred to, compared with the random number specified in the first big winning type selection table 202b, and four types of special symbol jackpots It is determined what the jackpot type is among the types (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", set the jackpot A (2R time saving jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot B (5R time saving and big hit) is set (see FIG. 10(b)). Of the four types of jackpot types, the jackpot C and jackpot D are set when the game ball passes through a specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) provided in the second variable winning device 650 in the small hit game. Any jackpot type is given to each small hit type described later (see FIG. 11(a)).

In the processing of S405, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the set jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

After the process of S405 is completed, based on the current gaming state (whether there is time saving), the number of held balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401, the variation pattern selection table 202e1 for big hits (Fig. 12 ( a) Refer to) to determine the jackpot variation pattern (S406) and proceed to the process of S412.

When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S406, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the big winning symbol. A pattern variation time is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S404, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big win (S404: No), it is then determined whether the lottery result is a small win (S407). In the processing of S407, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S407: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the small hit type is set (S408), and the current game state is held. A small hit variation pattern is determined based on the number of balls and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 (S409), and the process proceeds to S412.

In the process of S407, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small win (S407: No), the lottery result is a loss, so the display mode of loss corresponding to the special symbol is set (S410).

In the process of S410, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area, the A stop type to be displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81 is determined.

When the process of S410 is finished, the outlier variation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state, the number of held balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained in the process of S401 (S411), and the process proceeds to S412.

In the process of S411, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the missing symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S406, the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained in the processing of S401 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The relationship between each lottery result, the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1, and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 12(a) to 12(b) and FIG. 13).

After completing the processing of S406, S409 or S411, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S406, S409 or S411 is set (S412). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S405, S408 or S410 is set (S413). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 50). be. When the processing of S413 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the small winning start setting process (S220) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the small winning start setting process (S220). This small winning start setting process (S220) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35), and is a process for setting the start of the small winning game.

Here, when a small winning game is started, the pachinko machine 10 changes the second variable winning device 650 to an open state in which the ball can win (easy), and the winning ball of the second variable winning device 650 By passing through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5), a big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends.

That is, the game state in which the small winning game is executed is an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the second variable winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big winning game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state that increases the possibility of being

Returning to FIG. 38, the description continues. In the small winning start setting process (S220), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small winning A (S501). In the process of S501, if it is determined to be a small hit A (S501: Yes), using the small hit scenario table 202g, set a small hit scenario a corresponding to the small hit type (small hit A) ( S502).

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that it is not a small hit A (S501: No), a small hit scenario b corresponding to the small hit type (small hit B, C) using the small hit scenario table 202g Set (S503).

After completing the process of S502 or S503, it is then determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win C (S504). In the process of S504, when it is determined that it is a small win C (S504: Yes), the big win C is set as the big win type when passing V (S505), and this process ends.

on the other hand. In the process of S504, when it is determined that the small winning is not C (S504: No), the big winning D is set as the big winning type at the time of V passing (S506), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 39, the starting winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A 64b, or the second ball entrance B 640b (starting Winning) is determined, and if there is a start winning, the holding processing of the values indicated by various random number counters and the prefetching of the lottery results of each special pattern are executed from the values indicated by the reserved various random number counters. This process is for

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A 64b, or the second ball entrance B 640b (start winning) (S601). . Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A 64b, or the second ball entrance B 640b is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A 64b, or the second ball entrance B 640b (S601: No), a process relating to start winning is executed. Since it is not necessary, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, if it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A64b, or the second ball entrance B640b (S601: Yes), the process relating to the start winning , the process proceeds to S602.

In the process of S602, the special figure 1 starting winning process is executed in order to perform the process based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a (S602). The details of this special figure 1 starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S602 is finished, the special figure 2 starting winning process is executed in order to perform processing based on the ball entering the second ball entrance A64b or the second ball entrance B640b (S603). The details of this special figure 2 starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S603 is finished, the prefetching process is executed to execute the prefetching of the lottery result of each special symbol (S604), and this process is finished. Details of the prefetch processing (S604) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the special figure 1 starting winning process (S602) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 start winning process (S602). This special figure 1 start winning process (S602) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), determines whether or not there is a ball entering the first ball opening 64a (start winning), and starts winning This is a process for holding the values indicated by various random number counters when there is.

In the special figure 1 start winning process (S602), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (S701). In the process of S701, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64a (S701: No), there is no need to execute the process related to the start winning of the first special symbol. This process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (S701: Yes), then the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (variation display in special symbol (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

In the processing of S703, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit value (S703: No), the ball entered the first ball entrance 64a, This is the case where the number of held balls is the upper limit. In this case, the process ends as it is without executing the process related to the start winning of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is a ball entering the first ball entrance 64a (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), special symbol 1 1 is added to the value (N1) of the reserved ball number counter 203d (S704). Then, a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S705).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number of the RAM 223. It is stored in the counter 223b.

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S705, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the small hit updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above The value of the type counter C5 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S706), the special figure 1 is set to the first area of the variation order storage area 203k (S707), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S707, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the 2nd area, if the value is 3, the 3rd area, if the value is 4, the 4th area, and if the value is 5, the 5th area. , if the value is 6, the 6th area is set as the first area, and if the value is 7, the 7th area is set as the first area. By determining the value set in the variation order storage area 203k in the above-described variation execution determination process (S205), the entrance (starting entrance) changes the special symbol 1 as in this embodiment. , Even if there are two kinds of variations, ie, one that varies the special symbol 2, the variation can be started in the order of winning at the entrance (starting opening).

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the special figure 2 starting winning process (S603) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 start winning process (S603). This special figure 2 start winning process (S603) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and whether or not there is a ball entering the second ball entrance A64b or the second ball entrance B640b (start winning) is determined, and when there is a starting prize, the value indicated by the various random number counters is held.

In the special figure 2 start winning process (S603), first, it is determined whether or not the ball entered the second ball entrance A64b (start winning) (S801). When it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance A64b (S801: Yes), the process proceeds to S805 in order to perform the same processing as the first special symbol on the second special symbol.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S801 that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance A64b (S801: No), then the ball enters the second ball entrance B640b (start winning). It is determined whether or not (S802). When it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entrance B640b (S802: Yes), the process proceeds to S803 in order to determine whether the ball entered the second ball entrance B640b normally. do.

In the processing of S803, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is ON (S803). If it is determined that the special figure 2B valid period flag 203r is ON (S803: Yes), the ball is entered within the period set as valid (normal) to enter the second entrance B640b. Therefore, for the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S805 in order to perform the same process as for the first special symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of S803, if it is determined that the special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is off (S803: No), the entry to the second entrance B640b is set as invalid (abnormal). Since it is within the period, after setting the error command (S804), the process proceeds to S805.

The error command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output by the voice command during the external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the lamp control device 113 and an external output terminal board (not shown). When receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the content of the error from the error command, and notifies the third pattern display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 based on the extracted content. and

In the processing of S805, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of suspension of variable display in special symbols) is acquired (S805). Next, if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S806: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S807), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball is added. Set the special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the number counter 203e (S808). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter C5, and the winning hole type are stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (S809), and fluctuates. The special figure 2 is stored (set) in the first area of the order storage area 203k (S810), and this process is terminated. Note that the determination of the first area in S810 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S707.

Whether there is no entry into the second entrance A64b and the second entrance B640b (S802: No), or even if there is an entry into the second entrance A64b or the second entrance B640b If the value (N2) of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S806: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 42, the prefetching process (S604) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S604). This look-ahead process (S604) is executed in the starting winning process (see FIG. 39), determines the lottery result of each special symbol in advance, and is a process for setting a winning information command based on the result of the prior determination. .

In the look-ahead process (S604), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (start winning) (S901). In the process of S901, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (start winning) (S901: Yes), the first winning random number table 202a, the first jackpot type selection table 202b, the special figure Based on the type selection table 202c1 for 1, the pre-determination result (hit determination result, big hit type, small hit type) is acquired (S902).

On the other hand, in the processing of S901, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64a (the ball has entered the second ball entrance A 64b or the second ball entrance B 640b (start winning)) (S901: No), based on the first hit random number table 202a, the first jackpot type selection table 202b, and special figure 2 type selection table 202c2, acquire the preliminary determination result (hit determination result, jackpot type, small hit type) (S903).

After completing the processing of S902 or S903, based on the preliminary determination result (hit determination result, big hit type, small hit type) acquired in the processing of S902 or S903, the winning information command is set (S904). The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during an external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50), which will be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts the preliminary determination result (win determination result, big winning type, small winning type) from the winning information command, and stores the extracted value in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Store. As a result, the audio ramp control device 113 can execute an effect based on the result of the prior determination.

Next, referring to FIG. 43, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 7) and the second entering ball. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance B640b of the device 640, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the effective period measuring counter 203s is 1 or more (S1001). In the process of S1001, if it is determined that the value of the effective period measuring counter 203s is 1 or more, the value of the effective period measuring counter 203s is increased to measure the period during which the ball can enter the second ball entrance B640b. 1 is subtracted (S1002), and the process proceeds to S1003.

In the processing of S1003, it is determined whether or not the value of the effective period measuring counter 203s is 0 (S1003). In the process of S1003, if it is determined that the value of the effective period measuring counter 203s is 0 (S1003: Yes), the period for determining that the ball enters the second ball entrance B640b normally has passed. Therefore, the special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is set to OFF (S1004), and the process proceeds to S1005.

In the processing of S1001, when it is determined that the value of the effective period measuring counter 203s is 0 (S1001: No), the processing of S1002 to S1004 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1005. Also, if it is determined in the process of S1003 that the value of the effective period measuring counter 203s is greater than 0 (S1003: No), the process of S1004 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1005.

In the process of S1005, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S1005). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance B640b is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S1005: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal pattern (second pattern) is not hit (S1005: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 is fluctuating (S1006). If the display mode is not fluctuating (S1006: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S1007). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S1008), and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 0 (not 0). (S1008: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S1008: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S1009).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1010). In the process of S1010, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1011).

When the process of S1011 is completed, based on the second winning random number table 202d, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S1012). Specifically, the obtained value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202d. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 199", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design, and if it is in the range of "200 to 398", the normal design is out. It is determined that

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S1012 is the normal symbol hit (S1013), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S1013: Yes), the winning The hour display mode is set (S1014). In the process of S1014, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether it is during time saving (whether the value of the counter 203h during time saving is greater than 0) (S1015), and when it is determined that it is not during time saving (the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 0) (S1015: No), since the gaming state is not the time saving mode, the opening time of the electric accessary 640a is set to 0.2 seconds and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1016), and the variation time of normal symbols is set to 180 seconds. (S1017), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1015, if it is determined that the time is being shortened (the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0) (S1015: Yes), the game state is the time being shortened, so the opening time of the electric accessary 640a is set to 0.5 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1018), the variation time of normal symbols is set to 1 second (S1019), and this process is terminated.

In this way, when the game state of the normal design is the time saving game state (during time saving), the game state of the normal design is compared with the normal game state (during non time saving), the time of fluctuation display is "180 seconds → 1 second", and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance B 640b becomes very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 0.5 seconds x 2 times". Therefore, the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance B640b.

In the process of S1013, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S1013: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S1020). In the process of S1020, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of loss is completed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 180 seconds (S1017), and this processing is terminated.

In the processing of S1006, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1006: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S1021). Incidentally, the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S1017 or the process of S1019 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the process of S1021, if the variation time has not elapsed (S1021: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1021, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S1021: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1022). In the processing of S1022, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the processing of S1014, the “○” symbol as the second symbol is displayed stopped (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S1020, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S1022, when the second symbol display update process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 50) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S1014 or the process of S1020.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S1023). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S1023: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance B640b is set (S1024). When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S1024, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 50) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1016 or S1018 are completed.

When the processing of S1024 is finished, in order to measure the open period of the electric accessory 640a set in the processing of S1024, the special figure 2B effective period flag 203r is set to ON (S1025), and the effective period measurement counter 203s is set to 1000. (2 seconds) is set (S1026), and the process ends. By the processing of S1025 and S1026, it is possible to determine whether the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entrance B640b is the opening period of the electric accessory 640a. In other words, it is possible to detect that a game ball has entered the second ball entrance B640b due to a fraudulent act or the like, even though it is not the opening period of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 650a is executed twice for 0.5 seconds in the time-saving game state. After adding the allowable time until the ball passes through the second entrance B640a, the effective period of the special figure 2B is set to 2 seconds, and the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 executed at a 2 millisecond cycle Although 1000 is set in the effective period measuring counter 203s to be subtracted by the operation, for example, the effective period may be set for each opening operation of the electric accessory 650a.

On the other hand, in the process of S1023, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S1023: No), it is not necessary to control the opening of the electric accessary 640a, so the processes of S1024 to S1026 are skipped. End the process.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through-gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through-gate) 67 (S1101). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (S1102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1103).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S1103: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S1104). Then, based on the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f added in the process of S1104, the normal pattern reserved ball number command is set (S1105).

Normal figure reservation ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and external output processing (S1701) of main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. Inside, it is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal pattern reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f from the normal pattern reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the normal pattern reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223d.

When the processing of S1105 is finished, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) is stored in the free reservation area (reservation first area to reserved fourth area) (S1106). In the process of S1106, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the value of the second per random number counter C4 stored in the process of S1106 and the second per random number table 202d are obtained based on the general pattern pre-determination result (S1107), and the general pattern is obtained based on the general pattern pre-determination result. A winning information command is set (S1108), and this process ends.

General figure winning prize information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and external output processing (S1701) of main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later , and is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 . The sound lamp control device 113, when receiving the general pattern winning information command, extracts the general pattern pre-determination result from the general pattern winning information command, and stores the extracted value in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform an effect based on the general pattern preliminary determination result.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol, and the more the number of reserved balls, the more the game It is designed to benefit people. Therefore, the state in which the ball can be entered into the second ball entrance B640b provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state.

By indicating the timing at which such a game state is provided based on the pre-determined result of the normal game, the player can play the game without missing a game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. It should be noted that when the performance is performed using the preliminary determination result of such a general pattern, not only the production based on the result of the determination of the success or failure of the general pattern, but also the electric accessory 640a is opened when the general pattern is determined to be winning. It is good to perform a production that suggests the timing of By doing so, in a normal game state, a game is played aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the second ball-entering device 640 (a device accompanied by the electric accessory 640a) moves to the right side of the game board 13. Even if it is arranged, it is possible to switch to a game (so-called right-handed hitting) aiming at the right side of the game board 13 before the electric accessory 640a performs the opening operation, and even in the normal game state There is an effect that the possibility of a ball entering the second ball entrance B640b can be increased.

Next, referring to FIG. 45, the door passing process (S109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the door passing process (S109). This door passage time process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and is a process for determining whether or not the winning of the ball to the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is normal.

In this door passage time process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 provided in the second variable winning device 650 has detected a ball (S1201). In the process of S1201, if it is determined that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 has not detected a ball, that is, if it is determined that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 is not set to ON ( S1201: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 has detected a ball, that is, if it is determined that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 is set to ON (S1201 : Yes), it is determined by referring to the small winning scenario being executed whether the ball can pass through the second variable prize winning device 650 (within the passable period) (S1202).

In addition, in each small winning scenario, in addition to the operation control scenario executed during the small winning game, a ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 (door 650f) is provided in order to determine an abnormality during the small winning game. A period for valid (normal) handling and a period for valid (normal) handling of balls that have passed through a specific area in the second variable winning device 650 are set (see FIG. 15).

In the processing of S1202, if it is determined that the passage is within the passable period (S1202: Yes), the door passage command is set (S1203), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if it is determined that it is not within the passable period (S1202: No), an error command is set (S1204), and this process ends.

The error command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output by the voice command during the external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the lamp control device 113 and an external output terminal board (not shown). When receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the content of the error from the error command, and notifies the third pattern display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 based on the extracted content. and

In this way, with respect to the winning to the second variable winning device 650, even during the small winning game, by providing a period during which the winning is valid (normal) and a period when it is not valid (abnormal), It is possible to prevent an act of illegally winning a ball to the second variable winning device 650 during a small winning game.

In addition, since the period during which passage of the door 650f is valid (passable period) is set in the small winning scenario, the opening pattern of the door 650f whose operation is controlled during the small winning game is changed according to the type of the small winning. In the case (when a different small winning scenario is selected), the opening pattern of the door 650f and the passable period can be set in association with each other, and the passable period suitable for the opening pattern of the door 650f can be easily set. It has the effect of being able to

In this embodiment, when the passage of the sphere is outside the passable period (S1202: No), only the error command is set without setting the door passage command. An error command may be set above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the V passing time process (S110) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this V-passing process (S110). This V passage time processing (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34), and it is checked whether the passage of the ball to the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) in the second variable prize winning device 650 is normal. This is the process of determining.

In this V passage time process (S110), first, it is determined whether or not the passage detection switch 650e5 provided in the V discharge channel 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 has detected a ball (S1301). In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the passage detection switch 650e5 has not detected a ball, that is, if it is determined that the passage detection switch 650e5 is not set to ON (S1301: No), this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that the passage detection switch 650e5 has detected a ball (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether the current V passable period is set for the small hit scenario. It is determined (S1302).

In the process of S1302, if it is determined that it is not within the V passable period set in the small winning scenario (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1303), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1302, if it is determined that it is within the V passable period set in the small winning scenario (S1302: Yes), then it is set to the small winning type of the small winning game being executed. The jackpot type value is read (S1304). That is, when the small winning game under execution is the small winning C, the big winning C is read as the big winning type value, and when the small winning game being executed is other than the small winning C, the big winning D is read as the big winning type value (Fig. 11 (a) )reference).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type value read in S1304 is jackpot C (S1305), and if it is determined to be jackpot C in the processing of S1305 (S1305: Yes), jackpot C is indicated. The V flag 203m is set to ON (for example, the V flag 203m is set to "1") (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307. On the other hand, in the process of S1305, if it is determined that it is other than the jackpot C (jackpot D) (S1305: No), the V flag 203m indicating the jackpot D is turned on (for example, the V flag 203m is set to "2") (S1309), and proceeds to S1307.

And after the process of S1306 or S1309 is performed, a V passage command is set (S1307), and after that, the counter 203h is reset to 0 during time saving (S1308).

In this way, even during a small winning game with respect to the winning to the second variable winning device 650, by providing a period during which the winning is valid (normal) and a period during which the winning is not valid (abnormal), It is possible to prevent the act of illegally passing the ball to the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) during the winning game.

Further, in this embodiment, when the ball is detected by the passage detection switch 650e5 outside the passable period, an error command is set without turning on the V flag 203m, and this process is terminated. Since the V flag 203m is not set to ON even if the ball passes through the specific area outside the passable period, even if the ball is illegally passed through the specific area during the small winning game, the big win is achieved after the small winning game is finished. No games are played. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent games.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area is normal, and the presence or absence of an abnormality (error) is determined. configuration may be used.

For example, when the passage detection switch 650e5 detects two or more balls in one small game, it may be determined to be abnormal. This is because in this embodiment, by controlling the operation of each component of the second variable winning device 650, the number of balls that can pass through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) during one small winning game is set to one. We are hiring. Therefore, when the passage detection switch 650e5 detects two or more balls in one small winning game, it may be determined as abnormal.

In addition, in this embodiment, after it is determined that the ball is detected by the passage detection switch 650e5, it is determined whether the detection of the ball (passing through the specific area) is within the passable period. Detection of an outside ball (passing through a specific area) can be processed as an abnormality. may be configured to determine whether has detected a sphere.

Furthermore, based on the detection results of the passage detection switch 650a1 for detecting the winning of the door 650f and the passage detection switch 650e5, which is a specific area, the passage detection switch 650a1 detects the ball during one small winning game. It may be determined as an abnormality when the passage detection switch 650e5 detects a ball even though the ball is not detected.

By doing so, for example, it becomes possible to monitor fraudulent games such as causing a ball to stay in the V discharge channel 650e3 and allowing the ball to pass through a specific area within the passable period.

In addition, means for determining whether or not the current small winning game is a small winning that can pass through V is provided, and using the determination result, it is possible to pass even if the small winning is impossible (difficult) to pass through V. An abnormality may be determined when the detection switch 650e5 detects a ball.

It should be noted that the plurality of abnormality monitoring processes described above are configured such that the ball that first wins in the second variable prize winning device 650 after the small winning game is executed can win a prize in the V discharge flow path 650e3 as in the present embodiment. By using it, it becomes possible to monitor fraudulent games more reliably.

In other words, when trying to illegally pass a ball through the passage detection switch 650e5, which is a specific area, the passage detection switch 650e5 is detected even though the second variable prize winning device 650 has not won even one ball during the small winning game. When a ball is detected, it can be determined as an abnormality, and furthermore, if even one ball is won by the second variable winning device 650 during a small winning game, the passage detection switch 650e5 detects two balls, and it is determined to be abnormal. It is possible to discriminate.

Also, if the small winning game this time is a small winning game that cannot pass V, the ball won by the second variable winning device 650 does not pass the passage detection switch 650e5, so it passes the passage detection switch 650e5. Although the number of balls to be played is one, it can be determined as abnormal because the passage detection switch 650e5 detects the ball during a small winning game that cannot pass V.

It should be noted that an error command may be set and output externally if the determination result of each abnormality determination process described above is determined to be abnormal. In this case, the error command may include identification information that can identify the cause of the abnormality and priority information that indicates the priority of the abnormality that has occurred.

Here, the priority information is information for easily determining whether or not the abnormality that has occurred is caused by an illegal game. If it is determined that the number of balls passing through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) is larger than the number of balls detected by the passage detection switch 650a1, there is a high possibility of fraudulent play, so priority information with a high priority. is set, and the abnormality that it is determined that the ball passed through the specific area outside the passable period during the small winning game may be caused by ball play, so priority information with low priority is set. .

In this way, none of the abnormalities can occur in a proper game. can be preferentially notified, and there is an effect that the processing after the occurrence of the abnormality can be performed smoothly.

It should be noted that each abnormality determination process for the ball passing through the specific region may be combined in its entirety, or may be appropriately combined in part.

Here, as a result of each abnormality determination process described above, an error command that is set when an abnormality is determined is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. 50) is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the sound lamp control device 113 and an external output terminal board (not shown) in the external output processing (S1701). When receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the content of the error from the error command, and notifies the third pattern display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 based on the extracted content. and

Next, the V gate drive control process (S111) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this V gate drive control process (S111). This V gate drive control process (S111) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34) and is a process for controlling the drive of V gate 650d controlled by main controller 110. FIG. Both the open counter 203n and the closed counter 203o used in the V gate drive control process are incremented by timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds. Then, 2 milliseconds have elapsed.

In the V gate drive control process (S111), first, it is determined whether it is the first interrupt process after power-on (S1401). In the processing of S1401, if it is determined that it is the first interrupt processing after power-on (S1401: Yes), the V gate solenoid 650d2 is turned on (S1402), and the V gate 650d is set to the induction state (open).

Then, a V gate state command indicating that the state of the V gate 650d is in the inductive state (open) is set (S1403), the value of the open counter 203n is incremented by 1 (S1404), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that it is not the first interrupt process after power-on (S1401: No), it is determined whether the value of the open counter 203n is 0 (S1405). In the processing of S1405, if it is determined that the value of the open counter 203n is not 0 (S1405: No), then it is determined whether the value of the open counter 203n is greater than 750 (whether 1.5 seconds have elapsed). (S1406).

In the process of S1406, if it is determined that the value of the open counter 203n is not greater than 750 (750 or less) (S1406: No), 1 is added to the open counter 203n in S1404, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1406, if it is determined that the value of the open counter 203n is greater than 750 (S1406: Yes), the value of the open counter 203n is reset to 0 (S1407), and the V gate solenoid 650d2 is turned off. (S1408), the V-gate 650d is brought into a regulated state (closed).

Then, a V gate state command indicating that the state of the V gate 650d is in the regulated state (closed) is set (S1409), the value of the closed counter 203o is incremented by 1 (S1410), and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S1405 that the value of the open counter 203n is 0 (S1405: Yes), that is, once the value of the open counter 203n becomes greater than 750, the value of the open counter 203n becomes higher than 750 in S1407. is reset to 0, next it is determined whether the value of the closing counter 203o is greater than 1750 (whether 3.5 seconds have elapsed) (S1411).

In the process of S1411, if the value of the closing counter 203o is not greater than 1750 (1750 or less) (S1411: No), 1 is added to the value of the closing counter 203o (S1410), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1411 that the value of the closing counter 203o is greater than 1750 (S1411: Yes), the value of the closing counter 203o is reset to 0 (S1412), and the V gate solenoid 650d2 is set to ON. (S1413), sets a V gate state command indicating opening (S1414), adds 1 to the value of the open counter 203n (S1415), and terminates this process.

The V gate state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during an external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . Upon receiving the V gate state command, the audio lamp control device 113 can extract the state of the V gate 650d from the V gate state command and grasp the operating state of the V gate 650d. In particular, the Vgate state command set in S1403 is used when the audio lamp controller 113 sets the Vgate scenario 222c (see FIG. 58).

As described above, the V gate 650d in this embodiment is controlled so that it always performs a constant operation (repeatedly opening for 1.5 seconds and closing for 3.5 seconds) after the power is turned on. ing.

In this embodiment, as a control in which a constant operation is always performed, values counted by counters (open counter 203n and closed counter 203o) are set in advance for the induced (open) state and the regulated (closed) state. Although control is performed to switch the operating state of the V gate 650d when it reaches the set counter value, other configurations may be used.

For example, an operation scenario (character product operation scenario) is provided that defines the operation contents of the V gate 650d, and counts each time a timer interrupt that is periodically executed (2 millisecond cycle) by the main controller 110 is executed. The operation scenario defining the operation content of the V gate 650d is updated using the value of the counter (accessory action counter), and the V gate 650d is operated based on the updated action scenario content. good too. In this case, Vgate 650d may be configured to loop through one operating scenario, since it only performs certain operations repeatedly.

Further, as described above, when using a counter (role product action counter) for updating the action scenario (role product action scenario) of the V gate 650d, the value of the role product action counter is used as the value of the variation type counter CS1. may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to select a variation type associated with the operation of the V gate 650d (character object). Also, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of control processes executed by main controller 110 based on a common counter value.

For example, the value of the counter indicating that the V gate 650d is open and the value of the counter indicating that the V gate 650d is in the closed state, so that the variation type (variation time) of the selected special symbol is different. It is preferable to configure a special symbol variation pattern selection table. Specifically, the counters referred to in each variation pattern selection table 202e1 to 202e3 (see FIGS. 12 and 13) set in the variation pattern selection table 202 (see FIG. 11) are changed from the variation type counter CS1 to the accessory Change to the value of the operation counter. Then, in the process of acquiring the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37) (S401 in FIG. 37), the value of the accessory action counter is acquired instead of the variation type counter CS1. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the value of the accessory action counter.

As the variation pattern to be selected with reference to the accessory action counter, for example, the small winning variation pattern selection table 202e3 (see FIG. 13) referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small winning. The variation pattern set corresponding to A is the value of the role product action counter indicating that the V gate 650d is open and the value of the role product action counter indicating that the V gate 650d is closed. , and the variation pattern (variation time) set corresponding to the value of the role product action counter indicating that the V gate 650d is in the open state is the variation pattern It is preferable to set the small win for which is executed to be a V passable small win.

That is, the period (fluctuation time) until the lottery result of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a small hit A, and the period from the start of the small hit A game until the ball can pass through the specific area 650e5 A variation pattern (variation time). Specifically, a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds is set. Thereby, when the variation of the special symbol winning the small win A starts at the timing when the V gate 650d is open, the V passable small win can be provided.

In this way, when the operation status of the accessory (V gate 650d) and the winning game (small winning A game) based on the lottery result of the special symbol are executed at a specific timing (while the V gate 650d is open, winning Used to control the operation of a role (V gate 650d) in a gaming machine in which a privilege (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is awarded when a small win A is executed so that the timing of reaching the ball V gate arrives. By configuring the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be selectable using the value of the counter (accessory operation counter), execution is performed when the accessory is in a predetermined operation mode (V gate 650d is open) It is possible to make the variation of the special symbols to be the variation of the special symbols advantageous to the player.

As a result, it becomes possible to execute the control in which the conventionally independent control of the control of the action of the role and the lottery of the special symbol are associated, and the player can control the operation state of the role and the timing of execution of the variation of the special symbol. The game will be played while being conscious of. Therefore, for example, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbol will affect the result of the next and subsequent special symbol variations. That is, conventionally, even if the player does not show interest in the special symbol variation (the special symbol variation that is out of the game, or the special symbol variation in which an effect with a low possibility of becoming a big hit is executed), the player is not interested in the special symbol. Since the timing at which the special symbol variation stops rather than the result of the variation lottery is watched, it is possible to make the player interested in the special symbol variation and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. It has the effect of being able to

Furthermore, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern for each game state (normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is provided, and variation pattern selection corresponding to a game state (time-saving game state) advantageous to the player is provided. In the table, it is preferable to select the variation pattern (variation time) by referring to the value of the counter (accessory action counter) for controlling the action of the security article described above. With this configuration, for example, even if the value of the role product action counter is a value indicating that the role product (V gate 650d) is open, the role product (V gate 650d) is closed. Even if it is a value indicating a state of In an advantageous game state, it is possible to ensure that the small winning A game becomes a V passable small winning. As a result, it is possible to provide a game state that is more advantageous to the player in a state that satisfies a predetermined condition (time-saving game state) as a game state that is more advantageous to the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of

In addition, in the first embodiment, the counter (variation type counter CS1 ), but other configurations may be used. For example, the timing at which the start winning process (see FIG. 39) is executed, that is, the start winning opening (first ball entrance 64a, first The value of the counter (variation type counter CS1) referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in the process executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance A64b, the second ball entrance B640b) is may be configured to obtain

In addition, as a technique of using the value of the counter (accessory action counter) used to control the operation of the V gate 650d in other control, the counter referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol (this embodiment Although an example in which it is used in place of the variation type counter CS1) is shown above, it may also be used in place of the first hit random number counter C1. In this case, the value of the counter (accessory action counter) for updating the action scenario of the accessory (V gate 650d) may be used as it is, or a random number is generated using the success of the accessory action counter, The random number may be used instead of the first winning random number counter C1.

Specifically, the value of the role product operation counter (for example, 0 to 2500) added by the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 executed every 2 milliseconds, and the main processing of the main controller 110 A value obtained by combining an initial value random number counter value (for example, 0 to 2500) updated using the remaining time may be used instead of the first hit random number counter C1. As a result, it is possible to set the value of the counter used for judging the hit of the special symbol in a complicated manner, so that it is difficult to be fraudulent. Also, by using the value of one counter (accessory action counter) for a plurality of controls, the number of counters mounted on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the operation of the V gate 650d is always controlled to be constant. Operation control may be added to ensure execution when a predetermined condition is met, such as extending the period of the induced (open) state for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) after the end of the jackpot game. .

By doing so, it is possible to substantially change the probability of executing a big winning game via a small winning game based on the presence or absence of establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game that surprises the player. There is an effect that it becomes possible to provide

Also, for example, on the condition that the occurrence of the big winning game via the small winning game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the V gate 650d switches the timing to be in the induction (open) state, or the induction (open) You may shorten the period which becomes a state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further complicate the timing at which the specific area in the small winning game can be passed, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game.

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S1612.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1715 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1612). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1613, S1614).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S1613, S1614) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1608). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S1610, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1611), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1708 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1711 and S1712 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S1701). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34). Send a prize ball command to In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) and the start winning process (see FIG. 39), and the winning information command set in the look-ahead process (see FIG. 42). Send to Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, it transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 the small winning opening command set in the small winning control processing (see FIG. 53) such as the opening command set in the big winning control processing (see FIG. 51). Furthermore, the error command set in the door passage processing (see FIG. 45) or the V passage processing (see FIG. 46), the V gate state command set in the V gate drive control processing (see FIG. 47), etc. Send to the audio ramp controller 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

In addition, the external output processing in the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that various commands can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by means of an external terminal board (not shown). there is

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and reset to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production, 1 A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704). Details of the jackpot control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

After completing the processing of S1704, small winning control processing is executed (S1705). Details of the small winning control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, although the small hit control process (S1705) is performed in the main process, it may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second ball entrance B640b of the second ball entry device 640 is executed (S1706). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of S1024 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 43), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1016 or S1018 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1707). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37), the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation display according to the variation pattern. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37) ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is finished, and the stop pattern (first pattern) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the first pattern display device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device (not shown) is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1017 or the process of S1019 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 43), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1022 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 43), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device The display is ended, and the stop design (second design) is stopped (lighted up) on the second design display device in the display mode set by the processing of S1014 or the processing of S1020 of the normal design variation processing (see FIG. 43). do.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1709). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1710). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1710: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described processes after S1701 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1710: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1711, S1712).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1711). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 398 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1712).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the processing of S1709, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1709: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 48 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1713 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1713), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1714). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1715), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1716), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1709 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1708, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1711 and S1712 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization process (S1601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S1701. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1704). This jackpot control processing (S1704) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 50). This is processing for opening or closing the port 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S1801). Specifically, the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 35) or the processing of S2107 of the small winning ending control processing (see FIG. 54) described later is executed to determine whether the big winning scenario is set. do. That is, the result of the lottery of the special symbols is a big win, and the big win scenario is set based on the lottery result, or the big win scenario is set based on passing through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) during the small win game. Determine if it is set. In the process of S1801, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1801: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1801, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1801: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p (S1802), and the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p increases. It is determined whether it is time to start opening the jackpot scenario (S1803). For example, when the jackpot scenario a is set (see FIG. 14), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is 1. determine whether

In the process of S1803, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the start of the opening (if the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S1803: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S1804), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the start of the opening (S1803: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the start of the round (in the jackpot scenario a If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 1251 (S1805).

In the processing of S1805, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the start of the round (S1805: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened in the processing of S1806. (Set the specific door solenoid 65f2 to ON so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning port 65a is in an open state), then set the round number command indicating the number of rounds to newly start ( S1807), the process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the start of the round (S1805: No), then the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed. It is determined whether the condition is established (S1808). Here, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a in the present embodiment, when 30 seconds have elapsed since the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a was opened, or When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls win after the winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the processing of S1808, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is established (S1808: Yes), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is changed to the current round. is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the counter value corresponding to the end of the round (S1809), and this processing ends. In addition, when it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied in the processing of S1808, the closing condition is cleared, and it is configured not to determine that the closing condition is satisfied again in the jackpot control processing after the next time. .

Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls have won in the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a and the closing condition is satisfied, that is, a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) When closing the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is updated to the value one before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed. (It is configured so that the operation control is executed in the next jackpot control process).

By doing so, the operation control (for example, the operation control to close a specific winning hole when a predetermined number of balls have won) that is executed due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) can be turned into a jackpot scenario. can be executed based on Therefore, as a closing condition of the specific winning port (first specific winning port) 65a, the operation is controlled based on the jackpot scenario when a predetermined time has passed, and the jackpot scenario is not based when a predetermined number of prizes have been won. This eliminates the need to perform complicated control such as execution of motion control, thereby facilitating design and preventing a situation in which both types of motion control are mixed.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description continues. In the processing of S1808, if it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65 is not met (S1808: Yes), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the end of the round. (S1810).

In the processing of S1810, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the end of the round (S1810: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed in the processing of S1811. (the specific door solenoid 65f2 is turned off so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning port 65a is closed), and the process ends. Incidentally, the determination process from S1805 to S1810 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the big win set in the big win scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S1810, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the end of the round (S1810: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the start of the interval. If it is the value jackpot scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1812). In the process of S1812, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the start of the interval (S1812: Yes), the interval command is set (S1813), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1812, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is not the value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1812: No), next, jackpot ending control processing (S1814) is executed. This jackpot ending control process is a process executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the final round of the jackpot game to the start of the variation of the special symbols. .

Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1814) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending control process (S1814). This jackpot ending control process (S1814) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 51).

In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (if the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 40751) (S1901). In the processing of S1901, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S1901: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S1902), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the start of the ending (S1901: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the end of the ending (in the jackpot scenario a If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 42000 (S1903). In the process of S1903, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1903: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1903, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1903: Yes), next, the setting of the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1904), and the jackpot The scenario counter 203p is reset to 0 (S1905). In other words, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is ended.

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot executed this time is jackpot C (S1906). In the processing of S1906, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not jackpot C (jackpots A, B, and D) (S1906: No), the counter value of the counter 203h during time saving is set to 8 (S1907), End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot C (S1906: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

That is, if the jackpot type is other than jackpot C (jackets A, B, D), by setting the counter value of the time saving counter 203h to 8, from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol is changed 8 times ( A game state is set to be a time-saving game state (time-saving state) until the lottery of special symbols is executed eight times and the result of the eighth lottery is stopped and displayed.

Next, the small hit control process (S1705) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process (S1705). This small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 50), setting a command for executing various effects according to the small hit by the sound lamp control device 113, and setting the second specific This is a process for controlling the operation of a door solenoid 650f2 for opening and closing the prize winning opening 650a and a stopper solenoid 650c2 for varying the position of a stopper (ball stop member) 650c.

In the small winning control process, first, it is determined whether or not a small winning scenario is set (S2001). Specifically, the processes of S502 and S503 of the small winning start setting process (see FIG. 38) are executed, and it is determined whether the small winning scenario is set. In the process of S2001, if the small winning scenario is not set (S2001: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, if a small winning scenario is set (S2001: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q (S2002), and the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is a small winning It is determined whether it is time to start the opening of the scenario (S2003). For example, when the small winning scenario a is set (see FIG. 15(b)), the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so the small winning scenario counter 203q Determine if the value is 1.

In the process of S2003, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q corresponds to the opening start (if the small hit scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S2003: Yes), the process of S2004 causes the stopper (Ball stop member) 650c is set to the ball stop position (the stopper solenoid 650c2 is turned on so that the stopper 650c can be changed to the ball stop position). Then, an opening command for a small hit is set (S2005), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is a value that does not correspond to the opening start (S2003: No), then the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q corresponds to the start of the round (in the small winning scenario a If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 626 (S2006).

In the processing of S2006, when the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the start of the round (S2006: Yes), the second specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed based on the small winning scenario in the processing of S2007. (The door solenoid 650f2 is set to ON or OFF so that the door 650f of the second specific winning port 650a is in the open state or the closed state), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the operation control executed based on the small winning scenario, the operation may be controlled such that the second specific winning opening 650a opens and closes multiple times during one round of the small winning game. For example, when the small winning scenario is the small winning scenario b, the opening and closing operation of the second specific winning opening 650a is repeated for 0.1 seconds and for 0.9 seconds during one round. is set to Such operation control is executed in the process of S2007.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description is continued. In the processing of S2006, if the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to the start of the round (S2006: No), then it is determined whether or not the round end condition is established (S2008). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) win in total while the second specific winning port 650a is open, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

In the process of S2008, when it is determined that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is satisfied (S2008: Yes), the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is increased by 1 from the counter value corresponding to the end of the round. The value is updated to the subtracted value (S2009), and the process ends. If it is determined in the process of S2008 that the round end condition is satisfied, the round end condition is cleared, and it is configured not to determine that the round end condition is satisfied again in the control after the next time. there is

Here, the small winning scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the small winning counter 203q and to execute the operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value in the same manner as the big winning scenario described above. there is Therefore, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls enter the second specific prize winning port 650a and the round end condition is satisfied, that is, the round ends due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value). In the case of (closing the second specific winning opening 650a), the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is configured to be updated to the value one before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed ( It is configured so that the operation control is executed in the next small hit control process).

By doing so, operation control (for example, operation control for ending the round when a predetermined number of balls have won) that is not associated with the passage of time (update of the counter value) is performed based on the small winning scenario. It is possible to execute Therefore, as a round end condition of the second specific winning port 650a, when a predetermined time has elapsed, operation control is performed based on the small winning scenario, and when there is a predetermined number of winnings, operation control is not based on the small winning scenario. This eliminates the need to perform complicated control such as executing , thereby facilitating design and preventing a situation in which both operation controls are mixed.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description is continued. In the process of S2008, if it is determined that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is not satisfied (S2008: Yes), then the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is set to the value corresponding to the end of the round (small If it is the winning scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 1000 (S2010).

In the processing of S2010, when it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S2010: Yes), the processing of S2011 sets the second specific winning opening 650a to be closed. (the door solenoid 650f2 is turned off so that the door 650f of the second specific winning port 650a is closed), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2010, when it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to the end of the round (S2010: No), next, a small winning ending control process (S2013) is executed. . This small winning ending control process is the ending period in the small winning game, that is, the process executed during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the round of the small winning game to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. is.

Next, the small hit ending control process (S2012) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this small winning ending control process (S2012). This small winning ending control process (S2012) is a process executed in the small winning control process (see FIG. 53).

In the small winning ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (if the small winning scenario a, the counter value is 1001) (S2101). In the processing of S2101, when it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the start of ending (S2101: Yes), a small winning ending command is set (S2102), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S2101: No), then the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is the stopper (ball stop member) 650c. It is determined whether the value (counter value is 1125 in the case of a small winning scenario a) corresponding to the release of the ball stopping to be varied to the release position (S2103). In the process of S2103, if it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to ball stop release (S2103: Yes), the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is set to the release position (the stopper 650c is The stopper solenoid 650c2 is turned off (S2104) so as to change from the ball stop position to the release position, and this process is finished.

In this embodiment, there is an interval of 0.5 seconds after the second specific prize winning opening 650a is closed until the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is changed to the release position. This is the time provided for ejecting out of the second variable winning device 650 the balls other than the balls retained by the stopper (ball stopper) 650c among the balls that have won the second specific winning opening 650a. . Therefore, at the timing when the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is changed to the release position, only one ball (the ball retained by the ball stop member 650c) exists in the second variable winning device 650, and that ball It is possible to prevent other balls from obstructing the flow of the ball, and to provide a proper game.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description is continued. In the process of S2103, if it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to ball stop release (S2103: No), then the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203q is V passage determination It is determined whether the value corresponding to (S2105).

Here, the V passage determination indicates the timing of determining the result of the V passage processing (see FIG. 46) executed in the timer interrupt processing of main controller 110 . In this V passage time processing, the ball is in a specific area (the V discharge of the second variable winning device 650 When the passage detection switch 650e5 provided in the flow path 650e3 is passed, the V flag 203m is set to ON. That is, it is provided to determine whether or not the V flag 203m has been set to ON by the processing at the time of V passage at the timing when the V passage valid period has passed.

By doing so, it is possible to reliably perform processing based on the fact that the sphere has passed through the specific area within the V passage valid period. Note that other configurations may be used, for example, when the V flag 203m is set to ON, the next process may be performed immediately.

In the process of S2105, when it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to V passage determination (S2105: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2105, if it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to V passage determination (S2105: Yes), then determine whether the V flag 203m is set to ON (S2106).

In the processing of S2106, if it is determined that the V flag 203m is not set to ON (S2106: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203m is set to ON (S2106: Yes), then the jackpot type given to the small hit being executed (if the small hit is A, the jackpot type D (See FIG. 11(a))) to set a jackpot scenario (S2107). Then, the V flag 203m is set to OFF (S2108), the V passing time jackpot type value is cleared (S2109), and the present process is terminated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since all small winning games are set as one round games, unlike the big winning scenario that executes the operation control of the big winning game, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds, and the interval period (round However, if a small winning game having multiple rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big winning scenario used in the above-described big winning game may be set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small winning scenario is set for the period during which the small winning game is executed. You may set a small hit scenario for between. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to set the V passage valid period until one second has elapsed after the end of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period that is set across different game states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the volume of control processing can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 72. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 55, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the power-off processing of the main processing (Fig. 56 (see S2318 of )) is determined (S2202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 56, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S2315 in FIG. 56), it executes power-off processing in S2318. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2318 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2202: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2318. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2203).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2203: Yes), it will transfer to S2204 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2203: No), the process proceeds to S2208.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2204. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2318 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2203: No), and the process proceeds to S2208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2202: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S2318, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process moves to S2204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2204, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2318 is executed (see S2317 in FIG. 56). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2318 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2209), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2210), an interrupt Permission is set (S2211), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2208 is reached while the power-off flag is turned off is that the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2208: No), S2209, which is the work area clearing process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2210, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2210), interrupt permission is set. (S2211). Then, the V gate initial flag 223i is set to ON (S2212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S2209 is skipped is that when the process of S2208 is reached from S2204 via the process of S2206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2204, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the previous processing of S2301 was executed (S2301). If the time has not elapsed (S2301: No), the process proceeds to S2312 without performing the processes of S2302 to S2311. In the process of S2301, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed because S2302 to S2311 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2313 and the variable display setting process of S2314 in a short period. By executing the process of S2313 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2314 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2301 (S2301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2303 to S2314 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S2302). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2308 described later (S2303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2305 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending ball number display update process is executed (S2306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen. The settings are sent as commands to the display controller 114 . In the pending ball number display update process, the process of lighting the pending lamp (Ds1) according to the values of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223c is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2307). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing, it is monitored whether or not the frame button 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect. 22 is confirmed, the corresponding effect is set. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. A detailed description of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing will be given later with reference to FIG.

Further, for example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command is set for the display control device 114. You may By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win performance, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S2307 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2308), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2310), and the process proceeds to S2311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2308 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After completing the processing of S2310, the V counter update processing for updating the value of the V counter 223t is executed (S2311). The details of this V counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the process of S2311, the effect counter 223g is updated (S2312), and the process proceeds to S2313.

In the process of S2313, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S2313). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S2314). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S2314 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2315). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2315 (S2315: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2317), and the power-off processing is executed (S2318). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off (S2319), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2315 (S2315: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2316), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2316: No), the process returns to S2301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2316: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2313) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2313). This command determination process (S2313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S2313), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern from the main controller 110 is read. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S2401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S2401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on (S2402), the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2403), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 65) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

If no variation pattern command has been received (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S2404). When the stop type command is received (S2404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2405), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2406), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 65) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if no stop type command has been received (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received from main controller 110 (S2407). Then, when the stop command is received (S2407: Yes), the display stop command is set based on the received stop command (S2408). On the other hand, if the stop command has not been received (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S2409).

In the process of S2409, when the pending ball number command is received (S2409: Yes), the pending ball number counter of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) corresponding to the received pending ball number command is Stores the value contained in the received pending ball number command (S2410). Specifically, if the reserved ball number command received this time is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1), from the received reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 of the main controller 110 The value of the reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Thereafter, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set (S2411).

Here, the pending ball number command is when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A 64b, or the second ball entrance B 640b (start winning), or when a lottery for a special pattern is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the start winning prize is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number of the sound lamp control device 113 is processed in S2410. The value of the counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, for example, due to the influence of noise or the like, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, the start winning The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 at the time of detection or the lottery of special symbols. Further, for example, when the process of S2411 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the display control device 114, based on the order in which the received number-of-holding-balls commands for display are received, as shown in FIG. Several symbols are displayed side by side in the small area Ds1. Display of the reserved number of symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number command and the change order command received from the main control device 110 by the voice lamp control device 113. Information corresponding to the order may be included in the command for the number of reserved balls for display and transmitted to the display control device 114 . By doing so, the display control device 114 only needs to display the reserved ball number pattern based on the display reserved ball number command received from the audio lamp control device 113, so the processing load of the display control device 114 is reduced. It is possible to Also, even when the order of variation of the special symbols is not the order of starting winning, it is possible to display the number of reserved balls pattern of the first special pattern and the number of reserved balls pattern of the second special pattern side by side.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description is continued. In the processing of S2409, if the pending ball count command has not been received (S2409: No), then it is determined whether or not the V gate state command has been received from main controller 110 (S2412). Then, when the V gate state command is received (S2412: Yes), V gate command reception processing is executed (2413), and this processing ends.

Here, the V gate command reception processing (S2413) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this V gate command reception process (S2413). This V gate command reception process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. It is a process executed based on the V gate state command received from the controller 110 . By executing the V gate command reception process, it becomes possible for the sound lamp control device 113 side to grasp the operation of the V gate 650d. Also, it becomes possible to determine whether the V gate 650d is operating normally.

In the V gate command reception process, first, V gate state information based on the V gate state command received from main controller 110 is stored in V gate state storage area 223j (S2501). Here, the V gate state command received from main controller 110 is set when the state of V gate 650d is changed by V gate drive control processing (see FIG. 47) executed by main controller 110. The V gate 650d is in an open state (a guided state in which the ball can flow down the V discharge channel 650e3) or a closed state (a controlled state in which the ball cannot (difficultly) flow down the V discharge channel 650e3). A command is set to indicate which state the state is.

Next, it is determined whether the V gate initial flag 223i is set to ON (S2502). This V-gate first-time flag 223i is a flag that is set to ON in the start-up process (see FIG. 55) of the audio ramp control device 113 described above. In the processing of S2502, if it is determined that the V gate initial flag 223i is set to ON (S2502: Yes), the V gate state information stored this time indicates that the V gate 650d is in the open (induced) state. (S2503).

In the processing of S2503, if it is determined that the information (V gate state information) stored this time is information indicating that the V gate 650d is in the open (induction) state (S2503: Yes), the V gate scenario 222c is set (S2506), and the V gate first time flag 223i is set to OFF (S2507). Next, based on the set V gate scenario 222c, the V gate opening timing is stored in the opening timing storage area 223k (S2508).

That is, the series of processing from S2502 to S2508 is executed only when the V gate first time flag 223i is set to ON, that is, when the power of the audio lamp controller 113 is turned on. When the power supply of the control device 113 is turned on, sound lamp control is performed based on the V gate state command received from the main control device 110 (V gate state command set in S1403 of the V gate drive control process (see FIG. 47)). A V gate scenario 222c provided in the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the device 113 is set. The V gate scenario 222c defines an operation scenario corresponding to the V gate drive control process of the main controller 110. By setting the V gate scenario 222c, the V counter update process (see FIG. 72) described later is performed. updates the V counter 223t.

Among the operation scenarios defined in the V gate scenario 222c, the content corresponding to the value of the V counter 223t is the current operation status of the V gate 650d. Thus, by providing the V gate scenario 222c in the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to easily grasp the operation status of the V gate 650d. Further, by referring to the V gate scenario 222c, it is possible to assume the future operation status of the V gate 650d (for example, it is assumed that the V gate 650d will be in the induction state after 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds). can be done), and it is possible to execute an effect based on the assumed information. Therefore, it is possible to assume a futuristic operating situation of the movable object (V gate 650d) that affects the outcome of the game, and use the assumed information to execute a game situation (a game state that is advantageous to the player in the future). Since it is possible to execute an effect (assumed game situation effect) for notifying whether or not the game is played, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 58, the description is continued. In the processing of S2502, if the V gate first time flag 223i is not set to ON (S2502: No), or in the processing of S2503, the information stored this time (V gate state information) indicates that the V gate 650d is open. (S2503: No), it is determined whether the information stored this time matches the contents of the V-gate scenario 222c (S2504).

If it is determined in the process of S2504 that the information stored this time matches the contents of the V-gate scenario 222c (S2504: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information stored this time does not match the contents of the V gate scenario 222c (S2504: No), an error command is set (S2505), and this processing ends.

In the process of S2504, by comparing the updated contents of the V-gate scenario 222c set in S2506 and the operation status of the V-gate 650d indicated by the V-gate status command received from the main controller 110, the V-gate is normally activated. 650d is configured to be able to determine whether it is controlling the operation. By doing so, it is possible to properly determine that the V gate 650d is not under normal operation control.

In the processing of S2504, it is determined whether or not the update contents of the V gate scenario 222c set in S2506 match the operation status of the V gate 650d indicated by the V gate status command received from the main controller 110. However, for example, it may be configured to allow an error within a predetermined range.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation control contents of the main controller 110 and the V scenario update status of the sound lamp display device 113 are compared to grasp the operation status of the V gate 650d. A sensor for detecting the operation of the gate 650d may be provided, and operation information of the V gate 650d detected by the sensor may be added to grasp the operation status of the V gate 650d. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not normal operation control is being performed, and furthermore, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation control content is actually being operated. 650d is not operating normally.

In this embodiment, the V gate 650d is configured to be controlled in a constant operation at all times. When configured to change, for example, when the number of jackpots per day exceeds 10 times, or when 10 hours have passed since the pachinko machine 10 was turned on, one operation cycle of the V gate 650d (for example, 1 second in the induction state, 4 seconds in the regulation state) so that the ratio of the induction state (the state in which the V gate 650d is opened) in the control can be switched. is stored, and the V gate scenario 222c and the V counter 223t are reset at the timing when the control content is switched. With this configuration, even if the operation control contents of the V gate 650d are switched during the game, it is possible to immediately grasp the operation status of the V gate.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description is continued. In the processing of S2412, if the V gate command has not been received (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from main controller 110 (S2414). Then, when the winning information command is received (S2414: Yes), the winning command receiving process is executed (S2415), and then the process ends.

Here, the winning command reception process (S2415) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the winning command reception process (S2415). This winning command reception process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed when a winning command is received from the main controller 110. It is a process that

In the present embodiment, when the winning information based on the winning command received from the main controller 110 is the winning information indicating the small win A continuously, the omen effect, the continuous effect, and the continuous jackpot effect are configured to be executable. ing. In the winning command reception process, the setting of various flags and the setting of various counters referred to for executing the various effects described above are performed.

In the winning command reception process, first, the winning information based on the winning command received from the main controller 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2601). The winning information includes information based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and C5.

Next, it is determined whether the flag 223u during continuous production is currently set to ON (S2602), and if it is determined that the flag 223u during continuous production is set to ON (S2602: Yes), additional winning The flag 223x is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2604. On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223u is not set to ON (S2602: No), the process of S2603 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2604.

After shifting to the process of S2604, it is determined whether or not the prize information stored this time is the prize information indicating the small hit A (S2604). Here, as shown in FIG. 11(a) or FIG. 15(a), the small win A is a small win scenario a in which the second variable winning device 650 is likely to win a ball during the small win game. It is a hit type, and is a small hit type for which the above-described continuous production is performed.

In the process of S2604, if it is determined that the information indicating the small winning A is included in the stored winning information (S2604: Yes), then it is determined whether the value is already stored in the small winning consecutive number storage area 223o. It is determined (S2608). If it is determined that the value is stored in the small hit consecutive number of times storage area 223o (S2608: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not stored in the small hit consecutive number storage area 223o (S2608: No), then it is determined whether the counter value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is 3 (S2609). In the process of S2609, when it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is 3 (S2609: Yes), this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, when winning information containing information indicating a small win A is continuously received (when a small win A is won continuously), the number of consecutive times is 2 or 3. The contents of the continuous production are different in the case of the times. The specific small hit continuation counter 223n is a counter that counts the number of continuations.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the upper limit of the continuous effect is set to 3 times, the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 3, and the winning command including the information indicating the new small hit A is received. Even if the process of adding the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is not performed (S2609), for example, when setting the upper limit of the continuous effect more than 3 times, the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is further added, and a continuous effect corresponding to the counter value is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2609, the counter value of the specific small per consecutive counter 223n is not 3, that is, if it is determined that the counter value of the specific small per consecutive counter 223n is 0 to 2 (S2609: No), 1 is added to the counter value of the specific small hit continuation counter 223n (S2610), and then it is determined whether the counter value of the specific small hit continuation counter 223n is 2 (S2611).

In the process of S2611, when it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 2 (S2611: Yes), the current number of pending balls is set to the indication effect counter 223p (S2612), and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S2611, the counter value of the specific small per consecutive counter 223n is not 2, that is, if it is determined that the counter value of the specific small per consecutive counter 223n is 1 or 3 (S2611: No), This process is terminated as it is.

The process of S2611 is a process for determining that the winning information containing the information indicating the small hit A is continuously received (continuously winning the small hit A), and the specific small hit continuous counter When the counter value of 223n becomes 2, it is determined that the small win A is won continuously. In addition, the indication effect counter 223p set in S2612 is a winning command determined to have won the small win A continuously (including information indicating the second small win A among the consecutive small wins A). Command) is a counter that counts the order in which the held ball changes. The portent effect is executed until the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p reaches a predetermined value (2 in this embodiment).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2604, the winning information stored this time is not the winning information containing the information indicating the small win A (the information indicating the small win corresponding to the small win type other than the big win, the loss, or the small win A is included) (S2604: No), then it is determined whether the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 2 or more (S2605).

In the process of S2605, if it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is 2 or more (S2605: Yes), then the counter value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is stored in the small hit consecutive number of times storage area 223o (S2606), resets the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n to 0 (S2607), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2605, if it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is not 2 or more (S2605: No), the process of S2606 is skipped, and the process of S2607 described above is executed. .

In this embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of reserved balls to be stored is set to 8, there is a possibility that a plurality of reserved balls continuously winning small hits A may exist independently. Therefore, by executing the process of S2608, the variation based on the winning command that was successively won in the first small hit A is executed, and until the value of the small hit consecutive number storage area 223o is reset to 0, it Even if the winning information including the information indicating the small win A is received after that, the winning information is not reflected in the presentation. By doing so, for example, when the premonitory effect is executed based on the winning command of winning the small win A continuously at the beginning, the winning command of winning the small win A continuously next is generated. Even if it does, there is an effect that it is possible to eliminate confusion for the player without changing the content of the presentation.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, until the variation based on the winning command that wins the small win A continuously is executed, the value when the small win A wins next is produced. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, after executing a variation based on the winning command that successively wins the small win A, the next small win A plurality of counter values of the specific small winning continuation counter 223n may be configured to be able to store so that an effect based on the winning command that is successively won in A is executed. By doing so, the number of opportunities to execute the continuous performance increases, and it is possible to provide the player with many appropriate performances corresponding to the game results, thereby improving the interest in the game. There is

Returning to FIG. 57, the description is continued. In the process of S2414, if no winning command has been received (S2414: No), then it is determined whether or not a win-related command has been received from main controller 110 (S2416). Then, when the hit-related command is received (S2416: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S2417), and then the process ends.

Here, the hit-related processing (S2417) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this win-related processing (S2417). This hit-related process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113, and is executed when a hit-related command is received from main controller 110. It is a process that

When the winning-related processing is executed, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot opening command has been received (S2701). When it is determined that a jackpot opening command has been received (S2701: Yes), then a jackpot start effect process is executed (S2702), and this process ends. In the jackpot start effect processing, a process of setting a jackpot opening command for display and extracting information referred to when setting various ending commands for display used as the effect display of the final round according to the game state is executed. be.

Here, with reference to FIG. 61, the jackpot start effect processing (S2702) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this jackpot start effect processing (S2702). This jackpot start effect process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed when a jackpot opening command is received from the main controller 110. It is a process that

When the jackpot start effect process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag 223q is set to ON (S2801). This continuation flag 223q is set to ON when the lottery result of the special symbol in the first variation after the end of the big win is a small win A, and based on the fact that this continuation flag 223q is set to ON. , the above-described jackpot continuous effect is executed.

In the processing of S2801, if it is determined that the continuation flag 223q is set to ON (S2801: Yes), the V gate opening timing stored in the V gate state storage area 223j is acquired (S2807), and , From the game specification storage area 222b, the door opening timing in the small winning game of the first rotation (first variation) after the end of the big winning is acquired (S2808). Then, the end of the final round of the big win is used as the timing for making the variation of the first rotation (first variation) after the end of the big win the V passable variation (fluctuation of the special symbol in which the small winning game that can pass the V is executed). The timing is stored in the end information storage area 223r (S2809).

After that, the consecutive big hit effect flag 223s is set to ON (S2810), the continuation flag 223q is set to OFF (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2802. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the continuation flag 223q is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S2801: No), the processes of S2807 to S2811 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2802. Transition.

In S2802, a jackpot opening command for display is set based on the jackpot opening command received from the main control device 110 (S2802), then the continuous effect flag 223u is set to OFF (S2803), and the additional winning flag 223x is turned OFF. (S2804), and after resetting the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p, the information stored in the V passable variation storage area 223m is cleared (S2806). Then, this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description is continued. In the processing of S2701, if it is determined that the jackpot opening command has not been received (S2701: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2703). In the processing of S2703, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2703: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending command has been received (S2709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2703 that the round number command has been received (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h (S2704), and the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is is a value corresponding to the final round (10 for jackpot C) (S2705).

In the process of S2705, when it is determined that the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is the value corresponding to the final round (S2705: Yes), next, it is determined whether the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON. It is determined (S2706). When it is determined that the consecutive big win effect flag 223s is set to ON, the final round effect command for display is set based on the game timing information. By transmitting this final round effect command for display to the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 displays the omikuji effect shown in FIGS.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2705, if the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is not a value corresponding to the final round, or in the processing of S2706, if it is determined that the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is not set to ON. (S2706: No), the display round number command is set based on the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h (S2708), and this process ends. Although omitted in FIG. 60, even when it is determined that the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is one before the final round (9 for the jackpot C), the continuous jackpot flag effect flag 223s is set. It is determined whether it is set to ON, and if the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON, the third effect (see FIG. 32(a)) indicating that the Omikuji effect will be executed in the final round. A dedicated display round number command is set so as to be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

As described above, the various display round number commands set here are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the commands of the main processing (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 are stored. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the output process (S2302). When the display control device 114 receives various display round number commands, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Thus, in this embodiment, the current round number is determined by the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol device 81 is changed depending on whether or not the consecutive big win effect flag 223s is set. However, other configurations may be used. For example, by including information indicating the current round number in the round number command, the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h may be eliminated. .

Returning to FIG. 60, the description continues. In the processing of S2709, when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has been received (S2709: Yes), then the jackpot end effect processing is executed (S2710). The jackpot end effect processing is a process for setting the display contents to be displayed during the jackpot ending period. is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 62, the jackpot end effect processing (S2710) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this jackpot end effect processing (S2710). This jackpot ending effect process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed when a jackpot ending command is received from the main controller 110. This is the process to be performed.

When the jackpot end effect process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON (S2901). No), the jackpot normal ending command for display is set (S2902), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2901, if it is determined that the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the end timing of the final round is stored in the end information storage area 223r (jackpot It is determined whether the first rotation (first variation) after the end is the timing at which the V-passable variation occurs (S2903). The end timing of the final round is the timing at which the jackpot ending command is received. That is, it is determined whether the timing at which the process of S2903 is executed matches the timing stored in the end information storage area 223r.

In the process of S2903, if it is determined that it does not match the timing stored in the end information storage area 223r (S2903: No), set the display jackpot failure ending command, and proceed to S2905, while the end information is stored When it is determined that it matches the timing stored in the area 223r (S2903: Yes), a display jackpot success ending command is set, and the process proceeds to S2905.

When the display jackpot failure ending command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 displays small good luck or medium good luck as a result of the Omikuji effect. On the other hand, when the display jackpot success ending command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 displays Super Good Luck or Great Good Luck as a result of the Omikuji effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the end timing of the final round in the jackpot, in which the result can be arbitrarily changed (easily) by the player's game operation, is set under a predetermined condition (stored in the end information storage area 223r). The result of the continuous jackpot effect can be determined depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player can actively participate in the game by performing game operations such as intentionally shifting the end timing of the final round, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Although omitted in FIG. 62, the display content displayed during the jackpot ending period as a result of the jackpot continuous effect is the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball in addition to the determination result of the end timing of the final round described above. is also determined based on For example, when the timing at which the processing of S2903 is executed matches the timing stored in the end information storage area 223r, and when the reserved ball includes a special symbol jackpot, a super luck is selected. It is configured.

By constructing in this way, the end timing (first condition) of the final round in the jackpot can be arbitrarily changed (easily) by the player's game operation, and the player's game operation can be arbitrarily changed. It is possible to determine the result of the continuous jackpot performance depending on whether or not the lottery result (second condition) of the special symbols in the reserved ball, which is impossible (difficult), is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game, and to display a wide variety of results as the result of the continuous jackpot effect, thereby preventing the player from getting bored with the game. It has the effect of being able to

Returning to FIG. 60, the description continues. In the process of S2709, when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2709: No), then the small hit related process is executed (S2711). This small winning related process is executed when a small winning is won as a result of a special symbol lottery and the small winning game is executed.

Here, with reference to Drawing 63, small hit related processing (S2711) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing this small hit related process (S2711). This small winning related process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113, and a command related to small winning from main controller 110 (small winning It is a process that is executed when an opening command, a small winning ending command, a door passing command, a V passing command) is received.

When the small hit related process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit opening command is received (S3001). Here, when it is determined that the small winning opening command is received (S3001: Yes), small winning start effect processing is executed (S3002), and then this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the small hit start effect processing (S3002) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing small winning start effect processing (S3002). This small winning start production process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small winning. Along with setting a small winning opening command for display corresponding to the production display to be, the processing of setting and updating various flags or various counters referred to when executing continuous production is executed.

When the small winning start effect processing is executed, first, a small winning effect pattern is selected from the small winning effect pattern selection table based on the received small winning opening command (S3101). Specifically, based on the received small winning opening command, the small winning type to be executed this time is determined, and a small winning performance pattern is selected from the small winning performance pattern selection table 222h. In the small hit effect pattern selection table 222h, as shown in FIG. 19(a), in addition to the small win type, the additional winning flag 223x, the continuous effect flag 223u, and the small win of this time are the small wins that can pass V. A small winning effect pattern is selected based on the determination result.

Next, a display small winning opening command corresponding to the selected effect pattern is set (S3102), and then it is determined whether the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 1 or more (S3103). Here, when it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is smaller than 1 (S3103: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production is 1 or more (S3103: Yes), the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production is subtracted by 1 (S3104), and then the counter 223v during continuous production is 0 (S3105). Here, when it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is not 0 (S3105: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3105, if it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 0 (S3105: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the continuous effect ends with the small hit of this time, the continuous effect is being performed. The flag 223u is set to OFF (S3106), the additional prize winning flag 223x is set to OFF (S3107), the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is reset to 0 (S3108), and stored in the V passable variation storage area 223m. The stored value is cleared (S3109), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description is continued. In the process of S3001, when it is determined that the small winning opening command has not been received (S3001: No), it is then determined whether the small winning ending command has been received (S3003). Here, when it is determined that the small hitting ending command is received (S3003: Yes), based on the received small hitting ending command, the small hitting ending command for display is set (S3004), and this processing is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the small winning ending command is not received (S3003: No), it is then determined whether the door passing command is received (S3005). Here, if it is determined that a door passage command has been received (S3005: Yes), a display door passage command is set based on the received door passage command (S3006), and this processing ends.

Here, when the display door passing command is set and transmitted to the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of winning prizes during the small hit, and the voice output device 226 moves the ball to the third position. 2. A notification sound is output to notify that the variable winning device 650 has won. It should be noted that, based on the determination result that the current small win is a V-passable small win, the manner of display by the third symbol display device 81 or notification by the voice output device 226 may be changed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect (display, notification) during the small win, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3005 that the door passage command has not been received (S3005: No), then it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received (S3007). Here, if it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S3007: Yes), the V passing command for display is set based on the received V passing command (S3008), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (S3007: No), this processing ends.

Here, when the V passing command for display is set and transmitted to the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect display indicating that the big win is executed after the end of the small win, The audio output device 226 outputs a sound congratulating the player. Even if the V passing command for display is set, it may be configured such that the big win is suddenly executed after the small win is finished without intentionally executing the effect indicating the fact to the player. . By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2314) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2314). This variable display setting process (S2314) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process (S2314), first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3201). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S3201: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S3207. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S3201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned off (S3202). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3203).

Then, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3204). In the process of S3204, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, variation pattern selection processing is executed (S3205). The details of this variation pattern selection process (S3205) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. FIG.

After the processing of S3205 is completed, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S3206). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f provided in the RAM 233 is set to ON (S3207). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not ON (that is, is OFF) (S3207: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S3207: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S3208). The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3209).

Next, based on the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110, the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set (S3210), and the process proceeds to S3211.

In the processing of S3210, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S3211). , the process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, the variation pattern selection process (S3205) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing this variation pattern selection process (S3205). This fluctuation pattern selection process (S3205) is a process executed in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

When the variation pattern selection process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON (S3301). Here, if it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON (S3301: Yes), then continuous effect variation pattern selection processing is executed (S3305), and then this processing is terminated. The continuous effect variation pattern selection process will be detailed later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223u is not set to ON (S3301: No), then it is determined whether the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is greater than 2 ( S3302).

In the processing of S3302, if it is determined that the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is not greater than 2 (2 or less) (S3302: No), the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type obtained in the processing of S3203. A variation pattern is selected from the selection table 222a (S3303). In addition, the processing of S3303 is performed when the continuous effect flag 223u is not set to ON and the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is 2 or less, that is, the small hit A is included in the stored winning information. This process is executed when there is no winning information that has been won consecutively.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3302, when it is determined that the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is greater than 2 (S3302: Yes), portent variation pattern selection processing is executed (S3304), and then this processing is terminated. .

Here, the counter value of the omen effect counter 223p is set to the number of pending balls at that point in time when the winning command including the information corresponding to the small win A is received twice consecutively (Fig. 59, S2612). Therefore, when it is determined that the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is 2 at the timing when the variation pattern selection process is executed, the first (first) small winning A among the consecutive small winnings A Timing to select a variation pattern based on, that is, timing at which continuous production can be executed.

Further, if the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is greater than 2, the state before the variation corresponding to the continuous small wins A is executed, that is, the stored winning information contains the continuous small wins. It shows a state in which winning information that a win A is won is included, and an indication variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern capable of executing an indication effect as a variation pattern is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p contains the information corresponding to the small hit A, when the winning command is received twice in succession, the number of pending balls at that time is set. However, other configurations may be used. For example, based on the number of held balls at the time when the conditions for setting the counter value of the omen effect counter 223p are satisfied, until the continuous effect can be executed (variation corresponding to the first small win A among the consecutive small wins A (until the process of selecting a pattern is executed) is set to the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p, and the portent effect can be executed until the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p becomes 0. .

Next, referring to FIG. 67, the precursor variation pattern selection process (S3304) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing this precursor variation pattern selection process (S3304). This portent variation pattern selection process (S3304) is a process executed in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is in a state where the portent effect can be executed ( In a state where the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is greater than 2), a process for setting the portent effect to be executed is executed.

When the portent variation pattern selection process is executed, first, a variation pattern is selected from the portent effect variation pattern selection table 222i based on the variation pattern type obtained by the processing of S3203 of FIG. 65 (S3401). Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern selected in the process of S3401 is SW effect (S3402).

Here, when it is determined that the selected variation pattern has a SW effect (S3402: Yes), the portent effect is selected based on the portent effect selection table 222d (S3403), and the SW effective time 2 is set (S3404). , S3405. Various display modes to be displayed in the small area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 are defined in the portent effect selection table 222d. The display mode is appropriately set based on the counter value (see FIG. 17(c)).

On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if it is determined that the selected variation pattern does not have SW effect (S3402: No), the process of S3403 to S3404 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3405, the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is subtracted by 1 (S3405).

Next, it is determined whether the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is 2 (S3406), and if it is determined that the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is 2 (S3406: Yes), then the current number of pending balls is greater than 6 (S3407). In the process of S3407, when it is determined that the number of currently held balls is greater than 6 (S3407: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON (S3408), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that the counter value of the omen effect counter 223p is not 2 (S3406: No), or in the process of S3407, the current number of pending balls is not greater than 6 (6 or less) If so (S3407: No), this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the current variation pattern is selected, the counter value of the portent effect counter 223p is subtracted (S3405), and when the subtracted counter value becomes 2 (S3406: Yes), that is, when the next fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first small hit A among the continuous small hits A, whether or not to turn on the continuous effect flag 223u based on the current number of pending balls have decided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, continuous effect variation pattern selection processing (S3305) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3305). This continuous production variation pattern selection process (S3305) is a process executed in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is in a state where continuous production can be executed. This is a process for setting a continuous effect to be executed (in a state where the continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON).

Here, the outline of the processing regarding the continuous effect performed in this embodiment will be described. First, based on the winning command received from the main control device 110, the target range of continuous production (variation number of special symbols and the number of small winning games) and the target period (variation time of special symbols and small winning game time ) are calculated (assumed) in advance. Next, a small winning game in which V passage is possible and its variation are determined (V passage possible variation determination) within a range to be continuously produced.

Then, the variation pattern type (variation time of the special symbol) included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the range to be subjected to continuous performance, and the continuous performance based on the determination result of the V passable variation determination Select the production content (variation pattern) of, furthermore, based on the small winning opening command received from the main control device 110, the range to be subjected to continuous production, and the determination result of V passable fluctuation determination, continuous production The contents of the production during the small win game in the middle are selected.

By doing so, it is possible to execute a series of performances that are associated with the special symbol variations and the small winning game a plurality of times.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is configured to differ according to the number of pending balls, if the number of pending balls changes during continuous production execution (additional winning occurs ), there is a possibility that the main controller 110 will transmit a variation pattern command indicating a content different from the previously calculated (assumed) content (the variation time of the special symbol).

Therefore, if the previously calculated (assumed) contents (variation time of the special symbol) and the variation pattern type (variation time of the special symbol) included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 are different, continuous Since there is a possibility that the performance content of the performance and the actual game content (V passable fluctuation determination) are different, processing for replacing the content of the continuous performance is executed.

By doing so, the content (variation time of the special symbol) that was calculated (assumed) in advance and the information included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 (variation time of the special symbol) were different. However, by replacing the contents of the continuous presentation, there is an effect that a comfortable continuous presentation can be provided.

In addition, by using a configuration in which the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol does not change according to the number of pending balls, the previously calculated (assumed) contents (variation time of the special symbol) and the main controller 110 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation different from the variation pattern type (variation time of special symbol) included in the variation pattern command received from.

Returning to FIG. 68, the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3305) will be described. When the continuous effect variation pattern selection process is executed, first, it is determined whether the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON (S3501). It is a flag that is set to ON when the continuous performance type to be referred to is selected, and is for preventing the continuous performance type from being reselected during one continuous performance.

In the processing of S3501, if it is determined that the continuous effect type selection completion flag 223w is not set to ON (S3501: No), that is, if the continuous effect type referred to in the current continuous effect is not selected, Continuous effect type selection processing is executed (S3502), and then the process proceeds to S3503. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON (S3501: Yes), the process of S3502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3503.

Here, the continuous effect type selection process (S3502) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the continuous effect type selection process (S3502). This continuous effect type selection process (S3502) is a process executed in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and each variation during the continuous effect This is a process for setting the continuous effect type referred to when selecting the variation pattern corresponding to .

When the continuous performance type selection process is executed, first, the value stored in the small winning continuous number storage area 223o is set to the continuous performance counter 223v (S3601), and the value of the small winning continuous number storage area 223o is cleared. (S3602). After that, V passable variation determination processing is executed (S3603), and the process proceeds to S3604. The V passable variation determination process is a process for determining a variation in which a small hit that allows a V pass is performed in each variation in which a continuous effect is performed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the V passable variation determination process (S3603) executed by MPU 221 in sound ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the V passable variation determination process (S3603). This V passable variation determination process (S3603) is a process executed in the continuous effect type selection process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113. FIG.

When the V passable variation determination process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2 (S3701). Here, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production is 2 (S3701: Yes), based on the information stored in the game specification storage area 222b, the fluctuation of this time and the next time (two fluctuations) (S3702), and then proceeds to S3704.

Here, a detailed description will be given of the processing executed in S3702. When the continuous production flag 223u is set to ON in S3408 of FIG. 67, continuous production variation pattern selection processing is executed (S3301 of FIG. 66: Yes). Then, a continuous effect type selection process is executed in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3502 in FIG. 68), and a V passable change determination process is executed in the process (S3603 in FIG. 69). This V passing variable variation determination process is a process that is executed only when the continuous effect variation pattern selection process is first executed (the continuous effect type that is skipped when the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON). This is a process executed in the selection process).

Therefore, in the processing of S3701, the determined counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is the value set in S3601 of FIG. Become. That is, in the process of S3701, when it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2, the current continuous effect is an effect that is executed over two fluctuations. When it is determined that the counter value of the middle counter 223v is not 2 (is 3), the current continuous effect is performed over 3 variations.

Therefore, in the process of S3702, which is executed when it is determined that the value of the counter 223v during continuous effect is 2 in the process of S3701, the V passable variation is determined for the variation of two variations (this time, next time). to get the information to Here, in the process of S3702, the opening timing of the door 650f in the small win A and the next variation pattern (variation time) are acquired from the game specification storage area 222b. The current variation pattern (variation time) is extracted from the variation pattern type obtained in S3203 of FIG.

Also, in the present embodiment, as the next variation pattern (variation time), it is assumed that a new winning command is not received (there is no addition of the number of pending balls) until the next variation pattern is selected. Although it is configured to acquire a variation pattern, other configurations may be employed. For example, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is also possible to acquire a variation pattern that is assumed even when the number of held balls is added.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description continues. In the process of S3701, when it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is not 2 (is 3) (S3701: No), based on the information stored in the game specification storage area 222b, this time and The opening timing of the door 650f is acquired based on the fluctuations of the next time and the next time (three fluctuations) (S3703), and then the process proceeds to S3704. That is, in addition to the processing of S3702 described above, the variation pattern (variation time) of the next time (the third variation) is acquired from the game specification storage area 222b.

Next, in S3704, the V gate opening timing stored in the opening timing storage area 223k is acquired (S3704), and it is determined whether the V passable fluctuation is the current fluctuation (S3705). Here, a detailed description will be given of the processing executed in S3705.

In the process of S3705, based on the information acquired in S3702 or S3703 and the information acquired in S3704, it is determined whether the V passable variation is the current variation. Specifically, from this variation pattern (for example, special variation C: variation time 4 seconds) and the door 650f opening timing of small hit A (2.5 seconds to 4 seconds from the start of small hit A) (Fig. 17 ( See a)), in this variation, it is calculated that the door 650f is opened 6.5 to 8 seconds after the start of the variation. Then, from the next fluctuation pattern (for example, special fluctuation B: fluctuation time 5.5 seconds) and the opening timing of the door 650f of the small hit A (2.5 seconds to 4 seconds from the start of the small hit A) (Fig. 17 (a )), in the next fluctuation, it is calculated that the door 650f will be opened 18 to 19.5 seconds after the start of the current fluctuation.

Then, the period during which the door 650f is opened due to the current fluctuation and the next fluctuation described above is compared with the period during which the V gate 650d is opened stored in the opening timing storage area 223k, and each period satisfies the predetermined conditions. If the condition is satisfied, it is determined that the variation can pass through V. The predetermined condition is a condition that the door 650f is opened at a timing when the V-gate 650d can be passed, taking into account the time required for the ball that has won the door 650f to pass through the V-gate 650d. Specifically, the ball that has won the door 650f is retained by a stopper (ball stopping member) 650c, and the motion control of the stopper (ball stopping member) 650c opens the V gate one second after the door 650f is closed. It is configured to reach 650d. Specifically, 0.5 seconds after the door 650f is closed, the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is changed to the release position, and the ball that has been retained by the stopper (ball stop member) 650c starts flowing down. and then reaches the V gate 650d 0.5 seconds later.

Therefore, when the V gate 650d is in the open state (induction state) after one second from the end of the period in which the door 650f is opened, the fluctuation is determined as the V passable fluctuation. In this embodiment, the ball won by the door 650f due to the small win A is retained by the stopper (ball stop member) 650c, so the small win A starts regardless of when the door 650f wins. It is possible to reach the V gate 650d after a certain period of time has elapsed (5 seconds after the start of the small win), and it is possible to improve the determination accuracy of the V passable fluctuation. Therefore, by making the content of the continuous effect suitable for the actual game result, it is possible to prevent the effect that gives the player a sense of distrust.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the stopper 650c is provided, but the stopper 650c may be omitted. When adopting such a configuration, when determining the V passable fluctuation, the open period of the door 650f and the open period of the V gate 650d (the period in which the induction state is established) are compared, and the open period of the door 650f is compared. It is preferable to execute an effect suggesting the ratio of the period during which the ball can pass through the V gate 650d (the ratio of the period during which the ball winning during the period when the door 650f is open can pass through the V gate 650d). . By doing so, the player can grasp the possibility (expectation) of passing through the V gate 650d from the content of the presentation, and can be happy and sad about the result of the game. There is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect for performing

In addition, by using such a configuration, the timing of reaching the V gate 650d becomes random due to ball play of the ball that has won the door 650f. There is an effect that it is possible to make things difficult and to provide fair games to the players.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description continues. In the process of S3705, if it is determined that the V passable change is the current change (S3705: Yes), "this time" is set in the V passable change storage area 223m (S3706), and this process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3705 that the V passable variation is not the current variation (S3705: No), then it is determined whether the V passable variation is the next variation (S3707).

In the processing of S3707, if it is determined that the V passable variation is the next variation (S3707: Yes), "next time" is set in the V passable variation storage area 223m (S3708), and this processing ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3707 that the V passable variation is not the next variation (S3707: No), the V passable variation storage area 223m is set to "next time", and this processing ends ( S3709). In addition, in the processing of S3701, if it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2, in the processing of S3707, if it is determined that the V passable variation is not the next variation, the processing of S3709 is performed. This processing ends without execution.

Although not shown in the figure, if there is no variation determined as a V passable variation in the variations for which the continuous effect is executed, this process is terminated without setting the V passable variation storage area 223m.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the V passable variation determination process executed in the special symbol variation pattern selection process uses a configuration that determines the special symbol variation that is a small hit that can be passed through V. there is That is, the V passable variation determination process described in the present embodiment includes the function of determining whether the small hit corresponding to the special figure variation to be executed this time is V passable, and the stored winning information A function to determine whether there is a small hit that can pass V in (entrance information), and if there is a small hit that can pass V, when (after how many rotations) will the special pattern variation corresponding to that small hit It has a function to determine whether it will be executed.

It is not necessary for one process to have all of the functions described above, and separate processes may have each function.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description continues. After the V passable variation determination process is executed in S3603, next, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2 (whether the current continuous effect is a continuous effect straddling 2 fluctuations) ( S3604). Here, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous effect is 2 (S3604: Yes), based on the contents stored in the V passable variation storage area 223m by the V passable variation determination process described above, to determine whether the V-passable variation is "this time" (S3605).

In the process of S3605, when it is determined that the V passable variation is not "this time" (S3605: No), as the continuous effect type, the 2 continuous effect B is selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e (S3606), Next, the process proceeds to S3614. On the other hand, in the process of S3605, if it is determined that the V passable variation is "this time" (S3605: Yes), as the continuous effect type, select 2 continuous effect A from the continuous effect type selection table 222e (S3607 ), and the continuation flag 223q is set to ON (S3608). Then, the process proceeds to S3614.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3604, if it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is not 2 (is 3) (S3604: No), then it is determined whether the V passable variation is "this time". It is determined (S3609). Here, when it is determined that the V passable variation is "this time" in the process of S3609 (S3609: Yes), as the continuous effect type, the 3 continuous effect A is selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e (S3610 ), the continuation flag 223q is set to ON (S3608), and the process proceeds to S3614.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3609 that the V passable variation is not "this time" (S3609: No), then it is determined whether the V passable variation is "next time" (S3611). Here, when it is determined that the V passable variation is "next time" (S3611: Yes), as the continuous effect type, the 3 continuous effect B is selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e (S3612), and the continuation flag is selected. 223q is turned on (S3608), and the process proceeds to S3614. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V passable variation is not "next time" (S3611: No), as the continuous effect type, the 3 continuous effect C is selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e (S3612), and the process proceeds to S3614. do. Next, after executing the processing of S3606 or S3608, the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON, and this processing ends.

Although not shown in the figure, if there is no variation determined to be V-passable in the variation for which the continuous effect is executed, since nothing is stored in the V-passable variation storage area 223m, the continuous effect type is selected. This process ends without

Returning to FIG. 68, the description continues. In the process of S3503, it is determined whether or not the additional winning flag 223x is set to ON (S3503). Here, if it is determined that the additional winning flag 223x is set to ON (S3503: Yes), based on the variation pattern acquired in S3203, the continuous production variation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g, variation A pattern is selected (S3504), the SW effective time 1 is set (S3506), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3503, if it is determined that the additional winning flag 223x is not set to ON (S3503: No), based on the variation pattern acquired in S3203, from the continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f, A variation pattern is selected (S3505), SW effective time 1 is set (S3506), and this process is terminated.

Although not shown, if the continuous effect type is not selected, that is, if there is no change that is determined to be V-passable in the variation for which the continuous effect is executed, the same processing as S3303 in FIG. 66 is performed. executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (small hit) in succession, it is possible (easy) to pass the ball through the specific area. is determined, and based on the determination result, a series of effects (continuous) can be executed using a continuous small winning period and a variable display period of special symbols corresponding to the small winning. By configuring in this way, for example, the first small win is a small win in which it is impossible (difficult) to pass the ball through the specific area, and the second small win is a small win that allows the ball to pass through the specific area. In the case of a possible (easy) small win, as a production corresponding to the first small win, it is based on the fact that the current small win is an impossible (difficult) small win to pass the ball through a specific area. It is possible to execute an effect (for example, chance continuation effect) based on the fact that the next small win is a small win in which the ball can (easily) pass through a specific area instead of the effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the frequency of executing the performance based on the small win that cannot provide the player with an advantageous game state (it is difficult), it is possible to suppress the performance that the player feels dissatisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player gets bored with the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2307) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2307). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2307) is processing executed in the main processing (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Alternatively, it is a process of managing the time for validating the operation of the frame right button 22b) and setting a display command when the frame button 22 is operated within the valid time.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the switch valid time 1 is greater than 0 (S3801). Here, if it is determined in the process of S3801 that the SW valid time 1 is not longer than 0 (it is 0) (S3801: No), then it is checked whether the SW valid time 2 is longer than 0. It discriminates (S3806).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3801 that the SW effective time 1 is greater than 0 (S3801: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the SW effective time 1 (S3802), and both SW (frame left button 22a and frame right button 22b) is pressed (S3803). Here, if it is determined that both SW are pressed (S3803: Yes), a display switching advance notice SW pressing command is set (S3804), the SW effective time 1 is reset to 0 (S3805), and this processing is performed. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3803 that both SW are not pressed (S3803: No), this process ends.

Next, in the process of S3806, if it is determined that the SW effective time 2 is greater than 0 (S3806: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the SW effective time 2 (S3807), and either SW (frame left button 22a or It is determined whether any of the frame right buttons 22b) is pressed (S3808). Here, if it is determined that one of the SW is pressed (S3808: Yes), a display addition notice SW pressing command is set (S3809), the SW valid time 2 is reset to 0 (S3810), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3808 that neither SW has been pressed (S3808: No), this process ends. Also, in the processing of S3806, if it is determined that the SW valid time is not longer than 0 (it is 0) (S3806: No), this processing ends.

In this embodiment, the SW valid time 1 is set while the continuous effect is being executed, while the SW valid time 2 is set while the precursor effect is being executed. It is configured as follows. Therefore, since the effective time of both switches does not overlap, when the effective time of one switch is set, the processing related to the effective time of the other is skipped. If there is a possibility that each SW valid time is set, the processing of each SW valid time should be executed.

Next, the V counter update process (S2311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this V counter update process (S2311). This V counter update process (S2311) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and refers to the V gate scenario 222c. This is the process of updating the V counter 223t used to grasp the operation status of the .

When the V counter 223t is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the V gate scenario 222c is set (S3901). Here, if it is determined that the V-gate scenario 222c is not set (S3901: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V gate scenario 222c is set (S3901: Yes), then it is determined whether the counter value of the V counter 223t is 5000 (S3902).

In the processing of S3902, if it is determined that the counter value of the V counter 223t is 5000 (S3902: Yes), the counter value of the V counter 223t is set to 1 (S3904), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3902 that the counter value of the V counter 223t is not 5000 (S3902: No), the counter value of the V counter 223 is incremented by 1 (S3903), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the V-counter updating process in this embodiment, the V-gate scenario 222c defined for the V-gate 650d that repeats a fixed operation at five-second intervals is referred to. 650d, when the counter value of the V counter 223t reaches 5000 (5 seconds), the counter value is incremented from 1 again. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of information defined in the V gate scenario 222c.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 90. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 is operated so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S4001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S4001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S4102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S4103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S4104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S4002 in FIG. 73) (S4105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S4001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. A high processing performance can be maintained, and a diversified or complicated production can be easily executed using the auxiliary production unit.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 includes all the remaining boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S4101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S4101. and the processing of S4102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S4103 to S4105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S4103 to S4105 without performing the processes of S4101 and S4102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4003, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S4005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 88A), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S6302 in FIG. 88A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)) performs the simple command determination processing (see FIG. 75(b) S4308) and simple display setting processing (see S4309 in FIG. 75(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A 64b, or the second ball entrance B 640b (start winning), When an instruction to start a variable performance is received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when a variable pattern command for display is received, the variable image is immediately displayed during the period of the variable performance when the power is turned on. It can be displayed and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S4005, interrupt permission is set (S4006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S4006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301). If it is off (S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S4302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S4302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85. FIG.

In the display setting process (S4303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S4304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S4303) or the simple display setting processing (S4309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S4306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S4304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S4305), 24, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing object buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S4307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the third symbol display device A stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S4308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S4309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S4304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85, details of the command determination process (S4302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S4402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S4403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S4404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S4405) and returns to the processing of S4401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S4405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). FIG. 77(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S4501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S4501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4504), both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S4505)), and this processing ends.

By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77(a)), in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S4504, the display data table buffer 233d is set by the process of S4501. The drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the displayed variable display data table, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specified. Transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process, and image data of sprites required in the set variable display data table are stored in advance. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S4503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S4404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S4406), If there is a display variation type command (S4406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4407), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the stop type command process (S4407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop class command processing, first, the stop class table corresponding to the stop class information (shown by the stop class command for display) is determined (S4601), and the stop class table and the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b) ) is executed, and the value of the stop symbol counter updated each time is executed to finally set the stop symbol after the variable effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S4602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to OFF (S4603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S4602. In the above-described task processing (S4304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S4602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S4603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S4601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S4602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S4406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an advance notice effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4408), If there is a hit-related command (S4408: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S4409), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the win-related command process (S4409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing. This win-related command processing includes the win-related commands (jackpot opening command for display, number of rounds for display command, final round command for display, jackpot interval command for display, jackpot ending command for display, display Small winning opening command for display, small winning ending command for display, door passing command for display, V passing command for display) is a process for executing processing corresponding to.

In the hit-related command process (S4409), first, in the unprocessed new command, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot opening command for display (S4701), and if there is a jackpot opening command for display (S4701: Yes) , the jackpot opening command process is executed (S4702), and the process proceeds to S4703.

Here, the details of the jackpot opening command process (S4702) will be described with reference to FIG. 79(a). FIG. 79(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot opening command process (S4702). This jackpot opening command process (S4702) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the jackpot opening command process, first, the jackpot opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). After that, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set jackpot opening display data table (S3003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3005), the big hit opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S4701 that there is no jackpot opening command for display among the unprocessed new commands (S4701: No), the process of S4702 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4703. In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S4703), and if there is a display round number command (S4703: Yes), the round number command process is executed. (S4704), and the process proceeds to S4705.

Details of the round number command process (S4704) will now be described with reference to FIG. 79(b). FIG. 79(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing (S4704). This round number command process (S4704) is for executing the process corresponding to the round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the round number command process, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4901). After that, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S4902). Then, based on the set number of rounds display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S4903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S4905), the round number command processing is terminated, and the win-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S4703 that there is no display round number command among the unprocessed new commands (S4703: No), the process of S4704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4705. In the processing of S4705, it is determined whether or not there is a final round command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4705), and if there is a final round command for display (S4705: Yes), final round command processing is executed. (S4706), and the process proceeds to S4707.

Details of the final round command processing (S4706) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80(a) is a flow chart showing the final round command processing (S4706). This final round command processing (S4706) is for executing processing corresponding to the final round command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the final round command process, first, the final round display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). After that, the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5002). Then, based on the set final round display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5005), the final round command processing is terminated, and the win-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S4705 that there is no final round command for display among the unprocessed new commands (S4705: No), the process of S4706 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4707. In the processing of S4707, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot interval command for display in the unprocessed commands (S4707), and if there is a jackpot interval command for display (S4707: Yes), the jackpot interval command processing is executed. (S4708), and the process proceeds to S4709.

Here, with reference to FIG.80(b), the detail of big-hit interval command processing (S4708) is demonstrated. FIG. 80(b) is a flow chart showing the jackpot interval command process (S4708). This jackpot interval command process (S4708) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot interval command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the jackpot interval command process, first, the jackpot interval display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot interval display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5102), and based on the jackpot interval display data table thus set, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5105), the big hit interval command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. In the processing of S4707, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot interval command among the unprocessed new commands (S4707: No), the processing of S4708 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4709. In the process of S4709, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot ending command for display in the unprocessed commands (S4709), and if there is a jackpot ending command for display (S4709: Yes), the jackpot ending command process is executed. Then (S4710), the process proceeds to S4711.

Here, the details of the jackpot ending command process (S4710) will be described with reference to FIG. 81(a). FIG. 81(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending command process (S4710). This jackpot ending command process (S4710) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the jackpot ending command process, first, a jackpot ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). After that, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S5202). Then, based on the set jackpot ending display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5205), the big hit ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S4709 that there is no display jackpot ending command among the unprocessed new commands (S4709: No), the process of S4710 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4711. In the processing of S4711, in the unprocessed commands, it is determined whether or not there is a small per opening command for display (S4711), and if there is a small per opening command for display (S4711: Yes), a small per opening command The process is executed (S4712), and the process proceeds to S4713.

Here, with reference to Drawing 81 (b), the details of small hit opening command processing (S4712) are explained. FIG.81(b) is a flowchart which shows a small hit opening command process (S4712). This small winning opening command processing (S4712) is for executing the processing corresponding to the small winning opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

In the small winning opening command process, first, the small winning opening display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the small winning opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302), and based on the set small winning opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5303). ). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5305), the small winning opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning related command process.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S4711 that there is no display small winning opening command among the unprocessed new commands (S4711: No), the process of S4712 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4713. In the processing of S4713, in the unprocessed commands, it is determined whether or not there is a small hitting ending command for display (S4713), and if there is a small hitting ending command for display (S4713: Yes), a small hitting ending command The process is executed (S4714), and the process proceeds to S4715.

Here, with reference to FIG. 82(a), the details of the small winning ending command process (S4714) will be described. FIG. 82(a) is a flow chart showing the small winning ending command process (S4714). This small hitting ending command processing (S4714) is for executing the processing corresponding to the small hitting ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

In the small winning ending command process, first, the small winning ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). After that, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S5402). Then, based on the set small winning ending display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5405), the small hit ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. In the processing of S4713, when it is determined that there is no small winning ending command for display among the unprocessed new commands (S4713: No), the processing of S4714 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4715. In the processing of S4715, it is determined whether or not there is a display door passage command among the unprocessed commands (S4715), and if there is a display door passage command (S4715: Yes), door passage command processing is executed. Then (S4716), the process proceeds to S4717.

Details of the door passage command process (S4716) will now be described with reference to FIG. 82(b). FIG. 82(b) is a flow chart showing the door passing command process (S4716). This door passage command processing (S4716) is for executing processing corresponding to the door passage command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the door passing command process, first, the door passing display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). After that, the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5502). Then, based on the set door passage display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5505), the door passage command processing is terminated, and the win-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S4715 that there is no display door passing command among the unprocessed new commands (S4715: No), the process of S4716 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4717. In the processing of S4717, it is determined whether or not there is a display V passage command among the unprocessed commands (S4717), and if there is a display V passage command (S4717: Yes), V passage command processing is executed. (S4718), and the process ends.

Details of the V passage command processing (S4718) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing V pass command processing (S4718). This V passing command processing (S4718) is for executing processing corresponding to the V passing command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the V passing command processing, first, the V passing display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). After that, the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5602). Then, based on the set V passage display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5605), the V passage command processing is terminated, and the win-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S4717 that there is no display V passing command among the unprocessed new commands (S4717: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S4408, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S4408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a SW-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4410), and if the SW-related command is If there is (S4410: Yes), SW-related command processing is executed (S4411), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the SW-related command processing (S4411) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing SW-related command processing. This SW-related command process is a process for executing a process corresponding to the SW-related commands (both SW pressing command for switching display, advance notice SW pressing command for additional display) received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the SW-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a switching display both SW pressing command among unprocessed commands (S5701). In order to execute (display) the both SW pressing display effects, the process proceeds to S5702.

In the process of S5702, the both SW pressing display data table corresponding to the switching display both SW pressing command is determined, and switching is set in the display data table buffer 233d from the pointer value of the switching timing (S5702). Then, the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S5703), and the process proceeds to S5704.

By the processing of S5702, the both SW pressing display data table corresponding to the switching display both SW pressing command is synthesized with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, thereby easily setting the advance notice effect. be able to. It should be noted that, when synthesizing, the display contents specified in the both SW pressing display data table are added to each address after the address corresponding to the switching timing (the value of the pointer 233f). . That is, the display contents after the switching timing are specified for each elapsed time in the both SW pressing display data tables. By configuring in this manner, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently than in the case where addresses for all the fluctuation times are prepared in both SW depression display data tables.

In the process of S5701, if it is determined that there is no switching display dose SW pressing command among unprocessed commands (S5701: No), the process proceeds to S5704.

In the process of S5704, it is determined whether or not there is an additional display announcement SW pressing command among unprocessed commands (S5704). In the process of S5704, if there is an additional display advance notice SW press command (S5704: Yes), the process proceeds to S5705 in order to execute (display) the notice SW push effect.

In the process of S5705, the advance notice SW depression display data table corresponding to the additional display advance notice SW depression command is determined, and additionally set in the display data table buffer 233d from the current pointer value (S5705). Then, the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S5706), and this processing ends.

By the processing of S5705, the advance notice SW push-down display data table corresponding to the advance notice SW push-down command for additional display is synthesized with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, so that the advance notice SW push-down effect can be easily produced. can be set. When synthesizing, the display content defined in the advance notice SW pressing display data table is added to each address after the address (value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the effect currently being executed (displayed). is configured as That is, the display contents are defined for each elapsed time in the advance notice SW pressing display data table. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily add and display the advance notice SW depression effect from the time when the notice SW depression command for the additional infant is notified.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S4410, if it is determined that there is no SW-related command (S4410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4412), and the back image change command is determined. If there is a command (S4412: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S4413), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the back image change command process (S4413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6303) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S5801). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back face A, back face B), the back face image discrimination flag corresponding to the back face image type indicated by the back face image change command is turned on, and the other back faces are turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the image type is set to off (S5802), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S5801 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S5802. . Then, if the specified back image type is back B, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Then, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image of a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in task processing (S4304), if it is specified to display either back face A or back face B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image discrimination set in S5802 is performed. From the flag, the type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the lapse of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S4412, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S4412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4414). Otherwise (S4414: Yes), the error command process is executed (S4415), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the error command processing (S4415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). FIG. 85(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S5901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S5902). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S5901, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S5902, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process of S5902 sets on error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4414 that there is no error command (S4414: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4416), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

In the process of S4401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes ), and the processing of S4402 to S4416 is executed again. Then, the processing of S4401 to S4416 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. ), the command determination process is terminated.

The simple command determination process (S4308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) executed in this case, the display data table corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4501. In addition, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image required in this case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, details of the display setting process (S4303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 86, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6001). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S6002 to S6004 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S6005. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S6001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S6002), S6003-S6004 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S6003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S6004).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87(a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S6101).

In the task processing (S4304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S6101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S6004), or if it is determined in the process of S6003 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S6003: No), then the process proceeds to S6005.

In S6005, pointer update processing is executed (S6005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 87(b). FIG. 87(b) is a flow chart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6201). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S6201, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S6202). As a result, if it is End information (S6202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6203). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S6204), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S6205), and this processing is terminated. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S6203, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S6203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S6206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S6202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 86, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6006). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S6006 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S6008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S6008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S6009).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S6009: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S6010), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6011). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON in the ON state (S6014), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6015), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S4304), from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, from the last stop design determination flag set by S6015, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6009, if the fixed display flag is ON (S6009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S6016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6016: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S6017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6018). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6021), the process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is completed, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the third pattern display device 81 automatically displays the demonstration effect. You can set the drawing contents so that is displayed.

In the process of S6016, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S6016: No), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the simple display setting process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, the image of the power-on fluctuation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on fluctuation image has ended. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the details of the transfer setting process (S4305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 88(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S6302), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S6301, that is, if it is turned off (S6301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S6302), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 88(b). FIG. 88B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S6401). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6402). In the process of S6402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S6402 that the transfer process has not ended (S6402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6402: Yes), the process proceeds to S6403. Also, as a result of the process of S6401, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6401: No), the process proceeds to S6403.

In the processing of S6403, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S6403). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S6403, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S6403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6405), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S4308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 76 to 85) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 86 and 87) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent image data transfer from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 89) (see S6301: No in FIG. 88(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S6303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6005) of the previously executed display setting process (S4303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S6501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S6502). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6503), furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state is set to ON (S6504), and the process proceeds to S6505.

Also, in the processing of S6502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S6502: No), the processing of S6503 and S6504 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S6505. In the process of S6505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6506).

In the process of S6506, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S6506 that the transfer process has not ended (S6506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6506: Yes), the process proceeds to S6507. Also, as a result of the process of S6505, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S6505: No), the process proceeds to S6507.

In the process of S6507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6507). is turned off (S6508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S6513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S6507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6509).

If the back image change flag is on (S6509: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6511). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S6512), and the process proceeds to S6513.

In the process of S6509, if the back image change flag is not ON but OFF (S6509: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S6509, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

In the process of S6513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513). The determination in the process of S6513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the processing in S6513, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: No), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S6513 (S6513: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S6514). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S6514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6515), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, details of the drawing process (S4306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S4304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated (S6601). That is, in the process of S6601, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in task processing (S4304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S6602, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S6603). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 75(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small hit), the variable ball entry means (second variable winning device 650) that allows the ball to win a prize ), in which a specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) that gives a privilege to the player when the ball passes through the variable ball entry means, a guidance state in which the ball can pass through the specific area, and a difficult passage state. A guide means (V-gate 650d) is provided which can be varied at predetermined intervals to and from the regulated state. Then, when a specific lottery result is won consecutively, at least one of the consecutively won specific lottery results has a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area. there is

As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state than when the player wins the specific lottery result by himself when the player wins the specific lottery result in succession. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play due to winning the lottery result.

In the above-described embodiment, when a specific lottery result (small hit A) is won continuously, that is, when a specific lottery result is consecutively won, the ball moves through the specific area. Although the configuration in which the small winning game (advantageous privilege game) that is easy to pass is easily executed is shown, if it is a configuration in which the advantageous privilege game is easily executed by winning a specific lottery result multiple times, in this embodiment Configurations other than the configuration used may be used.

For example, when a specific lottery result is won a plurality of times in a predetermined order, an advantageous privilege game may be easily executed. In addition, as a predetermined order, a predetermined order such as a case where a specific lottery result used in the present embodiment is consecutively won multiple times, or a case where a specific lottery result and a loss are alternately repeated. includes winning multiple times in a particular lottery result. In particular, by presetting the order including the case where the lottery result of the special pattern is lost as a predetermined order, even if the lottery result of the special pattern is lost, an advantageous privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Since there is a possibility that it will become easier, there is an effect that the player can always have expectations.

Furthermore, in the case where small wins are won continuously, the total time of the playing time of the small win game and the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the second small win among the consecutive small wins is the V gate 650d. It is configured so that it does not become an integral multiple of the operating cycle.

As a result, when small wins occur successively, the successive small wins do not cause the ball to flow down at the same timing to the V gate 650d operating at a predetermined operating cycle. That is, it is possible to cause the balls to flow down at different timings to the V-gate 650d which is operating in a predetermined operation cycle by continuously generating small winning games. Therefore, when the player wins the small winning game continuously, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state than when the player wins the small winning game alone, and wins the small winning continuously. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to the fact that the game is played.

In addition, in this embodiment, the total time of the game time of the small winning game and the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation display among the continuous small winnings is the time corresponding to the integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d In contrast, the V gate 650d is configured to differ by at least the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the inductive state.

As a result, when the V gate 650d is in the regulated state, the V gate 650d in the second small winning game is V The timing of causing the ball to flow down to the gate 650d can increase the probability that the V gate 650d will be in the induced state, and when the player wins the small winning game continuously, the player wins the small winning game alone. It is possible to provide a more advantageous game state than in the case where the game is played, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play the game due to consecutive small winnings.

As for the time to be different, it is desirable to make the difference longer than the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state with respect to the integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, but it may be less than that. . As such a configuration, for example, when the operating period (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d is set to be shorter than the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state (for example, 1 second), By winning a small prize consecutively for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), it is preferable to make a difference of one operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the small winning game continues five times, among the small winning games that are continuously executed, at least one small winning game that can pass V is executed, so the game It is possible to provide a player with a more advantageous game state than the case of winning a single small win when the small win is won in succession.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the V gate 650d is not in an integral multiple of the period (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state is set as the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. By doing so, for example, in a continuous small winning game, the time (1.5 seconds minute) When the different small winning game continues a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) (when the total difference is more than one cycle of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d), even for different operation cycles of the V gate 650d It is possible to vary the timing of causing the ball to flow down to the V gate 650d in the small winning game. Therefore, there is an effect that a more advantageous game state can be provided to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition (7 reserved balls) is satisfied at the timing when the variation of the special symbols corresponding to the successively won small wins is executed, the successively won small wins are awarded to the player. It is configured to provide an advantageous game state for As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to always satisfy the predetermined condition, and to improve the operation of the game.

In this embodiment, it is shown that the number of reserved balls is seven as the predetermined condition, but other conditions may be set, and the number of reserved balls that satisfy the predetermined condition may be changed. In addition, requirements other than the number of held balls may be set as the predetermined condition. For example, it may be set as the predetermined condition that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the predetermined lottery result and the game state is different from the normal game state. Alternatively, it may be determined as a predetermined condition that it is within a predetermined period of time (for example, a period of time until the special symbols are changed 50 times) after a specific game state such as a jackpot game ends.

Even with such a configuration, the player will be motivated to play the game so as to satisfy the predetermined conditions, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won continuously, a small hit that can (easily) pass through a specific area is determined, and based on the determination result, a continuous small hit period And a series of effects (continuous) can be executed using the variable display period of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit. By configuring in this way, for example, the first small win is a small win in which it is impossible (difficult) to pass the ball through the specific area, and the second small win is a small win that allows the ball to pass through the specific area. In the case of a possible (easy) small win, as a production corresponding to the first small win, it is based on the fact that the current small win is an impossible (difficult) small win to pass the ball through a specific area. It is possible to execute an effect (for example, chance continuation effect) based on the fact that the next small win is a small win in which the ball can (easily) pass through a specific area instead of the effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the frequency of executing the performance based on the small win that cannot provide the player with an advantageous game state (it is difficult), it is possible to suppress the performance that the player feels dissatisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player gets bored with the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case where the small winnings executed when a specific lottery result is obtained are consecutive, a game state more advantageous than the case where the small winnings are executed alone is configured to be able to be provided. , based on the fact that the small win is executed a plurality of times, it may be configured so as to be able to provide a more advantageous game state than when the small win is executed independently.

For example, based on the fact that a small win is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (for example, 8 times, which is the upper limit number to be held and stored), a game state that is more advantageous than the case where a small win is executed alone is established. It may be configured so that it can be provided. By doing so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to frequent winning of small winnings.

In addition, based on the fact that small wins are executed a plurality of times along a predetermined order (for example, small wins and losses are executed alternately), it is more advantageous than the case where small wins are executed independently. game state can be provided. By doing so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to frequent winning of small winnings. Furthermore, by defining a predetermined order by combining small hits and losses, it is possible to provide a game state advantageous to the player even when the result is a loss as a result of lottery of special symbols a plurality of times. It has the effect of being able to

In addition, based on the fact that small hits are executed multiple times along a predetermined order (for example, small hits and losses are alternately executed), it is more advantageous than the case where small hits are executed alone game state can be provided, similar to the special variation time (special variation B to C) of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit described in this embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the loss A special fluctuation time may be set to , and the timing at which a plurality of small wins are executed and the opening timing of the guidance means may be made different. As a result, even if the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a loss, there remains a possibility that the player will be provided with an advantageous game state. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that an advantageous game state will be provided, aside from the result of the lottery of the special symbols. effective.

In this case, it is preferable to unify (at least partially unify) the special variation time of the special symbols corresponding to the small win and the special variation of the special symbols corresponding to the loss. As a result, when the small hits are consecutive and when the small hits are executed multiple times along a predetermined order (for example, when the small hits are alternately executed), special special effects during the continuous production It is possible to execute the same effect as the symbol variation effect, and there is an effect that the capacity of the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

Specifically, in the variation pattern selection table 202c for loss referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the variation time is 5.5 seconds when the number of entering balls retained and stored is 5 to 6. A special fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation pattern for outliers) is defined. By configuring in this way, for example, while the number of entered balls that are retained and stored decreases from 7 to 6 to 5, special wins are made in the order of small win A (first time) → miss → small win A (second time). When the symbol lottery is executed, after the first small hit A is completed, the fluctuation display of the loss (5.5 seconds) is executed, and then the fluctuation display of the small win A (5.5 seconds) ) After that, a small hit A is executed. Therefore, the interval between the arrival timing of the winning ball V gate of the first small winning A and the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the second small winning A is 17 seconds. Since the operation cycle of the V gate 650d is 5 seconds, the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the second small winning A is different from the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the first small winning A of the V gate 650d. The timing is different by 2 seconds (delayed by 2 seconds) from the operating cycle.

In the above-described example, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is shown to be unified between the case of the lottery result of the special symbol and the case of the small hit, but the variation pattern of the special symbol in the case of the loss (Variation time) may be a variation pattern having a variation time that is the sum of the special variation B (5.5 seconds) and the game time of the small hit A (6 seconds). By doing so, even if the deviation variation is executed during the small hit as in the above example, the time required for the deviation variation to change the deviation (variation time of special symbols and small winning game time ) can be unified with Therefore, the same continuous performance time can be secured in the case where the lottery results of the special symbols are in the order of small win A→loss→small win A and the case where the small win A is won three times in succession. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of display data displayed by the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced by standardizing the continuous effects.

In addition, by making it difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol during the continuous performance is a small win or a loss, the player can have expectations until the end of the continuous performance. There is

As mentioned above, the illustrated configuration shows a case where the lottery result of the special symbol other than the small hit is out, but it is not limited to it. It may be a small hit (small hit B to C) where B is not set. In this case, it is preferable to unify the small winning game times of the small winnings B to C with the small winning A to achieve commonality of the continuous effect.

Further, in this embodiment, by setting the special variation time as the variation time of the special symbol, when the small hit is executed continuously (when the small hit is executed a plurality of times), the small hit is made independently. Although it is configured to be able to provide a more advantageous gaming state than when it is executed, other configurations may be used. It is also possible to change the opening period and the opening timing, change the operation cycle of the V gate 650d (induction means), and change the operation timing of the stopper 650c.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set in advance so that one of the small wins is a small win that can pass V when the small win is executed a plurality of times. However, as another configuration, the operation pattern of the V gate 650d may be set so that one of the small wins can pass through the V when the small win is executed a plurality of times. . Even if such a configuration is used, it is possible to obtain the same effects as in the first embodiment.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 101. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, by providing special fluctuations B to C as fluctuation patterns when the result of the special symbol lottery is the small hit A, when the small hit A is successively won, the small hit The opening timing of the door 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 is determined by the state of the V gate 650d provided in the second variable prize winning device 650. It has a configuration in which the timing of the induced state is shifted so that when the small winning A is won continuously, the big winning via the small winning game is easily granted.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, as a result of the lottery of special symbols, as a small winning type selected when a small winning is obtained, a special variation pattern of special symbols is changed only 8 times after the small winning game is finished. and a small winning E which enables the selection of a special variation pattern only three times from the variation pattern of normal symbols after the completion of the small winning, and selection is made by winning the small winning D. As a possible special variation pattern, a variation pattern with a short variation time (1 second) is selected. Also, the operation period of the V gate 650d is changed from 5 seconds to 10 seconds.

By using such a configuration, the operation of opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 by the small winning game can be executed multiple times within the operation cycle (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d. Therefore, the door 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 can be intentionally opened at different timings with respect to the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, and when small wins occur frequently, a big win is given via a small win game. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the contents of various tables stored in the ROM of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are partially changed. The difference from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that a new counter is added to the R 34th AM of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 . Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), the ROM202 of the second embodiment has the contents of the first small per type selection table 202c and the variation pattern selection table 202e changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM202 in the first embodiment. ing. Also, the numerical values set in the big winning scenario table 2202f and the small winning scenario table 2202g are changed.

FIG. 91(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 91(b), the RAM 203 of the second embodiment has a special figure special fluctuation counter 203t and a normal figure special fluctuation counter 203u added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. .

Next, with reference to Drawing 92 (a), the 1st small hit classification selection table 202c in a 2nd embodiment is explained. FIG. 92(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small winning type selection table 202c in the second embodiment. The 1st small hit type selection table 202c has a special figure 1 type selection table 2202c1 and a special figure 2 type selection table 2202c2 in which a small hit type different from the above-described first embodiment is defined. .

FIG. 92(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table 2202c1 of the second embodiment. The special figure 1 type selection table 2202c1 is different from the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 of the first embodiment described above, with the point that the small hit D and the small hit E are added as the small hit type, and various small hit types The difference is that the value of the small hit type counter value set is changed, and other configurations are the same as the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 of the first embodiment described above, and the detailed description is omitted. .

As shown in FIG. 92(a), when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a small hit, the small hit when the random number is "0 to 34" in the small hit type counter C5 The type is "small hit A". Further, when the random number is "35 to 40", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number is "41 to 390", the small hit type is "small hit C". Further, when the random number is "391 to 395", the small hit type is "small hit D". Further, when the random number is "396 to 398", the small hit type is "small hit E".

Here, among the small winning types, the "small winning D" and "small winning E" added in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92(b). First, when "small hit D" is selected, as an opening pattern in which it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable prize winning device, the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened at 0.1 during the small winning game. An opening scenario is set in which the second opening operation is performed twice, and "jackpot D" is set as the jackpot type given when passing through the V discharge channel 650e3, which is a specific area (when passing V). . Further, a game state in which a special variation pattern, which will be described later, is set as a variation pattern of the special symbols, is provided until the variation display of the special symbols is executed eight times after the small winning game of the small winning D is finished.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96, but when a special variation pattern is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. , it is possible to execute the variable display of the special symbols a plurality of times in a short time. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the small winning game multiple times within the operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d operates, and the timing of opening the door 650 of the second variable winning device 650 by the small winning game is determined. It can be made different with respect to the operation period in which the V gate 650d operates. In other words, it means that the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened at the same timing (for example, the timing at which the V gate 650d is in the regulated state) with respect to the operation period of the V gate 650d for the small winning games that have occurred a plurality of times. can be prevented.

By configuring in this way, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the frequent occurrence of small winning games at the timing when V passage is impossible (difficult).

Further, when the "small win E" is selected, the "jackpot D" is set as the opening pattern similar to the above-described "small win D" and the big win type given when the V is passed. Furthermore, after the small winning game E is completed, a game state in which a special variation pattern, which will be described later, is set as a variation pattern of the normal symbols, is provided until the variation display of the normal symbols is performed three times.

The normal symbol variation pattern (variation time) is set to 180 seconds in the normal game state (S1017 in FIG. 99), but is set to 0.5 seconds when the special variation pattern is set. As a result, the normal symbols are easily hit in the normal game state, so that the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entry device 640 is easily opened, and the game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance B640b. becomes.

As a result, normally, the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance B640b in the normal game state in which the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are alternately held and stored by the first ball entering device 64. Thus, it is possible to continuously hold and store the special symbols 2. - 特許庁Special symbol 2 is set to have a high ratio of selecting small win A, which is a small win that makes it easy to enter the ball into the second variable winning device, relative to special symbol 1 (Fig. 92 (b), ( c)), it is possible to provide a state in which it is easy for a player to receive a big win via a small win.

In addition, in the present second embodiment, the contents of the operation scenarios (small winning scenarios) of small winning A to small winning C are different from those of the above-described first embodiment. A detailed description of the operation scenario will be given later with reference to FIG. 93, but the small winning scenario a2 corresponding to the small winning A requires a smaller winning game than the small winning scenario a used in the above-described first embodiment. The time is defined to be short, and the small winning scenario b2 corresponding to the small winning B or the small winning C is so that the time required for the small winning game is shorter than the small winning scenario b used in the above-described first embodiment. stipulated.

FIG. 92(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table 2202c2 of the second embodiment. The special figure 2 type selection table 2202c2 is, with respect to the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 of the first embodiment described above, the point that the small hit D and the small hit E are added as the small hit type, and various small hit types The difference is that the value of the small hit type counter value set is changed, and the other configuration is the same as the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 of the first embodiment described above, and the detailed description is omitted. .

As shown in FIG. 92 (c), when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a small hit, the small hit when the random number is "0 to 85" in the small hit type counter C5 The type is "small hit A". Further, when the random number is "86 to 90", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number is "91 to 390", the small hit type is "small hit C". Further, when the random number is "391 to 395", the small hit type is "small hit D". Further, when the random number is "396 to 398", the small hit type is "small hit E".

As described above, also in the second embodiment, the ratio of selecting the small hit A, which is a small hit that the ball is likely to win in the second variable winning device 650, is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. is set.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202e in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93(a). FIG. 93(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e in the second embodiment. The variation pattern selection table 202e includes a large winning variation pattern selection table 2202e1 that defines variation patterns different from those of the first embodiment, a loss variation pattern selection table 2202e2, and a small winning variation pattern selection table 2202e3. have.

Although detailed description of each variation pattern table will be described later, the variation pattern table used in the second embodiment is the variation pattern table used in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a special variation D is added to be selected in , and that special variations A to D cannot be selected.

FIG. 93(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern selection table 2202e1. Various jackpot variation patterns are selected from the jackpot variation pattern selection table 2202e1 based on whether a special variation pattern is set and the value of the variation type counter CS1. The special variation pattern setting is provided after the completion of the small winning D when the small winning D is selected as a result of the lottery of the special symbols, and when the special variation pattern is set, the value of the variation type counter CS1. Regardless, the special variation D (1 second) is selected.

FIG. 93(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation variation pattern selection table 2202e2. Like the above-described jackpot variation pattern selection table 2202e1, the winning variation pattern selection table 2202e2 is configured so that various jackpot variation patterns are selected based on whether or not a special variation pattern is set and the value of the variation type counter CS1. ing. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning variation pattern selection table 2202e3. The small winning variation pattern selection table 2202e3, like the large winning variation pattern selection table 2202e1 described above, is configured so that various large winning variation patterns are selected based on the presence or absence of special variation pattern settings and the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the small hit D is won, a predetermined period after the end of the small hit game (in the second embodiment, until the special symbol fluctuates 8 times) Special fluctuation A pattern is set, and it is configured so that the variation of the special symbol can be executed a plurality of times in a short period (a period of one operation cycle of the V gate).

Therefore, the small winning game can be executed a plurality of times within a short period of time, and the ball can flow down to the specific area in the small winning game at different timings with respect to the operation cycle of the V gate.

Next, the small winning scenario table 2202g in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95(a). FIG. 95(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning scenario table 2202g in the second embodiment. In the small winning scenario table 2202g, the small winning scenario a202g1 is changed to the small winning scenario a2202g1, and the small winning scenario b202g2 is changed to the small winning scenario b2202g2 with respect to the small winning scenario table 202g of the first embodiment described above. , and a small winning scenario b2202g2 is defined as a selection scenario corresponding to the small winning D and the small winning E, and the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The small winning scenario a2202g1 differs from the small winning scenario a202g1 of the first embodiment in that the interval between each scenario is shortened, and the contents of each scenario are the same. The interval of each scenario will be described with reference to FIG. 95(b).

FIG. 95(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning scenario a2202g1. In the small winning scenario a2202g1, the opening period is shortened to 0.1 seconds with respect to the small winning scenario a202g1, and in the ending period, the period from the execution of the V passage determination to the end of the ending is 0.1 seconds. , and the duration of the entire scenario is specified to be 2.7 seconds. In addition, since the period during which the door solenoid 650f2 is set to ON is the same as the small winning scenario a202g1 of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

By defining in this way, in the small winning game in which the small winning scenario a2202g1 is selected, the small winning game is executed for 2.7 seconds.

FIG.95(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of small hit scenario b2202g2. In the small winning scenario b2202g2, the number of times the door opens and closes is reduced by 1 to 2, the opening period is shortened to 0.1 seconds, and out of the ending period, The period from the execution of the V passage determination to the end of the ending is shortened to 0.1 second. Since other configurations are the same as those of the small winning scenario b202g2 of the first embodiment described above, description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the game time during the small winning game is 2.7 seconds for the small winning A, and 2.5 seconds for the small winning B to E. Execute the game. By configuring in this way, it is configured so as to be able to execute more special symbol variations in a short period of time.

In addition, in the second embodiment, although the small winning game time is set in advance, the game time of the small winning game may be changed according to the game state. For example, the length of the opening period or the ending period during the small winning game may be changed depending on whether the game state is the normal game state or the time saving game state.

Next, the operation cycle of the V gate 650d and the timing of the special symbol game executed by the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the timing of the special symbol game and the operation of the V gate 650d when the normal variation pattern is selected in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96(a), in the second embodiment, the V gate 650d is variably controlled so that one operation cycle is 10 seconds. On the other hand, as a result of the lottery for the special symbols, the shortest variation pattern selected when the small hit A is won is 10 seconds (see FIG. 94). Then, when the small win A is won, a small win scenario a2 is set in which the game time is defined to be 2.7 seconds (see FIG. 95(b)).

In the second embodiment configured in this manner, a plurality of small winning A games are not executed within one operating cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled in the normal gaming state, that is, It is configured so that the ball does not reach the V gate 650d multiple times within one operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled.

Figure 96 (b), when the special variation pattern in the second embodiment is selected, that is, as a result of the special symbol lottery, winning the small hit D, the special symbol in the case of executing the special symbol special variation 6 is a timing chart schematically showing the timing of a game and the operation of V gate 650d.

As shown in FIG. 96(b), as a result of the special symbol (special figure) lottery by the main controller 110, when the small winning D is won, after the small winning D game is executed for 2.5 seconds, the special figure A special variation is performed. As for this special symbol special variation, the special variation D with variation time of 1 second is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 93(a) to (b) and FIG. 94). Therefore, the V gate 650d is made possible to perform a plurality of special figure fluctuations within one operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when a small hit A is won, a small win scenario a2 in which the game time is defined to be 2.7 seconds is set (see FIG. 95(b)), so V Within one operating cycle (10 seconds) in which the gate 650d is variably controlled, a plurality of small winning A games are configured to be executable.

As a result, the small hit A game is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (in this embodiment, the period in which the special figure fluctuates 8 times) during which the special figure special variation is performed, so that the operation cycle of the V gate 650d On the other hand, it is possible to execute a small winning game at different timings. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit A game will pass through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5).

In addition, in the second embodiment, by enabling execution of a plurality of small winning games within the operating cycle (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d, the V gate 650d is variably controlled in one operating cycle (10 Seconds), the ball reaches the V gate 650d at a plurality of timings. In addition, it is only necessary to provide multiple timings for the ball to reach the V gate 650d. For example, in the case where there are a plurality of small wins with different timings for the balls to reach the V gate 650d, even if the small wins are not executed a plurality of times within the operating cycle (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d, The small win may be set so that the ball reaches the V gate 650d multiple times within the operation period (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d.

As described above, in the second embodiment, a period during which a plurality of small hits are advantageously executed (a period during which a special figure special variation is executed) is provided based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, when the player wins the small winning game a plurality of times, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state than when the player wins the small winning game alone, and wins the small winnings continuously. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to this.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result (small hit D), a specific game state (special figure special fluctuation) is set. , When other specific conditions are satisfied, it may be configured to set the specific game state. For example, the specific game state may be set on the condition that the number of memory reservations of special symbols reaches the upper limit. Also, the specific game state may be set on the condition that the ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the special figure special fluctuation is configured to be set for a predetermined period (8 times), but instead of setting the predetermined period by the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, It may be configured so that the special figure special variation is set until it is executed. As a result, by executing the special figure special variation, it is possible to easily provide the player with a jackpot game.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. First, timer interrupt processing 2 executed by MPU 201 in main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process 2 in the second embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, like the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 34). It is a periodic process that is executed every

In timer interrupt processing 2 of the second embodiment, S101, S106, S108, and S109 each correspond to steps S101, S104, S106, and S108 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. , and S109 are executed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, based on the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol has become a specific lottery result (small hit D), the variation of the special symbol selected in the normal game state A transition to a specific game state in which a variation pattern (variation time) different from the pattern (variation time) is selected. ), the variation pattern of the special symbols is set so that the lottery of the special symbols with which the lottery result is a small win is executed a plurality of times.

As a result, a plurality of small winning games can be executed in one operation cycle of the V gate 650d, so that when a plurality of small winnings are won within a predetermined period (operation cycle of the V gate 650d). Furthermore, the opening timing of the door 650f in the small winning game can be varied with respect to the operating cycle of the V gate 650d. Therefore, there is an effect that a game state (privilege) that is advantageous to the player can be easily awarded by frequent occurrence of small wins within a predetermined period.

In addition, in the second embodiment, based on the lottery result of the special symbol, a configuration is used in which the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected special symbol is changed. Other configurations may be used. For example, when the special symbol lottery result is a predetermined lottery result, the operation period of the V gate 650d may be set to be longer than the normal operation period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a small winning game a plurality of times within a predetermined period (operation cycle of the V gate 650d) without using a configuration for changing the variation pattern of the selected special symbol. be able to.

Furthermore, when lengthening the operation period of the V gate 650d, it is preferable to extend the period in which the V gate 650d is in the inductive state (open state). As a result, the ratio of the induction state (open state) in one operation cycle of the V gate 650d can be increased, and when a small winning game is executed a plurality of times within one operation cycle, V There is an effect that the possibility of becoming a passable small win can be increased.

Also, by similarly shortening the playing time of the small winning game, within a predetermined period (the operation cycle of the V gate 650d), it may be configured so that the small winning game can be executed a plurality of times. In this case, it is preferable to set the small winning game so that the period during which the specific door 650f is closed, that is, the small winning opening period and the small winning ending period are shortened in the small winning game. By doing so, the time of the entire small winning game is shortened, but the time of the period during which the specific door 650f is opened (the period during which the ball can win in the second specific winning opening 650a) is not changed. That is, it is possible to increase the ratio of the time during which the ball can win in the second specific winning opening 650a in the entire time of the small winning game, and the small winning game is executed a plurality of times within one operation cycle. In this case, there is an effect that the possibility of executing a small winning game that can pass V can be increased.

Furthermore, the second embodiment has two game states (normal game state and time-saving game state) in which the ratio of the special symbol lottery result to a specific lottery result (small hit D) is different, and the normal game When the lottery result of the special pattern satisfies a predetermined condition in the state (by executing the time-saving jackpot), the state is shifted to the time-saving game state in which the probability of obtaining the specific lottery result is higher than that of the normal game state. It is

By constructing in this way, the player can play the game with two types of game characteristics, that is, the game in which the special pattern is drawn and the game in which the ball passes through the specific area. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation of getting tired.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, in the normal gaming state, two entrances (first entrance 64a and second entrance 64a) with different ratios of special symbol lottery results to specific lottery results (small hit D) Since it has a configuration (first ball entry device 64) that alternately enters balls into the ball opening A 64b), in the normal game state, whether the next prize won after winning the "small win A" is a special figure 1 Since the degree of expectation that "small win A" will be won continuously changes depending on whether it is special figure 2, it is possible to provide a new game property of making "small win A" win continuously for the player. It becomes possible, and there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

Also in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the sound lamp control device 114 performs the same control as in the above-described first embodiment, but the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (small winning D ), and while the special variation pattern is being executed as the special symbol variation pattern, the special variation D (variation time: 1 second) is set as the special variation pattern regardless of the special symbol lottery result. Therefore, in the above-described first embodiment, it was configured to execute continuous production when the small hits continued, but in the second embodiment, the continuous production is always performed during the period in which the special variation pattern is set. can be configured to run.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 108. FIG. In the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, the winning information (ball winning information) based on the ball entering the first special symbol and the winning information (ball winning information) based on the ball entering the second special symbol are stored. , is changed in the order in which the ball was entered (in the order in which it was retained and stored) (so-called entry order digestion). On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the winning information (ball winning information) based on the winning ball to the second special symbol is given priority over the winning information (ball winning information) based on the ball winning to the first special symbol. It is different in that it uses a configuration that dynamically changes (so-called special figure 2 priority digestion).

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is changed, and the ROM of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores and the contents of the RAM of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 102, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 102 is a front view of the game board 13 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 102, the game board 13 of the third embodiment is different in that the first ball entrance 1064 is replaced with the first ball entrance device 64 . Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The first ball entrance 1064 is a ball entrance for obtaining first special symbol entrance information when a ball enters.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
First, ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 103(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As for ROM202 of this 3rd execution form, with respect to the constitution of ROM202 in 1st execution form, the value of 1st per random number table 202a and 1st small per classification selection table 202c is changed.

FIG. 103(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 103(b), the RAM 203 of the third embodiment has a variation execution flag 203j, a variation order storage area 203k, and a special figure 2B validity period flag 203r in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. , and the effective period measuring counter 203s are deleted.

Next, the first winning random number table 3202a in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 3202a. The first per random number table 3202a is different from the first per random number table 202a of the first embodiment described above in the value of the small hit determination value. Although the same small hit determination value is defined in FIG. 2, each has a different determination value in the first hit random number table 3202a.

First, the small hit determination value for special figure 1 is "1". Therefore, as a result of the special symbol lottery based on the special figure 1, the probability of a small hit is set to be "1/400". Next, the small hit determination value for special figure 2 is "1 to 398". Therefore, as a result of the special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2, the probability of becoming a small hit is set to be "398/400".

By configuring in this way, it is difficult to win a small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1, and it is possible to make it easier to win a small win in the lottery of the special figure 2, and the game state in which the special figure 2 is changed is changed to the special figure. It is possible to create a game state more advantageous to the player than the game state in which 1 is varied.

Next, with reference to Drawing 105, the 1st small hit classification selection table 202c in a 3rd embodiment is explained. Figure 105 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small per type selection table 202c in the third embodiment, Figure 105 (b) shows the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table 3202c1 It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, FIG. 105 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table 3202c2.

As shown in FIGS. 105(a) and 105(b), in the third embodiment, the rate at which the small win A that gives the player an advantage is selected is It is lowered in the special figure 1 type selection table 3202c1.

As described above, in the third embodiment, in the lottery based on the variation of the special figure 1, both the probability of becoming a small hit and the selection ratio of the small hit A when winning the small hit are Since it is lower than the lottery based on the variation of 2, the game state in which the special figure 2 is varied is configured to be a game state more advantageous to the player than the game state in which the special figure 1 is varied.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, control processing of the main controller in the third embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. In the third embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) is changed to the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 106), and the start winning process ( 39) is changed to the starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 107). Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. In the special symbol variation process 3 in the third embodiment, processes from S271 to S274 are added to the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment. As for other processing, the same processing as in the first control example is executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S202, when it is determined that the present is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is obtained (S271). Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S272).

In the process of S272, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S272: Yes), the process proceeds to S211. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not greater than 0 (S272: No), then the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed. Acquire (S273).

Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S274). Here, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S274: Yes), the process proceeds to S207. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not greater than 0 (S274: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the special symbol variation processing 3 explained above, when the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S272: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1 ) Regardless, the variation based on the special symbol 2 is executed (so-called special symbol 2 priority).

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the starting winning process 2 will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the details of the starting winning process 2 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The starting winning process 2 in the third embodiment is different from the starting winning process in the first embodiment in the process related to the variation order storage area 203k and the starting winning process related to the second special symbol. As for other processing, the same processing as in the first control example is executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the start winning process is executed, first, the processes of S651 to S657 are executed. These processes are the same processes as S601 of the starting winning process (see FIG. 39) and S701 to S706 of the special figure 1 starting winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above, so the detailed description omitted.

Next, it is determined whether the ball has entered the second ball entrance (S658). In the third embodiment, there is one ball entrance (second ball entrance) that acquires the winning information (ball entrance information) of the second special symbol by entering the ball. Different from the embodiment. In the processing of S658, if it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entrance (start winning) (S658: Yes), then the processing of S659 to S663 is executed. In addition, the processing of S659 to S663 executed in the third embodiment is the same processing as the processing of S805 to S809 of the special figure 2 start winning process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment described above , the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, after executing the process of S663, the same prefetching process (S604) as the prefetching process (S604) executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment described above is executed (S664), and this process is executed. finish.

As described above, in the third embodiment, since the configuration is used to preferentially vary the winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the variation based on the winning information of the special figure 2 is continuously can be executed by In the lottery based on the special figure 2, the ratio of winning the small hit A is set higher than the lottery based on the special figure 1, so the game state (normal game state) in which it is difficult to enter the second special symbol. It is possible to set a game state (so-called time-saving game state) in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to set a game state in which it is difficult to win the small win A and a game state in which it is easy to win the small win A.

It should be noted that, as in the third embodiment, in the case of using a configuration in which the second special symbol is preferentially changed, in order to execute the continuous effect of the first embodiment described above, the ball holding the second special symbol It is sufficient to configure so as to execute the processing related to the continuous effect only for the target. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed in the order in which the ball is entered (so-called winning order digestion), and the winning received from the main controller 110 Since the special symbols are changed in the order of command processing, in the winning command reception process, all winning commands (winning command based on special symbol 1 or winning command based on special symbol 2) was running (see FIG. 59).

However, in the third embodiment, since the second special symbol is preferentially varied, the special symbols are varied in an order different from the processing order of the winning command received from the main controller 110. may be Therefore, when adopting a configuration that preferentially executes a variation based on one special design among a plurality of special designs as in the third embodiment, it corresponds to the special design on the side that is preferentially executed. It is only necessary to execute the processing related to the continuous effect only for the winning commands to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a continuous effect similar to that of the above-described first embodiment.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the normal game state (see FIG. 104) in which it is difficult to win a small hit in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly executed, and the second special symbol (special figure 2 ) in which the lottery is mainly executed and it is easy to win a small win (see FIG. 104). A pass detection switch 650e5) provided in the device 650 is configured to be able to provide a small hit game in which the ball easily passes.

As a result, in the normal game state, the frequent execution of the small winning game is suppressed, and in the time saving game state in which the small winning game is frequently executed, the small winning game is executed a plurality of times, It is possible to provide a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the player wins the small win game a plurality of times, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state than when the player wins the small win game alone, and the player wins the small wins continuously. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to this. In addition, the configuration of the special figure special variation used in the above-described second embodiment may be used in the third embodiment.

<Modification 1 in the third embodiment>
Next, Modification 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In Modification 1, the board configuration of the game board 13 is changed from that of the above-described third embodiment. In this modification 1, the second ball entry device 1640 is arranged below the first ball entry port 1064, and the second variable winning device 650 is arranged below the second ball entry device 640. It differs from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the third embodiment in that through gates 67 are arranged on the left and right sides of the board 13, respectively. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The second ball-entering device 1640 used in Modification 1 is provided with a second ball-entering port 1640b (not shown) accompanied by an electric accessory 1640a (not shown). The electric accessory 1640a differs from the electric accessory 640a described above in that it has two movable pieces (a right movable piece and a left movable piece) that are driven when the opening operation is executed. , is the same as the second ball-entering device 640 used in the above-described first embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

According to the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of Modification 1, even when a game (ordinary game) aimed at the left side area of the game board 13 is being performed, it is possible to pass the ball through the through gate 67, and It is configured such that a ball can be entered into the second ball entering device 640 even when a normal game is being played.

By configuring in this way, for example, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the normal game state, and the normal symbol lottery is executed. Then, when a win is won in the normal pattern lottery, the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entry device 640 is released, and the ball is entered into the second ball entry port 1640b of the second ball entry device 1640 (start winning ).

And, in the present modification 1, as in the above-described third embodiment, the second special symbol is preferentially varied, so the game state in which the variation of the second special symbol is continuously executed in the normal game state can be provided. Furthermore, since the lottery of the second special symbol has a higher probability of winning the small hit A than the lottery of the first special symbol, if the variation of the second special symbol is continuously executed, the small It is possible to increase the possibility of winning the winning A continuously.

As a result, even if the game state is the state of the normal game, the player is provided with a game that increases the possibility of continuously winning the small win A by winning the win in the lottery of the normal symbols. There is an effect that it becomes possible to play the game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the board surface configuration of the game board 13 used in the present modification 1, the second variable prize winning device 650, which is in an open state in which the ball can win a prize when a small win is won, is arranged at the lower center of the game board 13. By playing a game (ordinary game) aiming at the left area of the game board 13, the ball can reach the second variable winning device 650. FIG.

This eliminates the need for the player to play the right-handed game even if he or she wins a small win. In addition, when a small winning game is executed, it is not necessary to notify the player of prompting the right-handed game by the third symbol display device 81 or the like. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that he or she has won a small prize, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to winning a plurality of small prizes.

It should be noted that the board configuration of the game board 13 used in Modification 1 may be applied to the above-described first embodiment or second embodiment, or instead of various controls executed in the third embodiment, Various controls executed in the above-described first embodiment or second embodiment may be applied.

<Regarding modification 2 in the third embodiment>
Next, modification 2 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a front view showing the game board 13 in Modification 2. As shown in FIG. In Modification 2, the board configuration of the game board 13 is changed from that of the above-described third embodiment. In Modification 2, a winning unit 710 (see FIG. 110) having a third variable winning device 700 is arranged in the right area of the game board 13, and a first variable winning device 65 is arranged below the winning unit 710. However, it differs from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the third embodiment in that a second ball-entering device 640 is arranged on the downstream side thereof. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals will be given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Next, an overview of the winning unit 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 110. FIG. FIG. 110 is a front view schematically showing the internal structure of the winning unit 710. FIG. In order to explain the internal structure of the winning unit 710, FIG. 110 schematically shows only the main structure with the cover member removed.

First, as shown in FIG. 109, most of the game balls that have entered the right area of the game board 13 pass through the opening 710a of the winning unit 710. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 110, the prize winning unit 710 includes a first flow-down path 711a having a first discharge port 711 for discharging the balls that have passed through the opening 710a onto the game board 13, and the balls that have passed through the opening 710a. It has a second flow path 712a having a second discharge port 712 that is discharged onto the board 13, and a third variable winning device 700 that is configured so that the ball flowing down the second flow path 712a can win a prize, Based on the operation of the opening/closing member 700b (see FIG. 110) of the third variable winning device 700, the balls passing through the opening 710a are configured to flow down their respective paths.

The third variable prize winning device 700 is configured to allow a ball to enter when the special symbol lottery result is a small win, and when a small win game is executed, the opening/closing member 700b is operated. The first opening 700a1 and the second opening 700a2 of the 3-variable winning device 700 are respectively changed to a state in which the ball can win. A winning ball in the third variable winning device 700 is configured to pass through a specific area (passage detection switch 700 c 2 ) provided in the third variable winning device 700 or the normal ejection path 703 .

In addition, in this modification 2, it is different from the above-described third embodiment in that the variation time of 1 second is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (not shown). figure).

Next, the winning unit 710 will be described with reference to FIG. The opening 710a of the prize winning unit 710 is an opening having an opening width of one ball, and is formed at a position through which most of the balls shot to the right side area of the game board 13 pass. A second opening/closing member 700b3 is provided at a position below the opening 710a (the position reached by the ball passing through the opening 710a). The second opening/closing member 700b3 switches between a state (open state) in which a ball can pass through the first flow path 711a or a state (closed state) in which it is difficult for a ball to pass through, and a state of the first flow path 711a. is configured to be variable.

The second opening/closing member 700b3 is configured to follow the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 700b, which will be described later. 700b3 is configured to be movable back and forth. The second opening/closing member 700b3 is composed of a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board side, and in the closed state, the first flow path 711a is completely covered by the second opening/closing member 700b3. The upper surface of the second opening/closing member 700b3 has an inclined surface on which the ball flows down toward the second flow path 712a (left side in front view in FIG. 110) in the closed state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 111, a mechanism for opening and closing the second opening/closing member 700b3 will be described. FIG. 111(a) is a plan view schematically showing the winning unit 710 in a state where the second opening/closing member 700b3 is closed (state when the small winning game is not executed), and FIG. It is a plan view schematically showing the winning unit 710 in a state in which the second opening and closing member 700b3 is open (state during execution of a small winning game).

As shown in FIG. 111(a), the opening/closing member 700b of the third variable winning device 700 is configured to be movable in the forward and backward direction of the game board 13 by means of an opening/closing member solenoid 700g. In this state, the opening/closing member 700b projects forward from the game board 13 (the state shown in FIG. 111(a)), and when the opening/closing member driving solenoid 700g is set to ON, the opening/closing member 700b moves toward the game board. 13 is retracted rearward (the state shown in FIG. 111(b)).

Among the opening/closing members 700b, a plurality of protrusions are provided on one end side (the side facing the second opening/closing member) of the first opening/closing member 700b2. A transmission member 700b4 having an engaging portion with which the plurality of projections can be engaged is provided. The transmission member 700b4 is rotatably pivoted with respect to the winning unit 710. As shown in FIG. In addition, the second opening/closing member 700b3 is provided with a plurality of protrusions on one end side (the side facing the opening/closing member), and is provided at a position where the protrusions and the transmission member 700b4 described above are engaged.

Here, the operation of changing the second opening/closing member 700b3 with the operation of the opening/closing member 700b will be described with reference to FIG. For example, when the opening/closing member 700b is changed from the protruded state (the state shown in FIG. 111(a)) to the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 111(b)), the transmission Member 700b4 rotates (rotates to the right as viewed from the viewpoint of FIG. 111). As the transmission member 700b4 rotates, the second opening/closing member 700b3 engaged with the transmission member 700b4 moves in the direction of projecting to the front side of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. In other words, the opening/closing member 700b and the second opening/closing member 700b3 are driven by the opening/closing member driving solenoid 700g, which is a single driving source, to opposite positions, that is, when the opening/closing member 700b protrudes, the second opening/closing member 700b3 retracts. However, when the opening/closing member 700b is retracted, it is mechanically configured by the transmission member 700b4 so that the second opening/closing member 700b3 protrudes.

Returning to FIG. 110, the description continues. The second flow-down path 712a, in which the ball that has flowed down the upper surface of the second opening/closing member 700b3 is guided, has an inlet portion and an outlet portion formed by the upper surface of the opening/closing member 700b. It is configured.

This detour 710b is a passage provided for extending the flow time of the ball flowing down the second flow path 712a (reducing the flow speed), and the time for the ball to pass through the second flow path 712a is 2. It is designed to be seconds. During this time, when the small wins are won consecutively, the ball that passed through the second flow path 712a during the previously executed small win enters the second opening 700a2 during the later executed small win. It is the time when the ball becomes possible.

That is, in the present modification 2, since the variation time of the special symbol in which the lottery result is a small hit is 1 second, when the consecutive small wins are won, the second flow path during the previously executed small win The ball that passed through 712a (entered the second flow path 712a during the ending period of the small hit (see FIG. 15 (b))) has a special symbol fluctuation time (1 second) corresponding to the small hit and during the small hit After an opening period (0.1 seconds), the ball can be entered into the second opening 700a2.

In addition, the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit and the ball passage time of the second flow path 712a are not limited to the time set in this modification, and when the small hit is won continuously , The ball that entered the second flow-down path 712a during the previous small win (the ball that reached the third variable winning device 700 at the timing when the opening and closing member 700b closed during the small win (during the small win ending)) It suffices if the time for winning the third variable prize winning device 700 in the later small prize is set. For example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is set to 4 seconds and the opening period during the small hit is set to 1 second, the ball passing time of the second flow path 712a is 5.5 Seconds (4 seconds of fluctuation time, 1 second of opening period, and part of the ending time (0.5 seconds) during the previous small win) may be set.

Here, the second flow-down path 712a will be described with reference to FIG. 111(a). As described above, the inlet and outlet of the second flow-down path 712a are formed by the opening/closing member 700b, and as shown in FIG. It is configured as a flowable route. In this state, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the first opening/closing portion 700b1 of the opening/closing member 700b flows down to the detour 710b.

The detour 710b is formed by the first side wall 710b1, the second side wall 710b2, the third side wall 710b3, and the bottom member as a path along which the sphere flows down in a meandering manner. A specific configuration of the detour 710b will be described below. It should be noted that, in principle, words indicating directions used in the concrete description indicate directions when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front. The ball that has entered the second flow-down path 712a first collides with the right side surface of the first side wall 710b1 (the right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 111). The bottom portion where the right side of the first side wall 710b1 is arranged is inclined in the depth direction of the game board 13 (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 111), and the ball that collides with the right side of the first side wall 710b1 It flows down in the depth direction of the game board 13 and collides with the right end side of the second side wall 710b2. The bottom portion where the right end side of the second side wall 710b2 is arranged is inclined to the left of the game board 13 (leftward from the viewpoint of FIG. 111), and the ball that collides with the right end side of the second side wall 710b2 It flows down toward the left side of the game board 13 through the back channel. As described above, the detour 710b used in the present embodiment is configured such that the downward direction of the ball is changed to a substantially right angle due to the inclination of the bottom surface and the side walls, so that the downward flow (rolling) of the ball is prevented. A longer distance can be set.

Note that the detour 710b may be configured using a configuration other than the configuration of the detour 710b described above. It may be composed of one member, and each side wall may be configured to form an obtuse angle with respect to the flowing direction of the sphere. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the detour 710b can be simplified, although the downflow (rolling distance) of the ball cannot be set as long as the configuration of the detour 710b used in the present embodiment. It becomes possible.

The configuration of the detour 710b described above may be appropriately selected according to the space for disposing the detour 710b and the required falling (rolling) distance of the ball.

The ball that has flowed down the detour 710b flows down the upper surface of the second opening/closing member 700b3 of the opening/closing member 700b that constitutes the outlet of the second flow-down path 712a, passes through the second outlet 712 (see FIG. 110), and is played. It is discharged to the board 13.

Returning to FIG. 110, the description continues. The first opening/closing portion 700b1 forming the inlet portion of the second flow path 712a is designed to have a shorter opening width (the distance the ball flows down) than the second opening/closing portion 700b2 forming the outlet portion. The first opening/closing part 700b1 is designed to have an opening width of 15 mm, and the second opening/closing part 700b2 is designed to have an opening width of 45 mm.

With this configuration, the number of balls rolling on the top surface of the second opening/closing portion 700b2 of the opening/closing member 700b is greater than the number of balls rolling on the top surface of the first opening/closing portion 700b1 of the opening/closing member 700b. be able to. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 700b is opened at a high speed (for example, 0.2 seconds), the second opening 700a2 covered by the second opening/closing portion 700b2 is larger than the first opening 700a1 covered by the first opening/closing portion 700b1. It is an opening that makes it easier for the ball to win.

Next, referring to FIG. 110, the structure of the third variable winning device 700 provided in the winning unit 710 will be described. The third variable prize winning device 700 has two openings (the first opening 700a1 and the second opening 700a2) as described above. An opening/closing member 700b that is variable in the front-rear direction is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can pass through its two openings and a closed state in which a ball cannot (difficultly) pass through.

The first opening 700a1 and the second opening 700a2 are configured to be changed between the open state and the closed state by one opening/closing member 700b, and the two openings can be changed between the open state and the closed state at the same timing. be done. It should be noted that portions of the opening/closing member 700b that cover the respective openings (the first opening/closing portion 700b1 and the second opening/closing portion 700b2) are configured to have different lengths in the front-rear direction of the game board 13. The timing at which each opening changes between the open state and the closed state may be varied depending on the operation.

For example, the first opening/closing portion 700b1 of the opening/closing member 700b covering the first opening 700a1 is longer than the second opening/closing portion 700b2 of the opening/closing member 700b covering the second opening 700a2. 2) is designed to delay the timing at which the first opening 700a1 changes from the closed state to the open state (the state in which the opening is not covered by the opening/closing member) relative to the second opening 700a2, and to delay the timing from the open state to the closed state. You may make it advance the timing which changes to a state.

By configuring in this way, the period in which the first opening 700a1 is open relative to the second opening 700a2 is shortened, so that the ease of winning of each opening can be made more different. There is

Returning to FIG. 110, the description continues. A ball winning from the first opening 700a1 of the third variable winning device 700 is detected by the detection switch 700f1, flows down the first winning path 700d1, and reaches the V gate 700c1. The first winning path 700d1 is constructed so that the ball passes through for about 1 second.

Next, a ball that has won a prize from the second opening 700a2 of the third variable prize winning device 700 is detected by the detection switch 700f2, flows down the second prize winning path 700d2, and then reaches the V gate 700c1. . Further, in order to reliably detect the winning ball from the second opening 700a2 by the detection switch 700f2, the width of the ball passage of the ball from the second opening 700a2 toward the detection switch 700f2 is narrowed. The opening width (approximately 45 mm) of the second opening 700a2 is configured to be the sphere passage width (13 mm) of the detection switch 700f2. In addition, the second winning path 700d2 is configured so that the ball travels for about 0.3 seconds.

Also, the above-described first winning path 700d1 and second winning path 700d2 are configured to merge on the V-gate 700c1 in the third variable winning device 700. FIG.

As with the V gate 650d of the first embodiment described above, the V gate 700c1 is configured to be variable between the induced state and the restricted state at regular intervals after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Since the detailed configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

If the V-gate 700c1 is in the guidance state (a state in which the V-gate 700c1 can pass through the specific area of the V-ejection path), the ball that reaches the V-gate 700c1 passes through the specific area (the detection switch 700c2) in the V-ejection path 704, Collected in the collection port. When the V-gate 700c1 is in a regulated state (impossible (difficult) to pass through the specific area of the V-discharge route), it rolls on the V-gate 700c1, passes through the normal discharge route 703, and is collected in the collection port. .

In the third variable prize winning device 700 configured in this way, when small wins are won in succession, the small wins executed later among the consecutive small wins have the first opening portion 700a1 and the second opening portion. A ball can be entered from both 700a2. Furthermore, since the ball entering from the first opening 700a1 and the ball entering from the second opening 700a2 have different times to reach the V gate 700c1, the ball entering from either opening It is possible to increase the probability that the sphere will pass through the V gate 700c1. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state when the small wins are won successively than when the small wins are won singly. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to consecutive small winnings.

The configuration of the winning unit 710 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. Next, the flow of balls in the winning unit 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112. FIG. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining ball flow according to the operating state (closed state or open state) of the opening/closing member (door) 700b of the third variable winning device 700 of the winning unit 710. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 112, when the opening/closing member (door) 700b of the third variable prize winning device 700 is closed (closed state), the second opening/closing member 700b3 moves the ball through the first flow path (discharge path) 711a. A passable open state is established, and the ball that has entered the winning unit 710 passes through the first flow-down path (discharge path) 711 a and is discharged to the game board 13 .

In addition, in the state (closed state) where the opening/closing member (door) 700b of the third variable prize winning device 700 is closed (closed state), the ball flowing down on the first opening/closing portion (front door) 700b1 flows down to the detour 710b. . After passing through the detour 710 b , the ball flows down the upper surface of the second opening/closing portion 700 b 2 and is discharged to the game board 13 through the second discharge port 712 .

Next, when the opening/closing member (door) 700b of the third variable prize winning device 700 is open (open state), the second opening/closing member (guide plate) 700b3 allows the ball to pass through the first flow-down path (discharge path) 711a. The ball enters the winning unit 710 in a closed state where it cannot pass, and flows down the second opening/closing member (guide plate) 700b3 toward the first opening 700a1 of the third variable winning device 700. FIG.

Since the opening/closing member (door) 700b is in the open state, the ball that has flowed down to the first opening 700a1 wins the first opening 700a1. Also, the ball passing through the detour 710b also wins the second opening 700a2.

As described above, the third variable prize winning device 700 used in the present modified example 2, while the ball that failed to win from the first opening 700a1 flows down the detour 710b, the next small win Since the 3-variable winning device 700 is opened again, the ball flowing down the detour 710b can win from the second opening 700a2. With this configuration, when small wins occur frequently so that the third variable prize winning device 700 is continuously opened, balls flow down to both the first opening 700a1 and the second opening 700a2. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will win the third variable prize winning device 700 even if it is a small win that opens at high speed.

The difference between the ball passing time (about 1 second) on the first winning path 700d1 and the ball passing time on the second winning path 700d2 (about 0.3 seconds) should be within the period in which the V-gate 700c1 is in the guidance state. should be the difference between By configuring in this way, the possibility that a ball that has passed through either the first prize winning path 700d1 or the second prize winning path 700d2 will pass through the V gate 700c1 while the V gate 700c1 is in the guiding state is increased. It is possible to provide a more advantageous game state to the player.

In addition, since the opening width of the second opening is longer than the opening width of the first opening, the second opening is more likely to reach the third variable winning device 700 than the first opening. is a structure that makes it easy to win a prize. Therefore, it is possible to make the third variable prize winning device 700 in a state where the balls are likely to win when the small hits are consecutive.

Furthermore, in the normal game state in which the third variable prize winning device 700 does not operate, the opening/closing member 700b is closed and the second opening/closing member 700b3 is opened. The game ball flows down the first flow path 711 a and is discharged from the first discharge port 711 to the lower right area side of the game board 13 .

Therefore, in a game state other than the small win game, the ball shot to the right side area of the game board 13 by the player is suppressed (prohibited) from flowing down the second flow path 712a of the prize winning unit 710 . Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in a game state other than a small winning game (for example, a big winning game state), the ball flows down the second flow path 712a, suppressing the situation in which the flow time is delayed ( prohibited).

In addition, even if the right hitting game is performed in advance before the small winning game is executed, the ball does not flow down the second flow path 712a. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the execution of a game such as passing.

Furthermore, in the present modification 2, the second opening 700a2 where the ball winning from the second opening 700a2 flows down to the V gate 700c1 rather than the first winning path 700d1 where the ball winning from the first opening 700a1 flows down to the V gate 700c1. It is configured to shorten the passage time of the winning path 700d2. Therefore, the winning ball of the third variable prize winning device 700 can be made to flow down to the V gate 700c1 at different timings according to the winning opening, and the player can be given a big win in a small winning game. You can entertain whether or not.

In addition, for example, by configuring the period in which the V gate 700c1 is in an open state to be 0.5 seconds after the small winning game is executed, only the balls that have won from the second opening 700a2 are in the specific area ( It may be configured so that it can pass through the passage detection switch 700c2). By configuring in this way, small wins are continuously executed, and the ball can pass through the V gate 700c1 by creating a state in which the ball can pass through the second opening 700a2.

Further, the third variable prize winning device 700 used in Modification 2 has a first opening/closing portion 700b1 of an opening/closing member 700b and a second opening/closing member, as shown in FIG. 110 or FIG. 700b3 is configured to be less than one sphere. The gap may be covered by a guide plate on which balls can roll from the second opening/closing member 700b3 toward the opening/closing member 700b.

By doing so, during the small winning game, in the state where the opening and closing member 700b is open (the state where the second opening and closing member is closed), a plurality of balls rolling on the second opening and closing member are It is possible to flow down the opening/closing member 700b in a state in which the opening/closing member 700b is closed (a state in which the second opening/closing member is open).

In addition, in the present modified example 2, two openings (first opening 700a1 and second opening 700a2) are provided as a ball entering means for entering a ball into the third variable winning device 700. You may constitute a part into one. In this case, the second flow-down path 712a is configured so that the ball that did not enter the opening in the first small win among the consecutive small wins enters the opening in the later small win. Just do it. In this case, the second flow-down path 712a allows the ball to stay for a predetermined time (1 second in this modified example 2) until the next small hit is executed. should be configured to have

As described above, in the present modified example 2, when small wins are continuously executed, a game state is provided which is more advantageous than when a small win to be executed later is won alone. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to consecutive small winnings.

In addition, in the case of winning a series of small hits, it passed through the second flow path 712a during the previously executed small hit (the second flow path 712a during the ending period of the small hit (see FIG. 15(b)) A detour (guidance means) is provided so that the ball that has entered the second opening 700a2 can enter the second opening 700a2 during the small win executed after the special symbol variation time (1 second) corresponding to the small win. Therefore, it is possible to provide a more advantageous game state than when a small win to be executed later is won alone. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to consecutive small winnings.

Furthermore, in the present modified example 2, a small win can be executed a plurality of times at intervals shorter than the operating cycle of the V gate 700c1, which is the guiding means. Therefore, for example, when a small win is won three times in a row, by providing a game state in which the ball is likely to enter in the small wins (second and third times) to be executed later, When the V gate 700c1 is in the guiding state, it is possible to let the ball enter the third variable prize winning device, and the small win to be executed later is more advantageous than when the small win is won alone. The state can be provided, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play due to successive small winnings.

In addition, in this modification 2, a configuration is used in which the operation of the V gate 700c1 is always controlled at a constant cycle. It may be configured to execute for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the opening/closing member 700b of 700 is opened. By doing so, the balls flowing down the second flow-down path 712a can be awarded to the third variable prize winning device 700 immediately after the subsequent small wins are executed when the small wins are successively won. It becomes possible. Therefore, when small wins are executed continuously, it is possible to provide a more advantageous game state than when a small win to be executed later is won alone. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to consecutive small winnings.

In the present modified example 2 described above, the meandering detour 710b is used as the flowing-down period extending means for extending the flowing-down period of the ball in the second flowing-down path 712a, thereby extending the flowing-down distance of the ball to the second flow-down path 712a. Although it has been configured to extend the flow-down period of the flow-down path 712a, as another configuration for extending the flow-down distance of the ball, it is possible to use a Krun structure that causes the ball to flow down while rotating.

Further, as a method for extending the falling period of the ball, a configuration for reducing the falling speed of the ball may be used as a method other than the method for extending the falling distance of the ball. As such a configuration, for example, at least a part of the second flow-down path 712a is made of a material having a high coefficient of friction (urethane rubber, etc.) as a member capable of reducing the flow-down speed of the ball by friction generated between objects. In addition, by forming the ball rolling surface of the second flow-down path 712a roughly or by providing a protrusion, it is possible to reduce the flow rate between objects (the second The frictional force between the second flow path 712a and the ball) may be increased to reduce the flow speed of the ball.

Similar effects can be obtained by using such a configuration. In addition, in order to extend the flow period during which the ball flows down the second flow path 712a, both the flow distance extending means for extending the flow distance and the flow speed reduction means for reducing the flow speed of the ball may be used. good.

It should be noted that the board configuration of the game board 13 used in Modification 1 may be applied to the above-described first embodiment or second embodiment, or instead of various controls executed in the third embodiment, Various controls executed in the above-described first embodiment or second embodiment may be applied.

In each of the embodiments and modifications described above, output processing based on various determination processing is performed by the main controller 110, but all the output information is Also, even if the determination process is performed by a device other than the main controller 110, all information based on the determination result is output to the sound lamp control device 113 or the external output terminal board 261 It is configured to be possible. In addition, the output information can be identifiably notified to the outside. There is a connected display unit and the like.

It should be noted that the present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a variable machine) that shifts to a high-probability game state in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than normal once the jackpot hits once. In this case, a method of continuing the high-probability gaming state that shifts after the big hit until the next big hit, a method of continuing until the number of times the special symbols change reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), or a method of continuing until the special symbols change A lottery for shifting from the high-probability game state to the normal game state is performed, and if the lottery is won, the system shifts to the normal game state, but any pachinko machine may be implemented. It should be noted that, when the transition to the high probability gaming state, in addition to the high probability of the jackpot probability, the variation time of the special design is shortened, the probability of winning the normal design is high, the variation time of the normal design is It may be implemented in a pachinko machine that shortens or changes the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means that is variable when winning a lottery with normal symbols. In addition, once the jackpot hits, the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2-time rights product, 3-time rights product, etc.) that increases the expected value of the jackpot until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including that. may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. In addition, a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and enters a special game state on the condition that a ball wins in the special area, and two special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2) ) are changed at the same time, and based on the result of the lottery for one of the special symbols, the lottery for the other special symbol may be invalidated or interrupted. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine due to separate handling of medals and balls.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

All or part of the above embodiments and modifications may be combined. Further, although the sub-controllers such as the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are used, all the functions may be integrated into the main controller 110 .

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Feature A group> (Make any of the small hits advantageous multiple times)
discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means; dynamic display means for statically displaying the identification information based on the result of determination by the dynamic display means, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the specific determination result is statically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means A privilege game execution means for executing a game, a specific area through which a ball can pass by satisfying a predetermined condition when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, and a ball passing through the specific area. and a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege advantageous to the player, in the case where the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a state where a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of times A gaming machine A1, characterized by comprising setting means for setting at least one privilege game among the privilege games to be executed so that a ball can pass through the specific area.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a variable winning device that is opened by a privilege game (small winning game, etc.), and a specific area provided in the variable winning device, in which a big winning game is executed by passing a ball. a guide member for guiding the ball to the specific area; and means for repeatedly controlling the guide member in a manner in which the ball easily passes through the specific area and in a mode in which the ball hardly passes through the specific area at a constant cycle, A pachinko machine has been proposed in which the occurrence of a large winning game in a specific small winning game is randomized by making the opening operation of the variable winning device based on the small winning game and the control operation of the induction member independent (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206309). In this case, the timing at which the variable winning device is opened by the small winning game and the timing at which the mode of the induction member changes are independent of each other, so at what timing did the ball win in the variable winning device? Although it is possible to provide the possibility of executing a jackpot game even as a There was a problem that it would drop. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player's desire to play from declining.

According to the gaming machine A1, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times while a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, at least one privilege game among the privilege games to be executed a plurality of times is selected by the setting means. is set so that the sphere can pass through the specific area. Thus, by winning the privilege game multiple times, it is possible to provide the player with an advantageous state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

The gaming machine A1 has variable ball entry means for changing from a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter to an open state in which a ball can enter, based on the execution of the privilege game, and the variable ball entry means. A game machine A2, wherein the specific area is provided in means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a specific area is provided inside the variable ball entry that changes to the open state based on the execution of the privilege game. As a result, it is possible to execute the game aiming at the specific area only when the privilege game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the game value for the privilege game, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In the game machine A2, a variable means provided in the variable ball entry means, capable of changing between an advantageous state in which the ball can easily pass through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which the ball cannot easily pass through the specific area, and variable control means for alternately varying the means between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state, wherein the predetermined condition is met when the variable means is varied to the advantageous state by the variable control means. A game machine A3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means variably controls the variable means between an advantageous state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through, and when the variable means is in an advantageous state, the ball can pass through the specific area. A predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, when the variable means is in an advantageous state, the ball that enters the variable ball entry means after the privilege game is executed can pass through the specific area, so that the degree of difficulty for the ball to pass through the specific area is increased. is possible, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A3, the variable control means performs variable control such that the variable means is repeatedly varied between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state at a predetermined cycle.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the variable control means repeatedly changes the variable means between an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state at a predetermined cycle, the timing at which the variable means changes to the advantageous state is made random with respect to the timing at which the privilege game is executed. becomes possible. Therefore, even if the ball enters the variable ball entering means at any timing, there is a possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area.

A gaming machine A5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the specific condition is established when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since a specific condition is satisfied when a plurality of privilege games are executed in a predetermined order, a new game feature is provided in which a player is provided with an advantageous state based on a plurality of determination results by the determination means. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order, in addition to the order in which the privilege game is continuously executed a plurality of times, the result of determination by the determination means while the privilege game is performed may be set in a predetermined order. By doing so, even if the result of discrimination by the discriminating means is a failure, there is a possibility that the player will be provided with an advantageous state, so that the player can always have expectations. has the effect of

A gaming machine A6 characterized in that, in the gaming machine A5, the predetermined order is that the privilege games are executed consecutively.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the specific condition is established by continuously executing the privilege game, even if the ball does not pass through the specific region when the privilege game is won, the privilege game is won again next time. For example, it is possible to make it easier for the sphere to pass through the specific area. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the bonus game is won a plurality of times.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A6, a ball entry means capable of entering a ball, a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring ball entry information based on the ball entering the ball entry means, and storage means for storing a plurality of entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied; further comprising a second specification condition as the specification condition; The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the condition is established when a predetermined number or more of the entering ball information are stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of pieces of ball-entering information acquired by the ball-entering information acquisition means based on the fact that a ball has entered the ball-entering means are stored in the storage means until the determination condition is satisfied. The second specific condition is established by storing a predetermined number or more of pieces of entering ball information in the storage means. As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to play a game so as to store a plurality of pieces of winning ball information in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines A4 to A7, the variable control means sets a third period, which is a combination of the first period in which the advantageous state is established and the second period in which the disadvantageous state is established, as one operation period. The setting means has dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game, and the dynamic display period setting means The one privilege is provided so that when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the one privilege game and any of the other privilege games are executed at different timings for the one operation period. A gaming machine A8 characterized by having a special dynamic display period setting means for setting a special dynamic display period as a dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to a game.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means variably controls the variable means with the third period, which is the combination of the first period in which the advantageous state and the second period in which the unfavorable state are combined, as one operation period. Then, the dynamic display period setting means sets the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game. Further, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times by the special dynamic display period setting means, one privilege game and any other privilege game are performed at different timings in one operation period. A special dynamic display period is set to run. By doing so, it is possible to set a privilege game that allows passing through the specific area and a privilege game that makes it difficult to pass through the specific area, depending on the dynamic display period to be executed. Therefore, by controlling the operation of the variable means and the variable ball entry means, the burden of processing related to the game can be reduced compared to the case of setting the privilege game that can pass through the specific area and the privilege game that is difficult to pass through the specific area. has the effect of being able to

Here, in the configuration provided with the gaming machine A6, among the continuously executed privilege games, the first privilege game (first privilege game (corresponding to any other privilege game)) On the other hand, the special dynamic display period is set so that the execution timing of the next privilege game (the second privilege game (corresponding to the privilege game of 1)) is different. That is, by setting the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the second privilege game to the special dynamic display period, the execution timing of the privilege games that are continuously executed is set to one operation period of the variable means. can be different. As a result, the target for setting the special dynamic display period is only the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game, so there is an effect that the program capacity for executing the game processing can be reduced.

In addition, in the configuration without the game machine A6, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display corresponding to the loss) executed while a plurality of privilege games are executed is also the special dynamic display period. is configured to be set. As a result, the number of dynamic displays for which the special dynamic display period is to be set is increased compared to the configuration provided with the game machine A6, but a state advantageous to the player is provided when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times. There is an effect that the number of patterns can be increased.

In the gaming machine A8, the special dynamic display period setting means sets the execution timing of the first privilege game relative to the execution timing of any of the other privilege games when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times. is set so that the special dynamic display period is different by a predetermined period equal to or less than the first period.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by setting the special dynamic display period, the execution timing of one privilege game is different from the execution timing of any other privilege game by a predetermined period equal to or less than the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. It becomes possible to Thereby, when the execution timing of one privilege game and the execution timing of any other privilege game are made different, the execution timing of each privilege game is set across the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent such a situation. Therefore, by winning the privilege game multiple times, it becomes easier to provide the player with an advantageous state, so that when the privilege game is won multiple times, the player's desire to play can be suppressed. effective.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the predetermined period equal to or shorter than the first period is different from the first period. By doing so, it is possible to execute a plurality of privilege games at a wide range of timing without straddling the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state, so that a game state that is advantageous to the player is provided. It is possible to increase the probability of being Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In addition, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the execution timing of any one of the privilege games in the above 1 is set at least for a predetermined period of time equal to or longer than the first period with respect to the execution timing of any of the other privilege games. The special dynamic display period may be settable so as to be different in minutes. By doing so, it is possible to greatly vary the execution timings of the privilege games that are executed a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine A9, the special dynamic display period setting means is configured to be able to set the special dynamic display period up to a predetermined number of times, and when the special dynamic display period is set the predetermined number of times, the The predetermined number of times is set so that the interval between the execution timings of the privilege game that are the most distant from the one operation period among the execution timings of the privilege game that are executed a plurality of times is wider than the second period. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to set a special dynamic display period up to a predetermined number of times for each of the privilege games that are executed multiple times, and the farthest interval among the execution timings of the privilege games that are executed multiple times is variable. The predetermined number of times the special dynamic display period is set is set so as to be wider than the second period during which the means is in the disadvantageous state. As a result, when the special dynamic display period is set for a predetermined number of times, the privilege game can be executed at a timing other than the second period in any of the privilege games for which the special dynamic display period is set. That is, it is possible to reliably provide the player with an advantageous state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result, at least until the privilege game corresponding to the specific determination result is executed, the Advantageous privilege game discriminating means for discriminating whether the privilege game is an advantageous privilege game in which a ball can pass through the specific area, and information reporting means for announcing discrimination information reflecting the discrimination result of the advantageous privilege game discriminating means. A gaming machine A11 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, until the privilege game is executed, it is possible to notify the determination information reflecting the determination result as to whether the privilege game to be executed this time is the privilege game advantageous to the player. Therefore, even if the privilege game is won multiple times, the content of the information to be notified can be changed, so that the player's motivation to play will decrease when the privilege game is won multiple times. has the effect of suppressing

It should be noted that the information notification means for notifying information reflecting the determination result of the advantageous privilege game determination means may be any notification mode that can be recognized by the player. Preliminary determination information reflecting the determination result of the advantageous privilege game determination means may be reported as an effect, or may be reported using a sound output from a speaker. Alternatively, the notification may be made using light emitting means (such as an LED) provided in the gaming machine.

In any one of the game machines A7 to A11, a pre-determination means for determining the entered ball information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is established; When it is determined that the information indicates a privilege game, it is determined whether the privilege game is an advantageous privilege game in which a ball can pass through a specific area or a disadvantageous privilege game in which a ball cannot easily pass through the specified area. a second preliminary determination means for pre-determining; A game machine A12 characterized by having a second pre-determination information notification means for notifying the determination information.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A7 to A11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by executing the second preliminary determination for the entering-ball information stored in the storage means, the second preliminary determination information can be notified before the determination condition of the entering-ball information is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance whether the privilege game to be executed soon is an advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player, and diversification of the effects to be executed can be achieved.

The gaming machine A12 has a continuous effect executing means capable of executing a continuous effect accompanied by continuous dynamic display for any of the entering ball information stored in the storage means, wherein the continuous effect executing means A gaming machine A13 characterized by executing an effect reflecting the second prior determination information.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to perform continuous effects reflecting the second pre-determination information for continuous dynamic displays. Thereby, it is possible to determine not only whether or not there is information corresponding to a privilege game in the entry information stored in the storage means, but also whether or not there is entry information corresponding to an advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player. It is possible to notify the result of determination by continuous display accompanying a plurality of dynamic displays, and diversification of the effects to be executed can be achieved.

In the gaming machine A13, a bonus game effect setting means for setting a bonus game effect accompanying execution of the bonus game; a bonus game effect execution means for executing the bonus game effect set by the bonus game effect setting means; a determination means during continuous performance for determining whether the continuous performance is being performed when the privilege game performance is set by the privilege game performance setting means; A game A14 characterized by setting a specific privilege game effect when the determining means determines that the continuous effect is being performed.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if the privilege game is executed during the period in which the continuous performance is executed, it is possible to execute the specific privilege game performance for the continuous performance as the privilege game performance. Therefore, there is an effect that continuous effects can be provided to the player without causing discomfort.

In the gaming machine A14, the privilege game effect setting means sets, as the specific privilege game effect, a continuation suggestion effect suggesting continuation of the continuous effect in the case of the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game. A game machine A15 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game is executed during the period during which the continuous performance is executed, the performance suggesting the continuation of the continuous performance is executed. Therefore, when the privilege game is won multiple times during the continuous performance, the continuous suggestive performance is executed even if the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that a game has been executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to the execution of the privilege game a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine A14 or A15, the privilege game effect setting means suggests that the present privilege game is an advantageous privilege game in the case of the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game as the specific privilege game presentation. A game machine A16 characterized in that a suggestive effect is set.

According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A14 or A15, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed while the continuous performance is being executed, the suggestion performance suggesting that the privilege game of this time is the advantageous privilege game is executed. Therefore, when the privilege game is won multiple times during the continuous performance, the suggestive performance is executed when the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed, so that the player is provided with an advantageous state. can be recognized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to the execution of the privilege game a plurality of times.

Here, in the configuration including the gaming machine A15, when the privilege game is won a plurality of times during the continuous performance, when the disadvantage privilege game is executed, the continuation suggestion performance is executed and the advantage privilege game is executed. And the suggestion production is executed. Therefore, even if the privilege game is executed a plurality of times during the continuous production, until the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed, the production in which the continuous production continues is executed. can be executed as a continuous production of Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

<Feature B group> (There is a period during which multiple small wins are advantageously executed)
discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means; Dynamic display means for statically displaying identification information based on a result of determination by the means, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when identification information based on a specific determination result is statically displayed on the display means. variable ball entry means capable of changing from a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter to an open state in which a ball can enter when the privilege game is executed by the game execution means; A gaming machine having a specific area provided in a variable ball entry means, and privilege giving means for giving an advantageous privilege to a player based on the passage of a ball through the specific area, wherein the specific area A variable means capable of alternately changing between an advantageous state through which the ball can pass and a disadvantageous state in which the ball is more difficult to pass than the advantageous state, and the variable means is either the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state. A variable control means for variably controlling the variable means with a period from one state to the next being changed to the one state as one operation period; and specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state in which the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the balls reach the variable means a plurality of times within the single operation period. Game machine B1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a variable winning device that is opened by a privilege game (small winning game, etc.), and a specific area provided in the variable winning device, in which a big winning game is executed by passing a ball. Then, a guide member that guides the ball to the specific area, a mode in which the ball easily passes through the specific area, and a mode in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific area are repeatedly executed at a constant cycle. A pachinko machine has been proposed which randomizes the occurrence of a big win game in a specific small win game by providing a means and making the opening operation of the variable winning device based on the small win game and the control operation of the induction member independent. (For example, JP-A-2011-206309). In this case, the timing at which the variable winning device is opened by the small winning game and the timing at which the mode of the induction member changes are independent of each other. There is a problem that it is possible that the player cannot pass through and the player's motivation to play is lowered. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player's desire to play from declining.

According to the gaming machine B1, when a predetermined condition is established, the privilege game is performed so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period in which the variable means is variably controlled between an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state. It can be executed multiple times. Therefore, the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period, so that it is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game is executed during the period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In gaming machine B1, a ball entry means capable of entering a ball, a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring ball entry information based on the ball entering the ball entry means, and a ball entry information acquisition means and storage means for storing a plurality of entry information acquired by at least until the determination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by storing a plurality of pieces of ball-entering information in the storage means, it is possible to sequentially execute a plurality of dynamic displays. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation where the dynamic display is interrupted within one operation period, so there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility of executing the privilege game a plurality of times.

A gaming machine B3 characterized in that in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the predetermined condition is established when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, as the determination result by the determination means, in addition to the determination result of executing the privilege game, it has the determination result of setting the specific game state, There is an effect that various games can be offered to the player based on the determination result of the determination means.

A gaming machine B4 characterized in that in the gaming machine B2 or B3, the predetermined condition is established when a predetermined number or more of the ball-entering information are stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the specific game state is set when the number of entered ball information stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to always store the predetermined number or more of balls in the storage means, so that there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B1 or B4, the specific game state setting means has dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period during which identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, The period setting means has special dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a special dynamic display period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than usual, when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Game machine B5.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special dynamic display period, which is a shorter dynamic display period than usual, is set by the special dynamic display period setting means. This makes it possible to perform dynamic display multiple times within one operation period. Therefore, since the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period, by winning the privilege game a plurality of times, the variable means is in an advantageous state. It is possible to increase the possibility that a privilege game in which the ball can reach the variable means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In the configuration provided with the game machine B2, the storage means can store a plurality of winning ball information. Therefore, when the special dynamic display period is set, the dynamic display may be interrupted. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B5, when the predetermined condition is established, at least before the special dynamic display period is set, the ball entry assist state is set such that the ball entry information is likely to be stored in the storage means. A gaming machine B6 characterized by having auxiliary state setting means.

According to the gaming machine B6, it is possible to set the entry assistance state in which the entry information is likely to be stored in the storage means before the special dynamic display period is set. Therefore, since it becomes easy to set the special dynamic display period in a state in which a plurality of pieces of entering information are stored in the storage means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the specific game state is interrupted in the middle.

The ball-entering assistance state setting means can set, for example, a state in which the ball-entering information is likely to be stored in the storage means by setting a long dynamic display time, or regulate the ball-entering means. A configuration is conceivable in which the regulation means for controlling the ball is changed to a state in which it does not regulate the entry of the ball.

In the game machine B6, the entering assist state setting means sets a predetermined dynamic display period as the dynamic display period during which the dynamic display is performed.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, it is possible to set a state in which entry information is easily stored in the storage means simply by using a configuration of setting a predetermined dynamic display period. , there is an effect that it is possible to easily suppress a situation in which the specific game state is interrupted on the way.

As the predetermined dynamic display period, it is sufficient to set a period in which a plurality of balls can be entered by the ball-entering means. For example, a dynamic display period of about 30 seconds may be set. . Also, if the dynamic display period is intentionally set for the purpose of causing a plurality of balls to enter the ball-entering means, it is included in the dynamic display period longer than usual.

Furthermore, the object for which the predetermined dynamic display period is set includes the dynamic display of the identification information in which the determination result of the determination means is the predetermined determination result, and the first execution after the specific game state is set. display, etc. can be considered.

Here, the following configuration may be used as means for achieving the same effect as the game machine B7. That is, it may be configured such that a predetermined dynamic display period is set when it is determined that the number of entered ball information stored is less than or equal to a predetermined number during the specific game state. In this case, the predetermined number is preferably at least 1 or more. This is to allow the determination means to perform the determination at least a plurality of times in the remaining specific game states to be executed after the predetermined dynamic display period is set. As a result, the number of entered ball information stored in the storage means during the specific game state is less than or equal to the predetermined number, and even after the predetermined dynamic display period is set, the privilege game is executed a plurality of times during the specific game state. becomes possible.

In any one of game machines B1 to B7, the specific game state setting means has variable control period extension means for extending the one operation period variably controlled by the variable control means. Game machine B8 to play.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific game state is set, one operation period in which the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control period extending means is extended. Therefore, since the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period of the variable control means, the variable means is in an advantageous state by winning the privilege game a plurality of times. It is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game will be executed so that the ball reaches the variable means within the period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In the game machine B8, the variable control period extending means extends the first period of the one operation period.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of the game machine B8, the first period of one operation period of the variable control means is extended, so that the ball is delivered to the variable means within the period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. It is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game will be executed so as to reach. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

A game machine B10 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B9, the specific game state setting means has privilege game period shortening means for shortening the period in which the privilege game is executed.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the period during which the privilege game is executed can be shortened. A privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine B10, the privilege game period shortening means shortens a period during which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state during the period during which the privilege game is executed.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B10, it is possible to shorten the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the closed state in the period during which the privilege game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game is executed so that the ball reaches the variable means within the period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B11, the game machine B12 is characterized in that the specific game state setting means sets the specific game state until the determination by the determination means is performed a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific game state can be set until the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, a game state that is advantageous to the player is provided within a limited range, so that it is possible to provide the player with a period of expectation.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B12, when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result, the privilege is provided at least until the privilege game based on the specific determination result is executed. The game has advantageous privilege game discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the game is an advantageous privilege game in which a ball can pass through a specific area, and information reporting means for notifying information based on the discrimination result of the advantageous privilege game discriminating means. Characterized game machine B13.

According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, until the privilege game is executed by the information notification means, information based on the determination result as to whether the privilege game to be executed this time is a privilege game advantageous to the player is notified. Therefore, even if the privilege game is won consecutively, the contents of the information to be reported can be changed, so that the player's motivation to play is reduced when the privilege game is won multiple times. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B13, a pre-determination means for determining the entered ball information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is established, and the pre-determination information determined by the pre-determination means When it is determined that the information indicates a privilege game, the privilege game is an advantageous privilege game in which a ball can pass through a specific area or a disadvantageous privilege game in which a ball is more difficult to pass through the specific area than the advantageous privilege game. and the entering ball information pre-determined by the second pre-determination means is discriminated by the second pre-determination means during the period until it is discriminated by the discrimination means. and a second pre-determined information notification means for notifying the second pre-determined information.

According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by executing the second preliminary determination for the ball entry information stored in the storage means, the second preliminary determination information is notified until the determination means executes the determination of the ball entry information. can do. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance whether the privilege game to be executed soon is an advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player, and diversification of the effects to be executed can be achieved.

The game machine B14 has a continuous effect executing means capable of executing a continuous effect accompanying continuous dynamic display for any of the entering ball information stored in the storage means, and the continuous effect executing means A gaming machine B15 characterized by executing an effect based on the second prior determination information.

According to the gaming machine B15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to perform continuous effects reflecting the second pre-determination information for continuous dynamic displays. Thereby, it is possible to determine not only whether or not there is information corresponding to a privilege game in the entry information stored in the storage means, but also whether or not there is entry information corresponding to an advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player. It is possible to notify the result of determination by continuous display accompanying a plurality of dynamic displays, and diversification of the effects to be executed can be achieved.

In the gaming machine B15, a privilege game effect setting means for setting a privilege game effect accompanying execution of the privilege game; a privilege game effect execution means for executing the privilege game effect set by the privilege game effect setting means; a determination means during continuous performance for determining whether the continuous performance is being performed when the privilege game performance is set by the privilege game performance setting means; A game B16 characterized by setting a specific privilege game effect when the determining means determines that the continuous effect is being performed.

According to the gaming machine B16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B15, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if a privilege game is executed during the period during which the continuous performance is executed, it is possible to execute the privilege game performance for the continuous performance as the privilege game performance. Therefore, there is an effect that continuous effects can be provided to the player without causing discomfort.

In the gaming machine B16, the privilege game effect setting means sets, as the specific privilege game effect, a continuation suggestion effect suggesting that the continuous effect is continued in the case of the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game. A game machine B17 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine B17, in addition to the effects of the game machine B15, the following effects are produced. That is, when the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game is executed while the continuous performance is being executed, the performance suggesting the continuation of the continuous performance is executed. Therefore, when the privilege game is won multiple times during the continuous performance, the continuous suggestive performance is executed even if the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that a game has been executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

In the gaming machine B16 or B17, the privilege game effect setting means suggests that the present privilege game is an advantageous privilege game in the case of the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game as the specific privilege game presentation. A game machine B18 characterized in that a suggestive effect is set.

According to the gaming machine B18, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B16 or B17, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed while the continuous performance is being executed, the suggestion performance suggesting that the privilege game of this time is the advantageous privilege game is executed. Therefore, when the privilege game is won multiple times during the continuous performance, the suggestive performance is executed when the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed, so that the player is provided with an advantageous state. can be recognized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Here, in the configuration provided with the gaming machine B17, when the privilege game is won a plurality of times during the continuous performance, when the disadvantage privilege game is executed, the continuation suggestion performance is executed and the advantage privilege game is executed. And the suggestion production is executed. Therefore, even if the privilege game is executed a plurality of times during the continuous production, until the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed, the production in which the continuous production continues is executed. can be executed as a continuous production of Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

<Characteristic group C> (There is a period during which multiple small hits are likely to be executed)
A ball entry means that allows a ball to enter, a ball entry information acquisition means that acquires ball entry information based on the fact that a ball has entered the ball entry means, and a judgment is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition. determining means, display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determining means, and after dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period, the identification information based on the determination result by the determining means is stopped and displayed. and a dynamic display means for displaying the identification information based on the result of the determination that the entering ball information is the specific entering ball information by the determining means is stopped and displayed on the display means, which is advantageous to the player. a special game execution means for executing a special game, a specific area through which a ball can pass by satisfying a predetermined condition when the special game is executed by the special game execution means, and a ball in the specific area In a gaming machine having privilege granting means for imparting an advantageous privilege to a player when passing through, a specific game state in which the specific ball entry information is easily acquired based on the establishment of a specific condition is established. When the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a state in which a specific game state setting means to be set and a special condition that can be established in the specific game state set by the specific game state setting means are established, the predetermined condition is established. and setting means for setting at least one privilege game to be executed among the privilege games to be executed a plurality of times while the game machine C1 is playing.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a variable winning device that is opened by a privilege game (small winning game, etc.), and a specific area provided in the variable winning device, in which a big winning game is executed by passing a ball. and a guide member for guiding the ball to the specific area, and control means for controlling the guide member so that the ball can easily pass through the specific area and the ball cannot easily pass through the specific area. A pachinko machine capable of providing a jackpot game when passing through a specific area after winning a winning game has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206309). In this case, in order to provide a big winning game with a predetermined probability, it is necessary to execute a small winning game with a probability equal to or higher than the predetermined probability, so there is a risk that the small winning game will occur frequently, and the player will be uncomfortable. There is a problem in that the player's desire to play is lowered due to the pleasant feeling. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player's desire to play from declining.

According to the gaming machine C1, since it has a specific game state in which it is easy to acquire specific ball entry information, it is possible to suppress frequent occurrence of privilege games in a normal state other than the specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

In addition, although the specific game state is a state in which the privilege game is likely to occur frequently, if the privilege game is executed a plurality of times during the specific game state, it is possible to create a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play due to frequent occurrence of the privilege game.

In the game machine C1, the specific condition is satisfied when the determination result by the determination means is a predetermined determination result other than the specific determination result.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the determination result of the determining means has the determination result of setting the specific game state in addition to the determination result of executing the privilege game. There is an effect that various games can be offered to the player based on the determination result.

The game machine C1 or C2 has storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of the ball entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied, and the special condition is the storage means. A game machine C3 characterized in that it is established by storing a predetermined number or more of entering ball information in the .

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special condition is established by storing a predetermined number or more of pieces of information on entering a ball in the storage means. Therefore, in order to satisfy the special condition, the player can be urged to play the game so as to store a large amount of ball entry information in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

The game machine C1 or C2 has storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of the entering-ball information acquired by the entering-ball information acquiring means at least until the determination condition is satisfied, and the special condition is stored in the storage means. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that it is established when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of the stored ball entry information.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special condition is established when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of ball entry information stored in the storage means. Therefore, in order to satisfy the special condition, the player can be urged to play the game so as to store a large amount of ball entry information in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the game machine C4, the predetermined order is that the privilege game is executed consecutively for a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game is executed in succession and the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order, at least one of the privilege games executed a plurality of times is executed in the specific area. It is set to be executed in a state where the ball can pass through. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to play the game so as to store a large amount of ball-entering information in the storage means so that the privilege game can be continuously executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C5, the ball-entering means includes a first ball-entering means capable of entering a ball, and a ball-entering means provided separately from the first ball-entering means. and a second ball entering means that allows the ball to enter the second ball entering means, and the first ball entering information acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entering means. The game machine C6 is characterized in that the specific ball entry information is set higher for the second ball entry information acquired based on the ball.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, as the ball-entering means, there are a first ball-entering means that allows a ball to enter, and a second ball-entering means that is provided separately from the first ball-entering means and allows a ball to enter on the basis of the fulfillment of the release condition. A ball means is provided, wherein the second ball-entering information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball-entering means is higher than the first ball-entering information acquired based on the ball entering the first ball-entering means. Specific entry information is set high. As a result, there is an effect that the frequency with which the privilege game is executed can be reduced until the release condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine C6, a second determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition, a second display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result of the second determination means, and the second display. a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the means for a predetermined period of time, and then statically displaying the identification information based on the result of determination by the second determination means; and dynamic display by the second dynamic display means second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period of the identification information; and identification information based on a specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the second display means by the second dynamic display means. a second privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game that satisfies the opening condition of the second ball-entering means in the case where the determination result by the determination means is the predetermined determination result; and second special dynamic display for setting a second special dynamic display period, which is a second dynamic display period shorter than normal, as the second dynamic display period set by the second dynamic display period setting means. A gaming machine C7 characterized by having period setting means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the result of determination by the second determination means is the specific second determination result, and the identification information based on the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the second display means by the second dynamic display means, The second privilege game execution means has a configuration for establishing the opening condition of the second ball entry means, and when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result, the second dynamic display period setting means sets. A second dynamic display period shorter than usual is set as the second dynamic display period. As a result, it is possible to provide a game state in which the ball can be easily entered into the second ball-entering means when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result.

Here, in the configuration provided with the game machine C5, since the second ball entering means is more likely to acquire the specific ball entering information than the first ball entering means, when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result, In addition, it is possible to provide a game state in which it is easy to acquire a plurality of specific ball entry information, that is, in which a privilege game is easily executed a plurality of times.

In any one of game machines C3 to C7, the storage means has a first storage section capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the first ball entry information and a second storage section capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the second ball entry information. and further includes a second special condition as the special condition, wherein the second special condition is the case where the storage means stores a predetermined number of pieces of ball entry information that is greater than the upper limit of the number that can be stored in the first storage unit. A game machine C8 characterized in that it can be established in

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of ball entry information stored in the storage means is greater than the upper limit number that can be stored in the first storage section, that is, when the second storage section stores at least the ball entry information, the special condition holds. As a result, in a game state in which the privilege game is likely to be executed, it is possible to create an advantageous state for the player when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, in order to satisfy the special condition, the player can be urged to play the game so as to store a large amount of ball entry information in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C8, the second special condition is a state in which the storage means stores a predetermined number of pieces of entry information that is greater than the upper limit number of pieces that can be stored in the first storage section, and a predetermined number of pieces of the specific piece of entry information. A gaming machine C9 characterized by being established when the above is stored.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second special condition is satisfied when the storage means stores a predetermined number of pieces of information on entering a ball, which is larger than the upper limit of the number of pieces that can be stored in the first storage unit, and stores a predetermined number or more of pieces of specific information on entering a ball. do. Therefore, the conditions for establishing the second special condition can be complicated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Any one of the game machines C1 to C9 has variable ball entry means for changing from a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter to an open state in which a ball can enter, based on the execution of the privilege game. , a game machine C10 characterized in that the specific area is provided in the variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the specific area is provided in the variable ball entry means that changes to the open state based on the execution of the privilege game, it is possible to execute the game aiming at the specific area only when the privilege game is executed. becomes. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the game value for the privilege game, and therefore, when the privilege game is won a plurality of times, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. .

In the gaming machine C10, a variable means provided in the variable ball entry means and capable of changing between an advantageous state in which the ball can easily pass through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which the ball cannot easily pass through the specific area; variable control means for alternately varying the means between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state, wherein the predetermined condition is met when the variable means is varied to the advantageous state by the variable control means. A game machine C11 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means is configured to be variably controllable between an advantageous state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through. A predetermined condition that allows passage is established. As a result, when the variable means is in an advantageous state, the ball that enters the variable ball entry means after the privilege game is executed can pass through the specific area, so that the degree of difficulty for the ball to pass through the specific area is increased. is possible, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C11, the variable control means variably controls the variable means such that the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state are repeatedly varied at a predetermined cycle.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the variable control means repeatedly changes the variable means between an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state at a predetermined cycle, the timing at which the variable means changes to the advantageous state is made random with respect to the timing at which the privilege game is executed. becomes possible. Therefore, there is a possibility that the ball that enters the variable ball entering means at various timings will pass through the specific area, so that there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

In any one of the game machines C10 to C12, the variable control means sets a third period, which is a combination of the first period in which the advantageous state is established and the second period in which the disadvantageous state is established, as one operation period. The setting means has dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game, and the dynamic display period setting means When the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the one privilege game and any other privilege game are executed at different timings with respect to the one operation period. A gaming machine C13 characterized by comprising special dynamic display period setting means for setting a special dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to a game.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C10 to C12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means variably controls the variable means with a third period including the first period in which the advantageous state and the second period in which the disadvantageous state are combined is set as one operation period, and the dynamic display period of the setting means. A dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game is set by the setting means. Then, when the special dynamic display period setting means of the dynamic display period setting means executes a plurality of bonus games, one bonus game and another bonus game are executed at different timings for one operation period. A special dynamic display period is set so that any one of the bonus games is executed. By doing so, it is possible to set a privilege game that allows passing through the specific area and a privilege game that makes it difficult to pass through the specific area by changing the dynamic display period. Therefore, compared with the case of setting a privilege game that allows passing through the specific area and a privilege game that makes it difficult to pass through the specific area, there is an effect that the burden of processing related to the game can be reduced.

Here, in the configuration provided with the gaming machine C5, among the continuously executed privilege games, the first privilege game (first privilege game (corresponding to any other privilege game)) On the other hand, the special dynamic display period is set so that the execution timing of the next privilege game (the second privilege game (corresponding to the privilege game of 1)) is different. In other words, by setting the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the second privilege game as the special dynamic display period, the execution timing of the privilege games that are continuously executed can be changed within one operation period of the variable means. can be different for As a result, the target for setting the special dynamic display period is only the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game, so there is an effect that the program capacity for executing the game processing can be reduced.

In addition, in the configuration without the gaming machine C5, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display corresponding to the loss) executed while a plurality of privilege games are executed is also the special dynamic display. Configured to set a time period. As a result, the dynamic display for which the special dynamic display period is to be set increases the number of patterns that provide an advantageous state to the player when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, as compared with the configuration in which the game machine C5 is provided. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine C13, the special dynamic display period setting means sets the execution timing of the one privilege game with respect to the execution timing of any of the other privilege games when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times. is set so that the special dynamic display period is different by a predetermined period equal to or less than the first period.

According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by setting the special dynamic display period, the execution timing of one privilege game is different from the execution timing of any other privilege game by a predetermined period equal to or less than the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. It becomes possible to Thereby, when the execution timing of one privilege game and the execution timing of any other privilege game are made different, the execution timing of each privilege game is set across the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent such a situation. Therefore, by winning the privilege game multiple times, it becomes easier to provide the player with an advantageous state, so that when the privilege game is won multiple times, the player's desire to play can be suppressed. effective.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the predetermined period equal to or shorter than the first period is different from the first period. By doing so, it is possible to execute a plurality of privilege games at a wide range of timing without straddling the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state, so that a game state that is advantageous to the player is provided. It is possible to increase the probability of being Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In addition, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the execution timing of the one privilege game is made to differ by at least a predetermined period of time equal to or longer than the first period with respect to the execution timing of any of the other privilege games. The special dynamic display period may be settable as follows. By doing so, it is possible to greatly vary the execution timings of the privilege games that are executed a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine C14, the special dynamic display period setting means is configured to be able to set the special dynamic display period up to a predetermined number of times, and when the special dynamic display period is set the predetermined number of times, the The predetermined number of times is set so that the interval between the execution timings of the privilege game that are the most distant from the one operation period among the execution timings of the privilege game that are executed a plurality of times is wider than the second period. A gaming machine C15 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to set a special dynamic display period up to a predetermined number of times for each of the privilege games that are executed multiple times, and the farthest interval among the execution timings of the privilege games that are executed multiple times is variable. The predetermined number of times the special dynamic display period is set is set so as to be wider than the second period during which the means is in the disadvantageous state. As a result, when the special dynamic display period is set for a predetermined number of times, the privilege game can be executed at a timing other than the second period in any of the privilege games for which the special dynamic display period is set. That is, it is possible to reliably provide the player with an advantageous state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

<Feature D group> (Structure that makes it easy to win V prizes with small hits consecutively)
A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition, and a ball entry means for enabling a ball to be entered when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. a variable means that can be changed between an allowable position for allowing a ball to enter the ball-entering means and a regulating position for restricting the ball-entering means; A game machine having a specific area through which a ball can pass through and a privilege giving means for giving an advantageous privilege to a player based on the passage of the ball through the specific area, wherein the privilege game is a plurality of When the ball is executed twice, the ball whose entry into the ball entry means is restricted by the variable means positioned at the regulation position during the privilege game is transferred to the ball entry means during the next and subsequent privilege games. and a setting means for setting so that at least one of the following privilege games is executed during the period when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Characterized gaming machine D1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, in a small winning game in which the winning opening is opened, a first small winning game in which the variable ball entering means is opened and closed in a manner in which the ball is easy to enter, and a mode in which the ball is difficult to win. A gaming machine having a second small winning game that opens and closes the variable ball entry means has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233195). In such a gaming machine, even if the second small winning game is won, it is difficult to enter the ball into the winning opening. Since there is no advantage, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced when a plurality of wins are made in the second small winning game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player's desire to play from declining.

According to the game machine D1, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the ball whose entry into the ball entry means is restricted during the privilege game is guided to the ball entry means during the next and subsequent privilege games. It has a configuration that allows Further, it has a configuration in which at least one privilege game among the following privilege games is set to be executed in a state in which the ball can pass through the specific area. Therefore, when the privilege game is won multiple times, the player is in an advantageous state, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won multiple times. .

In the game machine D1, the guiding means has a flow-down passage through which the ball can flow down, and a flow-down period extension means for extending the period of time for the ball to flow down the flow-down passage. D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by extending the period during which the ball flows down the flow-down passage by the flow-down period extending means, the ball flowing down the flow-down passage is made to flow down to a position where the ball can enter the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably guide the player to the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

In the game machine D2, a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, a display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display of the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period. dynamic display means for statically displaying the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means; and dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. and wherein the specific condition is satisfied when identification information based on a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means, and the flowing period extension means includes the A game characterized in that the period during which the ball flows down the downflow path is extended so as to be longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to at least one of the following privilege games. Machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period during which the ball flows down the flow path is set to be longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to at least one privilege game among the following privilege games. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably guide the player to the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

In any one of gaming machines D1 to D3, the ball entering means has a first opening into which a ball can enter and a second opening provided separately from the first opening, and the guiding means a game machine D4, wherein a ball whose entry into the first opening is restricted by the variable means positioned at the restriction position is guided to the second opening.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball-entering means has a first opening and a second opening, and a ball whose entry into the first opening is restricted is guided to the second opening by the guiding means. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably guide the player to the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

In the gaming machine D4, the variable means has a covering member that covers the first opening and the second opening when positioned at the regulating position, and the covering member allows a ball to roll on the upper surface thereof. , wherein the area covered by the covering member is wider in the second opening than in the first opening.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means has a covering member capable of covering the first opening and the second opening, and the area covered by the covering member for the second opening is wider than that for the first opening. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to enter the second opening than the first opening, and when the privilege game is won multiple times, the player can be in an advantageous state. , there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the ball entering means is second guiding means for making it easier for a ball entered through the second opening to enter the specific area than a ball entered through the first opening. A game machine D6 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4 or D5, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, a ball that enters through the second opening flows down the second guiding means, so that the ball enters the specific area more easily than a ball that enters through the first opening. As a result, when the privilege game is won multiple times, the player can be in an advantageous state, and when the privilege game is won multiple times, the player's desire to play can be suppressed. effective.

In the gaming machine D6, a second variable means provided within the ball entry means and capable of being varied between an allowable position for allowing the ball to pass through the specific area or a restricting position for restricting the ball from passing through the specific area; , and a second variable control means for varying the second variable means to the allowable position for a predetermined period after the privilege game is executed, wherein the second guide means is operated from the first opening. The second passage, which is the passage until the ball entered from the second opening passes through the specific region, is longer than the passage period of the first passage, which is the passage until the ball that has entered the ball passes through the specific region. A game machine D7 characterized in that it is configured to shorten the passage period of the .

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second variable means is provided within the ball entry means that can be changed to an allowable position for allowing the ball to pass through the specific area or a restricting position for restricting the ball from passing through the specific area, and the second variable control means The second variable means is varied to the allowable position for a predetermined period after the privilege game is executed. Then, as the second guide means, there are provided a first passage, which is a passage through which the ball entering from the first opening passes through the specific region, and a passage through which the ball entering through the second opening passes through the specific region. A second passage is provided, and a passage period during which the ball passes through the second passage is shorter than a passage period during which the ball passes through the first passage. This makes it easier for a ball entering from the second opening to pass through the specific region than a ball entering from the first opening. Therefore, when the privilege game is won a plurality of times, the player can be in an advantageous state, and when the privilege game is won a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. There is

The period during which the variable means is in the allowable position by the second variable control means is set longer than the passage period during which the ball passes through the first passage and shorter than the passage period during which the ball passes through the second passage. good too. By doing so, it is possible to restrict the balls passing through the passages other than the second passage from passing through the specific region. Therefore, when the privilege game is won a plurality of times, the player can be in an advantageous state, and when the privilege game is won a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. There is

In the game machine D7, the game machine D8 is characterized in that the second path is formed to have a steeper downward slope than the first path.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second passage formed with a steeper slope than in the first passage, it is possible to increase the speed at which the balls flow down compared to the first passage.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably provide a state in which the ball that has won the prize at the second opening is more advantageous to the player than at the first opening.

The game machine D9 is characterized in that, in the game machine D7 or D8, the second path is formed in a shorter distance than the first path.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7 or D8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second path can be set at a shorter distance than the first path.

Therefore, there is an effect that the ball that has won the prize in the second opening can reliably provide the player with a more advantageous state than the first opening.

In any one of gaming machines D1 to D9, a ball entering device is configured to allow a ball to enter, and has a ball entering device having the ball entering means, the variable means, and the guiding means, wherein the ball entering device A third guiding means capable of guiding a ball to the ball-entering means, a discharge port capable of discharging the ball guided by the third guiding means to the outside of the ball-entering device, and a ball to the discharge port. a third variable means that is variable between a permissible position that permits passage and a restricted position that restricts passage of the ball to the discharge port, wherein the third variable means is adapted to execute the privilege game; A gaming machine D10 characterized in that the third variable means is varied to the restricted position based on.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a third guiding means is provided for guiding a ball that has entered a ball entering device having a ball entering means, a variable means, and a guiding means to the ball entering means. The third guiding means is provided with a discharge port capable of discharging the ball to the outside of the ball-entering device, and by varying the third variable means, the ball guided by the third guiding means is discharged to the outside of the ball-entering device. Switch whether to let it or guide it to the ball entry means. The third variable means is varied so as to guide the ball guided by the third guiding means to the entering ball means when the privilege game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the ball from being guided to the ball entering means until the privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball from entering from the second opening when the privilege game is executed alone.

In the game machine D10, the game machine D11 is characterized in that the third variable means is variable in conjunction with the variable operation of the first variable means.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effects of the game machine D10, the third variable means is variable in conjunction with the variable operation of the first variable means, so the drive source for varying the variable means can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to Further, by interlocking the variable operation of the third variable means with the first variable means that is variably controlled by executing the privilege game, there is an effect that the variable operation can be performed in accordance with the privilege game.

In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D11, the gaming machine D12 is characterized in that the flowing period extending means has a flowing distance extending means for extending the flowing period by extending the flowing distance of the flowing path. .

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D11, the flowing period extending means extends the flowing distance of the flowing path by the flowing distance extending means, so that the next and subsequent There is an effect that it can be guided to the ball-entering means during the privilege game.

In the gaming machine D12, the gaming machine D13 is characterized in that the flowing-down distance extending means is a meandering flow-down passage in which the flow-down passage is formed in a meandering shape.

According to the game machine D13, in addition to the effect of the game machine D12, since the meandering flow path is used to extend the flow distance, there is an effect that the space for installing the flow path can be reduced.

A game machine D14 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines D2 to D13, the flowing period extending means has a flowing speed reducing means for reducing the speed of the ball flowing down the flowing passage.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D13, the flowing-down period extending means reduces the speed of the ball flowing down the flowing-down passage by the flowing-down speed reducing means. , there is an effect that the player can be guided to the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

A gaming machine D15 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D14, the flow-down speed reduction means is a speed-reducing member for reducing the flow-down speed of the ball.

According to the game machine D15, in addition to the effect of the game machine D14, since the speed reduction member is used to reduce the flow speed, there is an effect that the space for installing the flow passage can be reduced.

As the speed reducing member, a member capable of reducing the falling speed of the ball by friction generated between objects is conceivable. For example, it is preferable to use a member (such as urethane rubber) that exhibits a high coefficient of friction that reduces the falling velocity of the ball due to the frictional force generated when the ball rolls. In addition, if a material having a larger rolling friction than the material used for the flow-down path is used, that material becomes the speed reducing member. For example, if the upper surface of the flow-down path of the ball is coated with a fluorine-based resin (such as PTFE), it may be made of a synthetic resin such as ABS resin that has greater rolling friction than the upper surface of the flow-down path. It also includes the case where the ball rolling surface of the flow-down passage is roughened or protrusions are provided to increase the frictional force between objects and reduce the flow-down speed of the balls.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls enter a prize winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through a prize winning opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
A game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a privilege game (for example, a small winning game) when a special symbol lottery result is a predetermined lottery result, and when a ball passes through a specific area during the privilege game, A gaming machine that provides a predetermined privilege (for example, winning game) has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-301008).
However, in the gaming machine described above, even if the bonus game is executed, the ball does not necessarily pass through the specific area. There is a possibility that the desire to play will decrease.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in a player's willingness to play.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 comprises privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition, and A variable that can be changed to a ball entry means that allows a ball to enter when a privilege game is executed, an allowable position that allows a ball to enter the ball entry means, and a regulation position that regulates the ball entry. means, a specific area provided in the ball entry means, through which the ball can pass when a predetermined condition is established, and a privilege for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the ball passing through the specific area. and a granting means, wherein when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the ball whose entry into the ball entering means is restricted by the variable means positioned at the restriction position during the privilege game, At least one privilege game among the following privilege games is executed during the period when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a guiding means capable of guiding to the ball entering means during the following privilege games. and a setting means for setting such that
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the guiding means comprises a flow-down passage through which the ball can flow down and a flow-down period extension for extending the period in which the ball flows down the flow-down passage. and means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, further comprising: determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition; and display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determining means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period of time, and then statically displaying the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means; and dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. and dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period, wherein the specific condition is when identification information based on a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The flow period extending means extends the period during which the ball flows down the flow path longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to at least one of the following privilege games. It is extended so that
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the ball entering means includes a first opening into which a ball can enter, and and a second opening provided separately, wherein the guiding means directs a ball whose entry into the first opening is restricted by the variable means positioned at the restriction position to the second opening. and is induced.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, which is provided in the ball entering means, and is provided at an allowable position for allowing the passage of the ball to the specific area or the passage of the ball to the specific area. and a second variable control means for varying the second variable means to the allowable position for a predetermined period after the privilege game is executed. the ball entering means has second guiding means for making it easier for a ball entered through the second opening to enter the specific area than a ball entered through the first opening; 2. The guiding means is arranged so that the ball entering from the second opening is more likely to pass through the specific region than the passing period of the first passage, which is a passage for the ball entering from the first opening to pass through the specific region. The passage period of the second passage, which is a passage until passing through, is configured to be short.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the establishment of the specific condition, the variable means is varied to the allowable position, and the ball entry means can enter the ball. becomes. A specific area is provided in the ball entering means, and a privilege is given by the privilege giving means when the ball passes through the specific area. A ball whose entry into the ball entry means is restricted by the variable means positioned at the regulation position during execution of the privilege game is guided to the ball entry means during the next and subsequent privilege games by the guide means. It is set by the setting means so that at least one privilege game among the next and subsequent privilege games is executed during the period when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
As a result, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, it becomes possible to execute the privilege game in which the ball can pass through the specific area, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. be.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the period in which the ball flows down the downstream passage is extended by the flowing period extending means, so that the downstream passage is extended. The falling ball can be made to flow down to a position where the ball can be entered by the ball entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably guide the player to the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the following effects are obtained. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. After the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means until the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means elapses, the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the display means. When identification information based on a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means, a specific condition is established, and the flow period extension means corresponds to at least one of the following bonus games. The period during which the ball flows down the downflow passage is extended so as to be longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information.
As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably guide the player to the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games.
According to the game machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the ball-entering means has a first opening into which a ball can enter and a second opening provided separately from the first opening. A ball that is restricted from entering the first opening is guided to the second opening.
As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably guide the player to the ball-entering means during the next and subsequent privilege games.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, the following effects are obtained. That is, the ball entry means is provided with a second variable means that can be changed to an allowable position that allows the ball to pass through the specific area or a restrictive position that restricts the ball from passing through the specific area. , the second variable control means makes it variable to the allowable position for a predetermined period after the privilege game is executed. In order to make it easier for the ball entering through the second opening to enter the specific area than the ball entering through the first opening by the second guide means, the ball entering through the first opening is placed in the specific area. The passage period of the second passage, which is the passage until the ball entered from the second opening passes through the specific area, is shorter than the passage period of the first passage, which is the passage until the ball passes through.
As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the bonus game is won a plurality of times.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
650 second variable winning device (variable ball entry means)
650d V gate (variable means)
650e5 passage detection switch (specific area)
S111 variable control means
S220 privilege game executing means
S407 determination means
S409 Setting means , ball entry assistance state setting means
Part of S1306 privilege giving means
Part of S1309 privilege giving means
S1707 dynamic display means
S2152 Specific game state setting means

Claims (5)

privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
a ball entry means that enables a ball to be entered when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means;
a variable means capable of being changed between a permissible position for allowing the ball to enter the ball-entering means and a restricting position for restricting the ball from entering the ball-entering means;
a specific area provided in the ball entry means, through which the ball can pass when a predetermined condition is established;
A gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player based on the passage of the ball through the specific area,
When the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the ball whose entry into the ball entry means is regulated by the variable means positioned at the regulation position during the privilege game is transferred during the next and subsequent privilege games. a guiding means capable of guiding to the ball entering means;
and setting means for setting such that at least one of the following privilege games is executed during the period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. The guiding means are
a downflow passage through which the ball can flow down;
2. The game machine according to claim 1, further comprising a flowing-down period extending means for extending a period during which the ball flows down the flowing-down passage. a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition;
display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determination means;
dynamic display means for statically displaying the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means after dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period;
dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means;
The specific condition is satisfied when identification information based on a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means,
The flowing period extending means extends the period during which the ball flows down the flowing passage so as to be longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to at least one of the following privilege games. 3. The game machine according to claim 2, characterized in that: The ball entry means
a first opening into which a ball can enter;
a second opening provided separately from the first opening;
3. The guide means guides a ball whose entry into the first opening is restricted by the variable means positioned at the restriction position to the second opening. 4. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to 3. a second variable means provided within the ball-entering means and capable of being varied between an allowable position for allowing the ball to pass through the specific area and a restricting position for restricting the ball from passing through the specific area;
a second variable control means for changing the second variable means to the allowable position for a predetermined period after the privilege game is executed,
The ball entering means has a second guiding means for making it easier for a ball entered through the second opening to enter the specific area than a ball entered through the first opening,
The second guide means is arranged so that the ball entering from the second opening is more likely to pass through the specific region than the passing period of the first passage. 5. The game machine according to claim 4, wherein the passage period of the second passage, which is a passage until passing through the specific area, is configured to be short.

Images